PC 2109 
.R8 
Copy 1 







Glass 1 ( L2M 
BooklS-^-— 

SMITHSONIAN DEPOSIT 



»\v # ,%• WsV. ; 



FRENCH GRAMMAR. 



PRACTICAL 

GRAMMAR 



THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 
/ 

By J. ROWBOTHAM. 



FIRST A TM ERICAN EDITION, 

WITH 

ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS 
By F. M. J. SURAULT, 

TEACHER OF FRENCH IN HARVARD COLLEGE. 



CAMBRIDGE : 

HILLIARD AND* BROWN. 

1831. 



-pc* 



M 



-^« 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1831, by Hilliard & Brown, in the 
Clerk's Office of the District Court of Massachusetts. 



444 f.i"1* 



EB2 



l.p 



ADVERTISEMENT. 



The present Grammar has been selected from many 
in use both in England and this country, and prepared to 
meet the wants of such young persons as are studying 
French in our schools and colleges. The grammars most 
frequently used in such institutions, it may be safely said, 
have been found very imperfectly fitted for those to whom 
they were given ; — Levizac's, for instance, being crowded 
with philosophical and metaphysical discussions, which 
are embarrassing in themselves, and have little or no prac- 
tical value ; and Wanostrocht's being confused, awkward, 
and ill-arranged. The merits, which led to the selection 
of the present work for the students of Harvard College, 
are its clearness, simplicity, and accuracy ; its excellent 
divisions and disposition ; and its practical character 
throughout. The separation of the Accidence from the 
Syntax ; the shortness and plainness of the rules ; the 
abundance and aptness of the examples ; the clear manner 
in which the verbs, and especially the irregular verbs, are 
exhibited ; the large amount of the exercises, with their 
obvious application ; and the direct tendency of the whole 
to produce a habit of speaking the language, will, it is 
believed, recommend it for general use before any one 
now given to the same class of pupils. 

Cambridge, August 31, 1831. 



CONTENTS. 



^rontmctatton, &*♦ 



Alphabet 
Pronunciation 
Genders of Nouns 



Page 



msitnoloQ^ 



ARTICLES 

NOUNS. — Plural of Nouns 

Declension of Nouns 

Examination on the Articles and Nouns 
ADJECTIVES. — Plural of Adjectives 

Gender of Adjectives 

Comparison of Adjectives 

Declension of Adjectives 

Examination on the Adjectives 

Numerals 
PRONOUNS.— Personal Pronouns 

Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns 

Possessive Pronouns Relative - 

Demonstrative Pronouns 

Relative Pronouns 

Interrogative Pronouns ». 

Indeterminate Pronouns 

Examination on the Pronouns 
VERBS. — Auxiliary Verbs 

Regular Verbs 

Terminations of Verbs 

Passive Verbs 

Neuter Verbs 

Reflective Verbs 

Reciprocal Verbs 



VI CONTENTS. 

Impersonal Verbs 
Irregular Verbs 

ADVERBS. — Formation of Adverbs 
Prepositions 
Conjunctions 

Articles and Nouns 

Adjectives - 

Pronouns. — Personal Pronouns 

Possessive Pronouns 

Demonstrative Pronouns 

Relative Pronouns 

The Pronouns en and y 

Interrogative, &c. Pronouns 

Indefinite Pronouns 

The Pronoun on 
Verbs 

Simple Tenses. Indicative Mood 

Compound Tenses Indicative 

Subjunctive Mood ' 

May, might, can, could, &c. 
Infinitive Mood 

Infinitive with de 

Infinitive with a 
Participles. — Present, or Active 

Past Participles 
On the Placing of Adverbs 
On the Placing of Prepositions 
Interjections 
Idomatical Expressions 
Recapitulatory Practice 



French Abbreviations 






The asterisk (*), or (t) is used to direct the reader to some 
note, or observation. 

The letters M. F., m. f., or Mas. Fetn. denote the genders 
Masculine and Feminine. _ 

The letters N. G. D. A. or Norn, Gen. Bat. Ace. denote 
the Nominative, Genitive, Dative, and Accusative cases ; but 
the figures 1. 2. 3. are sometimes used before nous instead of 
N. G. D. to denote the states, or cases (i. e. 1. stands for the 
first state, or nominative ; 2. for the second state, or genitive ; 
3. for the third state, or dative). 

Before verbs, 1. denotes the first person ; 2. the second ; 
and 3. the ^/uVd 

06s. is used for observe, observation, or observations. Ex. 
for example. Sing, singular ; and PI plural. V. or v. see. 
P. or p. page. Gram. Grammar, or Grammaire. Die. Fr. 
Ac. Dictionnaire de l'Academie Francaise. 

Ind. Indicative Mood ; Subj. Subjunctive; Imper. Imper- 
ative. Pies. Present Tense ; Imp. Imperfect; Pret. Prete- 
rite ; Flit. Future ; Cond. Conditional. Act. Active Verb ; 
Neut. Neuter ; Kef. Reflective ; Def. Defective. 



A PRACTICAL 

FRENCH GRAMMAR. 



W&t HljJljatftt* 



The letters of the Alphabet are the same in French as in 
English, with the exception of za, which is wanting, and they 
are generally pronounced in a similar manner when in com- 
bination, except the vowels : we have, therefore, merely 
introduced them for the sake of uniformity. 



Letters. 

A a . 


English mode 

of representing 

their sounds. 

Ah . 


French mode 
of representing 
their sounds. 

Ah . 


Pronounced in combination 
with other letters, or in 
words. 
Initial. Final. 

Ah . . * 


B b . 


bay . 


. b6 . 


be . . eb 


C c . 


say . 


ce 


ce, or ke ec 


D d . 


day . 


de . 


de . . ed 


E e . 
F f . 


ay . 
eff . 


e 

effe . 


e # 
fe . . ef 


Hh . 


jay • 

ash . 


ge . 
ache . 


ge . . eg 
he . . eh 


I i . 


e 


i 


i # 


J j . 
K k . 


je . 
kah . 


ka . 


je . . ej 
ke . . ek 


L 1 . 


elle . 


elle . 


le . . el 


Mm . 


em me 


emme 


me . . em 


N n . 


enne . 


enne . . 


ne . . . en 


Oo . 








o . . * 


P P . 

Qq • 


pay . . 
ku . 


pe 

qu . . 


pe . . ep 

que . . •* 


Rr . . 


erre . 


erre . . 


re . . er 


S s . . 


ess . . 


esse . 


se, or ze es 


Tt . . 


tay . . 


te . . 


te . . et 


Uu . . 


u . . 


u . . 


u . . * 


Vv. . 
Xx . . 


vay . . 
eeks . . 


v6 . . 
ics, or ix 


ve . . ev 
xe . . ex 


Yy . . 

Z z . . 


egrec 
zede . . 


igrec . . 
zede . . 


i • « * 
ze , . ez 



2 PRONOUNCIATION. 

Although the author has endeavoured to mark, in different 
ways, the sounds of the letters, in the preceding page, yet 
he is of opinion that the pronunciation can only be acquired 
by hearing and by practice. However, the learner may bo 
benefited by obtaining a knowledge, from a teacher, of the 
manner in which the following letters, syllables, and words 
are to be pronounced. 



IJrorottutatiiw* 



a, h, &, sounded as in, chat, cat ; ta. thy ; a, to, at ; dge, 

age. 
e, e, e, 6 . . je, I ; les, the ; mesure, measure ; donni, 

given ; pere, father ; etre, to be. 
i, i, y . . . ici, here ; petite, little ; maitre, master ; 

yeux, eyes, 
o, 6, ... trop, too ; voire, your ; vdtre, yours ; hote, 

host, 
u, ti, ... plus, more ; rue, street ; mur, ripe ; chute, 

fall. 



ai, ai, at, 
ay, au, aoii, 



ea, ei, eu, 
eu, eai, eau, 
eoi, 



f plaire, to please ; je faisais, I did ; fai, I 
have ; je chantai, I sung ; hair, to hate ; 

<{ naitre to be born ; paysan, peasant ; 
autre, other ; auteur, author ; Aout, Au- 

[il mangea, he ate ; neige, snow ; veine, vein ; 

j eu, had ; peu, little ; heureux, happy ; il 
eut, he might have ; jeune, young ; jeune, 
fast ; jeai, a jay ; beau, fine ; bourgeois, 
citizen. 



la, le, le, 
ie, io, iu, 
ieu, iou, 



f diademe, diadem ; viande, meat ; il etudiait, 
he studied ; jiacre, a hackney-coach ; 
impie, impious; amiti'e, regard ; troisilme, 
third ; heritiere, heiress ; passion, passion ; 
Confucius, Confucius ; Monsieur, Mr. ; 

[ chiourme, a galley's crew. 



PRONUNCIATION. 



oe, 01, OU, 
ceu, oie, oua, 
oui, 



f noil, Christmas ; Mademoiselle, Miss ; pois- 
son, fish ; poison, poison ; je louois*, or 
louais*, I praised ; clou, nail ; toujours, 
always ; cozur, heart ; ceuf, egg ; joie, 
joj r ; rouage, wheel work ; louange, praise ; 
oui, yes ; Louis, Louis. 



ua, ue, ue, 
ue, u6, 
ui, ueu, 



am, an, aen, 
aim, ain, aon. 
aient, 



em, en, ean, 
eim, ein, eon, 
eun, eur, euse, 
eux, 



C^quantite, quantity ; 
equator ; leguer, 



quatre, four ; equateur, 
to bequeath ; ecuelle, 



porringer ; guerir, to cure ; guere, but 
little ; guepe, a wasp ; guide, guide ; gaeuz, 
beggarly. 

f camp, camp ; amiral, admiral ; champ, 
field ; an, year ; changer, to change ; 
Caen ; faim, hunger ; pain, bread ; fan- 
taine, fountain ; paon, peacock ; Us chan- 
t aient, they sung. 

f terns, time; empereur, emperor; solemnite, 
solemnity ; vent, wind ; Jean, John ; 
mangeant, eating ; Rheims ; dessein, de- 
sign ; pigeon, pigeon ; nous mangeons, 
we eat ; d jeun, fasting ; bonheur, happi- 
ness ; vertueuse, f. vertueux, m. virtuous. 



f image, image ; importun, troublesome ; vin, 
im, in, ian, wine \jardin, garden ;jardinier, gardener ; 

ien, ienne,ion, <l viande, meat; mien, mine; mienne, mine ; 
ient, lion, lion ; patient, patient ; Us parlaient, 

I they spoke. 



om, on, oin, 



um, un, 



C ombre, shadow ; plomb, lead ; nom, name ; 
< mon, my ; mon ami, my friend ; fagon, 
\ fashion ; foin, hay ; coin, corner. 

i parfum, perfume ; humble, humble ; chacun, 
\ each ; chacune, each. 



* 06s. In the imperfect tense and conditional of verbs, oi is used by 
some writers instead of ai, and is pronounced in a similar manner. 



PRONUNCIATION. 



The final consonants are not pronounced unless the ensuing 
word begin with a vowel ; but they must always be pronoun- 
ced as under : — 



Abraham, Abraham 
air, air 
arc, bow 
arsenal, arsenal 
auteur, author 
avec, with 
avoir, to have 
bis, again 
brut, rough 
calcul, calculation 
cap, cape 
car, for 
Certs, Ceres 
chef, (sing.) chief 
cuiller, spoon 
David, David 
dot, dowry 
'echec, check 
est, east 
exact, exact 
fer, iron 
fier, proud 
jil, thread 



gratis, gratis 

Grec, Greek 

hivcr, winter 

Jupiter, Jupiter 

lac, lake 

mat, mate 

mer, sea 

ouest, west 

Pallas, Pallas 

poil, hair 

retif, restive 

sac, sack 

sel, salt 

seul, alone 

Sieur, Sir 

sot, fool 

sud, south 

troc, truck, barter 

Venus, Venus 

vif, alive, and most words in 

if 
vis, screw 
Zenith, Zenith, &c. 



The following is a list of those words which the English 
find most difficult to pronounce. 



aiguille, needle 
angelique, angelic 
anguille, an eel 
armee, army 
Avignon, Avignon 
bouillir, to boil 
Boulogne, Boulogne 
Bretagne, Britany 
brouillard, fog 
campagne, country 
canaille, rabble 



chevrefeuille, honeysuckle 
chien, dog 
cigogne, stork 
citrouille, pumpkin 
croix, cross 
cuvier, a fish-tub 
deuil, mourning 
egayant, rejoicing 
epagneul, spaniel 
Espagnol, Spanish 
eternite, eternity 



GENDERS OF NOUNS. 



fruit, fruit 
grenouille, frog 
heure, hour 
horreur, horror 
ignominie, ignominy 
ignorant, ignorant 
joyeusemcnt, cheerfully 
joindre, to join 
lumilre, light 
lieuc, league 
Monsieur, Mr. 
murmur e, murmur 
musician, musician 
Neuchatel, Neufchatel 
nettoyer, to clean 
observatoire, observatory 
(Billet, pink 
oignon, onion 
orgueil, pride 
oscillc, sorrel 



parapluie, umbrella 
plusieurs, many 
puisque, since 
quelquefois, sometimes 
quinze, fifteen 
quotient, quotient 
reluire, to shine 
saigner, to bleed 
singularite, singularity 
soleil, sun 
Soulier, shoe 
tailleur, tailor 
temoignage, witness 
ulterieur, ulterior 
universalite, universality 
vaincu, conquered 
vahureusement, bravely 
Versailles, Versailles 
vigne, vine 
vouloir, to be willing. 



Although the preceding words are introduced in this part 
of the Grammar, yet it may be better for the pupil not to 
attempt to pronounce them till he has made some progress 
in the language, because their correct pronunciation requires 
a verv delicate ear. 



OBSERVATIONS RESPECTING THE 



Every noun, in French, is either of the masculine or fem- 
inine gender, whether the being or thing that is named be 
animate or inanimate. The genders of animate or living beings 
may easily be distinguished ; thus, all male animals are mas- 
culine, and all female animals are feminine; but the genders 
of inanimate tilings can only be learned by practice ; for 
which purpose we have generally marked the genders of the 
nouns throughout the work. 
1* 



GENDERS OP NOUNS. 



1. The sexes are sometimes distinguished by different 



names ; as, 

Masculine. 
*Vhomme, the man 
le dinclon, the turkey-cock 
le boric, the he-goat 
le lilvre, the hare 
un gar con, a boy 
un cerf, a stag 
lejars, the gander 



Feminine, 
lafemme, the woman 
la dinde, the turkey-hen 
la chevre, the she-goat 
la hase, the hare 
une file, a girl 
une biche, a hind 
Voie, the goose, &c. 



2. Some are distinguished by their terminations ; as, 



Masculine 
le tigre, the tiger 
le lion, the lion 
le loup, the Ae-wolf 
un lapin, a (buck) rabbit 
w?i canard, a drake 
wn Juzf, a Jew 
un paysan,dL countryman 

ww cousin, a (male) cousin 

im ami, a (male) friend 

ww acteur, an actor 

wra pecheur, a sinner 

Je defendeur, the defendant 

Ze vengcur. the avenger 



Feminine, 
la tigrcsse, the tigress 
fa lionne, the lioness 
Z« Zowt'e, the sAi-wolf 
2/rae lapine, a (doe) rabbit 
w?ze carte, a duck 
une Juive, a Jewess 
une paysanne, a country-wo- 
man. 
une cousine, a (female) cousin 
une amie, a (female) friend 
une actrice, an actress 
une peclier esse, a sinner 
/« defender esse, the defendant 
Z« vengercsse, the avenger, &c. 



3. Sometimes the same word (though masculine or fem- 
inine) is used to designate both sexes ; as, une balcine, a. whale ; 
un requin, a shark ; une corneille, a crow or rook ; tin crapaud, 
a toad ; une grenouille, a frog, &c. 

4. Majeste, Majesty; and sentinelle, sentinel, are feminine. 



* The articles must be of the same gender as the nouns to which they 
refer ; but when a noun begins with a vowel or h mute, then V is put in- 
stead of le or la. 



GENDERS OP NOUNS. 



5. Amour, love ; dilice, delight ; and orgue, organ, are 
musculine in the singular, and feminine in the plural. 

6. Automne, autumn, is masculine when the adjective pre- 
cedes ; as un bel automne, a fine autumn ; but it is feminine 
when the adjective follows ; as, une automne froide et plu~ 
vieuse, a cold and rainy autumn. 

7. Personne, substantive, is feminine ; and personne, pro- 
noun, is masculine. 

8 The following nouns designate both sexes ; auteur, 
author or authoress ; docteur, doctor or doctress ; ecrivain, 
writer ; orateur, orator ; philosopher philosopher ; poete, poet 
or poetess ; timoin, witness, &c — [Vide Grammaire des Gram- 
moires, p. 93.] 

The following nouns arc sometimes masculine and some- 
times feminine, depending generally upon the manner in 
which they are used ; but in some instances, they appear to be 
nouns of similar orthography and different origin. 

Feminine, 
aigle Romaine, Roman stan- 
dard 
une a?ige, an angel-fish, or a 

scate 
une carpe (a fish), a carp 
une coclie, a notch or a sow 
une couple, a couple (as 

rabbits^ &c.) 
une enfant (a girl), a child 
une enseigne, a sign 



Masculine, 
un aigle, an eagle 

un ange, an angel 

le carpe, the wrist 

un coche, a caravan 

un couple, a married couple 

un enfant (a boy), a child 
un enseigne (an officer), an 

ensign 
un exemple, an example 

le fin, the main point 

tin for et, a gimlet 

un garde, a warden or keeper 

le grejfe (an office), the Rolls 

le guide, the conductor 

un livre, a book 

un manche, a handle 



une exemple (a written model), 

a copy 
la fin, the end 
wieforet, a forest 
une garde, a guard 
la greffe (a branch), the graft 
les guides, the reins 
une livre (a iccight), a pound 
une manche (of a coat), a 

sleeve 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Masculine, 
un manoeuvre, a laborer 
un memoir e, a bill 
un ??wde, a mood 
un moule, a model 
un mousse, a cabin-boy 
un office, an office 
?tn page (an officer), a page 
un pique (in cards), a spade 
un poele, a stove 
un paste (employment), a post 
le pourpre, the scarlet fever 
un remise, a glass-coach 
un somme, a nap or sleep 

un souris, a smile 

un tour, a turn 

un triomphe, a triumph 

un trompette, a trumpeter 
un vase, a vessel 
un voile, a veil 



Feminine, 
la manoeuvre, the managing 
une memoire, a memory 
une mode, a fashion 
une moule (a Jish), a muscle 
de la mousse, moss 
une office, a pantry 
une page (of a book), a page 
une pique (in arms), a pike 
une poele, a frying-pan 
la poste, the post 
la pourpre, (a color), purple 
une remise, a coach-house 
la somme, the sum or total 

amount 
une souris, a mouse 
une tour, a tower 
une triomphe (in cards), a 

trump 
une trompette, a trumpet 
la vase, the mud 
une voile (of a ship), a sail 



fEigttlolOfiS* 



In French, as in English, there are nine parts of speech, 
five of which are declinable, and four indeclinable. 





Declinable. 




Indeclinable. 


1. 


V Article, the article 


6. 


VAdverle, the adverb 


2. 


le Nom, the noun 


7- 


la Preposition, the prepo- 


3. 


VAdjectif, the adjective 




sition 


4. 


le Pronom, the pronoun 


8. 


la Conjonction, the con- 


5. 


le Verbe, the verb 




junction 






9. 


V Interjection, the interjec- 
tion 



PLURAL OF NOUNS. y 

CHAPTER T. 

There are three articles, viz. le, the, definite ; un, a, in- 
definite ; and du, some, partitive. 

They are declined in three states or cases, viz. nominative, 
genitive, and dative; as follows. The definite le, the ; 
thus, 

Singular. 

Masc. Fern. Common. Plural. 

Nom. or 1st state . le la P* les, the 

Gen. or 2nd . . . du de la de V des, of the 

Dat. or 3rd ... au a la a V auz, to the 

The indefinite article un, a, is thus declined. 

Masc. Fern. 

1. un une, a 

2. d'un d^une, of a 

3. a un & une, to a 

The partitive article du, some, is thus declined. 

Masc. Fern. Common. Plural. 

1. -\du, some \de. la, some de V, some, \des, some 

2. de, of some de, of some d', of some de, of some 

3. d du, to some a de la, to some, d de V, to some a des> to some 

* Obs. 1. The apostrophe is used instead of e before a masculine, and 
instead of a before a feminine noun. 

2. That du is a contraction of de le ; des of de les ; au of d, le ; and 
aux of a les. De le, de les, a le, a les, must never be used before a noun. 

3. Du, de la, &c. are sometimes Englished by from the ; d'un and 
d'une by from a; de and d' by from some. 

f Obs. Du, de la, &c. are used to express a part of a whole, and des 
is used to express a part of a quantity of things. Ex. donnez-moi du 
pain, give me some bread ; donnez-moi de la viande, give me some meat; 
donnez-moi des pommes, give me some apples. 



10 PLURAL OP NOUNS. 

CHAPTER II. 

The plural of nouns is generally formed by adding s to 
the singular ; as, 

Singular. Plural, 

le pere, m.* the father les per es, the fathers 

le livre, m. the book les livres, the books 

la mere, f.* the mother les meres, the mothers 

la haie, f. the hedge les haies, the hedges 

la ville, f. the town les villes, the towns 

Vhomme, m. the man les hommes, the men 

Varbre, m. the tree les arbres, the trees 

V'&toile, f. the star les itoiles, the stars 

So form the following examples, and observe that a mas- 
culine singular article must be put before a masculine singular 
noun, a feminine singular before a feminine singular, a plural 
before a plural, and V before a noun beginning with a vowel 
or h mute. 

Roi, m. king ; reine, f. queen ; garpon, m. boy ; maison, f. 
house ; champ, m. field ; main. f. hand ; loi, f. law ; hiver, 
m. (Ji mute), winter; eglise, f. church ; histoire, f. (h mute), 
history ; cause, f. cause ; prince, m. prince ; cordon, m. string ; 
larme, f. tear ; jardin, m. garden ; Jiuitre, f. (h mute), oyster ; 
langue, f. language ; liarpe, f. (h aspirate), harp ; lettre, f. let- 
ter ; oncle, m. uncle ; vertu, f. virtue ; habit, m. (Ji mute), 
coat ; ami, m. (male) friend ; amie, f. (female) friend ; cousin, 
m. (male) cousin ; cousine, f. (female) cousin ; itr anger, m. 
foreigner ; etrangere, f. foreigner ; voisin, m. neighbour ; voi- 
sine, f. neighbour. 

The general rule admits of the following exceptions. 

1. Those nouns which end in s, z, and z, in the singular, 
remain the same in the plural ; as, 

* Note. m. stands for masculine, and f. for feminine. 



PLURAL OF NOUNS. 11 



Singular. Plural, 

lejilst m. the son lesjils, the sons 

Vos, m. the bone les os, the bones 

la croixy f. the cross les croix, the crosses 



pri. . 
sourisi 



. _. „_~ ; .. — , — _. -~ 7 — 

So ; palais, m. palace ; mois, m. month ; bribis, f. sheep ; 
fix, m. price ; noix, f. nut ; lynx, m. lynx ; voix, f. voice ; 
mrisi f. mouse ; nez, m. nose ; heros, m. (h aspirate), hero. 

2. Most nouns in au, eau, eu, ceu, ieu, and ow,* form their 
plural by adding x ; as, 

Singular. Plural, 

lefeu, m. the fire les feux, the fires 

le Dieu, m. the God les Dieux, the Gods 

Voiseau, m. the bird les oiseaux, the birds 

Veau, f. the water 7es eaux, the waters 

So ; couteau, m. knife ; chapeau, m. hat ; berceau, m. cra- 
dle ; tableau, m. picture ; genou, m. knee ; caitlou, m. flint ; 
neveu, m. nephew ; tfeow, m. calf ; vcbm, m. vow; chou, m. 
cabbage ; lieu, m. place ; vaisseau, m. vessel ; manteau, m. 
cloak; hameau, m. (A aspirate), hamlet; piew, m. stake; 
bijou, id. jewel ; chateau, m. castle ; jew, m. game ; joyau, m. 
jewel ; pe«w, f. skin. 

3. Most nouns, in al and ail, form their plural by changing 
1, or il, into wx ; as, 

Singular. Plural, 

le crista!, m. the crystal les cristaux, the crystals 

P animal, m. the animal les animaux, the animals 

/e corail, m. the coral /es coraux, the corals 

So ; mal, m. evil ; general, m. general ; travail, m. labor, 
or work; soupirail, m. air-hole; cheval, m. horse; 6az7, m. 
lease ; arsenal, m. arsenal ; marechal, m. marshal ; cardinal, 
m. cardinal ; email, m. enamel. 



* 06s. Some nouns in om follow the general rule ; as le clou, the nail ; 
le Irou, the hole ; le verrou, the bolt ; le hibou, the owl ; lefou, the fool ; 
le filou, the sharper ; le matou, the male cat ; le licou, the halter. Plural 
les clous, the nails ; les trous, &c. Also Ze bleu, the blue, takes s, in the 
plural. • 



12 PLURAL OF NOUNS. 

But the following nouns in al and ail, take s in the plural. Le carnaval, 
the carnival; le regal, the treat; le bal, the ball; le bocal, the jug ; lecal, 
the hard skin ; Juvenal, Juvenal, and other proper names in al ; le mail, 
the mallet ; Vevantail, the fan ; le gouvernail, the rudder ; le camail, the 
capuchin ; Vattirail, the train; le serail, the seraglio ; le portail, the por- 
tal ; le detail, the detail. Plural, les carnavals, the carnivals ; les regals ; 
les bals, &c. 



4. Nouns, in nt form their plural by changing the t into 
s ; but those of one syllable, in nt, follow the general rule ; 
as, 

Singular. Plural 

le moment, m. the moment les momens,* the moments 

Venfant, m. the child les enfants, the children 

le pont, m. the bridge les pants, the bridges 

la dent, f. the tooth les dents, the teeth 

So ; serpent, m. serpent ; accent, m. accent ; sentiment, 
m. sentiment ; evenement, in. event ; mouvement, m. move- 
ment ; parent, m. relation; gw?i, m. glove; vent, m. wind ; 
accident, -m. accident ; cure-dent, m. tooth-picker ; lieutenant, 
m. lieutenant. 

5. Nouns, with the indefinite article in the singular and 
partitive article, in the plural ; as, 

Singular. Plural, 

un verre, m. a' glass des verres, glasses 

une plume, f. a pen des plumes, pens or some pens 

un ecolier, m. a scholar des ecoliers, scholars. 

iune ecoliere, f. a scholar des ecolieres, scholars 

* Obs. This mode of spelling is adopted by the French Academy, as 
well as by most modern writers ; vide the Dictionary of the French Acade- 
my, Revue Encyclopedique, &c. But some writers prefer retaining the 
t. — ( Vide the French Grammars of Gitard, Wailly, Restaut, &c.) 

■f Obs. 1. When the feminine of an indefinite article or adjective is used, 
the final letter e is not taken away before a vowel ; as une eglise, a church ; 
de bonne eau, good water. 

2. The names of metals have no plural when taken in a general or col- 
lective sense ; as, de Vor, gold ; de V argent, silver ; du fer, iron ; du 
plomb, lead ; du cuivre, copper ; but some have a plural when taken in a 
distributive sense, that is, when they denote different kinds of the same 
species of things ; or, when used in work ; then we may say des fers, des 
plombs, &c. — Wailly, p. 31. 



PLURAL OF NOUNS. 13 

Singular. Flural 

un chapeau, m. a hat des chapeaux, hats 

une voir, f. a voice des voix, voices 

2m savant, ra. a learned man des savans, learned men 

une savante, f. a learned wo- des savantes, learned women 
man 

So ; cuiller, f. a spoon ; plat, m. dish ; assiette, f. plate ; 
couteau, m. knife ; fourchette, f. fork ; jardin, m. garden ; 
cuisine, f. kitchen ; cuisinier, m. male cook ; cuisiniere, f. 
female cook ; cliambre, f. room ; gillet, m. waistcoat ; dent, f. 
tooth ; ange, m. angel ; Jille, f. daughter ; parent, m. rela- 
tion ; enfant, m. or f. child ; veau, m. calf. 

The following nouns are irregularly formed. 

Sijigular. Plural. 

I'oeil* m. the eye les yeux, the eyes 

le ciel,* m. the heaven les deux, the heavens 

le betail. m. the cattle des bestiaux, cattle 

I'aieul, m. the ancestor les aieux, the ancestors 

ail, m. garlic aux or a?//z, garlic 

k ON THE PLURAL OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 

When a word is compounded of two nouns, without a pre- 
position between them, or of a noun and an adjective, both 
take the mark of the plural ; as, 

Singular. Plural. 

un arc-boutant, m. a buttress des arcs-boutans, buttresses 

un bout-rime, m. a rhyme des bouts-rimes, rhymes 

ifii havre-sac, m. a soldier's des havres-sacs, soldiers' knap- 
knapsack sacks 

3. The names of the virtues and vices have no phual ; as, la foi, the 
faith ; la prudence, prudence, &c. — Vide Restaut, p. 45. 

4. The following nouns have no singular ; tenebres, f. darkness ; pleurs, 
in. tears ; matines, f. morning prayers ; ciseaux, m. scissars ; nones, f. nones ; 
vepres, f. vespers ; ancetres, m. ancestors ; gens, m. or f. people, &c. 

* -5. Ciel and wil sometimes follow the general rule ; as, des dels de lit, 
testers of a bed , les dels de tableaux, the skies of pictures ; des ails de 
bauf (a term used in architedure) , ovals. 



■ 



14 PLURAL OP NOUNS. 

So ; un chene-vert, m. an evergreen-oak ; un gentil-homme 9 
m. a nobleman ; un bel-esprit, m. a wit ; un petit-maitre, m. 
a fop; un chat-huant, ra. a screech-owl; un chou-Jleur, m. a 
cauliflower. 

When a word is compounded of two nouns, with a prepo- 
sition between them, the first only takes the mark of the plu- 
ral ; as, 

Singular. Plural. 

unjet-iVeau, m. a water-spout des jets-cPeau, water-spouts 

un clief-d?azuvre, m. a master- des chefs-d'oeuvre, master- 
piece pieces 

So ; un arc-en-ciel, m. a rainbow ; un coq-a-Vane, m. an 
idle story ; un croc-en-jambe, m. a trip ; un maitre-d'Iwtel, m. 
a steward. 

When a noun is compounded of a verb, preposition, or 
adverb, the noun only changes for the plural ; as, 

Singular. ■ Plural, 

un garde-manger, m. a larder des garde-mangers, lardgrs 

un avant-coureur, m. a fore- des avant-coureurs, forerun- 

runner, or harbinger ners, or harbingers 

un garde*-fou, m. a railing on des garde-fous, railings on 

bridges bridges 

So; une av ant-courier c, f. a forerunner; un entresol, m. a 
suite of rooms between the ground and first floor; un cntre- 
sourcil, m. a space between the eyebrows ; un garde-feu, ra. 
a high fender ; un abat-vent, m. a penthouse of a steeple ; un 
abat-jour, m. a sky-light. 

Proper names, when used as common, take the mark of the plural ; 
as, les Cicerons, les Demosthenes, les Homeres, et les Virgiles, seront 
toujour s rares, Cicero?, Demosthenes, Homers, and Virgils will always 
be rare. — (Du Marsais' Gram. vol. ii. p. 3, and Wailly, p. 33.J 

* Obs. When garde is used as a noun, it takes the mark of the plu- 
ral ; as, les gardes-frangaises* the French guards ; les gardes-suisses, 
f. the Swiss guards. 

* Jtote. Adjectives derived from the names of nations begin with a small letter. — 
(See Oram, des Orammaires, vol. ii. p. 240.) 



DECLENSION OP NOUNS. 15 

When a noun is compounded with the pronoun mon or ma, 
my, both change for the plural ; as, 

Singular. Plural. 

Monsieur, Mr., Master, or Sir Messieurs, gentlemen 

•Madame, Madam, or Mrs. Mesdames, ladies 

Monseigneur, my Lord Messeigneurs, my Lords 

Mademoiselle, Miss Mesdemoiselles, Misses 



Ettltmiou of T$ounu> 



The Declensions of Nouns make three distinct states or 
cases, that is, nominative, genitive, and dative. 

1. Masculine nouns with the definite article are thus de- 
clined : 

Singular. Plural. 

*N. Le gargon, the boy Les gargons, the boj r s 

G. du garcon, of the boy des gargons, of the boys 

D. au gargon, to the boy auz gargons, to the boys 

So ; decline the masculine nouns ; livre, book ; nez, nose ; 
fils, son ; cheval, horse ; chapeau, hat. 

2. Feminine nouns with the definite article are thus de- 
clined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. La plume, the pen Les plumes, the pens 

G. de la plume, of the pen des plumes, of the pens 

D. d la plume, to the pen aux plumes, to the pens 

So ; decline the feminine nouns ; table, table ; mere, moth- 
er; mer, sea; noix, walnut. 



* Obs. Some Grammarians make six cases ; but since there are no 
changes in the terminations of French nouns, we think they would only 
tend to perplex the student. 



16 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 



3. Nouns of either gender, beginning with a vowel or /* 
mute, are declined with the definite article; thus, 



Singular. 
N. Venfant, the child 
G. de Venfant, of the child 
D. & Venfant, to the child 

Singular. 
N. Uhabit, the coat 
G. de l'habit, of the coat 
D. d Vhabit, to the coat 

So ; decline ami, m. friend ; amie, f. friend ; animal, 
animal ; homme, m. man ; heritiere, f. heiress. 



Plural 

Les enfans, the children 
des enfans, of the children 
aux enfans, to the children 

Plural. 

Les habits, the coats 
des habits, of the coats 
aux habits, to the coats 



m. 



4. Nouns of either gender, with the indefinite article in the 
singular, and partitive article in the plural, are thus declined: 

Plural. 



Singular. 
N. Un vaisseau, a vessel 

G. d'un vaisseau, of a vessel 

D. & un vaisseau, to a vessel 



Singular. 

N. Une mere, a mother 
G. d'une mere, of a mother 
D. d une mere : to a mother 



Des vaisseaux, vessels, or some 
vessels 

de vaisseaux, of or from ves- 
sels 

d des vaisseaux, to some ves- 
sels 

Plural. 
Des meres, mothers 
de meres, of or from mothers 
d des meres, to mothers 



So; miroir, m. looking-glass ; tapis, m. carpet; file, f. 
daughter ; loi, f. law ; noix, f. walnut ; femme, f. woman. 

5. Nouns of either gender, beginning with a vowel or h 
mute, are thus declined with the indefinite and partitive arti- 
cles ; which only differ from the preceding in the genitive 
plural. 



Singular. 
N. Un ecolier, a scholar 
G. d'un ecolier, of a scholar 
D. d un Ecolier, to a scholar 



Plural 
Des ecoliers, scholars 
d'ecoliers, of scholars 
d des ecoliers, to scholars 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. If 

Singular. Plural 

N. Une histoire, a history Des histoires, histories 

G. d'une histoire, of a history d'histoires, of histories 

D. d une histoire, to a history d des histoires, to histories 

So ; orphelin, m. male orphan ; orpheline, f. female orphan ; 
enfant, m. child ; animal, m. animal ; hotesse, f. hostess ; 
heure, f. hour. 

6. Nouns of either gender with the partitive article in the 
singular, are thus declined : 

Masculine. Feminine. 

N. Du* cuivre, copper or some De la viande, meat or some 

copper meat 

G. de cuivre, of some copper de viande, of some meat 

D. d du cuivre, to some copper d de la viande, to some meat 

So ; miel, m. honey ; *salade, f. salad ; sel, m. salt ; mou- 
tarde, f. mustard ; poivre, m. pepper ; cire, f. wax ; pain, m. 
bread. 

7« Nouns of either gender, beginning with a vowel or h 
mute, are thus declined with the partitive article. 

Masculine. , Feminine, 

N. De Vairain, brass or some De Vhumanit'e, humanity 

brass 

G. d'airain, of some brass dliumanite, of humanity 

D. & de Vairain, to some brass d de Fhumanite, to humanity 

So ; honneur, m. honor ; encre, f. ink ; argent, m. money, 
or silver ; huile, f. oil ; or, m. gold ; eau, f. water ; etain, m. 
tin or pewter. 



* Obs. When different kinds of the same species of things are spoken of, 
we can use the partitive article des ; as, des cuivres, coppers ; des salades, 
salads ; des sels, salts, &c. 



18 



PRACTICE ON THE ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



RECAPITULATORY PRACTICE ON THE ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



The books, livre, m. 

Of the prince, prince, m. 

To the trees, arbre, ra. 

The string, cordon, m. 

Of the strings, 

The voice, voix, f. 

To the voices, 

Of the windows, fenetre^ £ 

Cheese, frontage, m. 

To the beef, bceuf, m. 

¥e&s,pois, m. 

Some mutton, mouton, m. 

Of veal, veau, m. 

To pork, pore, m. 

Some poultry, volaille, f. 

Rabbits, lapin, m. or lapine, f. 

Of the ends, fin, f. 

To the towns, villa, f. 

Of the teeth, dent, f. 

To the eye, ceil, m. 

To the eyes, 

Of an eye, 

To a church, eglise, f= 

From a church, 

To houses, maison, f. 

From houses. 

Nails (of iron), clou, m. 

Of nails, 

Nails (of animals), ongle, m. 

Of the nails, 

From a book, livre, m. 

A woman, femme, f. 

Some women, 

Of women, 

To a school, ecole, f. 

Of a sword, ep'ee, f. 

Of an end, fin, f. 

To the stars, etoile, f. 

To (some?) stars, 

To a pen-knife, canif, m. 



Of a plate, assiette, f. 

Some plates, ' 

To a dish, plat, m. 

Of dishes, 

Some tea, the, m. 

Coffee, cafe, m. 

To some coffee, 

Some sugar, sucre, m. 

Of sugar, 

Milk, laity m. 

Cream, crime, f. 

Of some lead, plomb, m. 

To some iron, fer, m. 

Steel, acier, m. 

Some water, eau, f. 

The waters, 

Of the waters, 

Cabbages, cliou, m. 

Cauliflowers, clwn-fleur, m. 

Potatoes, pomme de terre, f. 

Some meat, viande, f. 

Mustard, moutarde, f. 

Slates, ardoise, f. 

To some pens, plume, f. 

Children, enfant, m. 

The children, 

Of candles, chandelle, f. 

Of the candles, 

A candlestick, chandeliery m. 

Of candlesticks, 

Some beer, biere, f. 

Of w\ne, vin, m. 

Of the wine, 

Some paper, papier, m. 

Of some paper, 

Some money, argent, m. 

To some silver, argent, m. 

Of silver, 

Some ink, encre,f. 

Of ink, 



PRACTICE ON THE ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 19 

Some change, monnaie, f. Some desks, 

Of some change, Of the desks, 

The desk, pupitre, m. Learned men, savant, m. 



RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES, ON THE ARTICLES AND NOUNS, 
TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH. 

FIRST LESSON. 

Lebras, l'ceil, la bouche, Poreille, les rivieres, des ruis- 
seaux, du bras, un horame, une heure, de Poreille, au feu, a 
l'ceil, d'une maison, a lamaison, a un homme, de Peau, de la 
viande, de salade, k du miel, & une fontaine, d'un pays, de la 
ville, des armees, de la matiere. d'un roi, aux fontaines, du 
charbon, du fromage, a. la bouche, d'une reine, de 1'or, de 
Pargent, du fer, du cuivre, du pain, du beurre, de l'etain, du 
plomb, du vif-argent, aux oiseaux, des louanges, une bouteille 
de vin, un gigot de mouton, une t§te de veau. 

* bras, m. arm reine, f. queen 

bouche, f. mouth beurre, m. butter 

oreille, f. ear plomb, m. lead 
ruisseau, m. rivulet or brook vif-argent, m. quicksilver 

pays, m. country louange, f. praise 

ck&rbon, m. coal g^got, m. leg 

fromage, m. cheese tete, f. head 

SECOND LESSON. 

Le soleil et la lune eclairent la terre. Je vis hier le roi ; 
la reine et les princes. Le pere, la mere, les freres, les 
sceurs, les oncles, les tantes, et plusieurs autres parens, sont 
alles en France. Apportez-moi une bouteille de vin. Le 
gazouillement des oiseaux, le murmure des ruisseaux, la frai- 
cheur des bois, le parfum des fleurs et la douce odeur des 
plantes contribuent beaucoup au plaisir de l'esprit et h la 
sante du corps. Le vin de Bourgogne se vend sur le pied de 

* Obs. 1. Those words that have occurred in a previous part of the 
Grammar are not generally given under the exercises. 

2. Du, de la, de V, and des, are sometimes Englished by of the, and' 
sometimes by some, depending on the nature of the sentences in which 
they are employed ; thus, de la viande, maybe Englished by some meat 
or of the meat. 



20 



PRACTICE ON THE ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



sohil, sun ; et, and 
lune, moon 
eclairent, enlighten 



soixante sous* la bouteille. La Provence et le Languedoc 
produisent des oranges, des citrons, des flgues, des olives, 
des amandes, des chataignes, des p6ches, des abricots, et des 
raisins. La vie est un meiange de biens et de maux. Don- 
nez-moi du pain et du beurre. Le bonheur des medians 
n'est que passager. 

beaucoup, greatly 

esprit, mind ; saute, health 

corps, body 

Bourgogne, Burgundy 

se vend, is sold 

sur le pied, at the rate 

soixante sous {sixty half pence), 

thirty pence 
la, a ; produisent, produce 
citron, m. lemon 
amande, f- almond 
clidtaigne, f. chesnut 
pechc, f, peach 
abricot, m. apricot 
raisins, m. grapes 
est, is ; melange, mixture 
biens, good ; maux, evil 
donnez-moi, give me 



terre, earth 

je vis Jiier, I saw yesterday 
tante, f. aunt 
plusieurs, several 
autres, other 
parens, relations 
sont allis, are gone 
en France, to France 
apportez-moi, bring me 
bouteille, f. bottle 
de, of ; vin, wine 
gazouillement, warbling 
murmur e, murmuring 
ruisseaux, brooks 
fraicheur, coolness 
bois, woods 
parfum, fragrance 
jleurs, flowers ; douce, sweet 
contribuent, contribute 



bonheur, happiness 
medians, wicked 
n'est que, is but 
passager, transitory 



THIRD LESSON. 

La France est separee de l'ltalie par les Alpes, et de PEs- 
pagne par les Pyrenees. La Tamise est une belle riviere. 
Lamer Aiediterranee est entre l'Europe, l'Asie, et PAfrique. 
La Suisse est un pays montagneux. Le, Tage se jette dans 
POcean Atlantique. Les Antilles sonrdans les Indes Occi- 
dentals. Les Moluques sont dans POcean Indien. L'Eu- 
rope est borne au nord par la mer du nord et POcean Atlan- 
tique ; a POrient, par le Don ou Duna, le detroit de Con- 



* Obs- Sous is mostly called a penny by the English, but its real value 
is not more than the value of an English half-penny. 



PRACTICE ON THE ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



21 



stantinople et l'Archipel ; au raidi par la mer Mediterranee, 
et k FOccident par POcean Atlantique. 



est separee, is separated 
par , by ; de V, from (the) 
Alpes, Alps ; et, and 
Espagne, Spain 
Pyrenees, Pyrenees 
Tamisc, Thames 
belle, fine ; mer, sea 
Mediterranee, Mediterranean 
entre, between 
Asle, Asia 
Afrique, Africa 
Suisse, Switzerland 
montagneux, mountainous 
Tage, Tagus 
sejette dans, falls into 



Ocean Atlantique, Atlantic 
Ocean 

Antilles, Antillas 

sont, are ; dans, in 

hides Occidentales, West In- 
dies 

Moluques, Moluccas 

Indien, Indian 

borne, bounded 

au, on the ; nord, north 

d V Orient, on the east 

detroit de, straits of 

Archipel, Archipelago 

au midi, on the south 

d V Occident, on the west. 



FOURTH LESSON. 

Saturne etait le Dieu du terns, et Cybele la Deesse de la 
terre. Jupiter fils de Saturne et d'Ops, etait le Dieu du ciel, 
Neptune le Dieu de la mer, Pluton le Dieu des enfers, et Vul- 
cain celui du feu. Mercure etait le messager des Dieux, et 
le Dieu de Feloquence, des marchands et des voleurs. Apol- 
lon etait le Dieu des beaux-arts, Mars le Dieu de la guerre, 
et Bacchus celui du vin. Diane etait la Deesse de la chasse, 
Ceres la Deesse de l'agriculture, Flora la Deesse des fleurs, 
Venus la Deesse de Pamour, et Minerve celle de la sagesse, 
des arts et des sciences. 



etait, was ; du terns, of time 

Deesse, Goddess 

Pluton, Pluto 

enfers, infernal regions 

Vulcain, Vulcan 

celui, that (needs no trans.) 

Mercure, Mercury 

messager, messenger 

marchands, merchants 

voleurs, thieves 



Apollon, Apollo 
beaux-arts, fine arts 
guerre, war 
Diane, Diana 
chasse, hunting 
Flore, Flora 
jleurs, flowers 
amour, love 
Minerve, Minerva 
sagesse, wisdom. 



22 PLURAL OP ADJECTIVES. 

EXAMINATION ON THE ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 

What is a before a feminine noun ? to a before a mascu- 
line noun ? the before a masculine ? of the before a femi- 
nine ? to the before a masculine ? to the before a feminine ? 
of the before a plural ? to the before a plural ? the before a 
noun beginning with a vowel ? to the before a noun begin- 
ning with a vowel ? of the before a masculine 1 of a before 
a feminine ? 

What is some {meaning a part of a ivhole) before a femi- 
nine noun? some before a noun beginning with a vowel? to 
some before a masculine ? How is of some expressed in the 
masculine, feminine, and plural ? Is of some the same before 
a vowel as before a consonant? If not, what is the difference? 
What is some (meaning apart of a quantity of things) in the 
plural ? Is of the expressed in the same manner as some ? 

What is the general ending of the plural of nouns ? Are 
there any exceptions to the general rule ? When nouns end 
in s, x, or z, in the singular, how are their plurals formed ? 
What do nouns end in, in the singular, that take x in the plu- 
ral ? Tell me the plural of tableau, oiseau ? Are there any 
nouns in ou that follow the general rule ? If so, what are they? 
How are the plurals of nouns formed that end in al and ail? 
Are there any nouns in al and ail that follow the general 
rule ? If so, what are they ? How do nouns in nt form their 
plural ? 



CHAPTER III. 

3K0tCtttlt0* 



Adjectives change for the plural, the gender, the degrees 
of comparison, and the declension. 

PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 

The same rules that have been given for forming the plu- 
rals of nouns will apply to the adjectives; as, 



GENDER OP ADJECTIVES. 23 

Singular. Plural, 

aimable, aimables, amiable 

ambitieux, ambitieux, ambitious 

bel, or beau, beaux,* fine 

cardinal, cardinaux, cardinal 

charmanty charmans, charming 

charmante, charmantes, charming. 

So ; ancien, old, or ancient ; bon, good ; constant, constant ; 
curieux, curious ; econome, saving ; egal, equal ; faux, false ; 
fertile, fertile ; funeste, fatal ; furieux, furious ; habile, clever ; 
inegal, uneven; jeune, young ; lent, slow; mauvais, bad; 
mauvaise, bad ; mol or mou, soft ; nouvel or nouveau, new ; 
royal, royal ; specieux, specious ; tranquille, tranquil ; vrai , 
true. 

GANDER OF ADJECTIVES. 

Rule I. 

Those adjectives which end in e mute are alike in the mas- 
culine and feminine ; as. 

Masculine. Feminine, 

aimable, aimablc, amiable 

agreable, agreable, agreeable 

austere, austere, austere 

brave, brave, brave. 

So ; celebre, celebrated ; contraire, contrary ; facile, easy ; 
fidele, faithful ; habile, clever ; honnete, honest; jeune, young ; 
modcste, modest ; sage, wise ; utile, useful. 



*Obs. I. The plural of bel or beau, mol or mou, nouvel or nouveau, is 
always formed from the latter, viz. beau, mou, nouveau. 

2. Cent, a huodred ; and tout, all, lose the t in the plural ; as, two hun- 
dred, deux cens ; all men, tons les hommes ; and the adjective bleu, blue, 
takes s instead of a - , in the plural. 

3. Mo3t adjectives, in al, are the same in the singular and plural ; as, 
fatal, fatal ; filial, filial ; final, final ; frugal, frugal ; jovial, jovial ; late- 
ral, literal ; matinal, early ; naval, naval ; pascal, pascal, &c. However, 
we must write les arts liberaux, the liberal arts ; les cierges pascals, the 
pascal candles ; and, instead of combats navaux, write des combats sur 
mer, naval fights. 



24 GENDER OF ADJECTIVES. 

Rule II. 

Adjectives or participles of the musculine gender, not end- 
ing in e mute, are made feminine by simply adding e mute ; 
as, 

Masculine. Feminine, 

absolu, absolue, absolute 

aine, ainee, eldest 

amer, amere, bitter 

anterieur, anterieure, anterior 

assis, assise, seated 

bigot, bigote, bigoted 

brun, brune, brown 

So ; cagot, hypocritical ; charmant, charming ; clier, dear ; 
civil, civil ; clos, close ; commun, common ; complet, com- 
plete ; confus, confounded ; courtois, courteous ; cru, raw ; 
dur, hard ; devot, devout ; egal, equal ; emu, moved ; enrage, 
enraged ; exterieur, exterior ; fatal, fatal ; fecond, fruitful ; 
grand, great ; gris, grey ; hardi, bold ; idiot, idiotic ; inte- 
rieur, interior ; instruit, informed ; joli, pretty ; leger, light ; 
meilleur, better ; mineur, minor ; mort, dead ; mutin, mutin- 
ous ; niais, silly ; nu, naked ; perplex, perplexed ; prefix, 
prefix ; persan, Persian ; pervers, perverse ; petit, little ; 
plat, flat ; plein, full ; posterieur, latter ; profond, profound ; 
prompt, ready ; prudent, prudent; pueril, puerile ; rond, 
round ; royal, royal ; sain, wholesome ; second, second ; se- 
cret, secret ; sense, sensible ; seul, only ; subtil, subtle ; supe- 
rieur, superior ; venal, venal ; vert, green ; vrai, true. 



THE FOLLOWING ARE EXCEPTIONS TO THE PRECEDING 
RULES. 

1. Most adjectives which end in as, ais, el, et,* es, eil, ten, 
ol, on, ot* in the masculine, form the feminine by doubling 
the last consonant and adding e mute ; as, 

Masculine. Feminine, 

ancien, ancienne, ancient 

annuel, annuel, annual 

* Obs. 1. But the adjectives, bigot, cagot, complet, devot, idiot, secret, 
follow RULE II. 



GENDER OF ADJECTIVES. 25 

has, basse, low 

*bel, beau, belle, fine 

So ; bon, good ; chretien, christian ; criminel, criminal ; 
cruel, cruel ; epais, thick ; itemed, eternal; expres, express; 
*fol or fou, foolish ; gentil, genteel ; gras, fat; gros, large ; 
italien, Italian ; las, tired ; mignon, darling ; *mol or mou, 
soft; mortel, mortal ; moyen, middling ; ;wwe£, dumb ; mutuel, 
mutual ; net, clean ; *nouvel or nouveau, new ; paien, pagan ; 
pareil, equal ; perpetuel, perpetual ; reel, real ; sot, foolish ; 
sabsiantiel, substantial ; vermeil, vermillion ; *vieil or vieux, 
old. 

2. Adjectives ending ln/"ehange the/into xJc; as, 
Masculine. Feminine. 

actif, active, active 

attentif, attentive, attentive 

bref, breve, short 

So ; captif, captive ; chetif, mean ; craintif, fearful ; naif, 
simple ; neuf, new ; oisif, idle ; pensif, pensive ; vif quick. 

3. Adjectives in eux, change x into se ; as, 

Masculine. Feminine, 

curieux, curieuse, curious 

dangereux, dangereuse, dangerous 

delicieux, delicieuse, delicious 

So ; facheux, grievous ; genereux, generous ; glorieux, glo- 
rious ; gracieux, graceful ; heureux, happy ; honteux, shame- 
ful ; judicieux, judicious; paresseux, idle; studieux, studious; 
vertueux, virtuous; vicieux, vicious. 

4. Some substantival adjectives, meur, change r into se, eur 
into rice, and also some change ur into resse ; as, 



*2. Bel,fol, mol, nouvel, vieil, are put before a masculine noun begin- 
ning with a vowel -, and beau, fou, mou, nouveau, vieux, before a noun 
beginning with a consonant. But the masculines plural are formed from 
the latter ; as, beaux, foux, moux, nouveaux, vieux ; and the feminines 
singular and plural are formed from the former ; as, singular, belle, folle, 
&c. ; plural, belles, folles, &c. 



26 GENDER OF ADJECTIVES. 

Masculine. Feminine, 

chanteur, singer chanteuse, singer 

actcur, actor actrice, actress 

administrates, administrator administratrices administratrix 

enchanteur, enchanter enchanteresse, enchantress 

So form ; 1st. Inse; as, danceur, dancer ; parleur, talka- 
tive or talker ; trompeur, deceitful or deceiver. 

2nd. In rice ; as, accusateur, accuser ; ambassadeur, am- 
bassador; bienfaitcur, benefactor; consolateuri comforter; 
debiteur, debtor; directeur, director; ex&cv.teur, executor ; 
inventeur, inventor; lecteur, reader; persScufeur, persecutor; 
protecteur, protector ; testateur, testator ; tuteur, guardian, &c. 

3rd. In resse ; as, defendeur, defendant ; demandeur, plain- 
tiff; pecheur, sinner ; vengeur, avenger. 

Obs. Auteur, author ; amateur, virtuoso ; orateur, orator, are masculine 
and feminine. Gouverneur, governor, makes gouvernante, governess : and 
empereur, emperor, makes imperatrice, empress. 

5. These adjectives change c into que : as, 

Masculine. Feminine, 

caduc, caduquc, decayed 

public, publique, public 

Turc, Turque, Turkish ; but 

Grec makes Grecque, Greek 

6. The three following are made feminine by adding he to 
the masculine ; as, 

Masculine. Feminine. 

blanc, blanche, white 

So ; franc, free ; sec, dry. 

7. The following adjectives are quite irregular. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

absous, absoute, absolved 

benin, benigne, benign 

doux, douce, sweet 

dissous, dissoute, dissolved 

faux, fausse, false 

favori, favorite, favorite 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 



27 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


frais, 


fraiche, fresh or cool 


jaloux, 


j alouse, jealous 


long. 


long ae, long 


malin, 


maligne, malignant 


roux, 


rousse, red or reddish 


tiers, 


tierce, a third 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

The comparative is formed by adding^?/ws, and the super- 
lative by adding le plus or la plus, to the positive or simple 
state : as, 



Positive, 
riche, m. or f. rich 



Comparative, 
plus grand ) t 
plusgrande ) » reatei 
plus riche, richer 



beau, m. ^ 
bel,va. > 
Z>eZZe, f. ) 
frugal, m. 
frugale, f. 
Jong", m. 
longue, f. 



fine 



finer 



frugal 



| long 



/>Zms 6eZ V 
j>Zms belle ) 
^Zws frugal 
plus frugale 
plus long ? , 
jpZus longue ) 0D ^ r 



more 
frugal 



Superlative, 
le plus grand > the 
la plus grande $ greatest 
le or Za plus riche, the 

richest 
leplus beau ) 
Ze ^Zt«s &eZ > the finest 
la plus belle ) 
leplus frugal 7 the most 
laplus frugale S frugal 
leplus long > ]onp . est 
Za^Zus Zong-ue 5 Ion S est 



So form, Jiardi, m. bold ; hardie, f. bold ; doux, m. sweet; 
douce, f. sweet; blanc, ra. white ; blanche, f. white ; facile, m. 
or f. easy ; franc, m. sincere ; franche, f. sincere ; benit, m. 
holy ; benit e, f. holy. 



little moindre, less 



, , Ze meilleur, 

better , . 77 7 

Za meilleur c 



Superlative. 

the best 



The adjectives forc, good ; mauvais, bad ; and _pefc'f, little 
form their degrees irregularly ; as, 

Positive. Comparative, 

bon, m. P , meilleur, 

bonne, f. \ ° meilleure, 

petit, m. 
petite, f. 

mauvais, m. ) , , 

fluniM./e, f. ^ bad ^ rg > worse 

06s. 1. The comparative and superlative of ^eZi'Z or petite, and maw- 
oais or maucaise, may be formed by plus and Ze or laplus ; as, plus pc- 



le moindre 
la moindre 



;},„ 



e least 



*?>"> I the worst 

lapire, $ 



28 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



tit or petite, less ; le plus petit or la plus petite, the least ; plus mauvais 
or mauvaise, worse ; le plus mouvais or la plus mauvaise, the worst. 

2. Pronouns have the same effect as articles in making the superlative 
degree ; as, mon meilleur ami, my best friend ; which is equal to le meil- 
leur de mes amis, the best of my friends. 



The adverbial particles bien, mal, peu, bientot, beaucoup 
form their degrees of comparison irregularly ; as, 

Positive. Comparative, 

bien, well mieux, better 

mal-, ill pis or plus mal, 

worse 

peu, little moms , less 

bientot or tot, soon plutot, sooner 

beaucoup, much plus or davantage, 



Superlative, 
le mieux, the best 
le pis or le plus mal, 

the worst 
le moins, the least 
le plutot, the soonest 
le plus, the most 



The comparison of most adverbial particles is made by 
plus and le plus ; as, sagement, wisely; plus sagement, more 
wisely; le plus sagement, most wisely, &c. 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

In the following practice, the articles, nouns, and adjec- 
tives must agree in gender and number ; as, le bon homme, the 
good man ; la bonne femme, the good woman ; les bons horn- 
mes, the good men ; les bonnes femmes, the good women, &c. 

Obs. That de (not des) is used in all the states before an adjective for 
the partitive article, winch, before a vowel or h mute, becomes d' ; as, de 
bon pain, good bread ; d'habiles gens, clever people. 



1. Nouns of either gender, with adjectives and the definite 
article, are thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Lejeunegargon^ the young Lesjeunes ga?*pans, the young 

lad lads 

G. du jeune gargon, of the des jeunes gargons, of the 

young lad young lads 

D. au jeune gargon, to the aux jeunes garcons, to the 

young lad young lads 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 29 

Singular. Plural 

N. La jeune jille, the young Les jeunes Jilles, the young 

girl girls 

G. de la jeune file, of the des jeunes Jilles, of the young 

young girl girls 

D. a la jeune Jille, to the aux jeunes jilles, to the young 

young girl girls 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Uhonnete homme, the hon- Les honnetes hommes, the hon- 
est man est men 

G. de Vhonnete homme, of the des honnetes hommes, of the 

honest man honest men 

D. d Vhonnete homme, to the aux honnetes hommes, to the 

honest man honest men 

So ; lejoli oiseau,ihe pretty bird; la jolie cage, the pretty 
cage ; Vheureux moment, the happy moment ; Vheureuse occa- 
sion, the happy opportunity. 

2. Nouns of either gender, with the adjective and the in- 
definite and partitive articles, are thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Un bon liure, a good book De bons livres, good books 

G. d'un bon livre, of a good de bons livres, of good books 

book 

D. d un bon livre, to a good d de bons livres, to good books 

book 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Une bonne plume, a good De bonnes plumes, good pens 

pen 

G. dhine bonne plume, of a de bonnes plumes, of good pens 

good pen 

D. d une bonne plume, to a d de bonnes plumes, to good 

good pen pens 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Un habile homme, a clever D'habiles hommes, clever men 

man 

G. d'un habile homme, of a d'habiles hommes, of clever 

clever man men 

D. d un habile homme, to a d d'habiles hommes, to clever 

clever man men 



30 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



Singula?'. 
N. Une habile femme, a clever 

woman 
G. d'une habile femme, of a 

clever woman 
D. d une habile femme, to a 

clever woman 



Plural. 
D'habiles femmes, clever 

women 
dliabiles femmes, of clever 

women 
d dViabiles femmes, to clever 

women 



But when nouns are followed by adjectives, they are thus 
eclined : 

Plural. 
Des habits rouges, red coats 
d 1 habits rouges, of red coats 

d des habits rouges, to red 
coats 

Plural. 
Des maisons blanches, white 

houses 
de maisons blanches, of white 

houses 
d des maisons blanches, to 

white houses 



Singular. 
N* Un habit rouge, a red coat 
G. d r un habit rouge, of a red 

coat 
D. d un habit rouge, to a red 

coat 

Singular. 
N. Une maison blanche, a white 

house 
G. d'une maison blanche, of a 

white house 
D. d une maison blanche, to a 

white house. 



So; un petit enfant, a little child ; une petite maison, a 
small house ; un heureux moment, a happy moment ; une heu- 
reuse occasion, a happy opportunity ; unhomme actif, an active 
man ; un corps mou, a soft body ; une table ronde, a round 
table. 

3. Nouns of either gender, with adjectives having a double 
masculine, are thus declined : 



Singular. 
N. Un beau paysage, a fine 

landscape 
G. d^un beau paysage, of a 

fine landscape 
D. d un beau paysage, to a 

fine landscape 

Singular. 
N. Un bcl enfant, a fine child 
G. ri'im bel enfant, of a fine 

child 
D. d un bel enfant, to a fine 

child 



Plural. 

De beaux pay sages, fine land- 
scapes 

de beaux pay sages, of fine 
landscapes 

d de beaux pay sages, to fine 
landscapes 
Plural. 

De beaux enfans, fine children 

de beaux enfans, of fine chil- 
dren 

d de beaux enfans, to fine 
children 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. SI 

« /lar. Plural. 

N. Un bdhumme, a fine man De beaux hommes, fine men 

G. d'un bel homme, of a fine de beaux homines, of fine men 

man 

D. d un be! homme, to a fine a de beaux hommes, to fine 

man men 

Singular. Plural. 

It. L'ne belle femme, a fine De belles femmes, fine women 

woman 

G. d* une belle fcmme, of a. fine de belles femmes, of fine 

woman women 

D. d une belle femme, to a fine d de belles femmes, to fine 

woman women 

So ; un nouveau livre, a new book ; un nouvel acteur, a new 
actor : une nouvelle mode, a new fashion ; un vieil habit, an old 
coat ; un bel ceil, a fine eye. 

4. Nouns with adjectives, in the comparative degree, are 
thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Un plus joli enfant, a pret- De plus jolts erf cms, prettier 

tier child children 

G. d'un plus joli enfant, of a deplusjolis enfans, of prettier 

prettier child children 

D. d km plus joli enfant, to a d deplusjolis enfans, to pret- 

prettier child tier children 

Singular. Plural. 

y. Une plus belle femme, a De plus belles femmes, finer 

finer woman women 

G. d'une plus belle femme, of a de plus belles femmes, of finer 

finer woman women 

D. d une plus belle femme, to a d de plus belles femmes, to 

finer woman finer women 

Singular. Plural. 

N. In homme plus actif, a Des hommes plus actifs, more 

more active man active men 

G. cTun homme plus actif of a d' homines plus actifs, of more 

more active man active men 

D. d un homme plus actif, to a d des hommes plus actifs, to 

more active man more active men 



32 



DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES- 



Singular. 
N. Une cJwse plus certaine, a 

more certain thing 
G. d'une chose plus certaine, 

of a more certain thing 
D. a une chose plus certaine, 

to a more certain thing 



Plural. 
Des choses plus certaines, more 

certain things 
de choses plus certaines, of 

more certain things 
a des choses plus certaines, to 

more certain things 



So ; une plus belle maison, a finer house ; un plus bel ceil, a 
finer eye ; une plus habile femme, a cleverer woman ; un ami 
plus f dele, a more faithful friend; une voix plus harmonieuse, 
a more harmonious voice. 



5. Nouns with adjectives, in the superlative degree 3 are 
thus declined : 



Singular. 
N. Le plus bel homme, the 

finest man 
G. du plus bel homme, of the 

finest man 
D. au plus bel homme, to the 

finest man 



Plural. 
Les plus beaux hommes, the 

finest men 
des plus beaux hommes, of the 

finest men 
aux plus beaux hommes, to the 

finest men 



Singular. 
N. La plus belle femme, the 

finest woman 
G. de la plus belle femme, of 

the finest woman 
D. d la plus belle femme, to 

the finest woman 



Plural. 
Les plus belles femmes, the 

finest women 
eds plus belles femmes, of the 

finest women 
aux plus belles femmes, to the 

finest women 



Singular. 
N. TJhomme le plus grand, the 

greatest man 
G. de Vhomme le plus grand, 

of the greatest man 
D. a Vhomme le plus grand, 

to the greatest man 



Plural. 
Les hommes les plus grands, 

the greatest men 
des hommes les plus grands, of 

the greatest men 
aux hommes les plus grands, 

to the greatest men 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



33 



Singular. 

N. La pomme la plus douce, 

the sweetest apple 
G. de la pomme la plus douce, 

of the sweetest apple 
D. a la pomme la plus douce, 

to the sweetest apple 



Plural. 
Les pommes les plus douces, the 

sweetest apples 
des pommes les plus douces, of 

the sweetest apples 
aux pommes les plus douces, to 

the sweetest apples 



So ; la plus habile femme, the cleverest woman ; la plus belle 
maison, the finest house ; le plus bel ceil, the finest eye ; le bas 
le plus blanc, the whitest stocking ; Vherbe la plus am&re, the 
bitterest herb. 



RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE. 



Good children 
honest men 
to honest men 
of honest women 
to the best master 
to the best mistress 
to the most foolish hope 
the greatest treasure 
a young horse 
young horses 
to young horses 
younger mares 
of younger mares 
to the oldest castle 
to the oldest castles 
of the finest castle 
great events 
prettier birds 
the prettiest birds 



the prettiest child 

to the youngest child 

the new world 

of a new hat 

the finest tree 

finer towns 

to finer towns 

the finest trees 

fine trees 

the best possession 

a great undertaking 

great undertakings 

the greatest undertaking 

the most delightful situation 

great buildings • 

greater revolutions 

a sweet almond 

sweet almonds 

the sweetest oranges 



Child, enfant, m. 
honest, honnele (h mute) 
man, homme, m. 
woraan,/e«we, f. 
best, meilleur 



master, maitre, m. 
mistress, maitressc, f. 
foolish, fol 
hope, espoir, m. 
great, grand 



34 PRACTICE ON THE ADJECTIVES. 

treasure, tresor, m. hat, chapeau, m. 

young, jeune tree, arbre, m. 

horse, cheval, ra. town, villc, f. 

mare, jument, f. possession, jouissance, f. 

castle, chateau, m. undertaking, entreprise, f. 

event, evinement, m. delightful, agrtable 

pretty, Jafr, situation, situation, f. 

bird, oiseau, m. building, edifice, m. 

new, nouveau revolution, revolution, f. 

world, monde, m, almond, amanctS, f. 

new, wcm/" orange, orange, f. 



RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVES, TO BE 
TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH. 

FIRST LESSON. 

Un homme vertueux. Une femme vertueuse. Le bon 
prince. Les bons princes. La bonne princesse. Les bon- 
nes princesses. Une femme aimable. Des enfans aimables. 
Le frere aine. La soeur ainee. Les freres aines. Les 
sceurs ainees. Un homme grand.* Un grand* homme. La 
vie humaine. Le bien public. Un agneau blanc. Un beau 
cheval. De beaux chevaux. Un Fran9ais poli et savant. 
Une Francaise polie et savante. Des Franc,ais polis et sa- 
vans. Des Franchises polies et savantes. Un bel homme. 
De beaux homines. A un Anglais aimable et genereux. 
D'une Anglaise aimable et genereuse. Deux Anglais aima- 
bles et genereux. Deux Anglaises aimables et genereuses. 
Un habit noir. Des habits noirs. Une veste blanche. L'his- 
toire ancienne. Un livre ancien. Un auteur favori. Une 
chanson favorite. De plus beaux hommes. De plus belles 
femmes. De bons livres. De bonnes plumes. La plus belle 
ville. L'homme le plus agreable. Aux plus beaux palais. 
Les gouffres les plus dangereux. Aux plus beaux pays. Des 
plus habiles gens. Des plus habiles femmes. De meilleurs 
amis. La moindre esperance. 

* Obs. Adjectives sometimes precede and sometimes follow the noun. — 
{Syntax of Adjectives.) 



PRACTICE ON THE ADJECTIVES. 



35 



aine, eldest 

grand, tall 

grand, great (celebrated) 

bien, m. good 

agneau, m. lamb 

noir, black 

blanc, white 



veste, f. waistcoat 
ancien, ancient, or old 
auteur, m. author 
gouffre, m. gulf 
pays, m. country 
gens, people 
esperance, hope 



SECOND LESSON. 



Un horn me brave et genereux ne combat jamais pour une 
cause injuste. Les gens pauvres et miserables sont souvent 
plus charitables que les riches. Un enfant doux, aimable et 
docile est aime de tout le monde. La vue d'un agreable pay- 
sage est une source variee et rapide de sensations delicieuses. 
La vie humaiiie n'est jamais exempte d'inquietudes. Le bien 
public est preferable a l'interet particulier. Un pere vertueux 
et une mere vertueuse n'ont pas toujours des enfans vertueux. 
Homere etait peut-etre un plus grand genie que Virgile ; 
mais Virgile avait un gout plus delicat et plus raffine. L ? u- 
sage frequent des finesses est toujours l'effet d'une grande 
incapacite, et la marque d'un petit esprit. 



Brave, brave 

ne combat jamais, never fights 

pour, for ; gens, people 

sont, are ; souvent, often 

que, than 

doux, mild, or gentle 

docile, docile 

aime, loved ; de, by 

tout le monde, every body 

vue, sight 

agreable, pleasant 

paysage, landscape 

varie, varied 

delicieuse, delightful 

n^est jamais, is never 



exempte de, free from 

inquietude, trouble 

bien, ^good 

particulier, private 

n'ont pas, have not 

toujours, always 

Homere, Homer ; etait, was 

peut-etre, perhaps 

genie, genius ; que, than 

mais, but ; avait, had 

raffine, refined 

gout, taste 

finesse, artifice 

petit, narrow 

esprit, mind 



36 EXAMINATION ON THE ADJECTIVES. 



THIRD LESSON. 

Thales ditque de tous les 6tres, Dieu est le premier, comme 
etant Createur de toutes choses ; et que de toutes les 
choses qu'il a creees, la plus belle est le monde, la plus forte 
est la necessite, la plusgrande est l'espace, la plus sage est le 
terns, la plus prorapte est la pensee, la plus commune est 
Pesperance. 

La grandeur d'ame consiste dans la fermete, la droiture et 
l'elevation des sentimens ; ajoutez y un esprit vaste, lumi- 
neux et profond, vcus aurez un grand homme. L'amour- 
propre est le plus grand de tous les flatteurs. La bonne 
grace est au corps ce que le bon sens est a l'espril. La grande 
sagesse de l'homme consiste a connaltre ses folies. 

Thales, Thales ; dit, said droiture, uprightness 

que, that ; tous, all ajoutez y, add to them 

les etres, beings ; est, is esprit, understanding 

forte, strong ; Pespace, space vous aurez, you will have 

sage, wise ; terns, time amour-propre, self-love 

prompte, quick jlatteur, flatterer 

pensee, thought la bonne grace, elegance 

Pesperance, hope ce que, what ; sens, sense 

grandeur, greatness sagesse, wisdom 

dans, in ; fermetb, firmness a connaitre, in knowing 



EXAMINATION ON THE ADJECTIVES. 

Are the rules for forming the plural of nouns applicable to 
the adjectives ? What is the plural of heureux, vigoureux, 
royal, constant ? What letter do vaste and veritable take for 
the plural ? Is vrais singular or plural ? What number is 
utiles? Arc adjectives in e mute the same in the masculine 
and feminine ? How do other adjectives form their feminine ? 
Do any adjectives double the last letter for the feminine ? 
What else is added ? Form the feminine of temportl, virtuel, 
universel, gros, and ancien. What is the general ending of 
the feminine? How is the feminine of adjectives in eux 
formed ? Give me the feminine of courageux, vertueux, pares- 



NUMERALS. 



37 



seux. Are all adjectives in x formed in this manner ? In 
what respect do they differ ? What is the feminine of douz ? 
How are adjectives inland c formed? What are actif,por- 
tatif, grcc, blanc, changed into for the feminine ? How do 
substantival adjectives in eurform their feminine? Are there 
no exceptions ? 



CHAPTER IV. 



Numerals are divided into cardinal and ordinal. 



CARDINAL NUMBERS. 



Un, m. ime, f. one 

deux, two 

trots, three 

quatre, four 

cinq, five 

six , six 

sept, seven 

huit, eight 

ncuf, nine 

dix 9 ten 

onze, eleven 

douzc* twelve 

treize, thirteen 

quatorze, fourteen 

quinze, fifteen 

seize, sixteen 

dix-scpt, seventeen 

diz-huit, eighteen 

dix-neuf, nineteen 

vingt, twenty 

vingt et un, twenty-one 

"ingt-deux, twenty -two 

lingt-tmis, twenty-three 

vingt-quatre, twenty-four, &c. 

trente, thirty 

4 



trente et un, thirty one 

trente-deux, thirty-two, &c. 

quarante, forty 

quarante et un, forty one 

quarante-deux, forty-two, &c. 

cinquante, fifty 

cinquante et un, fifty-one 

cinquante-deux, fifty-two, &c. 

soixante, sixty 

soixante et un, sixty-one 

soixante-ckux, sixty-two, &c. 

soixante-dix, seventy 

soixante et onze, seventy-one 
soixante-douze, seventy-two 
soixante-treize, seventy-three 
soixante-quatorze, seventy -four 
soixante-quinze, seventy-five 
soixante-seize, seventy-six 
soixante-dix-sept,se\enty-seven 
soixante-dix-huit, seventy-eight 
soixante-dix-neuf, seventy-nine 
quatre-vingt, eighty 
quatre-vingt-un, eighty-one 
quatre-vingt-deux, eighty-two, 
&c. 



S3 



NUMERALS. 



quatrc-vingt-dix, ninety 
quatre-vingt onze, ninety-one, 

&c. 
cent, a hundred 
cent-un, a hundred and one 
cent-deux, a hundred and two 
cent-trois, a hundred and three, 

&c. 
deux cens, or deux cent, two 

hundred 
trois cens or cent, three hun- 
dred 



deux cent un, two hundred and 

one 
deux cent deux, two hundred 

and two, &c. 
cinq cens, five hundred 
mille, a thousand 
deux mille, two thousand 
un million, a million 
deux millions, two millions 
dix jnillions, ten millions 
un milliard, a thousand mil- 
lions. 



ADVERBIALLY. 



Unefois, once 
deuxfois, twice 



trois fois, thrice or three times 
quatre-fois, four times, &c. 



ORDINAL NUMBERS. 



Le, la, the 
Le premier, m. | fi 



Le, la, the 

quatrihme, fourth 

la premiere, f. / " cinquieme, fifth 

/e second, m. ) , sixieme, sixth 

7 7 r > second ,.v ., 

la seconde, I. ^ septieme, seventh 

fe or to troisieme, m. or f. third huitieme, eighth 



Obs. 1. Vingt and cen£, when immediately followed by a substantive, 
take an s in the plural ; as, quatre-vingts ans, eighty years ; cent vingts 
hommes, a hundred and twenty men ; deux cens hommes, two hundred 
men. But when vingt or cent is followed by another numeral, s is omitted ; 
as, quatre-vingt-dix livres, ninety pounds ; trois cent vingt six aoldats, 
three hundred and twenty-six soldiers. Mille, a thousand, takes no s, in 
the plural ; as, deux mille guinees, two thousand guineas. Mille becomes 
mil in denoting the Christian aera ; as, in the year 1826, Van mil huit 
cent vingt-six. ~ Mille, mile, takes s in the plural ; as, quatre milles, four 
miles. 

2. When two or more numbers are used together, the conjunction et is 
not put between them ; as, cent-quatre, cent-vingt, not cent et quatre, 
cent et vingt. But the French say and write vingt et un, trente et un, &c. 

3. In speaking of time, the French say huit jours, a week (not une se- 
maine); quinze jours, a fortnight (not quatorze nuits); trois mois, three 
months ; six mois, six months ; neufmois, nine months ; not un quartier, 
a quarter ; un demi-an, half a year ; trois quartiers d'un an, three quar- 
ters of a year. 



NUMERALS. 



39 



Le, la, the Le, la, the 

neuvieme, ninth vingt-troisibne, twenty-third, 

dixieme, tenth &c. 

onzieme, eleventh trentieme, thirtieth 

douziemc, twelfth quarantieme, fortieth 

treizieme, thirteenth cinqaantieme, fiftieth 

quatorzieme, fourteenth soixantieme, sixtieth 

quinzieme, fifteenth soixante et dixieme, seventieth 

seizieme, sixteenth quatre-vingtibne, eightieth 

dix septieme, seventeenth quatre-vingt dixieme, ninetieth 

dix huitieme, eighteenth ceniieme, a hundredth 

dix-neuvieme, nineteenth cent-cinquantihne, a hundred 

vingtihne, twentieth and fiftieth 

vingt et wiieme, twenty-first deux-centieme, two hundredth 

vingt-deuxieme, twenty-second millieme, a thousandth 

dcux-millihne, two thousandth 

N. B. The ordinal numbers, from triosihne, to millieme, are either 
masculine or feminine, according to the gender of the noun which follows ; 
as, le troisi&mejour, the third day ; la troisieme maison, the third house, 
&c. 

ADVERBIALLY, 

Premiercment, firstly troisiememcnt, thirdly 

secondement, secondly quatriemement, fourthly, &c. 



Obs. 1. The ordinal numbers admit of an s for the plural ; as, deux cin- 
quiemes, two fifths. 

2. The cardinal, instead of the ordinal, numbers are used in French in 
mentioning the days of the month ; as, le deux, le trois, le vingt, le vingt 
et un de Janvier, &c. the second, third, twentieth, twenty-first of January, 
&c. ; except le premier de Janvier, &c. (never say Vun de Janvier) the 
first of January, &c. 

3. Also, in speaking of princes ; as, Henri trois, quatre, six, sept, &c. 
Henry the thi:d, fourth, sixth, seventh, &c. ; Louis quinze, Lewis the fif- 
teenth ; George quatre, George the fourth ; Charles dix, Charles the 
tenth, &c. ; except premier and second ; as, Henri premier, Henry the 
first; George second, George the second. 



40 NUMERALS. 

EXERCISES ON THE NUMERALS TO BE TRANSLATED INTO 
ENGLISH. 

FIRST LESSON. 

George quatre, roi d'Angleterre, est ne le 12 Aolit mi! 
sept cent soixante deux ; il fut couronne le dix-neuf Juillet, 
dix-huit cent vingt et un. Auguste Frederic d ? Angleterre ? 
due de Sussex, est un prince tres savant ; il est ne le 27 Jan- 
vier 1773- Henri quatre, roi de France, fut un excellent 
prince ; il mourut en 1610. L'Amerique fut decouverte par 
Christophe Colomb, Pan 1492. La poudre k canon fut in- 
vented k Cologne, par un moine, nomme Berthold Schwartz, 
l'an 1382. La boussole fut inventee par Jean Gola, Napoli- 
tain, Pan 1303. Pierre Helle, k Nuremberg, inventa les 
montres en 1490, et Messieurs Montgolfiers inventerent les 
ballons aerostatiques en 1783. La population de Londres, 
en 1821, etait de 1,274,800 habitans. La population de Paris 
en 1817, etait de 717,212 habitans. 

Monsieur B a vendu sa maison de campagne deux 

mille cinq cent cinquante livres sterlings. II les tuait par 
centaines, par milliers k la fois. II y avait trois mille fantas- 
sins et six cens cavaliers. Voici deux douzaines de tres-belles 
pdches. On fit dans la paroisse une qu£te qui produisit cent 
vingt et une guinees. 

Est ne, was born inventerent, invented 

Jiout, August un ballon a'erostatique, an air 
fut couronne, was crowned balloon ; etait, was 

tres, very ; savant, learned a vendu, has sold 

fut, was ; mourut, died maison de campagne, country 
par, by ; Christophe Colomb, house (for) 

Christopher Columbus il les tuait, he killed them 

poudre d canon, gunpowder a la fois, at a time 

moine, monk il y avait, there were 

boussole, mariner's compass fantassin, foot-soldier 

Napolitain, Neapolitan cavalier, cavalry 

Pierre, Peter on ft, they made 

Nuremberg, Nuremburg quete, collection ; dans, in 

inventa, invented paroisse, parish 

montre, watch quiproduisit, which produced 



NUMERALS. 41 



SECOND LESSON. 

Un curieux a remarque, qu'en additionnant les chiffres de 
Pannee de naissance ou de deces des plus grands ou des 
meilleurs des rois de France de la troisieme race, on trouvait 
les mernes nombres que ceux qui distinguent leurs noms ; 
ainsi : 

Saint Louis (Louis IX) est ne en 1215 ; additionez les 
quatre chiffres de cette date, et vous aurez 9- 

Charles VII. dit le sage, est ne en 1402 ; cette date 
donne 7- 

Louis XII. le pere du peuple, est ne en 1461, dont la 
somme est 12. 

Henri IV. est mort en 1610, ou Pon trouve deux fois!4. 

Louis XIV. a ete Roi de France en 1643, qui presente 14 ; 
il est mort en 1715, qui donne egaleraent 14 ; il etait age de 
77 ans, encore 14. 

Enfin S. jM. Louis XVIII. est ne en 1755, dont le total est 
bien 18. — Amusemens Philologiques. 

Curieux, virtuoso leurs, their ; ainsi, thus 

a remarque, has observed est ne, was born ; en, in 

qu* (for que), that ; en, by aurez, will have 

chiffre, cipher, or figure dit le sage, called the wise 

annee, year dont, whose 

de, of the est mort, died 

naissance, birth oil Von trouve, in which there 

ou, or ; dices, decease are 

des rois de France, of the deux fois, twice ; a ete, was 

French kings egalement, also 

de la troisieme race, of the enfin, finally 

Bourbon family S. M. (for Sa Mqjeste), his 
on trouvait, there is found majesty 

que, as ; ceux]qui, those which dont, whose, or of which 

distinguent, distinguish bien, just, or exactly 

4* 



42 



PRONOUNS. 

CHAPTER V. 



The pronouns are divided into personal, possessive, de- 
monstrative, relative, interrogative, and indefinite. 

PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

The personal pronouns are divided into three persons ; the 
first person is je, I ; plur. nous, we ; second person, tu, thou ; 
plur. vous, you ; the third person masculine, il, he, or it ; 
feminine elle, she, or it ; plur. masculine, Us, feminine dies, 
they; and the indeterminate pronoun on, one, we, people, 
&c. They are declined in four cases, as follows : 



FIRST PERSON. 



Singular. 
N. Je, I 

G. de moi, of me 
D. me, d moi, to me 
A. me, me 



Singular. 
N. Tu, thou 
G. de toi, of thee 
D. te, d toi, to thee 
A. te, thee 



Plural. 

Nous, we 
de nous, of us 
nous, d nous, to us 
nous, us 



SECOND PERSON. 



Plural. 
Vous, you 
de vous, of you 
vous, d vous, to you 
vous, you 



THIRD PERSON, USED WITH REFERENCE TO PERSONS. 

Masculine. 
Singular. 

N. II. he 
G. de lux, of him 
D. lux, d lux, to him 
A. /e, ou V* him 



Plural, 
lis, they 
oVeux, of them 
leur, a eux, to them 
les, them 



* Obs. V before a verb beginning with a vowel may be translated, him, 
her, or it, depending upon who or what is referred to ; thus, je Z'aime, may 
mean, I love him, I love her, or I love it. Therefore, when a sentence of 
this kind occurs, be sure, before you translate it, to make yourself acquaint- 
ed with the subject to which the V relates. 



PRONOUNS. 43 

Feminine. 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Elle, she Elks, they 

G. d'elle, of her d'elles, of them 

D. lui, a elk, to her leur, a elles, to them 

A. la, V, her les, them 

WITH REFERENCE TO ANIMALS AND THINGS. 

' Singular, Plural. 

N. II; elle, it lis, elles, they 

G. en, of it en, of them 

D. y, lui, to it y, leur, to them 

A. le, la, l\ it les, them 



THE INDETERMINATE PRONOUN OU. 

N. O/i, one, we, they, people, &c. 

G. de soi, of one's self, ourselves, himself, herself, &c. 

D. se, a soi, to one's self, himself, ourselves, themselves, &c, 

A. se, one's self, himself, herself, themselves, &c. 

To moi, toi, lui, &c. is added menu, as follows : 

Singular. Plural. § 

Moi-meme, myself Nous-memes, ourselves 

toi-meme, thyself -vous-memes, yourselves 



lui-meme, himself eux-memes 

elle-meme, herself elles-memes 

soi-meme, one's self, &c 



is. ) 



themselves 



These are likewise declinable with de and d ; as de moi- 
meme, of myself; d moi-meme, to myself, &c. 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

Possessive pronouns are either conjunctive or relative. 

CONJUNCTIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

The conjunctive possessive pronouns are mon, my ; ton, 
thy ; son, his, her, and its ; notre, our ; voire, your ; and leur, 
their ; which vary for the gender and number, as follows : 



44 







PRONOUNS. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Masc. and Fern, 


Mon, 


ma, 


mes, my 


ton, 


ta, 


tes, thy 


son, 


sa, 


ses, his, her, its 


notre, 


notre, 


nos, our 


voire, 


votre, 


vos, your 


leur, 


leur, 


leurs, their 



The preceding pronouns are always placed before nouns, 
with which they must agree in gender and number ; but mon, 
ton, son, are put instead of ma, ta, sa, before a feminine noun 
beginning with a vowel or h mute. They are declined as 

follows : 

Mon, with the masculine noun livre is thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Mon livre, my book Mes livres, my books 

G. de mon livre, of my book de mes livres, of my books 

D. d mon livre, to my book d mes livres, to my books 

Ma with the feminine noun table, is thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Ma table, my table Mes tables, my tables 

G. de ma table, of my table de mes tables, of my tables 

D. d ma table, to my table d mes tables, to my tables 

Mon before the feminine noun amie, beginning with a vowel 
is thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Mon amie, my friend Mes amies, my friends 

G. de mon amie, of my friend de mes amies, of my friends 

D. d mon amie, to my friend a mes amies, to my friends 

Mon before the feminine noun horlogt, beginning with h 
mute, is thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N, Mon horloge, my clock Mes horloges, my clocks 

G. de mon horloge, of my clock de mes horloges, of my clocks 

D. d mon horloge, to my clock d mes horloges, to my clocks 



PRONOUNS. 



45 



Voire, with a masculine or feminine noun is thus declined : 

Masculine. 
Singular. Plural. 

N. Voire plat, your dish Vos plats, your dishes 

G. de voire plat, of your dish de vos plats, of your dishes 
D. a votre plat, to your dish d vos plats, to your dishes 

Feminine. 
Singular. Plural. 

N. Votre assiette, your plate Vos assiettes, your plates 
G. de votre assiette, of your de vos assiettes, of your plates 

plate 
D. a voire assiette, to your a vos assiettes } to your plates 
plate 

So decline mon cheval, m. my horse ; sow cliapeau, m. her 
hat ; votre jils, m. your son ; ma plume, f. my pen; ma Jille, 
f. my daughter ; sa table, f. his table ; son action, f. his ac- 
tion ; mon oiseau, m. my bird. 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS RELATIVE. 

The possessive pronouns relative are, le mien, mine; le 
tien, thine ; le sien, his, hers, its; le noire, ours; le votre, 
yours ; le leur, theirs, which vary for the gender and number, 
as follows : 



Singular. 



Plural. 



Masc. 


Fern. 


Masc, Fern. 


Le mien, 


La mienne, 


Les miens, Les miennes, mine 


le tien, 


la tienne, 


les tiens, les tiennes, thine 


le sien, 


la sienne, 


les siens, les siennes, his, hers, its 


le noire, 


la noire, 


les notres, les notres, ours 


le votre, 


la votre, 


les votres, les v6tres, yours 


le leur, 


la leur, 


les leurs, les leurs, theirs 


These 


pronouns are i 


thus declined : 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Masc. Fern. 


N. Le mien, La mienne, 


, Les miens. Les miennes, mine 


G. du mien, de la mienne, des miens, des miennes, of mine 


D. au mien, d la mienne, aux miens, aux miennes, to mine 



So decline le tien, le sien, &c. 



46 PRONOUNS. 

These are called relative possessive pronouns, because 
they stand for some noun which precedes them, and with 
which they must agree in gender and number. They are de- 
clined, after the noun, as follows : 

The masculine noun, Hvre, book, with the conjunctive pos- 
sessive pronoun mon before, and the relative possessive pro- 
noun le sien, after, is thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Mon Hvre et le sien, my Mes Uvres et les siens, my 

book and his books and his 

G. de mon Hvre et du sien, of de mes Uvres et des siens, of my 

my book and his books and his 

D. d mon Hvre et au sien, to d mes Uvres et aux siens, to my 

my book and his books and his 

The feminine noun horloge, clock, with the pronoun ton 
before, and la sienne, after, is thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Ton horloge et la sienne^ Tes horloges et les siennes, thy 
thy clock and his clocks and his 

G. de ton horloge et de la de ies horloges et des siennes, 
sienne, of thy clock and his of thy clocks and his 

D. d ton horloge et a la sienne d tes horloges et aux siennes, to 
to thy clock and his thy clocks and his 

So decline mon pere et le votre, my father and yours ; voire 
chapeau et le mien, your hat and mine ; sa mere et la mienne, 
his mother and mine ; son horloge et la sienne, her clock and 
his ; mon oiseau et le sien, my bird and hers. 



EXERCISE. 

Votre livre et le mien. Votre lettre et la mienne. Ma 
montre et la sienne. Mon cheval et le v6tre. Ses souliers et 
les miens. Ses brebis et les miennes. De mon oiseau et du 
sien. De ma musique et de la sienne. A mon chien et au 
v6tre. A ma grammaire et & la tienne. De mes ardoises et 
des v6tres. De ses freres et des miens. A ses brebis et aux 
miennes. De mes cousins et des vOtres. A ma cousine et & 
la leur. Vos crayons et les n6tres. A nos bas et aux siens. 
Notre pays et le v6tre. De votre laquais et du nOtre. A 



PRONOUNS. 



47 



votre armee et a- la leur. De vos armies et des n6tres. Leur 
jardin et le tien. De leur maison et de la mienne, A leurs 
amis et aux n6tres. 



Montre, watch 
Soulier, shoe 
brebis, sheep 
musique, music 
chien, dog 



ardoise, slate 
cousin, cousin 
crayon, pencil 
laquais, footman 
armee, army 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

The demonstrative pronouns are ce (or cet before, a vowel 
or h mute) this or that ; celui, he ; celui-ci, this ; celui-ld, that ; 
ceci, this ; and cela, that. The four first admit of the fol- 
lowing changes : 

Singular. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

Ce,* or cet, this, or that Cette, this, or that 

celui, he, or that celle, she, or that 

celui-ci,i this celle-ci, this 

celui-ld, that celle~ld, that 



Plural. 



Masculine. 
CeSj these, or those 
ceuz, those 

ceux-ci, they, or these 
ceux-ld, they, or those 



Feminine. 
Ces, these, or those 
celles, they, or those 
celles-ci, they, or these 
celles-ld, they, or those 



The first is a pronoun adjective, and all the rest pronoun 
substantives ; they are declined with de and d, as follows : 



* Obs. 1. Ce is sometimes used before que, and corresponds to the Eng- 
lish that •which, or what ; as, ce que vous dites est vrai, that which, or 
what you say is true. 

f Ci means here, and la, there, so that the literal meaning of celui-ci, is, 
this here, and of celui-la, is, that there. 



48 PRONOUNS. 

1. Ce, before a masculine noun, is thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Ce livre, this or that book Ces livres, these or those books 

G. de ce livre, of this book de ces livres, of these books 

D. a ce livre, to this book a ces livres, to these books 

Ce before a noun, beginning with h mute, is thus declined : 
Singular. Plural. 

N. Cet homme, this man Ces hommes, these men 

G. de cet homme, of this man de ces hommes, of these men 
D. a cet homme, to this man d ces hommes, to these men 

Ce before a noun, beginning with a vowel, is thus declined : 
Singular. Plural. 

N. Cet oiseau, this bird Ces oiseaux, these birds 

G. de cet oiseau, of this bird de ces oiseaux, of these birds 
D. d cet oiseau, to this bird d ces oiseaux, to these birds 

Ce before a feminine noun is thus declined : 
Singular. Plural. 

N. Cette femme, this woman Ces femmes, these women 
G. de cette femme, of this wo- de ces femmes, of these women 

man 
D. a cette fernine, to this wo- a ces femmes, to these women 



man 



Singular. Plural. 



N. cette etoile, that star Ces itoiles, those stars 

G. de cette etoile, of that star de ces etoiles, of those stars 
D. a cette etoile, to that star d ces etoiles, to those stars 

So decline ce, &c. with the following nouns : mat, m. evil ; 
animal, m. animal ; honneur, m. honor ; table, f. table ; vie, f. 
life ; dme, f. soul. 

When we wish to point out any person, or thing, particu- 
larly, Id is put after the noun ; thus, 

Ce-ld with a masculine noun is thus declined : 



PRONOUNS. 49 

Singular. Plural 

N. Ce clieval-ld, that horse Ces chevaux-ld, those horses 

G. de ce clieval-ld, of that de ces chevaux-ld, of those 

horse horses 

D. a ce cheval-ld, to that d ces chevaux-ld, to those 

horse horses 

Ce-ld with a masculine noun, beginning with a vowel or h 
mute, is thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Cet homme-la, that man Ces hommes-ld, those men 

G. de cet homme-ld, of that de ces hommes-ld, of those 

man men 

D. a cet homme-ld, to that d ces hommes-ld, to those men 

man 

Ce-ld with a feminine noun is thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Cette eglise-ld, that church Ces eglises-ld, those churches 

G. de cette eglise-ld, of that de ces eglises-ld, of those 

church churches 

D. d cette eglise-ld, to that d ces eglises-ld, to those 

church churches 

So decline ce-ld with the following nouns : chien, m. dog*; 

hopital, m. (Ji mute) hospital ; maison, f. house ; etoile, f. star. 

2. The pronoun substantive celui is thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Celui, he Ceux, they, or those 

G. de celui, of him de ceux, of them or those 

D. d celui, to him a ceux, to them or those 

So decline celle, she, &c. 



06s. Cm, this ; and cela, that, are masculine, and have no plural. 
Ceci designates the object which is nearest to us, and cela the object 
which is most distant ; as, ceci est bon, mais cela est meilleur, this is good, 
but that is better. 



50 



PRONOUNS. 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

The relative pronouns are, qui, who ; lequel, which ; and 
quoi, what ; which are declined as follow : 

Qui, who, or which, relates to persons and things, and is 
of both genders and numbers. 

N. Qui, who, which, or that 

G. dont, whose, of whom, or of which, de qui, of or from 

whom 
D. d qui, to whom, or to which 
A. qui, que, whom, which, or that 

Lequel, which 



Singular. 


Plural 


Masc. Fern. 


Masc. Fern. 


N. Lequel, Laquelle, 
G. duquel de laquelle, 


Lesquels, Lesquelles, which 
desquels, desquelles or dont, 
of or from which 


D. auquel, d laquelle , 
A. lequel, laquelle, 


auxquels, auxquelles, to which 
lesquels, lesquelles, which 




Quoi, what 


N. Quoi, what ^ 




G. de quoi, of what ! 
D. & quoi, to what f 
A. quoi, what J 


for both numbers and genders 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

The interrogates are, lequel ? which ? qui? who ? que ? 
quoi? and quel? what? Lequel? is declined like the rela- 
tive lequel Qui ? que ? quoi ? are substantives ; quel ? a 
pronoun adjective. 

Qui ? who ? is thus declined : 



N. Qui ? or qui est-ce qui ? who ? 

G. dequi? whose, of or from whom ? 

D. d qui 



l 



-> I for both numbers 
? or a qui est-ce que ? to whom ? V and derg 

whose r ° 



A. qui ? or qui est-ce que ? whom ? 



PRONOUNS. 51 

Que ? quoi ? what ? are thus dec lined: 

N. Que ? quoi ? what ? "J 

. e quo % . i • j>f or both genders and numbers 

D. a quoi ? to what ? f to 

A. que? quoi? what? j 

Quel? what? before a masculine substantive is thus de- 
clined : 

Singular. Plural 

N. Quel homme ? what man ? Quels Jiommes ? what men ? 

G. de quel homme ? of what de quels hommes ? of what 

man ? men ? 

D. a quel homme ? to what a quels hommes ? to what 

man men ? 

A. quel homme? what man ? quels hommes? what men ? 

Quel? before a feminine noun is thus declined : 
Singula?'. Plural. 

N. Quelle plume ? what pen ? quelles plumes ? what pens ? 
G. de quelle plume ? of what de quelles plumes ? of what 
pen ? pens ? 



D. & quelle plume? to what a quelles plumes? to what 

pen ? pens ? 

A. quelle plume? what pen ? quelles plumes ? what pens ? 

So decline quel livre ? what book ? quel chapeau ? what 
hat? quelle femme? what woman 1 quelle table ? what table ? 



INDETERMINATE OR INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

1. Those which are used adjectively : 

Chaque, every, each quelconque, whatever 

quelque, some, any 

2. The following are sometimes used as substantives, and 
sometimes as adjectives: 

Aucun, no one, none, not one, Vun et Vautre, both 

not any Vun ou Vautre y either 

autre, other, any other ni Pun ni Vautre^ neither 



52 



PRONOUNS. 



le meme, the same 
nul, no, none, not one 
tel, such 



tout, all, every, every thing 
pas un, not one, no one 
plusieurs, several, many 



3. The following are used as pronoun substantives : 



Autrui, others 

chacun, each, every one, every 

body 
Pun Pautre, one another 
on, one, people, they, &c. 



personne, nobody, no one, 
none, any one, any body 
rien, nothing 
quelqiCun, some one 
quiconque, whoever, any body 



The following are changeable for the gender and number, 
except quelque and meme, which only change for the number. 



and chacun, 


pas un, aucun, 


and mil, only change for the 


gender. 






i 




Singular. 


Plural. 


Blase. 




Fern. 


Masc. Fenu 


Quelque 




Quelque, 


Quelques, Quelques 


vneme, 




meme, 


meines, memes 


quelqu'un 


i 


quelqu?une, 


quelques-uns, quelques-unes 


chacun } 




chacune, 


(no pi.) 


pas un. 




pas une, 




aucun, 




aucune, 


(no pi. except when used for 

quelques-uns) 


nul, 




nulle 9 


(no pi.) 


tout, 




toute, 


tons, toutes 


tel, 




telle, 


* tcls, telles 



The others are unchangeable. 

All these pronouns may be declined with the prepositions 
de and d, after the following models : 

Quelque with a substantive is thus declined : 
Singular. 
N. Quelque livre, some book 
G. de quelque livre, of some 

book 
D. d quelque livre, to some 
book 



Plural. 
Quelques livres, some books 
de quelques livres, of some 

books 
d quelques livres, to some books 



PRONOUNS. 53 

Tel with a masculine substantive is thus declined : 
Singular. Plural. 

N. Un tel homme, such a man De tels homines, such men 

G. d'un tel homme, of such a de tels homines, of such men 

man 

D. a un tel homme, to such a a de tels homines, to such men 
man 

Tout with a masculine substantive is thus declined : 
Singular. Plural. 

N. Tout homme, every man Tous les hommes, all men 

G. de tout homme, of every de tous les homines, of all men 

man 

D. a tout homme, to every a tous les hommes, to all men 
man 

Tout with a feminine noun is thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Toute heure, every hour toutes les heures, all hours 

G. de toute heure, of every de toutes les heures, of all 

hour hours 

D. d toute heure, to every d toutes les heures, to all hours 
hour 

Singular (only) Masc. 

N. Tout le monde, every body 

G. de tout le monde, of every body 

D. d tout le monde, to every body 

Singular : Fein. 
N. Toute la nation, the whole nation 
G. de toute la nation, of the whole nation 
D. d toute la nation, to the whole nation 

Plural. 
N. Toutes les nations, all nations 
G. de toutes les nations, of all nations 
D. d toutes les nations, to all nations 

So decline quelque femme, some woman ; une telle femme, 
such a woman; tout enfant, every child; toute femme, every 
woman ; toute maison, every house ; tout le bozuf the whole 
5* 



54 PRONOUNS. 

ox ; le meme auteur, the same author ; aucune raison, tfo 
reason ; un tel heros, such a hero ; une telle conduite, such 
conduct. 

The pronoun substantive quelqu'un is thus declined ; 
Singular. Plural, 

N. QuelqiVun, some one Quelques-uns, some persons 

G. de quelq-iVun, of some one de quelques-uns, of some, &c. 
D. a quelqu'un, to some one a quelques-uns, to some persons 

The other pronouns substantive are also declinable in the 
singular : but Vun V autre, one another ; Vun et V autre f both ; 
Pun ou V autre, either ; ni Vun ni Vautre, neither, somewhat 
vary in their form, as follows : 

Masculine. 
Singular. Plural. 

N. Uun Vautre, one another Les uns les autres, one another 
G. Vun de Vautre, of one, &c. les uns des autres, of one, &c. 
D. Vun d Vautre, to one, &c. les uns aux autres, to one, &e. 

So ; the feminine Vune Vautre, one another. 

Singular. Plural. 

N. L?un et Vautre, both Les uns et les autres, both 

G. de Vun etde Vautre, of both des uns et des autres, of both 
D. a Vun et a Vautre, to both aux uns et aux autres, to both 

So ; the feminine Vune et Vautre, both. 

Singular. Plural. 

N. L'un ou Vautre, either Les uns ou les autres, either 

G. de Vun ou de Vautre, of des uns ou des autres, of either 

either 
D. d Vun ou d Vautre, to either aux uns ou aux autres, to, &c. 

So ; the feminine Vune ou Vautre, either. 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Ni Vun ni Vautre, neither Ni les uns ni les autres, neither 

G. ni de Vun ni de Vautre, of ni des uns ni des autres f of 

neither neither 

D. ni a Vvn ni a Vautre, to ni aux uns ni aux autres t to 
neither neither 

So J the feminine ni Vune ni Vautre, neither. 



PRONOUNS. 



55 



RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUNS. 



My pens, plume, f. 

Your brothers, fre re, in. 

Of some books, livre, m. 

To my father and hers 

To his mother and mine 

Of what cause, cause, f. 

Of his house, maison, f. 

Of my house and his 

To their houses and mine 

To whom. To whom ? 

Of what child, enfant, m. 

To what children 

Of which. Of which ? 

To which (plural) 

What means ? moyen, m. 

To what persons ? personne, f. 

To those persons 

Of him. Of that man 

To this house, maison, f. 

To those animals, animal, m. 

Those clocks, horloge, f. 

Of their clocks and mine 

To some (ones) 

To none. To neither, f. 

To nobody. Of either, f. 

No condition, Hat, m. 

His tulips and thine, tulipe, f. 



Your cousins and ours, cous- 
in, m. 

To her hostess, hotesse, f. 

To your hostess and his 

Of his friend, ami, in. 

Of his friend, amie, f. 

To their friend and hers, 
ami, m. 

To your friend and hers, 
amie, f. 

To that hospital, hopital, m. 
(li mute) 

To her affection, affection f. 

To his affection and mine 

Of their enemies, ennemi, m. 

Of their enemies and yours 

To your enemies and his 

To thy hope, esperance, f. 

Of my hope and hers 

Of such a hero, heros, m. 

To such heroes 

Of both. Of either 

Of neither. To both, pi. 

Of some one. Some persons 

Of no one. Of neither, f. pi. 

Of nobody. To neither, m. pi. 

To either, pi. f. To both, pi. f. 



EXAMINATION ON THE PRONOUNS. 



What is the first person I in French? Is Wiethe same? 
What is to me ? What does il signify besides lie? Does elle, 
she, signify the same ? What is to us in French ? Is the 
French for to you the some as that ^/br you ? is Us always the 
French for they ? In speaking of books, what is they ? But 
if we speak of ladies, what is they ? If we speak of pens ought 
we to use Us or elles for they? Is there any thing in the third 
person accusative like the article ? Does the general rule for 
forming the plural of nouns apply to all the pronouns ? What 



56 EXERCISES ON THE PRONOUNS. 

is the plural of mon ? What is the plural of votre ? And what 
is the plural of votre 1 Do the masculine pronouns in t form 
their feminine like masculine adjectives in t ? Do masculine 
pronouns in I form their feminine like adjectives in 11 How 
do masculine pronouns in ien form their feminine ? How do 
the possessive pronouns mo?i, &c. change on for the feminine ? 
What does ton make for the feminine ? What does son make 
for the feminine ? Is votre the same for both genders ? What 
is the feminine of Vun ou V autre 1 What is the French for the 
pronoun some ? 



EXERCISES ON THE PRONOUNS. 

FIRST LESSON. 

Si nous voulons 6tre heureux, nous ne devons pas nous 
ecarter du sentier de la vertu. Ne jugez jamais sur les ap- 
parences; ellessont souvent trompeuses. Les femmes doivent 
etre tr&s-circonspectes, car une simple apparence de delit 
leur est quelquefois plus prejudiciable qu'une faute reelle. 
Excuser en soi les sottises qu'on ne peut excuser dans autrui, 
c'est aimer mieux &tre sot soi-me*me, que de voir les autres 
tels. C'est le gotit qui choisit les expressions, qui les com- 
bine, les arrange et les varie de maniere & ce qu'elles pro- 
duisent le plus grand effet. Les hommes passent comme des 
tleurs qui s'epanouissent le matin, et qui le soir sont fletries 
et foulees aux pieds. 

Si, if faute, fault ; reel, real 

voulons etre, desire to be excuser, to excuse 

ne devons pas, must not sottises, follies 

ecarter, deviate - „ qu'on ne peut, which one can- 

sentier, path not ; dans, in 

ne jugez jamais, never judge autrui, others ; c'est, is 

sur, from; souvent, often aimer mieux etre, choosing rath- 

trompeuse, deceitful er to be ; sot, a fool 

doivent, ought ; etre, to be que de voir, than to see 



so 



tres, very ; car, for ! les autres, others ; tels, 

simple, mere ; dilit, crime le gout, taste ; qui, which 

quelquefois, sometimes choisit, selects 

prejudiciable, prejudicial combine, combines; les, them 



EXERCISES ON THE PRONOUNS. 



57 



de maniere d ce qu'elles pro- 

duisent, so as to produce 
effet, effect 
les hommes, men 
passent, pass away 
comme, like ; fieurs, flowers 



s'ipanouissent, open 
le matin, in the morning 
le soil', at night 
fletries, withered 
foulees auxpicds, trodden under 
foot 



SECOND LESSON. 



Le monde n ? est qu'une grande famille, dont Dieu est le 
pere. Tout dans l'univers s'altere et perit ; mais les ecrits 
que le genie a dictes seront immortels. Les Alpes, sur le 
sommet desquelles l'ceil 6tonne decouvre des neiges et des 
glaces eternelles, presentent, au soleil couchant, le spectacle 
le plus imposant et le plus magnifique. Le bien que nous 
desirons se montre & nous et disparait comme un vain songe 
qui s'evanouit & notre reveil pour nous apprendre que les 
choses mernes que nous croyons tenir dans nos mains peuvent 
nous echapper dans un instant. Ceux qui semblent 6tre 
heureux ne le sont pas toujours. Chacun a ses defauts. La 
charite se rejouit du bonheur d'autrui. 



N'est que, is but 
famille, family 
tout, every thing ; dans, in 
s'altere, alters 
pirit, perishes ; mais, but 
ecrits, writings ; ginie, genius 
a dictes, has dictated 
seront, will be ; sur, on 
sommet, summit ; oeil, eye 
etonne, astonished 
decouvre, discovers 
neige, snow ; glaces, ice 
eterncl, perpetual 
presentent, present 
au soleil couchant, at sun-set 
bien, good ; desirons, hope for 
se montre, presents itself 



disparait, disappears 

vain, empty ; songe, dream 

s'evanouit, vanishes 

d notre reveil, when we awake 

pour apprendre (enseigner) to 

teach 
choses memes, very things 
croyons, think 
tenir, we hold fast 
dans, in ; main, f. hand 
peuvent nous ecJiapper, may 

slip away 
semblent, appear 
etre, to be 

ne le sont pas, are not so 
defaut, faults 
se rejouit du, rejoices in the 



58 EXERCISES ON THE PRONOUNS. 



THIRD LESSON. 

La terre a deux mouvemens, l'un annuel, c'est celui par 
lequel elle decrit son orbite autour du soleil dans l'espace 
d'un an ; alors sa vitesse, dans cette orbite, est de 68217 
milles par heure, ou 1137 milles par minute ; l'autre diurne, 
c'est le raouvement de sa rotation journaliere sur elle-meme ; 
sa vitesse, dans ce mouvement, pour un point de sa surface & 
l'equateur, sera de 1042 milles par heure, ou 25020 milles 
par 24 heures. 

La revolution diurne du ciel n'est qu'une illusion produite 
par la rotation de la terre ; il est naturel de penser que la 
revolution annuelle du soleil emportant avec lui toutes les 
planetes, n'est pareillement qu'une illusion due au mouvement 
de la translation de la terre autour du soleil. — Laplace. 

A, has ; mouvemens, motions ?i'est que, is only 

decrit, describes produite, produced 

autour, round ; dans, in de penser, to think 

an, year ; alors, hence emportant, carrying 

vitesse, velocity ; ou, or avec, with ; toutes, all 

diurne, diurnal planete, planet 

journaliere, daily n'est pareillement que, is in like 
sur elle meme, upon its own manner only 

axis due, owing 



FOURTH LESSON. 

On ne doit pas £tre juge dans sa propre cause. On se 
flatte souvent plus qu'on ne devrait. Quiconque a etudie les 
principes d'un art, sait que ce n'est qu'& la longue et par de 
profondes reflexions qu'ilpe ut parvenir k se le rendre propre. 
Chacun devrait, pour son propre bonheur, n'ecouter que la 
voix de la raison et de la verite. Ne faites pas <i autrui ce 
que vous ne voudriez pas qu'on vous fit. Je doute que rien 
ne soit plus propre a elever 1'a.me que la contemplation des 
merveilles de la nature. Quelques talens que vous possediez 
quelques avantages que vous teniez de la nature et de Pedu- 
cation, de quelques perfections que vous soyez doues, ne vous 
attendez qu'aux suffrages d ? un petit nombre d'hommes. 



VERBS. 



59 



Quelque genie qu'on ait, on ne peut sans application exceller 
en quoique ce soit. Les magistrats doivent rendre la justice 
&tout le monde, m&me & leurs ennemis. 



Ne doit pas, ought not 

etre, to be 

propre, own 

onseflatte souvent, we often 
flatter ourselves 

devrait, ought, or should 

a etudie, has studied 

principes, principles 

de, of; salt, knows 

ce n^est que, it is only 

d la longue, by length of time 

par, by ; peut, can 

parvenir, succeed 

d se le rendre propre, in attain- 
ing it 

chacun, every one 

devrait, should ; pour, for 

propre bonheur,' own happi- 
ness 

necouter que, listen only to 

raison, reason 

veriti, truth 

nefaites pas, do not 

ce que, what 

ne voudriez pas, would not 
wish 



qiCon fit, to be done 

je doute, I doubt 

que rien soit, whether any thing 
be 

plus propre, better calculated 

a elever, to exalt ; que, than 

merveilles, wonders 

de la, of 

quelques, whatever 

possediez, may possess 

teniez de, may have received 
from 

de quelques, with whatever 

soyez doues, may be endowed 

ne vous attendez qu>aux suf- 
frages, expect the appro- 
bation but 

d\m petit nombre dViommes, of 
few 

genie, genius 

qv?on ait, we may have 

on ne peut, we cannot 

quoi que ce soit, any thing 

doivent, ought 

rendre, to render 

meme. even 



CHAPTER VI. 



French verbs are divided into auxiliary, active, passive, 
neuter, reflective, and reciprocal ; and these again into regu- 
lar and irregular. 



60 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



I. AUXILIARY VERBS. 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb avoir, to have. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. Preterite. 

Avoir, to have Avoir eu, to have had 



Present. 
Ayant, having 



PARTICIPLES. 

Past. 
Eu, had 



Compound. 
Ayant eu, having had 



1. 



bc2. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Present. 
Pai, I have 
tu as, thou hast 
il, ou elle a, he, or she has 



Comp. of the Present. 
J'ai eu, I have had 
tu as eu, thou hast had 
il a eu, he has had 



.-1. Nous avons, we have 

1 2. vous avcz, you have 

^ 3. Us, ou dies ont, they have 



Nous avons eu, we have had 
vous avez eu, you have had 
Us ont eu, they have had 



Imperfect. 
M 1. Tavais,* I had 
.w>2. tu avais, thou hadst 
55 3. i/ ayai^ ? he had 



Comp. of the Imperfect. 
Tavais eu, I had had 
tu avais eu, thou hadst had 
il avait eu, he had had 



~ 1. Nous avions, we had 
3 2. vous aviez, you had 
^3. Us avaient, they had 



iVow5 avions eu, we had had 
vous aviez tu, you had had 
Us avaient eu, they had had 



Preterite. 
ja 1. J'ews, I had 
w>2. £w eus, thou hadst 
55 3. 2*/ eut, he had 



Camp. o/*Me Preterite. 
J'eus eu, I had had 
tu eus eu, thou hadst had 
il eut eu, he had had 



p-g 1. IVows eumes, we had 
5 2. vows etos, you had 
ft 3. 2*Zs eurcnt, they had 



IVoms eumes eu, we had had 
i>0ws ew£es cm, you had had 
Us eurent eu, they had had 



* Obs. Most modern writers use ai instead of oi in the imperfect and 
conditional. 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



61 



x 



Future Tense, , Comp. of the Future. 

Ml. J'aurai, I shall have Taurai en, I shall have had 

|-2. tu auras, thou wilt have tu auras eu, thou wilt have had 

x3. il aura, he will have il aura eu } he will have had 

1. Nous aurons, we shall Nous aurons en, we shall have 
_ have had 

J 2. vous aurcz, you will vous aurez eu, you will have 
* have had 

3. Us auront, they will Us auront en, they will have 
have had 

Conditional. Comp. of the Conditional. 

^ I. J'aurais, I should have T'aurais eu, I should have had 

"3^2. tu aurais, thou wouldest tu aurais eu, thou wouldest 
have have had 

3. il aurait, he would have il aurait eu, he would have 

had 

1. Nous aurions, we should Nons amnions eu, we should 
_ have have had 

J 2. vous auriez, you would vous auriez eu, you would 
- have have had 

3. Us auraicnt, they would ils auraient eu, they would 
have have had 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. Comp. of the Present. 

Que, that Que, that 

^ 1. J' ale, I may have J'aie eu, I may -have had 

\2. tu aies, thou mayest have tu aies eu, thou mayest have 
| had 

' 3. i7 a*7, he may have il ait eu, he may have had 

1. Nousayons, we may have Nous ay on s eu, we may have 
- had 

§2. vous ayez, you may have vous ayez eu, you may have 
S had 

3. *7s cuen*, they may have z7s aient eu, they may have 

had 
6 



62 AUXILIARY VERBS. 

Preterite. Comp. of the Preterite. 

s 1. Peusse, I might have Peusse en, I might have had 

g.2. tu eusses, thou mightest tu eusses eu, thou mightest 
.2 have have had 

3. il eut, he might have il exit eu, he might have had 

1. Nous eussions, we might Nous eussions eu, we might 
_ have have had 

o 2. vous eussiez, you might vous eussiez eu, you might have 
&• have had 

3. Us eussent, they might Us eussent eu, they might have 
have had 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural 

1 Ayons, let us have 

2. aie, have, or have thou ayez, have, or have you 

J q u 'H a it> l et him have quHls, ou qu'elles aient, let 

£ qu'elle ait, let her have them have 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb etre, to be. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. Preterite. 

A 

Etre, to be Avoir ete, to have been 

participles. 

Present. Past. Compound. 

'Etant, being 'Ete, been Ayant ete, having been 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. Comp. of the Present. 

S l. Je suis, I am Pai ete, I have been 

1)2. tu es, thou art tu as ete, thou hast been 

i§ 3. i7, ou e#e es£, he or she is il, ou elle a ete, he or she has 

been 
73 1. Nous sommes, we are Nousavons ete, we have been 
S 2. vows e£es, you are rows avez ete, you have been 

fe 3. z7s, ou cZ/cs sont, they are i7s ow£ eti, they have been 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



63 



|2. 

i» 3. 



-1. 

1 2. 
S3. 



SI- 
'S 9 

• s 3 



*3. 



c 

83, 



s 9 

- 



Imperfect. 
J'etais, I was 
£m etais, thou wast 
iletait, he was 

Nous etions, we were 
t'OMS etiez, you were 
z7s etaient, they were 

Preterite. 
Jefus, I was 
tufus, thou wast 
ilfut, he was 

Nous fumes j we were 
vousfutes, you were 
ilsfurent, they were 

Future. 

Je serai, I shall be 
ta serezs 9 thou wilt be 

z7 sera, he will be 
A t oms serous, we shall be 

i?0ws serez, you will be 

z7s serontt they will be 



Conditional. 
gl. Je serais, I should be 

1 

.£ 2. ta serais, thou would est 

be 

3. z7 serait, he would be 

1. IVbws serious, we should 
be 
1 2. rows seriez, you would be 

3. i7s seraient, they would 
be 



Comp. o/*<7ie Jwip. 
Tavais ete, I had been 
fw avais ite, thou hadst been 
il avait ete, he had been 

Nous avions ete, we had been 
vous aviez tte, you had been 
27s avaient ete, they had been 

Comp. of the Fret. 
J'cus ete, I had been 
tu eus ete, thou hadst been 
il cut ete, he had been 

Nous eumes He, we had been 
vous eutes Ui, you had been 
Us eurent ete, they had been 

Comp. of the Future. 
J'aurai ete, I shall have been 
tu auras ete, thou wilt have 

been 
il aura ete, he will have been 

Nous aurons et6 } we shall have 

been 
vous aurez ete, you will have 

been 
Us auront ete, they will have 

been 

Comp. of the Condit. 
Taurais ete, I should have 

been 
tu aurais ete, thou wouldest 

have been 
il aurait eti, he would have 

been 

Nous aurions ete, we should 

have been 
vous auriez ete, you would 

have been 
27s auraient ete, they would 

have been 



04 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. Comp. of the Pres. 

Que, that Que, that 

*. 1. Je sois, I may be J'aie ete, I may have been 

32. tu sois, thou may est be tu aies ite, thou may est have 
.5 been 

3. il soit, he may be il ait ete, he may have been 



1. Nous soyons, we may be Nous ayons ite, we may have 

been 

12. vous soyez, you maybe vous ayez ete, you may have 

gj been 

3. z7s soicnt, they may be 2*/s azc?i£ ej£, they may have 

been 

Preterite. Comp. of the Pret. 

Que, that Que, that 

M 'l. Jefusse, I might be J'eusse ete, I might have been 

"3 2. tu fusses, thou mightest ta eusses et'e, thou mightest 

a be have been 

00 3. ilfiit, he might be z7 ew£ ^e, he might have been 

1. IVWs fussions, we might IViws eussions ete, we might 

be have been 

£2. vous fussiez, you might vows eussiez ete, you might 



be 



have been 



3. Us fussent, they might Us eussent ete, they might have 
be been 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Singular. 



2. Sois, be, or be thou 
£ ^w'z'Z soz7, let him be 
( qxi/elle soit, let her be 



Plural 
Soyons, let us be 
soyez, be (you), or do you be 
gw'e'/s ou qxCelUs soient, let 
them be 



The auxiliaries may be conjugated in three other forms ; 
viz. interrogatively, negatively, and interrogatively negative- 
ly ; as, 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



65 



Interrogatively. 


Negatively. 


Interrog. Neg. 


Avoir 7 to have 






Ai-je 1 have I ? 


Je ifCai pas, I have 


N ai-je pas? have 




not 


I not? 


avaisje ? had I ? 


je n'avais pas, I 


n'avais je pas? had 




had not 


I not? 


eus-jc, had I ? 


je n'eus pas, I had 


n'eusje pas ? had 




not 


I not ? 


aurai-jc ? shall I 


je n'aurai pas, I 


n'anraije pas ? shall 


have ? 


shall not have 


I not have ? 


aural s-jc? should 


je n'aurais pas, I 


riaurais-je pas? 


I have ? 


should not have 


should I not have ? 


Interrogatively. 


Negatively. 


Interrog. Neg. 


A 

Eire, to be 






Suis-je ? am I ? 


Je ne suis pas, 1 


*Ne snisje pas ? am 




am not 


I not ? 


etais-je ? was I ? 


je n'etais pas, I 


?i"etaisje pas ? was 




was not 


I not ? 


fusJ-je ? was I ? 


je ne fus pas, I 


nefusjc pas? was 




was not 


I not 1 


ser ai-je ? shall I 


je ne serai pas, I 


ne seraije pas ? 


be? 


shall not be 


shall I not be ? 


serais je ? should 


je ne serais pas, I 


ne serais je pas ? 


I be? 


should not be 


should I not be 



So conjugate all the other persons, moods, and tenses, sim- 
ple and compound, except the infinitive, participles, subjunc- 
tive, and imperative, which do not admit of the interrogative 
form. 

The hyphen ( - ) is always placed between the verb and 
the pronoun in the interrogative form ; and when the verb 
ends with a vowel, a (-£-) is placed between the verb and the 
pronoun of the third person singular ; as, a-t-elle ? has she ? 
n'a-t-clle pas ete ? has she not been ? sera-t-il? will he be? 
iraura-t-il pas eu ? will he not have had ? 



* 06s. 1. JVe and pas correspond to the English word not, the ne, or 
jv before a vowel, is generally put before the verb, and pas after. 

f 2. In asking questions, est-ce que (is that that) is frequently used ; as, 
est-cequejefus? was 1 r (not fus-je ?) but we can say with propriety, 
either ful-il ? was he ; or est-ce qu'ilfut ? was he ? 

6* 



66 AUXILIARY VERBS. 



Practice on Avoir. 

Pres. Ind. Have I ? Have I not ? I have not. Hast thou 
not ? He has not. We have not. Have you ? They have. 
Have they not ? 

Imp. I had. Had T not ? Hadst thou not ? He had not. 
We had not. Had you not ? They had not. Had they not ? 

Pret. Had I ? I had not. Hadst thou not ? He had. He 
had not. Had he not ? We had. Had you ? Had they 
not? 

Fut. I shall have. Shall I have ? Wilt thou have ? Thou 
wilt have. Wilt thou not have ? He will have. Will she 
have? We shall have. You will have. They will have. 

Condit. I should have. Should I have ? Should I not have. 
I should not have. Would she not have ? He would have. 
Would he have ? We should not have. Would you not have ? 
They would not have. 

Pres. Subj. I may have. He may have. She may not 
have. We may have. You may have. They may not have. 

Pret. 1 might have. He might have. We might not have. 
You might not have. They might not have. 

Imper. Have (thou)? Let us not have. Have (you). Let 
them have. Let them not have. 

Practice on the Compound Tenses of Avoir. 

Pres. Ind. Have I not had (some) old friends ? Has she 
not had (some) old friends ? Have they had (some) money ? 

Imperf. I had not had the finest houses. Had they not 
had the happiest moments ? We had had (some) happy oppor- 
tunities. They had not had (some) prettier birds. 

Pret. She had had (some) fine eyes. He had had (some) 
great ancestors. Had they not had (some) good pens ? 

Fut. Will he not have had an old coat ? She will not 
have had (some) jewels. You will not have had [some) nuts. 
Will they not have had (some) old fashions ? 



PRACTICE ON AVOIR. 67 

Cond. Should I not have had (some) large curtains 1 We 
should not have had (some) fine carpets. Should we not have 
had the last place ? Would they not have had (some) genteel 
manners ? 

Pres. Subj. I may have had (some) horses. She may have 
had the prettiest hat. They may have had (some) false news. 
They may not have had (so?ne) little children. 

Pret. I might not have had a more delightful situation. 
She might have had a foolish hope. They might have had 
{some) new hats. 

Obs. The words in French must follow each other, in the order in which 
they stand underneath : 

Old, ancien; friend, ami, m. large, grand 

money, argent, m. curtain, rideau, ni, 

fine, beau; house, maison, f. fine, beau; carpet, tapis, m. 

happy, heureuz last, dernier ; place, place, f. 

moment, moment, m. manner, maniere, f. 

opportunity, occasion, f. genteel, galant 

pretty, joli ; bird, oiseau, m. horse, cheval, m. 

fine, bel ; eye, ceil, m. pretty, joli; hat, chapeau, m. 

great, grand false, faux 

ancestor, aieul, m. news, nouvclles, f. 

good, bon ; pen, plume f. little, petit; child, enfant, m. 

old, vieil ; coat, habit, m. delightful, agreable 

jewel, bijou, m. situation, situation, f. 

nut, noix, f. foolish, fol; hope, espoir, m. 

old, vieil ; fashion, mode^ f. new, neuf. 



EXERCISES ON A.VOIR. 

FIRST LESSON. 

J'aiune bonne plume. Tu as de bons amis. Elle a des 
maisons. A-t-il de beaux tableaux ? N'a-t-il pas un chien 1 
N'avez-vous pas une epingle 1 Nous n'avons pas des oranges. 
Vous n'avez pas un bon canif. Elles ont de Fargent. II n'a 
pas* d'argent. Elle n'a point* d'argent. Ont-ils de l'argent 1 

* The negatives pas and point, are not always used indifferently, the one 
for the othei. The first, in some instances, denies only in part, and the 
latter denies absolutely. 



68 EXERCISES ON AVOIR. 

J'avais des poires et des oranges. N'avait-il pas beaucoup 
d'amis 1 Nous n'avons pas eu de prudence. N'avez-vous pas 
eu de bons livres 1 lis ont eu du plaisir. Vous n'aviez pas 
eu de I' argent comptant. J'eus de bonnes maisons. Vous n'e&tes 
point d'or. N'eu.mes-nous pas un chien ? N'aviez-vous pas 
eu une recompense ? N'eurent-ils pas de For. Elles n'eurent 
pas eu de jolis ciseaux. N'avaient-ils pas eu de meilleurs 
chaises ? 

Chicn, rn. dog ; epingle, f. pin plaisir, m. pleasure 

can'f, m. pen-knife argent comptant, ready money 

poire, f. pear ; de, any jolis ciseaux, m. pretty scissars 

beaucoup, many chaise, f. chair 



SECOND LESSON. 

Aurai-je des gants 1 Tu n'auras pas des souliers. J'aurais 
de belles gravures. Elles n'auraient pas eu de jolies maisons. 
Paurais eu plus de plaisir. Tu aurais eu beaucoup d y avan- 
tage sur lui. lis auraient eu bien des ennemis. Aie du courage 
et de la fermete. N'aurions-nous pas eu bien des amis. Ayez 
des moeurs et de la conduite. Qu'il ait de la complaisance et 
de la politesse. Qu'elle n'ait pas eu de beaux yeux. Ayons 
de belles prairies et des bosquets delicieux. Qu'elles aient 
des manieres plus prevenantes. Que j'eusse des domestiques 
zeles et fideles. Que tu n'eusses pas eu des bijoux precieux. 
Qu'il elit eu de la grandeur d'&me. Que nous ayons eu des, 
juges eclaires. Que nous n'eussions pas eu une epee, un fusil 
et des pistolets. 

Gant, m. glove prairie, f. meadow 

Soulier, m. shoe bosquet, m. grove 

gravure, f. engraving manihre, f. manner 

beaucoup de, much pr&venant, prepossessing 

sur, over zele, zealous ; Jidele, faithful 

bien des, many juge, m. judge 

fermete, firmness eclaire, enlightened 

moeurs, f. manners ep'ee, f. sword 

conduite, conduct fusil, m. musket 

politesse, politeness pistolet, m. pistol 



PRACTICE ON ETRE. 69 

Practice on Etre. 

Pr, Ind. Am I ? I am not. Thou art not. Is he not ? We 
are. Are you not ? Are they 1 They are not 1 She is not. 

Imp. Was I ? Was I not. Thou wast not. Was he not 1 
Were we not 1 You were not. Were they not 1 They were. 

Pret. I was. Was I not ? Thou wast not. He was not. 
Was he not? Were we not 1 You were not. Were they? 

Fut. I shall not be. Shall I not be ? We shall be. Shall 
we not be 1 She will not be. Will they not be 1 

Cond. I should not be. Wouldst thou not be ? He would 
be. Would she not be 1 We should not be. Should we be 1 

Pr. Subj. I may be. Thou mayest not be. He may be. 
We may not be. You may not be. They may be. 

Pret. I might be. She might not be. He might be. You 
might not be. We might not be. They might not be. 

Imper. Be (thou). Let us be. Be {yoii). Let her be. 
Let them not be. 

Practice on the Compound Tenses of Etre. 

Obs. Although we have given the masculine adjectives in the following 
practice, yet they must always agree with the nouns or pronouns preced- 
ing the verbs, in gender and number ; thus, he is good,'?7 est bon ; she is 
good, e lie est bonne ; they are good, Us sont bons ; they are good, elles 
sont bonnes ; he is active, il est actif; she is active, ells est active ; he 
has been happy, ila ete heureux ; she has been happy, elk a ete heureuse. 

Pics. Ind. I, m. have been prudent, p>™dent. 1, /.have 
been prudent, prudent. They, f. have been honest, honhete. 
These trees, m. have not been large, grand. The horses, m. 
have not been fine, beau. These apples f. have been good, 
bon. 

Imperf. Had I, m. not been happy, heureux ? I, f. had 
not been good, ban. She had been vicious, vicieux. Had 
she not been jealous, jaloux ? It, f. had not been benign, 
benin. We,/ had not been idle, oisif. You,/, had not been 
quick, vif. Had you, m. not been pensive, pensif ? They,/, 
had not been short, bref. Had they not been active, actif? 



70 PRACTICE ON £TRE. 

Pret. Had I, /. not been attentive, attentif ? Thou, m: 
hadst been flattering, fiatteur. It, /. had been dangerous, 
dangereux. Had it, /. not been long, long ? She had been 
virtuous, vertueux. We, m. had not been curious, curieux, 
Had you, m. been quarrelsome, querdleur ? Had they, /. not 
been foolish, sot They, m. had been soft, mol 

Fut. Shall I,/, not have been generous, genereux ? Thou, 
m. wilt not have been idle, paresseux. Will it, f. not have 
been uneven, inegal? You,/, will have been amiable, aima- 
ble. Will they, m. not have been young, jenne. 

Condit. Should I, f. not have been mortal, mortel ? 
Wouldest thou, m. have been criminal, criminel ? It,/, would 
have been thick, epais. Would it, /. have been mutual, mu~ 
tuel? Should we, m. not have been ingenious, ing&nieux? 
Would they,/ have been false, faux ? 

Pres. Subj. I, /. may have been ready, pri,t. Thou, /. 
mayest not have been prudent, priident. She may have been 
ugly, laid. He may not have been ungrateful, ingrat. We, 
/. may have been diligent, diligent. They may, m. not have 
been brown, brun. 

Pret. I,f. might have been sincere, sincere. Thou, /. 
mightest have been public, public. She might not have been 
false. It,/, might have been fresh,/ra?s. We,/, might have 
been frugal, econome. They, m. might have been vigorous, 
vigoureux. 



EXERCISES ON $TRE. 

m 

FIRST LESSON. 

Je suis bien aise de vous voir. Elle est reellement aima- 
ble. Ces arbres sont tres beaux. Ces framboises ne sont 



Obs. The pronouns may be masculine or feminine, depending upon 
whom or what they refer to ; for example, a male person would say, je 
suis heureux, I am happy ; and a female would say, je suis heureuse, I 
am happy. Also, if we speak of books and say, they are goody we must 
say in French, Us sont bons ; but if we speak of pens and say, they are 
good, we must say, elles sont bonnes. 



EXERCISES ON ETRE. 



n 



pas belles. Ne sommes-nous pas constans ? Elles sont con- 
stantes. Ne sont-elles pas coraplaisantes ? N'6tes vous pas 
studieux ? N'etait-elle pas studieuse ? Etiez-vous tres-insou- 
ciant ? Elles etaient vaines et frivoles. Je fus trop occupe. 
Ne fut-elle pas jalouse? Ne flirnes-nous pas tres-malheureux. 
lis ne furent pas suffisamment appliques. Futes-vous impru- 
dentes ? Ne furent-elles pas jolies ? Je serai chez moi jusqu'a. 
midi. Mon pere sera chez lui ce soir. Ne serez-vous pas 
chez vous demain ? lis seront chez Monsieur 



Bien aise, very glad ; de, to 
voir, see 
reellement, really 
tres, very 

framboises, f. raspberries 
complaisant, condescending 
insouciant, indifferent 
frivole, frivolous 
trop, too ; occupe, busy 
malheureux, unhappy 



suffisamment, sufficiently 
appliques, attentive 
chez moi, at home 
jusqu'd midi, till twelve o'clock, 

or till noon 
chez lui, at home 
soir, evening 
chez vous, at home 
demain, to-morrow 
chez Monsieur, at Mr. 



SECOND LESSON. 

Tu ne serais pas si tem6raire. Ne sera-t-il pas plus desin- 
teresse ? Elle ne serait pas trop genereuse. Vous ne seriez 
pas fantastiques. Ne serions-nous pas sages ? lis ne seraient 
pas malhonne"tes. Sois liberal, mais avec discretion. Soyons 
economes et sobres. Soyez equitables, humains et prudens. 
J'espere que je serai plus prudent a Pavenir. Que nous 
soyons plus habiles. Que vous soyez moins ententes. Qu'il 
soit plus raisonnable. Qu'elles soient belles. Que nous fus- 
sions humains et genereux. Que vous fussiez humaines et 
genereuses. Que nous fussions plus circonspects. Qu'elle 
ne fut pas craintive. Qu'elles fussent plusattentives & leur 
devoir. Qu'ils ne fussent pas victorieux. 



Si, so ; t'emeraire, rash 
plus, more 

desinteresse, disinterested 
trop, too 
fantastique-) whimsical 



malhonnetes, uncivil 
mais, but; avec, with 
econome, saving 
sobre, temperate 
d Vavenir, for the future 



72 REGULAR VERBS. 

habile, skilful ; moins, less craintive, fearful 

entete, conceited & Icnr devoir, to their duty 

circonspect, circumspect victorieux, victorious 



REGULAR VERBS. 

There are four conjugations of regular verbs known by 
the terminations of their infinitives ; as, 

1. er ; as, parler, to speak 

2. ir . . . bdtir, to build 

3. oir . . recevoir, to receive 

4. re . . vendre, to sell 

MODEL OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
Parler, to speak. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. Preterite. 

Parler, to speak Avoir parle, to have spoken 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. Past. Compound. 

Parlant, speaking Parle, spoken Ayantparli, having spoken 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present, Comp. of the Present. 

1. Jeparle, I speak, I do J'aiparle, I have spoken 
speak, or I am speaking 

jj2. tu paries, thou speakest, tu as parle, thou hast spoken 
f n dost speak, or art 
2 speaking 

3. il, ou elle parle, he or she il a parle, he has spoken 

speaks, does speak, or elk a parle, she has spoken 
is speaking 



CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERBS. 



1. Nous parlons, we speak Nous avons parte, we have 

do speak, or are speaking spoken 

__, 2. vous parhz, you speak, vous avez parle, you have 

| do speak, or are speaking spoken 

&3. ils, ou elks parlent, they Us, ou dies ont parle they 

speak, do speak, or are have spoken 

speaking 

Imperfect. Comp. of the Imp. 

1. Je parlais, I spoke, did J'avais parle, I had spoken 
speak, or was speaking 

•§2. tuparlais, thou spokest, tu avais parle, thou hadst 

c didst speak, or wast spoken 
w speaking 

3. ilparlait, he spoke, did i7 avait parte, he had spoken 
speak, or was speaking 

1. Nous parlions, we spoke, JVbws avions parle, we had 

did speak, or were spoken 
speaking 

— 2. vous parliez, you spoke, voz/s azne^ parle, you had 

did speak, or were spoken 
S speaking 

3. ils parlaient, they spoke, iZs avaient parle, they h^d 

did speak, or were spoken 
speaking 

'Preterite. Comp. of the Fret. 

I. Jeparlai, I spoke, or did J'eus parle, I had spoken 

speak 

32. tu par las, thou spokest, ta ews parte, thou hadst 

.c or didst speak spoken 

^3. ?7 parla, he spoke, or z7 eut parle, he had spoken 

did speak 

1. NousparlAmes, we spoke, IVb?/5 eumes parle, we had 

or did speak spoken 

2 2. vous parldtes, you spoke, t;oms cw^es parle, you had 

2 or did speak spoken 

3. z7s parlerent, they spoke, i7s eurent parle, they had 

or did speak spoken 
7 



74 CONJUGATION OP REGULAR VERBS. 

Future. Comp. of the Future. 

1. Jeparlerai, I shall speak Paurai parte, I shall have 
«- spoken 

-g2. tu parleras, thou wilt tu auras parte, thou wilt have 
.5 speak spoken 

m 3. il parlera, he will speak U aura parle, he will have 

spoken 

1. Nous parlerons, we shall Nous aurons parte, we shall 
^ speak have spoken 

j=2. vous parlerez, you will vous aurez parle, you will 
P" speak have spoken 

3. Us parleront, they will Us auront parte, they will 
speak have spoken 

Conditional. Comp. of the Conditional. 

1. Je parlerais, I should Paurais parte, I should have 
speak spoken 

2 2. tu parlerais, thou tu aurais parte, thou wouldest 
So wouldest speak have spoken 

£3. il parler ait, he would 2*/ aurait parti, he would 
speak have spoken 

1. Nous parlerions, we IVows aurions parte, we should 
should speak have spoken 

■3 2. vous parleriez, you would vous auriez parte, you would 
jg speak have spoken 

^ 3. Us parleraient, they 27s auraient parle, they would 
would speak have spoken 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. Comp. of the Present. 

Que, that Que, that 

^ 1. Je parte, I may speak Paieparle^ I may have spoken 

.3 2. *w paries, thou mayest ta mes parte, thou mayest 
|f or mayst speak have spoken 

j»3. ilparle, he may speak i7 m7 parl'e, he may have 

spoken 

1. IVbws parlions, we may IVows «yon5 parle, we may 
speak have spoken 

^2. t>0?/s parliez, you may i>o?/s ayez parle, you may 
i? speak have spoken 

^3. Us parlent, they may z7s aient parte, they may have 
speak spoken 



CONJUGATION OP REGULAR VERBS. , J 

Preterite. Comp. of the Pret. 

1 . Je parlasse, I might or <Peusse parte, I might have 
should speak spoken 

*i 2. tuparlasses, thou mightest tu eusses parte, thou mightest 
S or mightst speak have spoken 

™ 2. ilparldt, he might speak il eut parte, he might have 

spoken 

1 . Nous parlassions, we Nous eussions parte, we might 
might speak have spoken 

S 2. vous parlassiez, you vows eussicz parte, you might 
£ might speak have spoken 

3. Us parlassent, they might Us eussent. parte, they might 
speak have spoken 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

1 Parlous, let us speak 

2. Parle, speak, or speak thou parlez, speak, or do you speak 

. ^ Q u 'H parte, let him speak quHls ou qu'elles parlent, let 

£ qu'elleparle,let her speak them speak 

So conjugate donner, to give ; aimer, to love ; eviter, to 
avoid ; cacher, to conceal, &c. There are more than 2700 
verbs in er conjugated after this model. 



MODEL OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
Bdtir, to build. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. Preterite. 

Bdtir, to build Avoir bdti, to have built 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. Past. Compound. 

Bdtissant, building Bdti, built Ayant bdti, having built 



<'G CONJUGATION OP REGULAR VERBS. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Singular. Plural 

1. Je bdtis, I build Nous bdtissons, we build 

2. tubdtis, thou buildest vous bdtissez, -you build 

3. il bdtit, he builds ils bdtissent, they build 

Imperfect. 
Singular. • Plural. 

1. Je bdtissaisjl did build Nous bdtissions, we did build 

2. tu bdtissais, thou didst vous bdtissiez, you did build 

build 

3. il bdtissait, he did build Us bdtissaient, they did build 

Preterite. 
Singular. PluraL 

1. Je bdtis, I built Nous bdtimes, we built 

2. tu bdtis, thou builtest wows bdtites, you built 

3. »7 6a<z7 ; he built -i7s bdtirent, they built 

Fwtare. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je bdtirai, I shall build. iVous bdtirons, we shall build 

2. £m bdtiras, thou wilt build wows bdtirez, you will build 

3. ilbdtira,he will build i7^ bdtiront y they will build 

Conditional. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je bdtirais, I should or Nousbdtirions, we should or 

would build would build 

2. £w bdtirais, thou wouldest woz^s bdtiriez, you would 

build build 

3. 27 bdtirait, he would build ilsbdtiraient, they would build 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Comp. of the Pres. J'm &«<£, I have built 

Comp. of the Imp. J'avais bdti, I had built 

Corap* of the Pret. J'eus bdti,Ihad built 

Comp. of the Fut. J'aurai bdti, I shall have built 

Comp. of the Cond. J'aurais bdti, I should have built 



CONJUGATION OP REGULAR VERBS. 77 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Singular. Plural. 

Que, that 

1. Je bdtisse, I may build Nous bdtissions, we may build 

2. tu bdtisses, thou mayest vous bdtissiez? you may build 

build 

3. il bdtisse, he may build Us bdtissent, they may build 

Preterite. 
. Singular. Plural 

Que, that 

1. Je bdtisse, I might build Nous bdtissions, we might 

build 

2. tu bdtisses, thou mightest vous bdtissiez, you might 

build build 

3. il bdtity he might build Us bdtissent, they might build 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Comp. of the Pres. Quefaie bdti, that I may have built 
Comp. of the Pret. Quefcusse bdti, that I might have built 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural, 

1 Bdtissons, let us build 

2. Bdtis, build {thou) bdtissez, build {you) 

C quHl bdtisse, let him build qu'ils, ou qu'elles bdtissent, let 
' \qu > ellebdtisse^e\ her build them build 

So conjugate punir, to punish ; agir, to act ; abolir y to 
abolish, &x. There are about 200 verbs of this conjugation 
i n nzr, gir, cir. &c. 






78 CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERBS. 

MODEL OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
Recevoir, to receive. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. Preterite. 

Recevoir* to receive Avoir repu, to have received 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. Past. Compound. 

Recevant, receiving Repu, received Ayant repu, having 

received . 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je repois, I receive Nous recevons, we receive 

2. tu repois, thou receivest vous recevez, you receive 

3. il repoit, he receives Us repoivent, they receive 

Imperfect. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je recevais, I did receive Nous recevions, we did receive 

2. tu recevais, thou didst re- vous receviez, you did receive 

ceive 

3. ilrecevait, he did receive Us recevaient, they did receive 

Preterite. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je repus, I received Nous re fumes, we received 

2. turepus, thou receivedst vous reputes, you received 

3. il reput, he received Us repureni, they received 

Future. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je recevrai, I shall receive Nous recevrons, we shall receive 

2. tu recevras, thou wilt re- voits recevrez, you will receive 

ceive 

3. il recevra, he will receive Us recevront, they will receive 



* Obs. The cedilla is not put under the c when it is immediately followed 
by e mute. 



CONJUGATION OP REGULAR VERBS. 79' 

Conditional. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je recevrais, I should or Nous recevrions, we should or 

would receive would receive 

2. tu recevrais, thou wouldest vous recevriez, you would re- 

receive ceive 

3. il recevrait. he would re- Us recevraient, they would re- 

ceive ceive 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Co^o. of the Pres. J'ai repu, I have received 
Corap. of the Imp. J'avais repu, I had received 
Comp. of the Pret. feus repu, I had received 
Comp. of the Fut. Taurai repu, I shall have received 
Comp. of the Cond. J'aurais repu, I should have received 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 

Present. 
Singular. Plural. 

Que, that 

1. Je repoive, I may receive Nous recevions, we may receive 

2. tu repoives, thou mayest vous receciez, you may receive 

receive 

3. il repoive, he may receive Us repoivent, they may receive 

Preterite. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je repusse, I might receive Nous repussions, we might re- 

ceive 

2. tu repusses, thou mightest vous repussiez, you might re- 

receive ceive 

3. ilreput, he might receive Us repussent,ihey might receive 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Corap. of the Pres. Quej 7 aie repu, that I may have received 
Comp. of the Pret. Que feusse repu, that I might have re- 
ceived 



80 CONJUGATION OP REGULAR VERBS. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

1 Recevofis, let us receive 

2. Recois, receive (thou) recevez, receive (you) 

3. JuHl, ou quelle recoine, let qu 7 ils, on qu'elles recoiveni, let 

him or her receive them receive 

So conjugate concevoir, to conceive ; devoir, to owe, &c. 
There are only seven regular verbs of this conjugation. 



MODEL OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
Vendre, to sell. 



^mclre 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. Preterite. 

Vendre, to sell Avoir vendu, to have sold 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. Past. Compound. 

Vendant, selling Vendu, sold Ay ant vendu, having sold 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je vends, I sell Nous vendons, we sell 

2. tu vends, thou sellest vous vendez, you sell 
3- il vend, he sells Us vendent, they sell 

Imperfect. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je vendais, I did sell Nous vendions, we did sell 

2. tu vendais, thou didst sell vous vendiez, you did sell 
2. il vendait, he did sell Us vendaient, they did sell 

Preterite. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je vendis, I sold Nous vendimes, we sold 

2. fw vendis, thou soldest vows vendites, you sold 

3. ilvendit, he sold j7s vendirent, they sold 



I 



CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERBS. 81 

Future. 
Singular. Plural 

1. Je vcndrai, I shall sell Nous vendrons, we shall sell 

2. tu vendras, thou wilt sell vous vendrez, you will sell 

3. il vendra, he will sell lis vendront, they will sell 

Conditional. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je vendrais, I should or Nous vendrions, we should or 

would sell would sell 

2. tu vendrais, thou wouldest vous vendriez, you would sell 

sell 

3. il vendrait,he would sell Us vendraient, they would sell 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Comp. of the Pres. J^ai rendu, I have sold 

Comp. of the Imp. J'avais vendu, I had sold 

Comp. of the Pret. Tens vendu, I had sold 

Comp. of the Fut. J'aurai vendu, I shall have sold 

Comp. of the Cond. J'aurais vendu, I should have sold 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Singular. Plural. 

Que, th it. 

1. Je vend?, F may sell Nous vendions, we may sell 

2. tu vendes, thou may est sell vous vendiez, you may sell 

3. ilvende, he may sell lis vendent, they may sell 

Preterite. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Je vendisse, I might sell Nous vcndissions, we might 

sell 

2. tu vendisses, thou mightest vous vendissiez, you might 

sell sell 

3. il vendit, he might sell Us vendissent, they might sell 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Comp. of the Pres. Quej'aie vendu, that I may have sold 
Comp. of the Pret. Quefeusse vendu, that I might have sold 



82 



CONJUGATION OP REGULAR VERBS. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Singula!'. 



Plural 



1 Vendons, let us sell 

2. Vends, sell, thou vendez, sell {you) 

quHl vende, let him sell qu'ih ou qxCdles vendent, let 

qwellt vende, let her sell them sell 



3. 



So conjugate rendre, to render ; repondre, to answer ; per- 
dre, to lose, &c. There are about thirty-five regular verbs 
conjugated according to this model. 

All verbs, like the auxiliaries, may be conjugated interrog- 
atively, negatively, and interrogatively negatively ; as. 

Interrogatively. 



Donne je ? ou, est-ce que je 
donne? do I give ? or am I 
giving? 
bdtissait-il ? did he build ? 

did we re- 
will she re- 
would they 



re pumes -nous / 

ceivc ? 
recevra-t-elle ? 

ceive ? 
rendraient-ils ? 

render ? 



Ai-je donne? have I given? 

avez-vous parte ? have you 
spoken ? or did you speak ? 

avait-il bdti ? had he built ? 

eutes-vous regu ? had you re- 
ceived ? 

aura-t-il recu ? will he have 
received ? 

auraient-elles vendu? would 
they have sold ? 



Tu ne donnes pas, thou dost 
not give, or thou art not 
giving 

vous ne bdtissiez pas, you did 
not build 

il ne recut pas, he did not re- 
ceive 

nous ne recevronspas, we shall 
not receive 

je ne rendrais pas, I should 
not render 



Negatively. 

II n'a pas donne, he has not 



given 

nous n'avions pas bdti, we had 

not built 
elles n'eurent pas repu, they 

had not received 
Us n'auront pas regu, they 

will not have received 
je n'aurais pas rendu, I should 

not have rendered 



PRACTICE OX THE CONJUGATIONS. 83 

Interrogatively Negatively. 

Ne donne-t-il pas? is he not N'avez-vous pas donne ? have 

giving? or does he not give? you not given? 

ne bdtissions-nous pas ? did tfa-t-il pas bdti ? has he not 

we not build ? built 

ne recurent-ils pas ? did they n* eumes-nous pas regu ? had 

not receive ? we not received ? 

ne rendrez-vous pas ? will you n ) auruns-nous pas rendu? 

not render ? shall we not have rendered ? 

ne rendrions- nous pas ? should ji'auricz-vous pas rendu 1 ! 

we not render ? would you not have ren- 
dered ? 

Be careful not to give a literal translation of English sen- 
tences similar to the following : am I speaking? parli-je? 
ou, est-ce que je parte? (not suis-je parlani). J am not re- 
ceiving, je ne recois pas, (notje ne suis pas recevanf). He 
does not punish, il ne punit pas (not il ne fait pas punir). I 
am going to London, je vais & Londres (not je suis allant & 
Londres). Are you going to Paris ? allez-vous a Paris (not 
etes vous allant a Paris). Are you building a house ? faites*- 
vous bdtir une maison, ou bdtissez-vous une maison ? (not etes- 
vous bdtissant une maison). Is she not listening? n'ecoute-t- 
elle pas ? (not ncst-ellepas ecoutant). 



PRACTICE ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 

Present Indicative. 

Do I not give ? donner We are seeking, chcrcher 

art thou speaking ? parler are you not seeking 1 

do I not speak ? do you limit 1 limiter 

does he not propose? proposer are they not dancing? dancer 

is she singing 1 chanter they do not observe 1 observer 



* Obs. The verb /aire, to do, or to make, is often used to express the 
cause of an action or event ; Ex. when we say faites-vous bdtir une mai- 
son ? we do not mean that the person whom we address is in the act of 
performing the manual labor ; but we suppose him to be the proprietor who 
cause? the house to be built. If we ask a man who is at work, whether 
he is building a house or a church, we say, bdtissez-vous une maison ou 
une eglise ? 



34 PRACTICE ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 

Imperfect. 

Did he comfort 1 consoler We blamed, hldmer 

thou didst not protect, prote- did you not begin 1 commencer 

ger 

he did not cultivate, cultiver they did not ask, dcmander 

he was cultivating were they not asking 

Preterite. 

I proved, eprouver We explained, expliqiicr 

didst thou not publish 1 pub- did you study ? itudier 

Her 
did she not forgive 1 pardon- they listened, ecouter 

ner 

Future. 

I shall celebrate, celebrer Shall we not order? ordonner 

wilt thou carry 1 porter you will appease, appetiser 

will he not yield ? c£f/cr they will augment, augmentcr 

will she not assist 1 assister will they not augment ? 

I should curl,yWser We should not avoid, eviter 

thou wouldest not kill, tuer would you burn ? bruler 

he would not abandon, aban- would they drive ? ckasser 
donner 

Present Subjunctive. 

T may forget, oublicr We may prepare, preparer 

thou mayest \end, preter you may congratulate, feli- 
she may not lend citer 

he may preserve, couserver they may reward, recompenser 

Preterite. 

I might leave, laisser We might empty, vidcr 

thou mightest repair, reparer you might wake, iveiller 
he might spare, epargner they might exhort, cxhorter 

Imperative. 

Flv, Mow, ro/er Sign, or do ?/ow sign, signer 

let him play, jouer let them roll, row/er 

let us dance, danser let them not speak, parler 



PRACTICE ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 85 

On the Compounds of the same Verbs* 

Pres. Ind. Have I not given the book to your brother 1 
Have I not spoken the truth ? Thou hast not proposed a 
2ood question. She has sung that song. Have we not sought 
our happiness ? Have you limited his power 1 They have 
not observed your actions and mine. 

Imp. He had comforted his mother. Hadst thou not pro- 
tected the oppressed 1 He had cultivated the liberal arts. 
She had blamed his conduct and theirs. Had we not begun 
the new game ? Had they not asked a great favor ? 

Pret. I had proved the truth of the Christian religion. 
Thou hadst not published the new edition. She had forgiven 
that offence. We had explained the rules. Had you not 
studied the first principles of his art ? They had not lis- 
tened. 

Fut. Shall I not have celebrated the victory? Wilt thou 
not have carried some books ? He will not have yielded 
to their entreaties. We shall have ordered the assault. Will 
you not have appeased his anger ? They will not have aug- 
mented their riches. 

Cond. Should I not have curled his hair? Thou wouldst 
not have killed thy adversary. She would not have aban- 
doned her friend. We should have avoided the dangers. 
Would you not have burnt the paper ? Would they not 
have driven the enemy ? 

Pres. Sub. I may have forgotten this insult. Thou mayst 
have lent money. He may have preserved his clothes. We 
may have prepared our supper. You may have congratulated 
your friends. They may have rewarded the men. 

Pret. I might have left my child. Thou mightest have 
repaired thy house. She might have spared her money. We 
might have emptied the bottle. You might have waked our 
companions. They might have exhorted their friends. 

Obs. The words in the following vocabulary must be taken in the same 
order in which they are given, and the participles may be known by referring 
to the infinitive of the corresponding simple tenses. 

8 



86 



PRACTICE ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 



book, livre, m. 

brother, fre re, m. 

truth, verite, f. 

good, bon ' question, ques- 
tion, f. 

song, chanson, f. 

happiness, bonheur, m. 

power, pouvoir, m. 

action, action, f. 

mother, mere, f. 

oppressed, opprime, m. 

art, art , m. liberal, liberal 

conduct, conduite, f. 

new, nouveau 

game, jew, m. 

great, grand ; favor ?i /az?£&r, f. 

religion, religion, f. 

Christian, chretien 

edition, edition, f. 

offence, offense, f. 

rule, regie, f. 

first, premier; principle, prai- 
czpe 



victory, victoire, f. 
entreaty, instance, f. 
assault, assaut, in. 
anger, colere, f. 
riches, rickesse, f. 
his, ses ; hair, cheveux, ro. 
adversary, adversaire, m. 
friend, a/wie, f. 
danger, danger, m. 
paper, papier, m.. 
enemy, ennemi, m. 
insult, insulte, f. 
money, argent, m. 
clothes, habits, m. 
supper, souper } m. 
friend, zwm, m. 
men, liomme, m. 
child, enfant, m. 
house, maison, f. 
bottle, bouleille, f, 
companion, compagnon, ro. 



PRACTICE ON THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
Present Indicative. 



Do I finish? ^wir 

dost thou not choose ? choisir 

art thou not chosen ? 

does it not impoverish ? ap- 

is it not impoverishing ? 



We do not fill, remplir 
are we not filling ? 
you banish, bannir 
do they enslave ? asservir 

are they not enslaved ? 



Imperfect. 



Did I not soften ? adoucir 
didst thou not embellish ? 

embellir 
he did not warn, avertir 
did she divert? divertir 



We demolished, demolir 
you disunited, desunir 

they weakened, affaiblir 
did they not weaken ? 



PRACTICE ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 87 

Preterite. 

Did I not define? definir We did not invade, envahir 

thou didst not shorten, ac- did you thicken 1 epaissir 

courcir 

she softened, amollir they did not end, Jinir 

Future, 

Shall I not furnish 1 fournir We shall not betray, trahir 

will he build 1 bdtir you will roast, rStir 

will she not cure ? guerir they will not stun, etourdir 

Conditional. 

Should I not stuff? farcir We should free, affranchir 
wouldst thou whiten 1 blanchir you would restore, retablir 
she would not dirty, salir they would not build, bdtir 

Fresent Subjunctive. 

I may refresh, refraichir We may soften, attendrir. 

he may warrant, garantir you may fulfil, accomplzr 
she may enrich, enrichir they may not fulfil 

Preterite. 

I might establish, etablir We might feed, nourrir 

he might enlarge, agrandir you might blacken, noircir 
she might not soften, flichir they might not blacken 

Imperative. 

Refresh, thou, refraichir Let us divide, repartir 

let him punish, punir divide, or do you divide 

let her bear or suffer, pdtir let them reunite, reunir 

Practice on the Compounds of the same Verbs. 

Com. Pres. I have not finished the embroidery. Hast 
thou not chosen these stockings ? Has it not impoverished 
the wealthiest families ? We have not filled our pockets. 
You have not banished the knaves. They have not enslaved 
the hearts. 



88 PRACTICE ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 

Imp. I had softened the answer. Thou hadst embellished 
the fable. Had he not warned his friends ? Had she di- 
verted the children ? We had demolished the old houses. 
You had disunited the princes. They had weakened the 
enemy. 

Pret. I had not defined the places. Hadst thou not 
.hortened these strings? She had not softened the wax. Had 
we invaded their estates? You had not thickened the ink 
They had ended the debate. 

s Fat. I shall not have furnished my house. Will he not 
have built his pavilion ? Will she not have cured his dis- 
order? Shall we have betrayed his interest? You will 
have roasted the meat. Will they not have stunned the 

neighbourhood ? 

Cond. I should not have stuffed the turkey. Thou wouldst 
have whitened the complexion. Would she not have dirtied 
the parlour ? We should have freed the negroes. You would 
have restored the ancient discipline. Would they have built 
large houses ? 

Pres. Subj. I may have refreshed the young plants. He 
may have warranted the truth. We may have enriched our 
relations. You may have softened the heart of the tyrant. 
They may have fulfilled their vows. 

Comp. Pret. I might have established my fortune. He 
might have enlarged his garden. We might have softened his 
wrath. You might have fed the chickens. They might have 
blackened their shoes. 

embroidery, broderie.^ f. enemy, ennemi, m. 

stocking, bas, m. place, lieu, m. 

family, fdmitle, f. string, cordon, ro. 

wealthy, opulent wax, cire, f. 

pocket, poche, f. estate, terre, f. 

knave, coquin, m. ink, encre, f. 

heart, cazur, m. debate, debal, m. 

answer, reponse, f. pavilion, pavilion, m+ 

fable, fable, f. disorder, maladie, f. 
old, vieil; house, mai son, f. interest, ,iuteret > ro. 

prince, prince, m. meat, viande,, f, 



PRACTICE ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 



89 



neighbourhood, voisinage, m. 

turkey, dindon, m. 

complexion, teint, m. 

parlour, salle, f. 

negro, negre, m. 

ancient, ancien 

discipline, discipline, f. 

large, grand 

young, jeune; plant, pla?ite, f. 



truth, v'erite, f. 
relation, parent, m 
tyrant, tyran, m. 
vow, voeu, m. 
fortune, fortune, f. 
garden, j ardin, ra. 
wrath, courroux, m. 
chicken, poulet, m. 
shoe, Soulier, m. 



PRACTICE ON THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



Present Indicative. 

Do I receive ? recevoir We conceive, concevoir 

I ara not receiving do you not perceive ? upper- 

thou owest, devoir cevoir 

art thou not owing ? are you perceiving ? 

doeshe perceive? appercevoir they do not owe again, rede- 

voir 

Imp. I did not receive. Didst thou not owe? Did ho 
perceive ? We conceived. Did you conceive ? They did 
not perceive. Were they not receiving ? 

Pret. Did I not receive ? Did he not perceive ? We did 
not conceive. Did you conceive ? 

Fut. I shall receive. Will he not perceive ? Shall we 
owe 1 You will not conceive. They will not owe again. 

Cond. Should I not receive ? She would not receive. 
Should we not conceive 1 Would you owe ? They would not 
owe again. 

Pres. Subj. I may receive. He may perceive. We may 

conceive. They may owe. 

Pret. I might receive. He might perceive. We might 
conceive. They might receive. 

Lnperat. Receive thou. Let us perceive. Let them 
conceive. 

8* 



PRACTICE ON THE CONJUGATIONS, 



Practice on the Compounds of the same Verbs. 

Pres. Lid. Has he not received that favor ? He has not 
received the favor. Have you perceived the project? They 
have not received his friendship. 

Imp. We had not perceived the enemy. Had you con- 
ceived a new project? They had not perceived the thieves. 
Had they not received the sheep. 

Pret. She had not perceived the thief. Had we not re- 
ceived letters ? They had conceived great hopes. Had 
they not received the pictures. 

Fut. Will she have received the books ? Will he have 
conceived the aversion I We shall have perceived the arti- 
fice. You will have received our kindness. 

Cond. Would they have perceived the man T Would he 
have conceived such a design ? Thou wouldst have perceived 
something. Would he have received our homage ? 

Pm. Subj. I may have received (some) money. She may 
not have perceived the knave. He may not have owed 
money. We may have perceived the rascal. 

Pret. I might not have received his pardon. He might 
have owed money again. You might not have perceived the 
men. They might have received the news. 

Friendship, amiti'e, f. design, dessein, m 

project, projet, m. some, qudque ; thing, chose,L 

thief, voleur, m. homage, hommage, m 

sheep, bir.bis, f. money, argent 

hope, espetance, f. owed, du 

aversion, aversion, f. rascal, coquin 

artifice, finesse, f. pardon, pardon, m. 

kindness, amitie, f. owed again, redu 

such a, un tel news, nouvelle ou nouvelles, f. 



PRACTICE ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 91 

PRACTICE ON THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Present Indicative. 

I do not scatter, repandre Are we not selling? vendre 

am I confounding? confondre you are not rendering, rendre 

does she not hear ? entendre they are laying, tendre 

does he spread 1 etendre do they not answer? repondre 

Imperfect. 

1 melted, fondre We confounded, confondi'e 

did she lay ? pondre did you shear ? tondre 

did he answer? r'epondre they did not remould, refondre 

did he not spill ? repandre did they lose ? perdre 

Preterite. 

I lost, perdre We did not stretch, tendre 

did it bite ? mordre you hanged or hung, pendre 

did she wait ? attendre they took down, descendre 

Fuf. Shall I not scatter ? I shall not confound. Will she 
not hear ? Will he spread ? We shall not sell. You will not 
render. They will lay. 

Cond. Should I not shear ? Would he not remould ? We 
should not lose. You would not bite. They would not wait. 

Pres. Subj. I may melt. It may lay. We may answer. 
You may spill. They may not confound. 

Prct. I might stretch. He might hang. We might take 
down. We might not scatter. You might hear. They 
might spread. 

Imper. Sell thou. Let him render. Let her lay. Let 
us melt. Do you answer. Let them lose. 

Practice on the Compounds of the same Verbs. 

Pres. Ind. Have I not scattered my favors ? Has he not 
heard my voice ? Has she not spread the linen ? 

Imp. Had they not sold their houses ? Had you not sold 
(he horse ? 



92 PRACTICE ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 

Pret. Had I not rendered the service 1 Had he not laid a 
snare 1 Had they not melted their gold ? 

Fut. Will she have laid fine eggs ? Will it have answered 
{to) your expectations ? Will he have spilled blood ? We 
shall have confounded his pride. They will have shorn their 
flocks. 

Cond. Should I not have waited for the fine season 1 
Would he have stretched his arms 1 Would they not have 
hung all those knaves 1 They would not have taken down 
the pictures. 

Pres. Subj. He may have remoulded his work. We may 
have lost our time. They may have bitten at the hook. 

Pret. I might not have scattered money. He might have 
heard the witnesses. We might have spread those maxims. 
You might not have sold your fine horses. They might have 
rendered their accounts. 

Favor, faveur, f. snare, piege, m. 

voice, voix, f. gold, or i m « 

linen, linge, m. fine, beau ; egg, ceuf, m. 

service, service, m. to, d; expectation, attente, f. 

blood, sang, m. time, terns, m. 

pride, orgueil, m. at, d ; hook, hamegon, m. (h 

flock, troupeau, m. mute) 

fine, beau; season, saison, f. money, argent, m. 

his, les ; arm, bras, m. witness, temoin, m. 

knave, coquin, m. maxim, maxime, f. 

picture, tableau, m. horse, cheval, in. 

work, ouvrage, m. account, compte^ m. 

The following table exhibits the terminations of all the 
verbs, regular and irregular. 

INFINITIVE PRESENT. 

pt ir nir tp • as 5 P arler > (er)/mY, (ir) savoir, (oir) rendre, (re) > 
er , it, oir, re , as, £ iQ gpeakj tQ fly> tQ knoyf) t0 render . j 

ALL PARTICIPLES PRESENT 

ending as, {*$& %g£ —J •»• 



PRACTICE ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 



93 



PARTICIPLES PAST. 



, . . C parle, fui, su, mort, mis,\ h 

e, i, u, t, s; as, £ spokeil} fl 0WD) k nown) dea d 5 put, 5 &c ' 

Obs. When past participles are made feminine, they terminate in e mute ; 
as, d&nnet, given ; fuie, flown ; morte, dead ; &c. 



Singular. 



lat. Per. 2nd. 

Je, tu, 

. . e, es, 
. . s, s, 



INDICATIVE. 

Present. 
Plural. 

1st Per. 2d. 3rd. 
nous, vous, ils, 



. ent ; as? 



Je parle, es, e. 
. . fuis, s, t. 
. . rends, s, d. 
. . veux, x, t. 



Imperfect. 



Singular. 
ais, ais, ait, 
ou ois, ois, oit, 



Singular. 

ai, as, a, 

is. is, it, 

us, us, ut, 

ins, ins, int, 



Singular. 
rai, ras, ra, 



Singular. 
rais, rais, rait, 
cm rois, rois, roit, 



Plural. 
| ions, iez, aient ; ") as, parlais, 
I . . . . oient ; ) ou parlois. 

Preterite. 
Plural. 

ames, ates, erent ; as, parlai, allai. 

lmes, ites, irent ; as, batis, fis. 

umes, utes, urent ; as, reijus, fus. 

inmes, intes, inrent ; as, tins, vins. 

Future. 
Plural. 
rons, rez, ront ; as, parlerai. 

Conditional. 
Plural. 
| rions, riez, raient ; as, parlerais, 
! . . . . roient ; as, parlerois. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 
Singular. Plural. 

e, es, e, |1 ions, iez, ent; as, Que je parle, que tu paries, &c. 



94 



PASSIVE VERBS. 



Preterite. 

Plural. 

assions, assiez, assent; as, parlasse. 
issions, issiez, issent ; as, mentisse. 
ussions, ussiez, ussent ; us, re^usse. 



Singular. 
asse, asses, at, 
isse, isses, it, 
usse, usses, ut, 
insse, insses, int, insions, insiez, inssent ; as, tinsse. 



Singular. 
2nd. Per. 3rd. 

e, e, II 1st, 
s, . . . oris, 



Imperative. 



2nd. 
ez, 



Plural. 

3rd; 
ent ; 



2nd. 3rd. 

as, parle, qu'il parle. 
as, lis, qu'il lise. 



msibt Ttviw. 



Passive Verbs are conjugated, in French as in English, by 
the help of the auxiliary etre, to be ; as, 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Pres. Eire hue, m. ou huee, f.* to be praised 
Pret. Avoir ete hue, to have been praised 



participles. 

Pres. f Etant hue, being praised 

Past. Ayant ete hue, having been praised 

Fut. Devant etre hue, being about to be praised 

indicative mood. 

Pres. Je suis, iu es, il est hue, I am, thou art, he is praised 
Nous sommes, vous etes, Us sont hues, we are, you are, 
they are praised 
Imp. J'etais hue, I was praised 
Pret. Jefus hue, I was praised 
Fut. Je serai hue, I shall be praised 
Cond. Je serais hue, I should be praised 






The past participle is liable to gender and number in every tense and 
person : we say, 

loue, m 

loues, mas!' > P raised ' 
louees, fern. 



in the 

in the Plur. 



Sin S- \lo 



PASSIVE VERBS. 95 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Pres. J'ai, ~) I have ~) 

Imp. J'avaif, I had I 

Pret. J'eus, \etehue, I had }>been praised 

Fut. J'aurai, \ I shall have | 

Cond. J'aurais, J Ishould have ) 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Pres. Que je sois hue, that I may be praised 
Pret. Quejefusse hue, that I might be praised 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Pres. Quefai eti hue, that I may have been praised 
Pret. Quefeusse iti hue, that I might have been praised 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

(No 1st person.) 
Sois, au'il soit hue, be thou, let him be praised 
Soyons, soyez, qu'ils soient hues, let us be, be you, let 
them be praised 

PRACTICE ON THE PASSIVE VERBS. 

Simple and Compound. 
Indicative. 
Pres. Am I,f. loved ? {aimer). I, m. am blamed, (blamer). 
Is he not encouraged 1 {encouragcr). Has he been encour- 
aged ? She has been condemned, (condamner). It, f. is 
given, (donner). We, m. are protected, (proteger). Have we,/", 
been protected ? They, m. are consoled, (consoler). Have 
they,/, been consoled ? 

Imp. Was it, f. applauded ? (applaudir). Was she not 
warned? (avertir). He had not been warned. We, m. were 
not banished, (bannir). They,/", were punished, (punir). 

Pret. The letter was received, (recevoir). Had it,/, been 
received ? We, f. were perceived, (appercevoir). The 
blood was spilt, (repandre). Had we, nu been perceived ? 
Had they, m. been spread 1 (tendre). 

Fut. Will it, f. be restored ? (rendre). He will not be 
lost, (perdre). VVill it,/*, not be lost '/ It, /. will not be lost. 



96 NEUTER VERBS. 

Will she be abandoned ? {abandonner). They, f. will be 
abolished, {abolir). Will they, m. not have been abolished ? 

Cond. \,f. should be compelled, {forcer). Would she not 
have been compelled ? She would not have been protected. 
They, f would be received, (recevoir). Would they, m. not 
have been received ? They,/*, would not have been consoled. 

Imperative. 

Be, (you 9 f.) loved. Let them, hi. be warned. Let them,/*, 
be banished. Let them, f. be constrained, (forcer). Let 
them, m. not be constrained. 

Subjunctive. 

Pres. I, jf. may be chosen, (choisir). I, m. may not have 
been chosen. It, f may be destroyed, (renverser). It, m. 
may not have been destroyed. He may be punished, (punir). 
They,/*, may have been destroyed. They, m. may not have 
been destroyed. 

Pret. Ijf. might be rewarded, (r'ecompenser). 1, m. might 
not have been rewarded. She might not have been 
blamed. It,/*, might be carried, (porter). It might not have 
been carried. They,/, might not have been carried. 



Nettie? Ttxftu. 



Neuter Verbs, both in French and English, form their 
compound tenses by avoir and etre, as the sense may require ; 
but there are several veibs which take etre in French and 
have in English ; as, 

Tomber, to fall. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Pres. Je suis, tu es } il est tomb'e, I have, thou hast, he has 

fallen 
Nous sommes, vous etes r Us sont iombes, we have, you 

have, they have fallen 
Imp. J'etais tombe } I had fallen 



NEUTER VERBS. 



97 



Pret. Jefus tomb'e, I had fallen 

Fut. Je serai tombe, I shall have fallen 

Cond. Je serais tombe,l should have fallen 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Pres. Queje sois tombe, that I may have fallen 
Pret. Quejefusse tombe, that I might have fallen 



The following is a list of 
tenses with etre, instead of 

AUer, to go 
arriver, to arrive 
convenir, to agree 
deceder, to die 
dichoir, to decay 
devenir, to become 
disconvenir, to disagree 
echoir. to expire 
aitrer. to go in 
intervenir, to interpose 
mourir, to die 
naitre, to be born 

The following verbs take 

Aborder, to land 
accourir, to run to 
accroitre, to increase 
apparaitre, to appear 
cesser, to cease 
comparaitre, to appear 
cmvcnir, to confess 
croitre, to grow up 
courir, to run 
dtcroitre, to decrease 
demeurer, to remain 



verbs which form their compound 
avoir. 

partir, to set out 
parvenir, to attain 
provenir, to proceed from 
rentrer, to go in again 
rester, to remain 
retomber, to fall again 
retatorner, to return 
revenir, to come back 
survenir, to happen 
tomber, to fall 
venir, to come 



avoir or e^re. 

deperir } to decay 
derober, to deprive 
descendre, to descend 
ditparaitre, to disappear 
monter, to ascend 
passer, to pass 
perir, to perish 
repartir, to set out again 
sortir, to go 
tistre, to weave 



As many of these verbs take aiWr or efre according to 
their signification, it is proper to show how they are used in 
French : we say, 

^ ous avez cesse votre travail, you have left off your work. 
9 



98 NEUTER VERBS. 

La pluie a cesse, ou est cessee, the rain is over, or has ceased. 
Cettemaison lui aurait convenu, this house would have suited 

him. 
Nous somtnes convenus du prix, we have agreed on the price. 
Elle est convenue du fait, she has confessed the fact. 
II a couru toute la journee, he has run all day. 
Ce predicateur est fort couru, this preacher is very much 

followed. 
Cette couleur a eti fort courue, that color has been very much 

in fashion. 
II a demeure & Paris, he has lived in Paris, 
lis sont demeures in6branlables, they have remained immova- 
ble. 
II est demeure muet, he has continued speechless. 
II a descendu Pescalier, he is or has gone down stairs. 
Elle est descendue d'une bonne famille, she is descended from 

a good family. 
Nous avons monte la colline, we have ascended the hill. 
Avez-vous monte la montre ? have you wound up the watch ? 
Cet officier est monte par degres aux charges militaires, that 

officer has risen by degrees to military employments. 
Les soldats ont passe les Alpes, the soldiers have passed the 

Alps. 
Charles X. a passe par la France, Charles X. has passed 

through France. 
La procession est passee, the procession is gone by. 
Cette mode est passee, that fashion is out. 
Ce mot a passee, that word is received. 
II a reparti avec esprit, he has replied with spirit. 
Votre soeur est repartie ce matin, your sister went away again 

this morning. 
Mon frere a sorti ce matin, my brother has been out. this 

morning. 
Mon frere est sorti ce matin, my brother is gone out this 

morning. 



PRACTICE ON THE NEUTER VERBS. 99 

PRACTICE ON THE NEUTER VERBS 

ichich take etre in French. 

Indicative. 

Pres. He has arrived in France. I,f. am departed from 
Germany. I, f have landed in England. They, m. have 
arrived. Have they,/*, arrived from Spain 1 Is she entered ? 
Is he not entered. 

Imp. He had arrived before me. Had she already arrived ? 
You, m. had not set out. My sister had set out. My bro- 
thers had returned. They, f. had returned to their room. 
She had falleu. 

Pret. l,f had grown tall. He had grown tall. Had she 
set out ? Had you, f fallen ? Had they, m. not returned ? 
We 9 f. had not alighted. 

Fut. Shall I,/, have returned ? He will not have fallen. 
Will they,/*, not have expired ? You, m. will have set out. 

Cond. I,f should have departed. Would he have departed ? 
She would have emigrated. Should we, m. have emigrated ? 

Subjunctive. 
Pres. We, f may not have agreed. You, m. may have 
disagreed. They,f may have remained. We may have in- 
terposed. 

Pret. I, f. might have perished. She might not have 
fainted. It, f. might have happened. They, f. might not 
have arrived. 



l&tftttUbt Ttvi)U. 



A verb is called reflective when its subject and object are 
the same ; these verbs are formed in French, with the pro- 
nouns me, te, se, nous, vous, se, answering to the English my- 
self, thyself, &c. ; as, Je me flatte, I flatter myself. Their 
compound tenses always take etre. Many verbs are reflec- 
tive in French, though not in English ; as, se lever, to 
rise, &c. 



100 REFLECTIVE VERBS. 

MODEL OF A REFLECTIVE VERB. 
Se lever, to rise. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Pres. Se lever, to rise 

Pres. Part. Se levant 

Past Part. Leve, m. levee,/' risen 

Pret. S^etre leve, ou levee, to have risen 

Comp. S^etant leve, having risen 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Je me leve, I rise 
Tu te leves, thou risest 
II se leve, he rises 
Nous nous levons, we rise 
Vous vous levez, you rise 
lis se Ihvent, they rise 

Imp. Je me levais, I did rise 
Pret. Je me levai, I rose 
Fut. Je me leverai, I shall rise 
Cond. Je me leverais, I should rise 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Pres. Je me suis leve, I have risen 

Imp. Je m'etais levi, I had risen 

Pret. Je me fas leve, I had risen 

Fut. Je me serai leve, I shall or will have risen 

Cond. Je me serais leve, I should have risen 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Leve toi, do thou rise 
Qu'il se leve, let him rise 
Levons-nous, let us rise 
Levez-vous, do you rise 
Quails se levent, let them rise 

This verb is conjugated interrogatively, &c. in the follow- 
ing manner : 






REFLECTIVE VERBS. 101 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Me Jeve-je ? Do [ rise ? 
Te leves-tu ? dost thou rise ? 
Se leve-t-il? does he rise? 
Nous levons-nous ? do we rise ? 
Vous levez-vous? do you rise? 
Se levent-ils ? do they rise ? 

Imp. Me levais-je ? did 1 rise ? 

Pret. Me levai-je ? did I rise ? 

Fut. Me leverai-je? shall I rise ? 

Cond. Me leverais-je ? should I rise ? 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Pres. Me suis-je leve ? have I risen 1 

Imp. M'etais-je leve ? had I risen 1 

Pret. Mefus-je leve? had I risen 1 

Fut. Me serai-je leve? shall I have risen ? 

Cond. Me serais-je leve ? should I have risen ? 

Negatively. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Je ne me leve pas, I do not rise 
Tu ne te leves pas, thou dost not rise 
II ne se leve pas, he does not rise 
Nous ne nous levons pas, we do not rise 
Vous ne vous levez pas, you do not rise 
lis ne se levent pas, they do not rise 

Imp. Je ne me levais pas, I did not rise 
Pret. Je ne me lev ai pas, I did not rise 
Fut. Je ne me leverai pas, I shall not rise 
Cond. Je ne me lever ais pas, I should not rise 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Pres. Je ne me suispas leve, I have not risen 
Imp. Je ne m'etais pas leve, I had not risen 
Pret. Je ne me f us pas levi, I had not risen 
Fut. Je ne me serai pas leve, I shall not have risen 
Cond. Je ne me serais pas leve, I should not have risen 
9* 



102 REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

JVe te leve pas, do not rise 
QuHl ne se leve pas, let him not rise 
JVe nous hvons pas, let us not rise 
Ne vous levez pas, do you not rise 
Qu'ils ne se levent pas, let them not rise 

and so on with the subjunctive and the remaining persons of 
the indicative. 

Interrogatively and Negatively. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Ne me leve-je pas 1 do I not rise ? 
Ne te leves-tupas ? dost thou not rise ? 
Ne se leve-t-il pas ? does he not rise ? 
Ne nous levons-nous pas ? do we not rise? 
Ne vous levez-vous pas ? do you not rise 1 
Ne se levent-ils pas ? do they not rise 1 

Imp. Ne me levais-je pas ? did I not rise 1 
Pret. JVe me levai-je pas ? did I not rise 1 
Fut. JVe me leverai-je pas ? shall I not rise ? 
Cond. Ne me leverais-je pas ? should I not rise ? 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Pres. Ne me suis-je pas leve ? have I not risen ? 
Imp. JVe m'etais-je pas leve ? had I not risen ? 
Pret. JVe me fus-je pas leve ? had I not risen ? 
Fut. JVe me serai-je pas leve ? shall I not have risen ? 
Cond. JVe me serais-je pas leve ? should I not have risen 1 

The imperative and subjunctive do not admit of the inter- 
rogative form. 






IMPERSONAL VERBS. 103 



Mttipvot^l Utxitu. 



Reciprocal verbs are formed by annexing entre, or entr y 
before a vowel, to the reflective pronouns, nous, vous, and se ; 
as, s^entre-battre, to beat one another ; s'entr' aimer, to love 
one another. They are conjugated in the plural only, but 
otherwise in precisely the same manner as the reflective verb 
s'en aller ; as, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Nous nous entr'aimonS) we love one another 
Vous vous entr'aimez, you love one another 
lis shntfaiment, they love one another 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Nous nous sommes entr'aimes, we have loved one another 
Vous vous etes entr'aimes, you have loved one another 
Us se sont entr'aimes, they have loved one another 

and so on through the other moods and tenses. 



%mptv$oml Vtvitu. 



A verb is called impersonal when the agent or nominative 
is unknown, or considered as such, and when this agent is ex- 
pressed in English by it, and in French by il ; as, 

II pleut, it rains II eclair e, it lightens 

11 neige, it snows Ilfaut, it is necessary 

Ilgrele, it hails II arrive, it happens 

II bruine, it drizzles II importe, it concerns 

II gele, it freezes II semble, it seems 

II degele, it thaws II par ait, it appears 

11 tonne, it thunders II convient, it becomes 



104 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Pleuvoir, to rain, is conjugated thus : 

Pres. Ind. 11 phut, it rains 

Imp. Ilplcuvait, it rained 

Pret. II pint j it rained 

Fut. II pleuvra, it will rain 

Cond. II yleuvrait, it would rain 

Pres. Sub. QuHl pleuve, that it may rain 

Pret. QuHl plut, that it might rain 

Imperative. QuHl pleuve, let it rain 

Falloir, to be necessary, is never used in the infinitive ; 
it is conjugated as follows : 

Pres. Ind. Ilfaut, it is 

Imp. Ilfallait, it was 

Pret. Ilfallut, it was 

Fut. Ilfaudra, it will be I 

Cond. Ilfaudrait, it would be 

Com. Pres. II afallu, it has been 

Pres. Sub. Qii'il faille, that it may be 

Pret. Qu^ ilfallut, that it might be 

Faire is an impersonal when speaking of the weather ; as, 

f chaud ~) f hot 

| beau | fine 

71 fait J f mid > it is \ cold 

UJait \ crott6 | dirty 

I mauvais temps ] (_ bad weather 

(_ du vent, the wind blows 

Faire, to make, is thus conjugated with beau: 

Pres. II fait ) f is ^ 

Imp. Ilfaisait | was 

Pret. II fit } beau, it ^ was )- fine 

Fut. 11 f era \ | will be 

Cond. llferait J L would be j 



necessary 



Avoir, as an impersonal, is conjugated with y ; thus, 

INDICATIVE, SIMPLE TENSES. 

Pres. II y a, there is, or are 

Imp. II y avait. ? ., 

■o '. t, * > there was, were 

Pret. 11 y cut, $ 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 105 

Fut. II y aura, there will be 
Cond. // y aurait, there would be 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. Qu'il y ait, that there may be 
Fut. Qu'il y eut, that there might be 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Indicative* 
Pres. U y a eu, there has, or have been 

Imp. 11 11 avail eu ) . , j , 

t, \ Tt * } there had been 

Fret. 11 y eut eu } 

Fut. 11 y aura eu, there will have been 

Cond. II y aurait eu, there would have been 

Subjunctive. 
Pres. Qu'il y ait eu, that there may have been 
Pret. Qu'il y eut eu 7 that there might have been 

Negatively. 

SINGLE TENSES NEGATIVELY. 

Pres. II n'y a pas, there is or are not 

Imp II n'y avait pas » - fa wgs Qr there were 

Fret. 11 n'y eut pas ) 

Fut. II n'y aura pas, there will not be 

Cond. II n'y aurait pas, there would not be 

Subjunctive. 
Pres. Qu'il n'y ait pas, that there may not be 
Pret. Qu'il n'y eut pas, that there might not be 

COMPOUND TENSES NEGATIVELY. 

Indicative. 
Pres. II n'y a pas eu, there has or have not been 

Imp. II n'y avait pas eu) . , , . , 
t> \. t/ > x c- there had not been 

rret. 11 n y eut pas eu \ 

Fut. 11 n'y aura pas eu, there will not have been 

Cond. II n'y aurait pas eu, there would not have been 

Subjunctive. 
Pres. Qu'il n'y ait pas eu, that there may not have been 
Pret. Qu'il n'y eut pas eu, that there might not have been 



106 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Interrogatively. 

SIMPLE TENSES. 

Ind. Pres. Ya-t-il? is or are there? 

Imp. Y avait-il? ) . „ 

Pret. Yeut-il? $ "as or were there ! 

Fut. Y aura-t-il ? will there be ? 

Cond. Y aurait-il? would there be ? 
No subjunctive in the interrogative form. 

COMPOUND TENSES INTERROGATIVELY. 

Pres. Y a-t-il en ? has or have there been ? 

Imp. Y avait-il eu ? ) , j ., , 
T, r 4 -it- . •/ o \ had there been .' 
Pret. Y eut-il eu ? j 

Fut. Y aura-t-il eu ? will there have been ? 

Cond. Y aurait-il eu ? would there have been 

Negatively Interrogatively. 

SIMPLE TENSES. 

Pres. N'y a-t-il pas ? is or are there not ? 

Imp. IV' y avait-il pas ? \ ., ■ . •> 

t> * at? * j o \ was or were there not r 
rret. Jyy eut-il pas? ) 

Fut. Ny aura-t-il pas ? will there not be ? 

Cond. iV'y aurait-il pas ? would there not be ? 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Pres. N'y a-t-il pas eu ? has or have there not been ? 

Imp Ny avait-il pas eu ? > ha(J there n0{ feeen > 

rret. JS'y eut-%1 pas eu r \ 

Fut. N'y aura-t-il pas eu ? will there not have been? 

Cond. N'y aurait-il pas eu ? would there not have been ? 

Chst, it is. 

Vest, it is Negatively, 

e'etait ou ce fut, it was Ce n y est pas, it is not 

ce sera, it will be ce ji'etait pas, it was not 

ce seraity'it would be ce ne fut pas, it was not 

que ce soit, that it may be ce ne sera pas, it will not be 

que cefut, that it might be ce ne seraitpas, it would not be 






EXAMPLES OP THE PASSIVE, REFLECTIVE, &C VERBS. 107 



Interrogatively. 
Est ce ? is it ? 
etait-ce ? was it 1 
fut-ce f was it ? 
sera-ce ? will it be 1 
serait-ce ? would it be ? 



Interrogatively Negatively. 
N'est-ce pas ? is it not 1 
n ) etait-ce pas ? was it not 1 
ne fut-ce pas ? was it not 1 
ne sera-ce pas ? will it not be 1 



ne serait-ce pas? 
be? 



would it not 



PASSIVE, REFLECTIVE, &£C. VERBS. 



The following examples 
manner in which the Passive, 
personal verbs are used : 

II ne s* est pas repenti 
il se promene dans le jar din 
je ni'etais repenti 
il s'en rctourne de Paris 
il se deplait dans ce lieu 
comment vous portez-vous 
je me porte tres bien,je vous re- 

mercie 
elle s T est flattie long-temps 



je ne me suis pas tue 
je m'etais flatte 
nous ne nous sommes point 

flattes 
jious nous entre-tuons 
Is s^entre-tuaient 
Is se tuent Vun V autre 
Ifaut s'entr' 'aider., c'est la hi 

de la nature 
Ifaut que je commence cet ou- 

vrage aujourd'hui 
il mefaut de V argent 
Ifaut que vous vendiez votre 

maison 
I nous faut unc maison 
il luifaut un livre 
cela n'est pas comme il faut 
il me faut line nouvelle Gram- 
maire 



are intended to illustrate the 
Reflective, Reciprocal, and Im- 

He has not repented 

he is walking in the garden 

I had repented 

he is returning from Paris 

he does not like that place 

how do you do 1 

very well, I thank you 

she has nattered herself a long 

time 
I have not killed myself 
I had nattered myself 
we have not nattered our- 
selves 
we kill one another 
they killed one another 
they kill one another 
we should help one another, 

it is the law of nature 
I must begin that work to-day 



I want money 

you must sell your house 

we want a house 

he wants a book 

that is not as it should be 

I want a new Grammar 



108 



PRACTICE ON THE REFLECTIVE, &C. VERBS. 



il y a dix milks de Londres a 

Croydon 
il y a une grande difference 

d'dge entre ces deux per- 

sonnes 
il y a des homines qui ne sont 

jamais co?itc?is 
il y aura beau coup de monde 

je suis fdchS contre ltd 

je m'en veux, ou je suis f ache 

contre moi 
je me suis fa die contre elle au- 
jourd'hui, ou j'ai ete fdche 
contre elle avjourcVhui 
elle s'est blesse la tete , 
il s'etait blessS a la tete 

avant votre depart 
il se blessa hier a la tete 
il lui blessa la tete hier 

elle le blessa a la tete hier 
il le blessa a la tete hier 
elle ne s'etait pas habillee 
ne m'habillerai-je pas ? 
ne vous habillercz-vous pas ? 
ne dois-je pas in'habiller ? 
je serais fdche contre lui 
je me serais fdche contre lui 
si j'etais fdche contre vous 
sijem'etais, ou si favais'ete 
fdche contre vous y c'eut ete 
votre faute 
j'en suis fdche 



it is ten miles from London 
to Croydon 

there is a great difference of 
age between these two per- 
sons 

there are (some) men who are 
never satisfied 

there will be a great many 
people 

I am vexed with him 

I am vexed with myself 

I have been vexed with her to- 
day 

she has hurt her (own) head 
he had hurt his (own) head 

before your departure 
he hurt his head yesterday 
he hurt his, or her head yester- 
day 
she hurt his head yesterday 
he hurt his head yesterday 
she had not dressed herself 
shall I not dress myself? 
will you not dress yourself? 
am I not to dress myself? 
I should be vexed with him 
T should be vexed with him 
if I were angry with you 
if I had been angry with you, 
it would have been your 
fault 
I am sorry for it 



PRACTICE ON THE REFLECTIVE, RECIPROCAL, AND IM- 
PERSONAL VERBS. 

Pres. lam reposing (sereposer.) lam not vexed ,(sefdcher.) 
I do not walk (sepromcner.) Do I boast ? (le vanter.) Thou 
dost not care, (se soucier.) Dost thou not mock? (semoquer.) 
Thou dost rejoice, (se rejouir.) Dost thou behave? (see com- 



REFLECTIVE VERBS. 109 

porter.) It concerns, (importer.) Does he not repent 1 (se re- 
pentir.) We are accustomed, (s^accoutumer.) Are we mis- 
taken 1 (se tromper.) We are not grown rich, (s'enrichir.) 
Are we not disposed ? (se disposer.) You depart, (Y eloigner.) 

Imp. I was resting myself, (sereposer.) Thou wast dress- 
ing thyself, (s'habiller.) Did it grow cold ? (se refroider.) It 
did not grow warm, (s^ehauffer.) Did he stop ? (s^arreter.) 
He did not lie down, (se coucher.) She wondered, (s'etonner.) 
It did not run out, (s'ecouler.) Did we wake 1 (s^eveiller.) We 
were settled, (s'etablir.) They were reunited, (se reunir.) 
Did they surrender? (se rendre.) 

Fret. Was I not undressing myself? (se deshabiller. ) I 
was contented, (se contenter.) Didst thou behave (se corn- 
porter) well in the last war 1 Wheat was sold (se vendre) 
yesterday for a dollar a bushel. Did we not get rid 1 
(se debarrasser ) Did you not inquire (V informer) after me 
yesterday ? These children did not stop one minute, (s'ar- 
reter.J 

Fut. I shall rise early, (se lever.) Thou wilt rejoice (se 
rejouir) at this good news. It will rain, (pleuvoir.) Will it 
snow? (neiger.) It will not be hot, (faire chaud.) Will it not 
be warm? She will not walk, (se promener.) We shall in- 
terfere, (se melcr.) You will not make haste, (se hater.) 
They will not quarrel together, (s'enire-cpiereller.) 

Cond. I should agree, (s^accorder.) Thou wouldst grow 
weak, (s'affaiblir.) Would he not make his escape, (s'echap' 
per.) Would she not be informed, (V informer.) We should 
repent, (se repentir.) You would be lost, (se perdrc.) They 
would fancy, (sHmaginer.) 

Imper. Do thou apply, (s^appliqucr.) Let him walk, (se 
promener.) Let her not fancy, (s'imaginer.) Let us be 
ready, (se disposer.) Sit (you) down, (s'asseoir.) Let them, f. 
not be afflicted, (s'affliger.) Let them m. help one another, 
(s^enir aider.) 

Subj. Pres. I may be grieved, (s'affliger.) Thou mayest 
endeavour (s'efforcer) to please your father. He may not 
overheat himself, (s'echaujfer.) We may not return, (s'en 
10 



110 DEFLECTIVE VERBS. 

retourner.) You may fly away, (s'en voler.) They may not 
strike each other, (s\ntre-f rapper.) 

Pret. That he might not embark this week, (s'embarquer.) 
That thou mightest not ruin thyself, (se miner.) He might 
not shake off, (s'affranchir.) We might not launch forth, (se 
repandre.) You might not meddle with my affairs, (se meler.) 
They might excuse themselves, (s'ezcuser.) 

PRACTICE ON THE COMPOUNDS OF THE SAME VERBS. 

Ind. Pres. I have not lain in bed too long. 1 have been 
vexed at what he said. Have I not walked every day ? Have 
I boasted ? Thou hast cared for that. Hast thou laughed at 
us ? Hast thou not rejoiced with thy relations? Has he not 
repented of his conduct? We have been accustomed to la- 
bor. Have we been mistaken ? You have not departed 
from him. Have they resigned their places ? 

Imp. Had I not inquired after your father and your moth- 
er ? It had not been warm. They f. had not been dressed. 
Had they not wounded themselves. The soldiers had sur- 
rendered. 

Pret. I, f. had not been contented. He had behaved with 
more resolution. You had not exhausted yourself. They 
had been deceived. 

Fut. Shall I not hide myself? Will it not have rained 1 
You will have thought yourselves able to conquer. They will 
not have made a mistake on that subject. Will they not have 
meddled with our affairs. 

Cond. Wouldst thou not have exposed thyself? We should 
not have embarked so soon. Would you not have vexed 
yourself? They would not have struck each other ? They 
would have fancied themselves to be very clever. 

Subj. Pres. I may not have stopped. He may have been 
rejoiced. She may not have intended to go and see you. 
They may not have quarrelled together. They may not have 
been grieved. 

Pret. I might have fainted away at that sight. He might 
have got rid of his prejudices. We might have shaken off that 
odious yoke. They might have launched forth into abuse. 



FIRST CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



too long, trop long tents 
in bed, au lit 
at what he, de ce qu'il 
every day, tons les jours 
for, en or de ; that, cela 
at, de ; with avec 
book, livre, ra. 
conduct, conduite, f. 
labor, travail, m. 
from him, rfc /mi 
place, emploi, m. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. Ill 

soldier, soldat, m. ; in, dans 

of him, efe /mi 

subject, sujet, m. 

to be, etre 

very, 6f€w; clever, habile 

to grieve, sechagriner 

at, d ; sight, u«e, f. 

prejudice, prejuge, 

yoke, joug, ra. 

odious, odieux ; into, c 

abuse, invectives, f. pi. 



m. 



en 



<£onjttflatum of tlje Xrresular ITarbs. 

FIRST CONJUGATION. 
1. Aller, fo go, neuter, with etre. 



Infinitive. Aller, 


alia at, alle. 








Indie. 












Pres. Je vais, 


vas, 


va; 


allons. 


allez, 


vont. 


Imp. J'all-ais, 


ais, 


ait, 


all-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. J'all-ai, 


as, 


a; 


all-ames, 


ates, 


erent. 


Faf. J'i -rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


i -rons, 


rez, 


ront 


Cond. J'i -rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. o J'aill-e, 


rats, 


rait; 


i -rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


es, 


e; 


all-ions, 


iez, 


aillent. 


Pret. c*J'all -asse, 


asses. 


, at; 


all-assions 


, assiez. 


assent. 



Imper. Va, qu'il aille ; allons, allez, qu'ils aillent. 

So conjugate 
S'en aller, to go away, reflective verb, with etre. 
Infinitive. S'en aller, s'en allant, s'en alle. 
Indie. Pres. Je m'en vais, tu t'en vas, il s'en va; nous nous en allons, 

vous vous en»allez, ils s'en vont. 
Imper. Je m'en allais, &c. &c. 

2. Envoyer, to send, active, with avoir. It is regular ex- 
cept in the indicative future and conditional. 



Fut. J'enver-rai, ras, ra; 
Cond. J'enver-rais, rais, rait 



enver-rons, 
enver-rions, 



rez, 
riez, 



ront. 
raient. 



So conjugate 
Rexvoyer, to send away, to send bach. 



112 



SECOND CONJUGATION OF IRREGUL4 R VERBS. 



PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING VERBS. 



Do I go ? 

Does he not go ? 

Would he not send back ? 

Would he go away ? 

He might send. 

He is gone to the city. 



He shall not go. 
We will send away. 
We are gone away. 
That they might be gone. 
They will be gone away. . 

He went away yesterday. We 

will send him back to-morrow. Let him go if he pleases. 

He would have sent to seek me. He is gone away without 
leave. Where will they go r 

City, ville, f. to seek me, me cliercher 

if he pleases, s 7 il lui plait leave, permission 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 

1. Acquerir, to acquire, to get, to purchase, active, with 
avoir. 



Infinitive. Acquerir, 


acqu 


erant, 


acquis. 






Indie. 












Pres. J*acqui -ers, 


ers, 


ert; 


acque -rons, 


rez, 


acquierent. 


Imp. J'acquer -ais, 


ais, 


ait"; 


acque -rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Pret. J'acqu -is, 


is, 


it; 


acqu -lmes, 


ites, 


irent. 


Fut. J'acquer -rai, 


ras, 


ra ; 


acquer-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. J'acquer -rais, 


rais, 


rait ; 


acquer -rions, 


riez, 


raient 


Subj. 












Pres. v J'acquier-e, 


es, 


e; 


acquer -ions, 


iez, 


acquierent. 


Pret. crj'acqu -isse, 


isses, 


it; 


acqui -ssions 


, ssiez, 


ssent. 



Imper. Acquiers, qu*il acquiere; acqueions, acquerez, qu'ils acquierent. 
So conjugate 
Conquerir, to conquer. 
Querir, tofetchy used only in the infinitive. 
Reconquerir, toreconquer^ used only in the participle past* 
S'enquerir, to inquire. 
Requerir, to require. 

2. Bouillir, to boil, neuter with etre. 






Infinitive. Bouillir, bouillant, bouilli. 

Indie. 
Pres. Je bous, bous, bout; bouill-ons, 

Imp. Je bouill -ais, ais, ait; bouill-ionsj 



ez, 
iez» 



ent. 
aieat* 



SECOND CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



113 



Fret. Je bouill -is, is, it ; bouill-imes, ites, irent. 

Flit. Je bouilli-rai, ras, ra; bouilli-rons, rez, ront. 

Cond. Je bouilli-rais, rais, rait ; bouilli-rions, riez, raient. 

Subj. 

Pres. o Je bouill -e, es, e ; bouill -ions, iez, ent. 

Pret. o-Je bouill -isse, isses, it; bouilli-ssions, ssiez, ssent. 

Imper. Bouille, qu'il bouille ; bouillons, bouillez, qu'ils bouillent. 

So conjugate 
Rebouillir, to boil again; but both verbs are generally used 
with /aire; as, faites bouillir cette viande, boil that meat. 
Faites rebouillir cette eau, boil that water again. 

3. Courir, to run, neuter and active, with etre and avoir. 



Infinitive. Courir, 


courant, couru. 






Indie. 












Pres. Je cours, 


cours, 


court]; 


cour-ons, 


ez, 


cnt. 


Imp. Je cour-ais, 


ais, 


ait; 


cour-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je cour-us, 


us, 


ut; 


cour-umes, 


utes, 


urent. 


Fut. Je cour-rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


cour-roas, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je cour-rais, 


rais, 


rait ; 


cour-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Subj. 












Pres. o Je cour-e, 


es, 


e; 


cour-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. u-Je cour-usse, 


usses, 


ut; 


cour-ussions, 


ussiez, 


ussent. 



Imper. Cours, qu'il coure ; courons, courez, qu'ils courent. 



So conjugate 

Parcourir, to run over. 
Recourir, to have recourse to. 
Secourir, to succour. 



Accourir, to run to. 
Coxcourir, to concur. 
Discourir, to discourse. 
Encourir, to incur. 

Accourir takes both avoir and etre in its compounds. 



4. Cueillir, to gather, to pick, active, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Cueillir, 


cueillant, cueilli. 






Indie. 










Pres. Je cueill -e, 


es, 


e ; cueill -ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je cueill -ais, 


ais, 


ait; cueill -ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je cueill -is, 


is, 


it ; cueill -irnes, 


ites, 


irent. 


Fat. Je cueille-rai, 


ras, 


ra ; eueille-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je cueille-rais, 
Subj. 

Pres. o Je cueill -e, 


rais, 


rait; cueille-rions, 


[riez, 


raient. 


es, 


e ; cueill -ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. crJe cueill -isse, 


isses, 


it; cueill -issions, 


issiez 


issent 



Imper. Cueille, qu'il cueille ; cueillons, cueillez, qu'ils cueillent. 
10* 



114 



SECOND CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERES. 



So conjugate 
Accueillir, to make welcome. Recueillir, to colled, 

5. Dormir, to sleep, neuter, with etre. 



Infinitive. Dormir, 


dormant, 


dormi. 






Indie. 












Pres. Je dors, 


dors, 


dort 


; dorm -ons,. 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je dorm -ais, 


ais, 


ait ; 


dorm -ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je dorm -is, 


is, 


it; 


dorm -imes, 


ites, 


irent- 


Put. Je dormi-rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


dormi-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Oond. Je dormi-rars, 

Sub}. 
Pres. <» Je dorm -e, 


rais, 


rait 


; dormi-rions, 


riez, 


raient- 


es, 


e; 


dorm -ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. crJe dorm -isse, 


isses, 


it; 


dormi -ssions 


ssiez, 


ssent. 



Imper. Dors, qu'il dorme ; dorm-ons, dormez, qu'its dorment. 
So conjugate 

endormir, to make sleep. se rendormir, to fall asleep 

s'endormiRj to fall asleep* again, 

sortir, to go out. resortir, to go out again. 



PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING VERBS. 



Boil it. 

He has boiled it again. 

Will they acquire I 1 

He will not have conquered. 

Have they not reconquered ? 

Will he require it? 

Let him run. 

Will he not sleep ? 

He will fall asleep again. 

He might go out again. 



That he may have concurred. 

Would he not have discoursed? 

He has run over it. 

We will not have recourse. 

That he might succour. 

Let us gather. 



He has collected. 

He has gone to sleep. 

He is gone out. 

Would he not have gone out. 

I am gathering some flowers. He would have picked some 
roses. Have you welcomed your friends ? They have in- 
curred the anger of their father. They would have dis- 
coursed on that subject. We will succour the unfortunate. 
He would concur with his friends. They have run over the 
book. You will have recourse to bad means. We will boil 
some vegetables. He has not gone out to-day. He would 
have reconquered the enemy. Let them acquire knowledge. 



SECOND CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



113 



Flower, fleur, f. 
rose, rose, f. 
friend, ami, m. 
anger, colere, f. 
subject, sujet, m. 
unfortunate, ma.lheure.ax 



book, livre, m. 
means, moyens, no. 
vegetables, legumes, f. 
enemy, ennemi, m. 
knowledge, connoissances, f. 



6. Faillir, to fail, to be near, neuter and defective verb, 
with avoir, used only in the preterite definite and the com- 
pound tenses. 

Infinitive. Faillir, failli. 
Pret. def. Je faill-is, is, it ; faill-imes, ites, irent. 
Faire faillite is generally used instead of faillir. 

7. Fuir, to jly, to shun, active and neuter verb, with avoir* 



Infinitive. Fuir, 


fuyan 


, fui. 






Indie. 










Pres. Je fu -is, 


is, 


it; 


fuy-ons, ez, 


fuient 


Imp. Je fuy-ais, 


ais, 


ait ; 


fuy-ions, iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je fu -is, 


is, 


it; 


fu -imes, ites, 


irent. 


Fut. Je fui -rai, 


ras, 


ra ; 


fui -rons, rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je fui -rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. Je fui -e, 


rais, 


rait; 


fui -rions, riez, 


raient. 


es, 




fuy-ions, iez, 


fuient. 


Pret. §«Je fu -isse, 


isses, it ; 


fu -issions, issiez, 


issent. 


Imper. Fuis, qu' 


ilfuie ; 


fuyons 


fuyez, qu'ils fuient. 








So conjugate 






S'enfuir, 


to run away. 





8. Mentir, to lie, neuter verb, with avoir. 
Infinitive. Mentir, rnentant, menti. 



Indie. 










Pres. Je men -s, 


s, t; 


merit -ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je ment -ais, 


ais, ait ; 


ment -ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je merit -is, 


is, it ; 


ment -imes, 


ites, 


irent. 


Fut. Je menti-rai, 


ras, ra ; 


menti-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je menti-rais, 


rais, rait ; 


menti-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Subj. 










Pres. a Je raent-e, 


es, e ; 


ment -ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. 5"Je merit -isse, 


isses, it ; 


ment -issions, 


issiez, 


issent. 


Imper. Mens, qu'il mente ; mentons, mentez, qu 


ils mentent. 





116 



SECOND CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS, 



So conjugate 
dementir, to give the lie. pressentir, to foresee, 

sentir, to smell, to perceive. ressentir, to resent. 

se repentir, to repent. 



consentir, to consent. 



9. Mourir, to die, neuter verb, with itre. 



Infinitive. Mourir, 


mourant, 


mort. 






Indie. 












Pres. Je meur-s, 


s, 


t; 


mour-ons, 


ez, 


meurent. 


Imp. Je mour-ais, 


ais, 


ait ; 


mour-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je mour-us, 


us, 


ut; 


mour-umes, 


utes, 


urent. 


Fut. Je mour-rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


mour-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je mour-rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. <o Je meur-e, 


rais, 


rait 


; moui-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


es, 


G J 


mour-ions, 


iez, 


meurent 


Pret. crJe mour-usse, 


usses 


,ut; 


mour-ussions, 


ussiez, 


ussent. 



Imper. Meurs, qu'il meure ; mourons, mourez, qu'ils meurent. 

So conjugate 
Se mourir, to be dying. 

10. Offrir, to offer, active verb, with avoir. 
Infi?titive. Offrir, offrant, offert. 



Indie. 












Pres. J'offi-e, 


es, 


e ; 


offr -ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. J'offr-ais, 


ais, 


ait ; 


offr -ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. J'offr-is, 


is, 


it; 


offr -imes, 


ites, 


irent. 


Fut. J'offri-rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


offii-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. J'offri-rais, 


rais, 


rait ; 


offri-rions, 


riez, 


raient 


Subj. 












Pres. v J'offr-e, 


es, 


e; 


offr -ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. o-J'offr-isse, 


isses, 


it; 


offr-issions, 


issiez, 


issent. 


Imper. Offre, qu 


il offre ; 


offrons, offrez, qu' 


ils offrent. 





ouvrir, to open. 
couvrir, to cover. 



So conjugate 

de couvrir, to discover. 
recouvrir, to cover again, 






11. Partir, to set out, neuter verb, with etre. 
Infinitive. Partir, partant, parti. 



Indie. 












Pres. Je par -s 


s, 


t; 


part-ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je part -ais, 


ais, 


ait; 


part-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je part -is, 


is, 


it; 


part-imes, 


ites, 


irent. 



SECOND CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



117 



Fut. Je parti-rai, 
Cond. Je parti-rais, 


ras, ra ; 
rais, rait ; 


parti -rons, 
parti-rions, 


rez, 
riez, 


ront. 
raient 


Subj. 
Pres. a Je part -e, 
Pret. §*Je part -isse, 


es, e ; 

isses, it; 


part -ions, 
part -issions, 


iez, 

issiez, 


ent. 
issent. 


Imper. Pars, qu'il 


parte ; partons, 


partez, qu'ils 


partent. 





So conjugate 
Repartir, to set out again. 

PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING VERBS. 



Shall I offer it to you 1 
Let us offer them to him. 
Have you offered it to her 
I would not offer them. 
I will set out. 
Why do you not set out 1 
Set out. 
shall set out. 



I fly him. 

Do not fly her. 

Let us fly. 

He has not lied. 

Let us never lie. 

We shall die. 

Let us die. 

I offer it to you. 

He was near falling into the snare. This great man has 
failed once. Your brother flies from me. I fled when they 
set the city on fire. Why does he lie so 1 These flowers 
will soon die, if you do not water them. He died like a hero. 
I offer you these figs. Shall I offer you these grapes ? Let 
him offer us something to eat. He has discovered his fault. 
She recovered her fortune. Why do you not open that box 1 
Your brother and sister have set out without an umbrella. 
He will set out again to-morrow. 



Snare, 



piege, m. 



set the city on fire, incen- 

diaient la ville 
flower, jleur, f. 
to water, arroscr 



grapes, raisins, m. 
fault, faute, f. 
fortune, fortune, f. 
box, boite, f. 
umbrella, parapluie, m. 



12. Rev^tir, to invest, to give other clothes, to bestow, ac- 



tive verb, with avoir. 

Infinitive. Revetir, revetant, revetu. 

Indie. 

Pres. Je rev-ets, £ts, et ; revet-ons 
Imp. Je revet-ais, ais, ait ; revet-ions, 
Pret. Je revet-is, is, it ; revet-imes, 



ez, 


ent. 


iez, 


aient. 


ites, 


irent. 



118 



SECOND CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



Fut. Je reveti-rai, ras, 


ra ; reveti-rons, 




rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je reveti-rais, rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. o Je revet -e, es, 


rait ; reveti-rions, 




riez, 


raient. 


e ; revet -ions, 




iez, 


ent. 


Pret. SrJe revet -isse, isses, 


it ; revet -issions 


• 


issiez, 


issent. 


Imper. Revets, qu'il revete ; 


revetons, revetez, 


qu 


'ils revetent. 



v£tir, to clothe. 



So conjugate 

devetir, to undress. 



se vetir, to dress one's self. se devetir, to divest one's self. 



13. Servir, to serve, to help, active verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Servir, 


servanl 


, servi. 






Indie. 












Pres. Je ser -s, 


B f 


t; 


serv -ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je serv -ais, 


ais, 


ait ; 


serv -ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je serv -is, 


is, 


it; 


serv -imes, 


ites, 


irent. 


Fut. Je servi-rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


servi-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je servi-rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. m Je serv -e, 


rais, 


rait; 


servi-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


es, 


e; 


serv -ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. trJe serv -isse, 


isses, 


it; 


serv -issions, 


issiez, 


issent. 


Imper. Sers, qu'il serve ; servons, 


servez, qu'ils servent. 





So conjugate 
Se servir, to make use. 
Desservir, to do an ill office, to clear the table. 

14. Tenir, to hold, to keep, active verb, with avoir. 

Infinitive. Tenir, tenant, tenu. 
Indie. 



Pres. Je tien 


-s, s, t ; 


ten 


-ons, ez, 


tiennent 


Imp. Je ten 


-ais, ais, ait; 


ten 


-ions, iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je tin 


-s, s, t ; 


tin 


-mes, tes, 


tinrent. 


Fut. Je tiend 


-rai, ras, ra ; 


tiend 


-rons, rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je tiend 

Subj. 

Pres. % Je tienn 


-rais, rais, rait; 


tiend 


-rions, riez, 


raient. 


-e, es, e ; 


ten 


-ions, iez, 


tiennent. 


Pret. ^ Je tin 


-sse, sses, tint; 


tin 


-ssions, ssiez 


, ssent. 



Imper. Tiens, qu'il tienne , tenons, tenez, qu'ils tiennent. 



So conjugate 



dEtenir, to detain. 
obtenir, to obtain. 
eetenir, to retain. 



contenir, to contain. 
soutenir, to sustain. 
s'abstenir, to abstain. 



SECOND CONJUGATION OP IRREGULAR VERBS. 



119 



maintenir, to maintain. 
extretexjr, to entertain. 



appartexir, to belong. 



venir, to come. 
ave nir, to happen. 
deveniRj to become. 
reverie, to come back . 
parvemr, to attain. 
prevexir, to prevent. 
provexir, to proceed from. 
coxyexir, to agree. 
subve.vir, to relieve. 
survexir, to eome unexpectedly. 



redevexir, to become again. 

mesavexir, to succeed ill. 

circonvexir, to circumvent. 

coxtrevexir, to contravene. 

deprevexir, to unprepossess. 

disconvexir, to disagree. 

se souvenir, ) . , 

7 } to remember. 
SE ressouvemir, ) 

ixtervenir, to intervene. 



15. Tressaillir, to start, to leap for, neuter and defective 
verb, with avoir. 

Infinitive. Tressaillir, tressaillant, tressailli. 

Indie. 
Pres. Je tiessaill -e, 
Imp. Je tressaill -ais, 
Pret. Je tressaill -is, 
Fut. Je ttessailli-rai, 
Cond. Je tressailli-rais, rais 

Subj. 
Pres. o Je tressaill -e, 
Pret. S-Je tressaill -isse 

Xo Imperative. 



es, 


e; 


tressaill -ons, 


ez, 


ent, 


ais, 


ait ; 


tressaill -ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


is, 


it; 


tressaill -imes, 


ites, 


irent. 


ras, 


ra : 


tressailli-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


rais, 


rait; 


tressailli-iions, 


riez, 


raient. 


es, 


e; 


tressaill -ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


isses, 


it; 


tressaill -issions, 


issiez, 


issent. 



saillir. to project. 



So conjugate 

assaillir to assault. 



PRACTICE ON 

I invest you 

do not clothe me 

he does not serve me 

shall I help you ? 

I will make use of him 

he does me an ill office 

I will hold you 

I detained him 

he belongs to me 

let him come 



THE PRECEDING VERBS. 

he disagrees 

that will intervene 

it proceeds from him 

he will remember 

he came unexpectedly 

he has obtained it 

he will attain to it 

you started 

let him start 

you will come back 



120 



THIRD CONJUGATION OP IRREGULAR VERBS. 



The King will invest that ambassador with extraordinary 
power. If I were rich enough I would clothe all the poor of 
my country. Shall I help you to a piece of beef. Help 
yourself to the wing of a chicken. He has made use of all 
his authority. My enemies have done me an ill office. He 
will support his character. They have detained all my means. 
That house belongs to my neighbour. Why does he not come 
to see me 1 He came yesterday. He will come to-morrow. 
Let him come when he pleases. He disagrees to all we have 
said. Keep your word. I will keep my promise. Much 
time will intervene. All those crimes proceed from ignorance. 
He arrived unexpectedly yesterday. He will obtain the price 
if he labors. The old man started for joy. They have as- 
saulted the city three times. 



Ambassador, ambassadeur, m. 

power, pouvoir, m. 

poor, pauvres, adj. 

country, pays, m. 

piece, morceau, m. 

beef, bceuf, m. 

wing, aile, f- 

chicken, poulef, m. 

author itv, autorite, f. 

enemies, cnnemis, m. 

character, caractere, m. 



means, moyens, m. 
house, maison. f. 
neighbour, voisin, m. 
when he pleases, quand il lui 

plaira 
word, parole, f. 
promise, promesse, f. 
price, prix, m. 
old man, vieillard, m. 
joy, joie, f. 
city, ville, f. 






THIRD CONJUGATION. 

1. Dechoir, to decay, neuter and defective verb, with avoir 
and etre. 



OlS, 

us, 
ras, 
mis, 



oics, 
usses, 



oit; 
ut; 
ra ; 
rait : 

oie ; 
ut; 



dechoy-ons, 
dech -limes, 
decher -rons, 
rdecher-ions, 



ez, 
tites, 
rez, 
riez, 



dechoient. 
urent. 
rant, 
raient. 



Infinitive, Dechoir, dechu. 

Indie. 

Pres. Je dech -ols, 
Pret. Je dech -us, 
Fut. Je decher-rai, 
Cond. Je decher-rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. % Je dech -oie, 
Pret. ^Je dech -usse 
No Imperative. 

■ When this verb expresses the state of the subject, it takes 
etre, to be, — Example. lis sont dechus de leurs privileges, they 
have lost their privileges. 



dechoy-ions, iez, dechoient. 
dech -ussions, ussiez,ussent. 






THIRD CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



121 



When it denotes the action of declining, it takes avoir, to 
have. — Example. Depuis ce moment il a dechu dejour en jour, 
from that moment he has declined every day. 

e choir, to happen, to expire, defective verb, is used as fol- 
lows : 

» 

Infinitive. Echoir, echeant, echu. 

Indie. 
Pres. II echoit. 
Fret. 11 echut. 
Fut. II echerra. 
Cond. II echerrait. 

Subj. 
Pret.' Qu'il echut. 

2. Mouvoir, to move, active verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Mouvoi 


r, mouvant, 


rau. 






indie. 












Pres. Je meu -s, 


s, 


t; 


mouv-ons, 


ez, 


meuvent. 


Imp. Je mouv-ais, 


ais, 


ait ; 


mouv-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je mu -s, 


s j 


t; 


m -times, 


utes, 


urent. 


Fut. Je mouv-rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


mouv-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je mouv-rais, 


rais, 


rait 


mouv-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Subj. 












Pres. a Je meuv-e, 


es, 


e; 


mouv-ions, 


iez, 


meuvent 


Pret. irJe tn -usse, 


usses 


ut; 


muss -ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Imper. Meus, qu'il- 


meuve 


; mouvons, mouvez, 


qu'ils 


meuvent. 



So conjugate 

e mouvoir, to stir up, to move. Promouvoir, to promote, 
used in the present of the infinitive and in its compound 



tenses. 



3. Pouvoir, to be able, active and defective verb, with avoir 



Infinitive. Pouvoir, 


pouvant, pu. 










Indie. 












Pres. Je puis or peux 


, peux, peut ; 


pouv 


-ons, 


ez, 


peuvent 


Imp. Je pouv-ais, 


ais, ait ; 


pouv 


-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je pus, 


pus, put ; 


pu 


-mes, 


tes, 


purent. 


Fut. Je pour-rai, 


ras, ra ; 


pour 


-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je pour-rais, 


rais, rait ; 


pour 


•rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Subj. 












Pres. § Je pui -sse, 


sses, sse ; 


puiss 


-ions, " 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. =rJe pusse, 


pusses, put ; 


puss 


-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


No Imperative. 













11 



122 



THIRD CONJUGATION OP IRREGULAR VERBS. 



4. S'asseoir, to sit down, reflected verb, with etre. 



Infinitive 
Lidic. 
Pres. Je m'ass -ieds 
Je m'assey-ais, 
Je m'ass -is, 
Je m'assie-rai, 
Je m'assie-rais, 



S'asseoir, s'asseyant, assis. 



Imp. 
Pret. 
Fut. 
Cond. 

Subj. 
Pres. o Je m'assey-e, 
Pret. crJe m'ass -isse, 

Imper. Assieds-toi, qu'il 
s'asseyent. 



ieds, 

ais, 

is, 

ras, 

rais, 

es, 

isses, 



ied 

ait; 

it; 

ra; 

rait: 

e; 

it; 



assey 

assey 

ass 

assie 

assie 



-ons, 

-ions, 

-imes, 

-rons, 

-rions, 



ez, 
iez, 

ites, 

rez, 

riez, 



assey -ions, iez. 



ent. 

aient. 

irent. 

ront. 

raient. 

ent. 



3s -issions, lssiez, issent. 

s'asseye; asseyons-nous, asseyez-vous, qu'ils 



So conjugate 

Se rasseoir, to sit down again. Seoir, to become, to Jit, 
which is used only in the third person of the simple tenses. 



ludic. 
Pers. 11 sied, 
Imp. II seyait, 
Fut. 11 siera, 
Cond. 11 sieiait, 



ils sieent. 
ils seyaient. 
ils sieront. 
ils sieraient. 



PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING VERBS. 



He decays 

they will decay 

let them move 

that they might promote it 

they have stirred it up 

I cannot 

he could not 



she sat down 
he sits down 
he has sat down 
it will become him 
they sit down again 
sit down 



That tree will soon decay. I do not know why it decays 
so quick. I have promoted his election. I do not move. He 
moves. I cannot do it. He can. Why can you not 1 I shall 
never be able to please him. Give me a chair to sit down. 
The lady has sat down. They have sat down again, because 
you have invited them. 



tree, arbre, m. 
quick, vite 



chair, chaise, f. 



THIRD CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Savour, to know, active verb, with avoir. 



123 



Infinitive. Savoir, 


sachant, su. 








Indie. 












Pres. Je sai -s, 


s, 


t; 


sat -ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je sav -ais, 


ais, 


ait; 


sav -ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Fret. Je su -s, 


s> 


t; 


su -mes, 


tes, 


surent. 


Fut. Je sau -rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


sau -rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je sau -rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. oJe sach-e, 


rais, 


rait; 


sau -rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


es; 


e A ; 


sach-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. cJe suss-e, 


es, 


sut; 


suss-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 



Imper. Sache, qu'il sache ; sachons, sachez, qu'ils sachent. 

Savoir, to know, is said of sciences or things which are 
studied and learnt ; as, 

Savez-vous le Latin ? cette nouvelle ? cette legon ? Do you 
know Latin ? this news 2 this lesson 1 

Connaitre, to know, is said of persons and of the objects of 
our senses ; as, 

Connaissez-vous ce Monsieur ? ce pays ? Do you know that 
gentleman ? that country ? 

6. Valoir, to be worth, neuter and defective verb, with 
avoir. 



Infinitive. Valoir, 


valant, valu. 








Indie. 












Pres. Je vau -x, 


x, 


t; 


val -ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je val -ais, 


ais, 


ait; 


val -ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je val -us, 


us, 


ut; 


val -times, 


utes, 


urent. 


Fut. Je vaud-rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


vaud-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je vaud -rais, 

Subj. 
Pres.oJe vaill -e, 


rais, 


rait ; 


vaud-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


es, 


e; 


val -ions, 


iez, 


vaillent 


Pret. cJe val -usse 


, usses 


, ut; 


val -ussions, 


ussiez, 


ussent. 



Imper. Vaux, qu'il vaille ; valons, valez, qu'ils vaillent. 

So conjugate 

Pre valoir, to prevail, which makes in the pres. subj. 
prevale. 

7. Voir, to see, active verb, with avoir. 

Infinitive. Voir, voyant, vu. 

Indie. 
Pres. Je voi -s, s, t ; 

Imp. Je voy-ais, ais, ait 
Pret. Je vi -s, s, t ; 



voy 


-ons, 


ez, 


voient. 


voy 


-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


V 


-imes, 


ites, 


irent. 



124 



THIRD CONJUGBTION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



Fut. Je ver -rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


ver 


-ions, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je ver -rais, 


rais, 


rait ; 


ver 


-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Sub}. 
Pies. § Je voi -e, 


es, 


e ; 


voy 


-ions, 


iez, 


voient. 


Pret. °* Je v -isse, 


isses, 


it; 


V 


-issions, 


issiez. 


issent. 



Imper. Vois, qu'il voie ; voyons, voyez, qu'ils voient. 

So conjugate 
entrevoir, to have a glimpsco f. pourvoir, to provide. 



pre voir, to foresee. 



prevoir, to see again. 



Pourvoir, and prevoir make their future and conditional in 
oirai and oirais, (je prevoirai, "rais.) 

Pourvoir has its preterite tenses in us and usse, (je 
pourvus, -usse.) 



8. Vouloir, to be willing, to wish, to choose, active and 
defective verb, with avoir. 

Infinitive. Vouloir, voulant, voulu. 
Indie. 
Pres. Je veu -x, 
Imp. Je voul -ais, 
Pret. Je voul -us, 
Fut. Je voud -rai, 
Cond. Je voud -rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. v Je veuill-e, 
Pret. crJe voul -usse, 

No Imperative. 



x, 


t; 


voul -ons, 


ez, 


veulent. 


ais, 


ait; 


voul -ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


us, 


ut; 


voul -umes, 


utes, 


urent. 


ras, 


ra ; 


voud-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


rais, 


rait j 


voud-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


es, 


e ; 


voul -ions, 


iez, 


veuillent 


usses, 


ut; 


voul -ussions, 


ussiez, 


ussent. 



PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING VERBS. 



I know it not 
he has known it 
you shall know it 
he is worth nothing 
he will not prevail 
let him not prevail 
would you wish it ? 
they do not wish it 
I do not see you 



have you caught a glimpse of 

him 1 
has he not foreseen it 1 
have you not seen him again 1 
will you not see him 1 
I do not wish it 
I wished it 
I choose it 



He does not know his lesson. Do you know the news ? 
You never shall know it, if I am able to hinder it. He never 
will be worth a dollar. They have not prevailed against their 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OP IRREGULAR VERBS. 



125 



enemies. Would you choose it, if you could 1 They have 
not wished to see me since the last week. I caught a glimpse 
of the house, in entering the wood. He foresaw all the mis- 
fortunes of his country. He will see his friends again, but he 
will not see his father. He does not wish it. I should wish 
to come, if I could; but it is impossible. 

Lesson, lecon, f. week, semaine, f. 

news, nouvelles, f. wood, bois, m. 

to hinder, empecher misfortune, malheur, m. 

dollar, piastre, f. country, patrie, f. 
enemies, cnnemis, m. 

FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

1. Absoudre, to absolve, active and defective verb, with 
avoir. 

Infinitive. Absoudre, absolvant, absous or absout. 
Indie. 



sout ; absolv -ons, 



ra; 
rait 



absolv -ions, 

absoud-rons, 
absoud-rions, 

absolv -ions, 



ez, 
iez, 



rez, 
riez, 



ent. 
aient. 



Pres. J'ab -sous, sous 
Imp. J'absolv -ais, ais, 
Pret. is wanting. 
Fut. J'absoud-rai, ras, 
Cond. J'absoud-rais, rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. Quej'absolv-e, es, 
Pret. is wanting. 

Imper. Absous, qu'il absolve ; absolvons, absolvez, qu'ils absolvent 



ront. 
raient. 



ent. 



So conjugate 

Dissoudre, to dissolve. Resoudre, to resolve, which diners 
in the following tenses : 

Past Part. Resolu. 
Pret. Je resol-us, us, ut ; resol-umes, utes, urent. 
Subj. Pret. Que je resol-usse, usses, ut ; resol-ussions, ussiez, ussent. 

Soudre, to solve, is used in the infinitive only. 



2. Battre, to beat, active verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Battre, battant, battu. 

Indie. 

Pres. Je ba -ts, ts, t ; batt-ons, 

Imp. Je batt-ais, ais, ait ; batt-ions, 

Pret. Je batt-is, is, it; batt-imes, 

Fut. Je batt-rai, ras, ra ; batt-rons, 

Cond. Je batt-rais, rais, rait; batt-rions, 
11* 



ez, 


ent. 


iez, 


aient. 


ites, 


irent. 


rez, 


ront. 


riez, 


raient 



126 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



Subj. 
Pres.v Je batt-e, es, e; batt-ions, iez, ent. 

Pret. crJe batt-isse, isses, it ; batt-issions, issiez, issent 

Imper. Bats, qu'il batte ; battons, battez, qu'ils battent 

So conjugate 

Abattre, to pull down. Rebattre, to beat again* 

Combattre, to fight. S'ebattre, to be merry. 

Debattre, to debate. Se debattre, to struggle, 
Rabattre, to abate. 

3. Boire, to drink, active verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Boire, 


buvant, bu. 








Indie. 










Pres. Je boi -s, 


s, t; 


buv-ons, 


ez, 


boivent 


Imp. Je buv-ais, 


ais, ait ; 


buv-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je bu -s, 


s, t; 


b -times, 


utes, 


urent. 


Fut. Je boi -rai, 


ras, ra ; 


boi -rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je boi -rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. a> Je boiv-e, 


rais, rait j 


boi -rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


es, e; 


buv -ions, 


iez, 


boivent. 


Pret. o-Je b -usse, 


usses, Ut ; 


buss-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 



Imper. Bois, qu'il boive ; buvons, buvez, qu'ils boivent. 
4. Conclure, to conclude, active verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Conclure, 


concluant, 


conclu. 






Indie. 










Pres. Je con -clus, 


clus, clut ; 


conclu-ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je conclu-ais, 


ais, ait ; 


conclu ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je con -clus, 


clus, clut ; 


concl urnes, 


utes, 


urent. 


Fut. Je conclu-rai, 


ras, ra ; 


conclu-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je conclu-rais, 


rais, rait ;] 


concl u-rions, 


riez, 


raient 


Subj. 










Pres. « Je conclu-e, 


es, . e ; 


conclu-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. crJe concl -usse, 


usses, ut ; 


concl -ussions, 


ussiez, 


ussent. 



Imper. Conclus, qu'il conclue ; concluons, concluez, qu'ils concluent. 

So conjugate 
Exclure, to exclude, which makes exclus in its past participle. 



5. Conduire, to conduct, active verb, with avoir. 
Conduire, conduisant, conduit. 



Infinitive 

Indie. 
Pres. Je cond -uis, uis, 
Imp. Je conduis-ais, ais, 



uit ; conduis-ons, 
ait ; conduis-ions, 



ent. 
aient. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



127 



Pret. Je conduis-is, is, 
Fut. Je condui -rai, ras, 
Cond. Je condui -rais, rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. o Je conduis-e, es, 
Pret. §\Je conduis-isse, isses, 



it ; conduis-imes, 
ra ; condui -rons, 
rait ; condui -rions, 



conduis-ions, 
conduis-issions. 



ites, 
rez, 
riez, 

iez, 
issiez, 



Imjper. Conduis, qu'il conduise ; conduisons, conduisez, 
duisent. 

So conjugate 
Reconduire, to lead again. 



irent. 
ront. 
raient. 

ent. 
issent. 
qu'ils con- 



Deduire, to deduct. 
Enduire, to do over. 
Instruire, to instruct. 
Introduire, to introduce. 
Produire, to produce. 
Reduire, to reduce. 



Seduire, to seduce. 
Traduire, to translate. 
Luire, to shine, past part. lui. 
Nuire, to hurt, past part. nui. 
Reluire, to glitter, past part. 
relui. 



PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING VERBS. 



I do not absolve you. 

Does it dissolve ? 

Will he resolve ? 

I will pull it down. 

Will he beat rae ? 

You have not beaten him 

again. 
Will he not deduct 1 
He has been seduced. 
He has hurt him. 
It does not shine. 



They will not struggle. 
They have fought. 
Will they not debate ? 
He will not drink ? 
Let them drink. 
Would you not conclude ? 
He has been excluded. 
He has produced it. 
He will not translate it. 
You will instruct him. 
Who will lead her again? 



The law has absolved him. The snow will be soon dis- 
solved. He has not yet resolved to do it ; but he will soon. 
/That barn has been pulled down a year. He has beaten that 
poor wretch without mercy. He will not deduct a penny. 
Why not ? because, he says, they have hurt him very much. 
The sun will not shine to-day. They struggled as long as 
they could. They fought like brave men. They debated 
the question all night. He drank some very cold water and 
died. He will never conclude his book. Who has excluded 
him from society ? ..That field produces much corn. He has 
translated the poem very badly. His father has instructed 
him at home. She was led back again into the room by her 
brother. 



128 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OP IRREGULAR VERBS- 



Law, hi, f. sun, soleil, m. 

snow, neige, f. brave men, des braves 

barn, grenier, m. field, champ, m. 

poor wretch, pauvre mist- corn, ble, m. 

rable badly, mal 

penny, sou, m. 

6. Confire, to preserve, to pickle, active verb, with avoir. 
Infinitive. Confire, confisant, confit. 



Indie. 
Pres. Je conf -is, 
Imp. Je confis-ais, 
Pret. Je conf -is, 
Fut. Je confi -rai, 
Cond. Je confi -rais, 

Subj. 
Pres.vJe confis-e, 
Pret. §*Je conf -isse, 
Confis, 



Imper. 



qvr 



is, 

ais, 

is, 

ras, 
rais, 

es, 
isses, 
confise 



it; 
ait; 
it; 
ra; 
rait : 

e; 

it; 



confis-ons, 
confis-ions, 
conf -imes, 
confi -rons, 
confi -rions, 

confis-ions, 
conf -issions, 



ez, 
iez, 

ites, 
rez, 
riez, 

iez, 
issiez, 



ent. 

aient. 

irent. 

ront. 

raient. 

ent. 

issent. 



confisions, confisez, qu'ils confisent. 



So conjugate 
CfRCONCiRE, to circumcise, past part, circoncis. 
Suffire, to suffice, to be enough, past part, suffi ; no femi- 
nine. 

7. ConnaItre, to know, active verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Connaitre, connaissant, connu. 






Indie. 










Pres. Je conn -ais, ais, 


ait; 


connaiss-ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je connaiss-ais, ais, 


ait; 


connaiss-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je conn -us, us, 


ut; 


conn -times, 


Cites, 


urent. 


Fut. Je connait-rai, ras, 


ra ; 


connait -rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond- Je connait-rais, rais, 


rait ; 


connait -rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Subj. 










Pres. v Je connaiss-e, es, 


e; 


connaiss-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. crJe conn -usse, usses 


,ut; 


conn -ussions, 


ussiez, 


ussent 



Imper. Connais, qu'il connaisse , 
naissent. 



connaissons, connaissez, qu'ils con- 



So conjugate 

MEcoNNAiTRE, to take for an- DisparaItre, to disappear. 

other. ReparaItre, to appear again. 

ReconnaItre, to acknowledge. PAiTRE, to feed, has no pret. 
ParaItre, to appear. def. and no imperfect in 

ApparaItre, to appear. the subjunctive. 

ComparaItre, to make one's 

appearance. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



129 



8. Coudre, to sew, active verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Coudre, 


cousant, cousu. 




Indie. 








Pres. Je cou -ds, 


ds, 


d ; cous -ons, ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je cous -ais, 


ais, 


ait ; cous -ions, iez, 


aient. 


Pret . Je cous -is, 


is, 


it ; cous -imes, ites, 


irent. 


Fut. Je coud-rai, 


ras, 


ra ; coud-rons, rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je coud-rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. © Je cous -e, 


rais, 


rait ; coud-rions, riez, 


raient. 


es, 


e ; cous -ions, iez, 


ent. 


Pret. §-Je cous -isse, 


issesj 


it ; cous -issions, issiez, 


issent 


Imper. Couds, qu'il 


couse 


; cousons, cousez, qu'ils consent. 
So conjugate 




Decoudre,^ unseio. 


Re coudre, to sew again. 



9. Craindre, to fear, active verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Craindre, 


craig 


aant, 


craint. 






Indie. 












Pres. Je crain -s, 


s, 


t; 


craign-ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je craign-ais, 


ais, 


ait ; 


craign-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je craign-is, 


is, 


it; 


craign-imes, 


ites, 


irent. 


Fut. Je craind-rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


craind-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je craind-rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. Je craign-e, 


rais, 


rait 


. craind-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


es, 


e; 


craign-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. zrJe craign-isse, 


isses. 


it; 


craign-issions, 


issiez, 


issent 



Imper. Grains, qu'il craigne ; craignons, craignez, qu'ils craignent. 
So conjugate 
Astreindre, to bind, to sub- Feindre, to feign. 



ject. 

Restreindre, to restrain. 
Atteindre, to reach. 
Ceixdre, to gird. 

ETEINDRE, to put OUi. 

Enjoindre, to enjoin. 



Joindre, to join. 
Oindre, to anoint. 
Pe ndre, to paint. 
Plaindre, to pity. 
Se plaindre, to complain. 
Teindre, to dye. 



10. Croire, to believe, to think, active verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Croire, croyant, 


cm. 






Indie. 








Pres. Je croi-s, s, t ; 


croy-ons, 


ez. 


croient 


Imp. Je croy-ais, ais, ait 


croy-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je cru -s, s, t; 


cr -umes, 


utes, 


urent 



130 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OP IRREGULAR VERBS. 



Fut. Je croi-rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


croi -rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je* croi-rais,* 


rais, 


rait ; 


croi -rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Subj. 












Pres. « Je croi-e, 


es, 


e, 


croy-ions, 


iez, 


croient. 


Pret. crJe cr -usse, 


usses, 


ut ; 


cr -ussions, 


ussiez, 


ussent. 



Imper. Crois, qu'il croie ; croyons, croyez, qu'ils croient. 



PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING VERBS. 



ap- 



He has not appeared again. 
He will not feed. 
She sews. 
She has unsewed it. 
I will sew it again. 
He does not fear me. 
Will he reach you ? 
Will you anoint yourself? 
We did not feign it. 
He painted it. 
You will restrain him. 
It is dyed. 

That they might have believed 
it. 



She has preserved them. 

It is enough. 

Will it not be enough 7 ? 

I shall not know her. 

It appears to me. 

He will not make his 

pearance. 
Let him not disappear. 
You have put it out. 
They will not have joined 

us. 
That I might pity her. 
He complains of you. 
Do you not believe it ? 
Did we not believe it ? 

Will she preserve these fruits well 1 It will not be enough 
for all our wants. My fortune has been enough for me. I 
have known him these ten years. Do you know Mr. B. ? 
You appear to me a very honest man. He has refused to 
make his appearance before the judge. They have disap- 
peared from society. She did not put out the lamp. The 
soldiers joined us yesterday. I pitied him, as soon I saw him. 
You complain of his bad conduct. I do not believe a word of 
it. She believed it when I saw her. He will never appear 
again in the country. The horse did not feed at all. She 
does not know how to sew. Let her sew it over again. I 
feared him yesterday very much. To-day I fear him a little ; 
to-morrow I shall not fear him at all. They have feigned 
strong pains. You will soon paint a picture very well. His 
father has never restrained him enough. I never should have 
believed it, if he had not said it. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



131 



Fruit, fruit, m. 
want, besoin, m. 
judge,>^e, m. 
lamp, lampe, f. 
soldier, soldat, m. 



conduct, conduit^ f. 

word, mot, ra. 

country, pays,m. 

strong pains, de fortes pcines. 

picture, tableau, m. 



11. Croitre, to groic, neuter verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Croitre, 


croissant, 


cru. 






Indie. 












Pres. Je croi -s, 


s, 


t; 


croiss-ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je croiss-ais, 


ais, 


ait; 


croiss-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je era -s, 


s s 


t; 


cr -iimes, 


utes, 


urent. 


Fut. Je croit -rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


croit -rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je croit -rais, 


rais, 


rait 


; croit -rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Subj 












Pres. ~ Je croiss -e, 


es, 


e; 


croiss-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. ^*Je cr -usse, 


usses,ut : 


cr -ussions, 


ussiez, 


ussent, 



Imper. Crois, qu'ils croisse ; croissons, croissez, croissent. 

So conjugate 
Accroitre, to increase. DecroItre, to decrease. 



12. Dire, to say, to tell, active verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Dire 


, disant, 


dit. 








Indie. 












Pres. Je di -s, 


s, 


t; 


di -sons, 


tes, 


sent. 


Imp. Je dis-ais, 


ais, 


ait ; 


dis-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je di -s, 


s, 


t; 


d -imes, 


ites, 


irent. 


Fut. Je di -rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


di -rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je di -rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. o Je dis-e, 


rais, 


rait: 


I di -rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


es, 


e ; 


dis-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. 5-Je d -isse, 


isses, 


it; 


dis-sions, 


siez, 


sent. 


Imper. Dise, qu' 


il dise ; disons, 


dites, qu'ils 


disent. 








So conjugate 






coxtredire, to contradict 




ill, 


always followed by 


interdire, to 


interdict, 


, to 


de. 






forbid. 






PRE DIRE 


, to foretell. 




maudire, to curse. 




REDIRE, 


to tell again. 





me dire, to slander, to speak 



se dedire, to retract. 



All, except redire, make -disez ; maudire makes maudissez, 
in the second person plural of the indicative present and of 
the imperative. 



132 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



13. Eclore, to hatch, to blow, neuter and defective verb, 
with etre. 

Infinitive. Eclore, £clos. 

Indie. Pres. II eclot, ils eclosent. 

Fut. II eclora, ils ecloVont. 

Cond. II eclorait, ils ecloraient. 
Subj. Pres. Qu'il eclose ; qu'ils eclosent. 



14. ecrire, to write, active verb, with avoir. 

Infinitive. Ecrire, ecrivant, ecrit. 
Pres. J'ecr -is, 
Imp. J'ecriv-ais, 
Pret. J'ecriv-is, 
Fut. J'ecri -rai, 
Cond. J'ecri -rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. o J'ecriv-e, 
Pret. o-J'ecriv-isse 

Imper. Ecris, qu'il ecrive 

So conjugate 
circonscrirEj to circumscribe, proscrire, to proscribe. 



is, 


it; 


ecriv-ons, ez, 


ent. 


ais, 


ait; 


ecriv-ions, iez, 


aient. 


is, 


it; 


ecriv-imes, ites, 


irent. 


ras, 


ra; 


ecri -rons, rez, 


ront. 


rais, 


rait; 


ecri -rions, riez, 


raient. 


es, 


e; 


ecriv-ions, iez, 


ent. 


isses, 


it; 


ecriv-issions, issiez, 


issent. 


crive ; 


ecrivons, ecrivez, qu'ils ecrivent 





to describe. 
inscribe, to inscribe. 
prescrire ? to prescribe. 



souscrire ? to subscribe. 
transcrire, to transcribe. 



15. Faire, to do, to make, with avoir. 

Infinitive. Faire, faisant, fait. 

Indie. 
Pres. Je fai -s, 
Imp. Je fais-ais, 
Pret. Je fi -s, 
Fut. Je fe -rai, 
Cond. Je fe -rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. 2 Je fass-e, 
Pret. Er Je f -isse, 

Imper. Fais, qu'il fasse ; faisons, faites, qu'ils fassent. 

So conjugate 
contrefaire, to counterfit. satisfaire, to satisfy. 

defaire, to undo, to defeat. se defaire, to get rid of. 

rede faire, to undo again. surf aire, to ask too much. 

refaire, to do,to make up again. 



s, 


t; 


f -aisons, 


aites, 


ont. 


ais, 


ait; 


fais-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


s j 


t; 


f -imes, 


ites, 


irent. 


ras, 


ra; 


fe -rons. 


rez, 


ront. 


rais, 


rait ; 


fe -rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


es, 


e; 


fass-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


isses, 


it; 


f -issions, 


issiez, 


issent. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



133 



PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING VERBS. 



Do you curse ? 

He slanders. ' 

He has not foretold it. 

Will you tell it again ? 

He retracts. 

Will you write ? 

That he may have described. 

Do you subscribe 1 

Do not that. 

You will undo it. 

He will satisfy you. 

Do it. 



He did not grow. 

You will not grow. 

Has he increased? 

Will he decrease 1 

Do not tell of it. 

Why do you tell ? 

He will not contradict. 

That he might not prescribe. 

He will be proscribed. 

She has transcribed it. 

I did it. 

Let him do it up again. 

It was counterfeited. 

Corn grows for men. His fortune increases ; hers has de- 
creased very rapidly. Say nothing about it. He will con- 
tradict all you may say. She would have prescribed it, if her 
sister had transcribed it well. He was proscribed from all 
good society. Why did you do it ? He will do it over 
again early. He has cursed his existence. He slanders every 
body. He foretold it last year. Tell that again. He has 
already retracted the whole story. Write me a good letter. 
She describes very well what she sees. I never subscribe for 
books. Who will be satisfied with such a reason. She has 
done it. 



Rapidly, rapidement 
every body, tout le monde 
last year, Vannee passee 



the whole story, Vhistoire en~ 

titre 
books, des livres 
reason, raison, f. 



16. Frire, to fry, active and defective verb, with avoir. 



ic. Pres. Je fris, fris, 


frit. 








Fut. Je fii-rai, ras, 


ra ; 


fri-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je fri-rais, rais, 


rait ; 


fri-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


>er. Fris. 











To supply the want of persons and tenses, we use the verb 
faire, with the infinitive/Wre; as, Jefais frire, tu fais frire, 
ilfait frire. 

12 



134 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



17. Lire, to read, active verb, with avoir. 
Infinitive. Lire, lisant, lu. 



Indie. 
Pres. Je li -s, s, 
Imp. Je lis-ais, ais, 
Pret. Je lu-s, s, 
Fut. Je li -rai, ras, 
Cond. Je li -rais, rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. Je lis-e, es, 
Pret. o-Je 1 -usse, usses 


t; 

ait ; 

t; 

ra; 
rait j 


lis-ons, 
lis-ions, 
1 -umes, 
li -rons, 
li -rions, 


ez, 
iez, 

utes, 

rez, 

riez, 


ent. 

aient. 

urent. 

ront. 

raient. 


e; 
, ut; 


lis-ions, 
1 -ussions 3 


iez, 
ussiez 


ent. 
ussent. 


Imper. Lis, qu'il lise ; 


lisons, 


lisez, q-u'ils lisent. 






So 


conjugate 






Elire, to elect. 




relire, to read again 



18. Mettre, to put, active verb, with avoir. 



Mettre, mettant, mis. 



Infinitive 

Indie. 
Pres. Je me -ts, 
Imp. Je mett-ais, 
Pret. Je mi -s, 
Fut. Je mett-rai, 
Cond. Je mett-rais, 

Subj. 
Pres. g Je mett-e, 
Pret. crJe m -isse, 

Imper. Mets, qu'il mette 



ras, 
rais, 



es, 

isses, 



t; 

ait; 

t; 

ra ; 
rait : 



mett-ons, 
mett-ions, 
m -imes, 
mett-rons, 
mett-rions, 



ez, 

iez, 

ites, 

rez, 

riez, 



e ; mett-ions, 
it ; m-issions, 
mettons, mettez, qu'lls mettent. 



iez, 
issiez, 



So conjugate 



ent. 

aient. 

irent. 

ront. 

raient, 

ent. 
issent. 



admettre, to admit. permettre, to permit. 

commettre, to commit. promettre, to promise. 

compromettre, to compromise, remettre, to put off, to defer. 
demettre, to turn out. se demettre, to resign. 

emettre, to deliver. soumettre, to submit. 

omettre, to omit. transmettre, to transmit. 



19- Moudre, to grind, active verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Moudre, moulant, moulu. 

Indie. 

Pres. Je mou -ds, ds, d ; moul -ons, 

Imp. Je moul -ais, ais, ait ; moul -ions, 

Pret. Je moul -us, us, ut ; moul -umes, 



ez, ent. 

iez, aient. 

utes, urent. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



135 



rez, 
riez, 



ront. 
raient. 



Fut. Je moud-rai, ras, ra ; moud-rons, 
Cond. Je moud-rais, rais, rait; moud-rions, 

Subj. 
Pres. a Je moul -e, es, e; mo ul -ions, iez, ent. 

Pret. 3-Je moul -usse, usses, ut; moul -ussions, ussiez, ussent. 

Imper. Mouds, qu'il moule ; inoulons, moulez, qu'ils moulent. 



E3IOUDRE, tO ichit. 



So conjugate 

remoudre, to grind again. 



20. Naitre, to be bom, neuter verb, with etre. 



Infinitive. Naitre, 


naissant, ne. 










Indie. 












Pres. Je nai -s, 


s, nait ; 


naiss 


-ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je naiss -ais, 


ais, ait ; 


naiss 


-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je naqui-s, 


s, t; 


naqu 


-imes, 


ites, 


irent. 


Fut. Je nait -rai, 


ras, ra ; 


nait 


-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je nait -rais, 


rais, rait ; 


nait 


-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Subj. 












Pres. o Je naiss -e, 


es, e; 


naiss 


-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. o\Je naqu -isse, 


isses, it; 


naqu- 


issions, 


issiez, 


issent 



Imper. Nais, qu'il naisse ; naissons, naissez, qu'ils naissent. 
So conjugate 
renaitre, to revive, to be born again. 

PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING VERBS. 



You will fry. 

Let bim read. 

He will not read again. 

Do you elect 1 

You did not put. 

They might put. 

He has not admitted it. 

He will never compromise it, 

Has he not omitted her ? 

Who will permit it ? 



That you might have promised. 

That she may have deferred. 

Let him resign. 

She will never submit. 

You have not transmitted it. 

Grind it. 

I will grind it again. 

He was born, (preterite.) 

She was not born. 

I should revive. 



Why would you not fry these little fishes ? He read yes- 
terday. He will not read again to-morrow. Does he not 
read very well 1 We have not elected our governor. Where 
have you put my handkerchief? He put it under the cushion. 
I will never admit that. Let him not compromise his charac- 



136 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



ter. He might have omitted his sister, but I would not per- 
mit him. He has promised me every thing. She asks that 
she may defer her visit till next week. Will he not resign 
his employment? Why does she not submit to her mother 1 
The letter was transmitted by the post. He is grinding the 
corn. You were born in the last century. She was born 
last year. He revived when he saw her. 



Fish, 



poisson, m. 



governor, gouverneur, m. 
handkerchief, mouchoir, m. 
cushion, coussinet, m. 
character, caractere, m. 



visit, visite, f. 
employment, emploi, m. 
post, poste, f. 
corn, ble, m. 
century, siecle, m. 



21. Plaire, to please, neuter verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Piaire, plaisant, plu. 








Indie. 










Pres. Je plai -s, s, 


t; 


plais-ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je plais-ais, ais, 


ait; 


" plais-ions. 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je plu -s, s, 


t; 


pi- -times, 


utes, 


urent. 


Put. Je plai -rai, ras, 


ra; 


plai -rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je plai -rais, rais, 


rait 


plai -rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Subj. 










Pres. o Je plais-e, es, 


e; 


plais-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. crJe pi -usse, usses, 


ut; 


pi -ussions, 


ussiez, 


ussent 


Imper. Plais, qu'il plaise 


3 plaisons, plaisez, qu'ils 


plaisent. 






So ( 


-onjugate 







deplaire, to displease. 
complaire, to humor. 



se taire, to hold one's tongue. 



22. Prendre, to take, active verb, with avoir. 

Infinitive. Prendre, prenant, pris. 



Indie 












Pres. Je pren -ds, 


ds, 


d; 


pren -ons, 


ez, 


nent. 


Imp. Je pren -ais, 


ais, 


ait ; 


pren -ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je pri -s, 


s, 


t; 


pr -imes, 


ites, 


irent. 


Fut. Je prend-rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


prend-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je prend-rais, 


rais, 


rait ; 


prend-rions, 


riez, 


raient 


Subj. 












Pres. u Je prenn-e, 


es, 


e; 


pren -ions, 


iez, 


nent. 


Pret. crJe pr -isse, 


isses 


it; 


pr -issions, 


issiez, 


issent. 



Imper. Prends, qu'il prenne ; prenons, prenez, qu'ils prennent. 



wth 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



137 



So conjugate 



apprendre, to learn. 
comprendre, to understand. 
desapprendre, to unlearn. 
extreprendre, to undertake. 



rapprendre, to learn again. 
reprendre, to take again. 

SE MEPRENDRE, to mistake, 

surprendre, to surprise* 



23. Rire, to laugh, neuter verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Rire, riant, 


ri. 










Indie. 














Pres. Je ri-s, 


s, 


t; 


ri 


-ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je ri-ais, 


ais, 


ait: 


ri 


-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Fret. Je ri-s, 


s, 


t; 


r 


-imes, 


ites, 


irent. 


Fut. Je ri-rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


ri 


-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je ri-rais, 


rais, 


rait ; 


ri 


-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Sub}. 














Pres. a Je ri-e, 


es, 


e; 


ri 


-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. u-Je r -isse, 


isses, 


it; 


r- 


issions, 


issiez, 


issent 



Imper. Ris, qu'il rie ; rions, riez, qu'ils rient. 
So conjugate 
Sourire, to smile. 



24. Suivre, to follow, active verb, with avoir. 
Infinitive. Suivre, suivant, suivi. 



Indie. 












Pres. Je sui -s, 


s, 


t, 


suiv-ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je suiv-ais, 


ais, 


ait; 


suiv-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je suiv-is, 


is, 


it, 


suiv-imes, 


ites, 


irent. 


Fut. Je suiv-rai, 


ras, 


ra; 


suiv-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je suiv-rais, 


rais, 


rait ; 


suiv-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


shibj. 












Pres. a Je suiv-e, 


es, 


e; 


suiv-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. zrJe suiv-isse, 


isses, 


it; 


suiv-issions, 


issiez, 


issent. 



Imper. Suis, qu'il suive ; suivons, suivez, qu'ils suivent. 
So conjugate 
poursuivre, to pursue. s'en suivre, to follow from. 

25. Traire, to milk, active and defective verb, with 
avoir. 

Infinitive. Traire, trayant, trait. 
Indie. 
Pres. Je trai-s, s, t, tray-ons, ez, traient. 

12* 



138 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



aient. 



So conjugate 



ront. 
raient. 



Imp. Je tray -ais, ais, ait; tray-ions, iez, 

Pret. is wanting. 

Fut. Je trai -rai, ras, ra ; trai -rons, rez, 

Cond. Je trai -rais, rais, rait ; trai -rions, riez 

Subj. 
Pres. Quejetrai-e, es, e; tray-ions, iez, traient 

Pret. is wanting. 

Imper. Trais, qu'il traie ; trayons, trayez, qu'ils traient. 



ABStraire, to abstract. 
ATtraire, to attract. 
distraire, to distract. 
extraire, to extract. 



rentraire, to fine-draw. 

se soustraire A, to avoid, to 

escape. 
soustraire, to stibstract. 



26. Vaincre, to conquer, to vanquish, active verb, with 
avoir. 



Infinitive. Vaincre, 


vainquant, vaincu. 








Indie. 












Pres. Je vain -cs, 


cs, c ; 


vainqu 


-ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je vainqu-ais, 


ais, ait ; 


vainqu 


-ions, 


iez, 


aient 


Pret. Je vainqu-is, 


is, it ; 


vainqu 


-imes, 


ites, 


irent. 


Fut. Je vainc -rai, 


ras, ra ; 


vainc 


-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je vainc -rais, 


rais, rait 


; vainc 


-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


Subj. 












Pres. ® Je vainqu-e, 


es, e ; 


vainqu 


-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. crJe vainqu-isse 


isses, it ; 


vainqu- 


issions, 


issiez, 


issent. 



Imper. Vaincs, qu'il vainque ; 
quent. 



vainquons, vainquez, qu'ils vain- 



So conjugate 
con vaincre, to convince. 

27. Vivre, to live, neuter verb, with avoir. 



Infinitive. Vivre, 


vivant, 


vecu. 










Indie. 














Pres. Je vi -s, 


s, 


t; 


viv 


-ons, 


ez, 


ent. 


Imp. Je viv -ais, 


ais, 


ait ; 


viv 


-ions, 


iez, 


aient. 


Pret. Je vec -us, 


us, 


ut; 


vec 


-times, 


utes, 


urent. 


Fut. Je viv -rai, 


ras, 


ra ; 


viv 


-rons, 


rez, 


ront. 


Cond. Je viv -rais, 

Subj. 

Pres. <u Je viv -e, 


rais, 


rait; 


viv 


-rions, 


riez, 


raient. 


es, 


e; 


viv 


-ions, 


iez, 


ent. 


Pret. o-Je vec-usse, 


usses 


,ut; 


vec-ussion?, 


ussiez, 


ussent 



Imper. Vis, qu'il vive ; vivons, vivez, qu'ils vivent. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 

So conjugate 



139 



revivre, to revive. 



survivre, to survive. 



PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING VERBS. 



She pleases me. 

He did not please her. 

You will not displease him. 

Let him humor her. 

He held his tongue. 

He takes it. 

Will you learn it ? 

Should you not unlearn it? 

Let him undertake it. 



He will retake it. 

Do you not mistake? 

1 am surprised. 

He laughs. 

She did not smile. 

You follow her. 

He followed me. 

T pursue you. 

It follows from that. 



That he might learn it again. We abstract it. 



I will extract it. 
He fine-draws. 
Will you subtract it ? 
Let him conquer. 
That he may live. 
We have survived. 



She attracts him. 
You distract me. 
I will escape that. 
He conquered. 
Are you convinced ? 
That she might revive. 

That book pleases me' much. You will not humor your 
friend. He displeased me extremely. Why will you not 
hold your tongue ? He has taken it from my house. You 
will learn it easily. She has unlearnt by negligence all he 
had ever learnt by labor. He has undertaken a great task. 
Will you not learn it again, if I give you the time ? Play 
distracts attention. He has escaped from the power of the 
police. 1 conquered in five minutes. Why will you not be 
convinced. She will revive with the spring. Has he retaken 
what he had lost ? I will take his money. Are you not sur- 
prised ? She cannot laugh. She smiles very prettily. Pur- 
sue your way ; I will not follow you. He extracts the beau- 
ties of a book very well. She lives still. He has survived all 
his friends. 



Extremely, extremement. 
easily, facilement. 
negligence, negligence, f. 
labor, travail, m. 
task, tdche, f. 
time, temps, m. 
playjew, m. 



power, pouvoir, m. 
police, f. 

minutes, minutes, f. 
spring, printemps, m. 
money, argent, m. 
prettily, joliment. 



140 EXERCISES ON THE VERBS. 

EXERCISES ON ALL THE VERBS, TO BE TRANSLATED INTO 
ENGLISH. 

FIRST LESSON. 

J'aime la paix et la tranquillite. Tu etudies la geographie 
et Phistoire. II parle inconsiderement. II va a la cam- 
pagne. Nous Pamusez par de belles promesses. Elles mon- 
trent du courage, de la Constance et de la fermete. Je le 
recevais avec amitie. Vous preferez le plaisir & la gloire, 
et les richesses a l'honneur. Alexandre surmonta tous les 
obstacles, et vainquit ses ennemis. II retraca dans sa per- 
sonne toutes les vertus de ses anc^tres. Je n'ai pas encore 
fini mon livre. Dans toutes vos actions, consultez la lumiere 
de la raison. N'avez-vous pas soulage les pauvres. Aimons 
la justice, la paix et la vertu. Sacrifiez votre interest person- 
nel au bien public. Que j'imitasse son exemple. Qu'il eu.t 
perfectionne ses qualites naturelles. Qu'elles eussent ete 
plus attentives a leur devoir. Que nous fussions humains et 
genereux. Nous ne liaisons pas Phomme, mais ses vices. 

Paix, peace ; etudier, study retracer, to exhibit 

inconsiderement , inconsider- dans, in ; encore, yet 

ateiy lumiere, light 

aller, to go ; /', her soulager, to relieve 

montrer, to show aimer, to love 

fermete, firmness au bien public, for the good of 
avec amitie, kindly the public 

surmonter, to surmount imiter, to copy 

vaincre, to vanquish, or con- perfectionner, to perfect 

quer devoir, duty 

SECOND LESSON. 

Aurai-je le plaisir de vous trouver chez vous demain 1 II 
vapleuvoir. Pleura-t-il aujourd'hui 1 Quoique vous soyez 
plus grand que lui, il est plus age que vous. Si j'avais de 
Pargent, j'acheterais une propriete. Si Phomme considerait 
la bonte de Dieu, il ne douterait jamais de sa providence. 
On m'a montre une chambre bien meublee. Jl ne peut pas 
sortir. Puis-je sortir? Vous devriez penser avant de parler. 
Combien y a-t-il d'ici chez vous 1 II y a deux ans que je suis 
ici. II faisait tres chaud hier, et il fait tres froid aujourd'hui. 



EXERCISES ON THE VERBS. 141 

II vaut mieux qu'il le fasse que de ne rien faire. II venait 
de sortir quand je suis entre. Est-ce qu'il viendra bient6t? 
II ne peut pas partir attendu les vents contraires. Soit qu'il 
le sache ou non. Trop orner un sujet prouve souvent un 
manque de jugeraent et de gofit. II n'y a que Dieu qui puisse 
faire quelque chose de rien. Si vous voulez 6tre heureux, 
apprenez que la source du bonheur est dans le cceur. 

Chez vous, at home suis (am) came ; id, here 

va, is going hier, yesterday 

quoique, although vaut mieux, is better 

grand, tall ; que, than le fasse, should do it 

lui (him) he nerien faire, do nothing 

plus age, older ; si, if il venait de sortir, he just went 

acheter, to purchase out 

propriete, estate quand, when ; bientot, soon 

considerer, to consider attendu, on account of 

bonte, goodness soit que, whether 

montrer, to show savoir, to know 

chambre, room non, not 

bien, well orner, to embellish 

meublee, furnished prouver, to betray 

puis, may ; devriez, should souvent, frequently 

avant, before manque, want 

combien, how far puisse, can 

que, since source, fountain 

THIRD LESSON. 

Imprtmerie. II est certain que l'imprimerie doit sa nais- 
sance a. Part de la gravure en bois. Les fabricans de cartes 
& jouer commencerent les premiers a- graver en bois des 
images de Saints ; et c'est sans doute ce qui donna k Guten- 
berg, de Mayence, l'idee de l'imprimerie dont il s'occupa, a 
ce qu'on croit, des 1436 ; il en fit les premiers essais vers 
1439 ; mais il n'y eut de livres imprimes que vers 1450 ; 
et le premier, portant date, est le Psautier de 1457* Fust 
et SchoefTer partagent avec Gutenberg la gloire de cette in- 
vention. On relegue au rang des fables l'histoire de Laurent 
Coster, de Harlem, malgre la veneration des habitans de 
cette ville pour cet homme, et la solemnite avec laquelle on a 
encore celebre dernierement l'anniversaire de sa pretendue 
decouverte. 



142 



EXERCISES ON THE VERBS. 



Imprimerie, f. printing 
devoir, to owe 
naissance, origin 
gravure, engraving 
en, on ; bois, wood 
fabricans, manufacturers 
cartes a jouer, cards 
a graver, by engraving 
des, about 5 essais, attempt 



vers, about 

portant date, bearing date 

psautier, psalter, or book of 

psalms 
partager, to share 
on relegue au rang, they place 

among 
malgr'e, notwithstanding 
dernier ement, lately 



FOURTH LESSON. 



La mort est un bien pour tous les hommes. Elle est la 
nuit de ce jour inquiet qu'on appelle la vie. C'est dans le 
sommeil de la mort que reposent pour jamais les maladies, 
les douleurs, les chagrins, les craintes, qui agitent sans cesse 
les malheureux vivans. Examinez les hommes qui paraissent 
les plus heureux ; vous verrez qu'ils ont achete lour pretendu 
bonheur bien cherement ; la consideration publique, par des 
maux domestiques ; la fortune, par la perte de la sante ; le 
plaisir si rare d'&tre aime, par des sacrifices continuels ; et 
souvent k la fin d'une vie sacrifice aux interests d'autrui, ils ne 
voient autour d'eux que des amis faux et des parens ingrats. 



Un bien, a gain 
pour, to 

jour inquiet, day of trouble 
sommeil, sleep 
reposent, repose 
malheureux, unhappy 
vivans, mortals 
paraissent, appear 



verrez, will see 
bien cherement, very dearly 
consideration, esteem 
perte, loss 
d'autrui, of others 
autour, around, 
faux, false 
parens, relations 



143 



SUfttrf)* 



FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 

Rule I. 

Adverbs are mostly formed from the feminine of adjec- 
tives, by adding the syllable *ment ; as, from sage, m. or f. 
wise, is formed sagement, wisely ; heureux, m. heureuse, f. 
happy, heureusement, happily ; franc, m. franche, f. free, 
franchement, freely ; doux, m. douce, f. sweet, doucement, 
sweetly : but when a masculine adjective ends in e, i, or u, 
ment is added to the masculine ; as, aise, m. aisee, f. easy, 
aisement, easily; Jiardi, m. hardie, f. bold, hardiment, boldly ; 
absolu, m. absolue, f. absolute, absolument, absolutely. 

The following are deviations from the above rule. 

Aveugle, m. or f. blind ; aveuglement, blindly 

commode, m. or f. convenient ; commodement, conveniently 

commun^ m. common ; communement, commonly 

conforme, m. or f. conformable; conform ement, conformably 

ejiorme, m. or f. enormous ; enormement, enormously 

expres, m. express ; expressement, expressly 

gentil, m. genteel ; gentiment, genteely 

obscur, m. obscure ; obscuremenf, obscurely 

profond, m. profound ; profondement, profoundly 

precis, m. precise ; precisement, precisely 

So form their derivatives ; as, incommode, inconvenient; in- 
commodement, inconveniently ; &c. 

Rule II. 

Those adjectives which end in ant and ent become adverbs 
by changing nt into mment ; as, vaillant, valiant, vaillamment, 
valiantly ; diligent, diligent, diligemment, diligently ; except, 
lent, slow, and present, present, which make lentement, slowly, 
and present ement, presently. 

* Obs. Ment corresponds to the English ly. 



144 ADVERBS, &C. 



ADVERBS AND ADVERBIAL EXPRESSIONS** 

The learner should pay particular attention to the follow- 
ing adverbs and adverbial expressions: 

d bout, to the last extremity, the end. 

II a pousse cet homme a bout, he has driven that man to the last 
extremity. U est venu a bout de son argent, he has seen his money 
out, or he saw the end of his money. 

a calif our chon, astride. 

lis vont a califourchon, they go astride. 

d contre cozur, reluctantly, unwillingly, with regret. 

II le fit a contre cozur, he* did it reluctantly , unwillingly, or with 
regret. 

d couvert, sheltered, secure. 

II est d couvert de la pluie, he is sheltered from the rain. 

a decouvert, in the open air, openly, exposed to. 

Nous etions a decouvert, we were exposed to the weather. Parlez 
a decouvert, speak openly. 

d dessein, designedly, on purpose, intentionally, &c. 

Vous l'avez fait a dessein, you have done it, or did it designedly, on 
purpose, or intentionally. 

& droite, on, or to the right, on the right hand. 

Tournez a droite, puis a gauche, turn on, or to the right, then on, 
or to the left. 

dfaux., unjustly, wrongfully, falsely, &c. 

Vous 1'accusez a faux, you accuse him unjustly, wrongfully, or 
falsely. 

djleur de, even, or level with. 

Cette digue est afleur d'eau, that bank is even with the water. 

& foison, in abundance, abundantly, plentifully. 

Ilyavaitde tout a foison, there was plenty of every thing, or 
every thing in abundance. 

d fond, thoroughly, perfectly. 

II possede cette science a fond, he is thoroughly master of that 
science. 



ADVERBS, &C. 145 

a jamais, ou pour jamais, always, for ever. 

C'est pour jamais, it is for ever. Nous sommes a jamais mines, 
we are ruinedybr ever. 

ailleurs, somewhere else, elsewhere. 

J'irai ailleurs, I shall go somewhere else. Envoyez ailleurs, send 
elsewhere, or to another place. 

ainsi, thus, so, in this manner, &c. 

La chose se passa ainsi, the thing happened thus. On est ainsi 
fait, le monde est ainsi fait, such is the world, such is the genius 
of the age. Ainsi des autres choses, ainsi du reste, and so forth. 

a jour, open, openly. 

Une palissade a jour, an open fence. 

d Pabandon, in confusion, at random, in disorder. 

Tout est a Vabandon, every thing is in confusion. 

d lafois, at once. 

On ne peut pas tout faire a lafois, we cannot do every thing, or all 
at once. 

d PAnglaise, after the English fashion, manner, or way. 
Vous vives d VAnglaise, you live after the English fashion. 

a la Franpaise, after the French fashion, manner, or way. 

Nous vivons a la Francaise, we live after the French fashion. 

d la ligere, lightly, foolishly, wantonly. 

Elle est vetue a la Ugere, she is lightly dressed, or clothed. Ne 
faites rien d la legtre, do nothing foolishly, or wantonly. 

d la renverse, backwards, upon one's back. 

Je tomberai a la renverse, I shall fall backwards. II etait couche d 
la renverse, he was lying on his back. 

d la ronde, round, round about. 

Dis lieues a la ronde, ten leagues round. Buvons d la ronde, let 
us d;ink round. 

d la volte, inconsiderately, at random. 

II fait toutes choses d la volee, he does every thing inconsiderately. 
II parle d la volee, he speaks at random. 

d Vicart t in a by-place, aside, to omit. 

Les voleurs le trouverent d Vecart et le depouillerent, the thieves 
found him in a by-place and stripped him. II le prit a Vecart, he 

13 



146 ADVERBS, &C. 

took him aside. Laissez cela a I'ecart omit that, or leave that on 
one side. 

a Penvers, the wrong side outwards, upon the decline, &c. 

II a mis ses bas a Venvers, he has put on his stockings the wrong 
side outwards. Ses affaires vont a Venvers, his affairs are (go) 
upon the decline. 

d Penvi, in emulation of one another, to contend who shall 
do best. 

Ilssont a Venvi qui sera le plus diligent, they try who can be (will 
be) most diligent. 

d P'etourdi, inconsiderately, giddily, rashly, heedlessly. 

II ne faut pas agir a I'etourdi, we must not act inconsiderately, or 
rashly. 

d Pimpr ovist e, unexpectedly, unawares, on a sudden. 

II est survenu a Vimproviste, he came unexpectedly, or suddenly. 

alors, then, at that time. 

Alors je lui dis, then I said to him. Ou etiez-vous alors ? where 
were you then, or at that time. 

a merveille, ou d merveilks, admirably well, wonderfully, ex- 
ceedingly well. 

II preche a merveilles, he preaches admirably, or exceedingly well. 
Elle peint a merveille, she paints admirably. 

a peine, scarcely, hardly. 

K JL peine le soleil etait-il leve, qu'on appercut 1'ennemi, the sun had 
(was) scarcely risen, when we perceived the enemy. X A peine 
sait-il lire, he can hardly, or scarcely read. 

aplaisir, carefully, well, designedly, at leisure, at one's ease. 
Cela est travaille a plaisir, that is carefully, or well wrought. Un 
conte fait a plaisir, a fiction, tale, story, romance. (Literally, a 
tale made designedly or on purpose). 

d plate couture, entirely, totally. 

L'armeea ete defaite a plate couture, the army has been entirely, 
or totally defeated. 

dplein, entirely, fully. 

II a traite a plein cette question, he has treated that question fully. 

d plomb, perpendicularly, directly, (d plomb, when used as a 
noun, is written as one word). 

II est tombe a plomb, it fell, or has fallen perpendicularly. Pren- 






ADVERBS, &C. 147 

dre Yaplomb, to level a wall. Prendre les aplombs d'une muraille, 
to try, or to see whether a wall is level by the plummet. 

a point, a point nomme, at the appointed time, in time, season- 
ably, very apropos* 

Vous venez a point, Men a point, a point nomme, you are come 
in time, very apropos, seasonably. 

apres, after, after that, subsequently. 

lis iront devant et lui apres, they will go before and he after. 

a propos, seasonably, apropos, in time, &c. ; mal a propos, 
hors de propos, unseasonably, at an unseasonable time. 

Elle fait chaque chose a propos, she does every thing seasonably, 
or in proper time. Vous venez bien mal a propos, you are come 
at a very unseasonable time. 

d quartier, aside, out of the way ; mettre a quartier, to lay 

by- 

Me tirant a quartier, il me dit, taking me aside, he said to me. II 
ne peut mettre de l'argent a quartier, he cannot lay by money. 

a reculons, backwards. 

Les cordiers travaillent a reculons, rope-makers go backwards when 
they are at work. 

assez, sufficiently, sufficient, enough. 

II n'a pas assez d'argent, he has not sufficient, or enough money. 

d tdtons, gropingly, in obscurity, or in the dark. 

II marche a tdtons, he gropes along in the dark. Les philosophes 
pa'iens cherchaient la verite a tdtons, the heathen philosophers 
sought the truth in obscurity. 

d tort, wrongfully, unjustly, without a cause ; a tort et d tra- 
vers, inconsiderately, at random. 

Vous m'accusez a tort, you accuse me wrongfully, or without a 
cause. II parle a tort et a travers, sans savoir ce qu'il dit, he 
speaks at random, without knowing what he says. 

au depourvu, unexpectedly, unaware, or unawares. 

II l'a pris au depourvu, he took (has taken) him unexpectedly, or 
unawares. 

avant, far, deep, forward, (this word is generally used with 
the adverbial particles, si, bien, trop, plus, assez, fort.) 

N'allez pas si avant, do not go so far, or so forward. Vous creu- 
sez trop avant, you dig too deep. 



148 ADVERBS, &C. 

atgoutd'hui, to-day, this day, now, at present, in this age, &c. 
II viendra aujourd'hui, he will come to-day. D'aujourd'hui en 
huit, this day sennight. Cela se pratiquait autrefois, mais aujourd?- 
hui on en use autrement, that was the custom formerly, but now, 
or at present, it is otherwise. La mode d'aujourd'hui, the present 
fashion. 

au niveau, de niveau, on a level. 

La cour n'est pas au niveau du jardin, the court-yard is not on a 
level with the garden. 

auparavant, before, first, formerly, &c. 

Si vous voulez vous en aller, faites cela auparavant, if you will go 
away, do that first. Un mois auparavant, a month before. 

aussitot, immediately, presently. 

J'irai aussitdt, 1 shall go immediately. 

aidant (is generally accompanied by que before a verb, and 
by de before a noun), as much as, as many as, so much, so 
many ; autant defois, as often as. 

Travaillez autant que vous pourrez, work as much as you can. II y 
avait autant de femmes que d'hommes, there were as many women 
as men. J'en ai eu autant, I have had so much for it. Je veux 
aller chez vous autant de fois que vous voudrez, I will go to your 
house as often as you please. 

autour, about, round, round about ; ici autour, about here. 

II regardait tout autour si on le suivait, he looked round about to 
see if any one followed him. II loge quelque part ici autour, he 
lodges somewhere about here, or hereabouts. 

autrefois, formerly, in former times, anciently, of old, &c. 
C'etait autrefois la coutcme, it wis formerly the custom. 

beaucoup, much, very much, many, a great deal, a great 
many, &c. (this word is always followed by de or d' be- 
fore a noun). 

II a beaucoup d'argent, ou Men de l'argent, he has a great deal of 
money. Elle parle beaucoup, she speaks much, or very much. II 
l'a dit beaucoup de fois, he said it many times. II y' avait beau- 
coup de gens, there were a great many people. 

bien, well, right, rightly, much, a great deal, a great many, 
very, &c. 

II parle bien le Francais, he speaks French well. C'est bien, that 
is right. Elle a bien de l'esprit, she has a great deal of wit. II y 
avait bien du monde, there were a great many people. II est bien 
malade, he is very ill. 



ADVERBS, &C. 149 

bientot, soon, very soon, in a short time. 

Je reviendrai bientot, I shall soon return, or I shall return very soon, 
or in ashort time. 

cd et Id, up and down, here and there. 

II va ga et la, he goes up and down, or here and there. 

clans, in this place, here, in this house, within, &c. 

II sort de ceans, he is just gone from here. II n'est pas ceans, he is 
not within. 

cependant, in the mean time, in the mean while, however. 

Nous nous arausons, et cependant la nuit vient, we are amusing 
ourselves, and in the mean time night approaches. 

certes, certainly, indeed, truly. 

Et certes, ce fut avec beaucoup de raison, and certainly, or indeed, 
it was with much reason. 

combien, how much, how many, what, is followed by de before 
a noun. 

Combien d'argent avez-vous ? how much money have you ? 
Comhien de soldats ? how many soldiers ? Combien vaut cela ? 
how much is that worth ? En combien de tems ? in what, or in 
how much time ? 

comment, how, in what manner, why, what. 

Je ne sais comment il peut subsister, I do not know how, or in what 
manner, he can subsist. Comment appellez-vous cela ? what, or 
how do you call that ? 

d'abord, first, at first 

D'abord il semble que cela soit vrai, at first it appears that that may 
be true. 

davantage, more. 

Je n'en dirai pas davantage, I will say no more about it. Le cadet 
est riche, mais Paine Test encore davantage, the youngest is rich, 
but the eldest is still more so. 

de bonne foi, & la bonne foi, en bonne foi, sincerely, honestly, 
candidly, uprightly, fairly. 

II agit de bonne foi, ou a la bonne foi,he acts honestly, uprightly, 
or fairly. En bonne foi, feriez vous cela ? sincerely, would you do 
that? 

de but en blanc^ abruptly, bluntly. 

II lui alia dire de but en blanc que ... he went to tell him ab- 
ruptly that . . . 

13* 



150 ADVERBS, &C. 

defront, abreast. 

lis marchaient tous trois de front, they all marched three abreast. 

de gaiete de cceur, wantonly, on purpose, in wanton sport, &c. 

II l'a offense de gaieti de cceur, he has offended him on purpose 
or wantonly. ' 

de guet a pens, wilfully, on purpose. 

Un guet a pens, un meurtre commis de guet a pens, a wilful 
murder. 

dehors, out, without, out of doors, externally. 

Elle est allee dehors, she is gone out. Cela avance trop en dehors, 
that projects too much. 

de plus en plus, more and more. 

II s'enrichittfe^Zws en plus, he grows richer and richer. 

depuis, since, since that time. 

Je ne l'ai point vu depuis, I have not seen him since. 

derricre, behind, backwards. 

Qu'importe que cela soit devant ouderriere? what does it matter 
whether that be before, or behind ? 

des-lors, from that time. 

Je la connaissais des-lors, I knew her from that time. - 

devant, ci-devant, before, former, formerly. 

Le chapitre de devant, the chapter before. Comme nous avons dit 
ci-devant, as we have said before. 

dorenavant, henceforth, for the future. 

Je suis resolu de vivre dorenavant, I am resolved to live for the 
future. 

encore, yet, still, again, even, also, too, &c. 

II n'est pas encore venu, he is not yet come. Vit-elle encore ? is 
she still alive ? Essay ez-encore, try again. Non-seulement il le 
sait, mais encore il y etait, he not only knows it, but even he was 
there. Outre l'argent, on lui donna encore un cheval, besides the 
money, a horse was also given to him. 

enfin, at last, lastly, finally, at length, in short, &c. 

II est venu enfin, he has come at last. Enfin pour abreger, lastly, 
finally, or to be short. Enfin il m'a dit que . . . in short he told 
me that . . . 



ADVERBS, &C. 151 

ensemble, together, one with another, all at once, &c 

Chantons ensemble, let us sing together. lis sont sortis ensemble, 
they are gone out together. 

ensuite, afterwards, then, subsequently. 

Ensuite nous ferons le reste, then, or afterwards we will do the 
rest. 

expres, purposely, on purpose. 

II a dit cela expres, he said that onpurpose. 

guere, ou gueres, few, little ; ne ... guere, but few, but little, 
not much, not very, not long. 

II n'y a gudre de vrais patriotes, there are but few true patriots. II 
?i'a guere d'argent, he has but little money. II n'est guhre sage, 
he is not very prudent. 

jadis, formerly, in old times, old, former. 

Les bonnes gens du temps jadis, the good people of old, or former 
times. 

jamais, ever ; ne ...jamais, never. 

Adieu pour jamais, adieu for ever. Je ?i'en ai jamais ou'i parler, I 
have never heard speak of it. 

maintenant, now, at present, at this time. 

Maintenant,)e n'en aipas le loisir, now, atpresent, or at this time, 

I have not leisure. 

par me garde, inadvertently, heedlessly, by oversight. 

II a fait cela par megarde, he has done that inadvertently. 

par-tout, every where. 

II va par-tout, he goes every where. 

pele-mele, confusedly, in confusion. 

Us etaient tous pele-mele, they were all in confusion. 

petit a petit, little by little. 

Petit a petit l'oiseau fait son nid, little by little the bird builds its 
nest. 

peu, little, but little, few, but few. 

II a peu mange, he has eaten but little. Je vous dirai en peu de 
mots, I will tell you in few words. II ai ri vera dans peu de terns, he 
will arrive in a short time. 

peu a peu, little by little, by degrees. 

Les jours augmentent^ew a peu, the days increase by degrees. 



152 ADVERBS, &C. 

peut-etre, perhaps, may be, possibly. 

Peut-etre vlendra-t-il, peut-etre qu'il viendraj perhaps he Wiil come. 
Peut-etre qu'oui, perhaps so (yes). 

sur le champ, immediately, instantly < 

Cela fut vide sur le champ, that was emptied immediately, 
sur-tout, above all, especially. 

Sur-tout n'oubliez pas cela, above all, or especially do not forget 

tant, so much, so many. 

II a tant de bonte, he has so much kindness. J'ai ete tant de fois 
chez lui, I have been so many times to his house. 

tant soit pea, but little, ever so little. 

Donnez m'en tant soit peu, give me but little, or ever so little. 

tot, soon, quick, quickly ; tot ou tard, sooner or later. 
II faut mourir tdt ou tard, we must die sooner or later. 

toujours, always, continually, still. 

C'est une source qui coule toujours, it is a fountain which flows 
continually. La June touine toujours autour de la terre, the moon 
always turns round the earth. II est toujours vivant, he is still 
alive. 

tour d tour, successively, by turns, one after another. 

Ces deux generaux commanderont tour a tour, those two generals 
will command successively, or by turns. 

tout d coup, suddenly, on a sudden. 

Elles entrerent tout a coup, they entered suddenly. 

tout dfait, entirely, quite, wholly. 

II a tout a fait fini, he has quite done. 

tout d la fois, all together, all at once, both. 

II est tout a la fois frugal et industrieux, he is both frugal and in- 
dustrious. 11 ne peut payer tout a la fois, he cannot pay all at 
once. 

tout de suite, immediately. 

Allez tout de suite, go immediately. 

tout droit, straight on, or straight along. 

Allez tout droit, go straight on, or straight along. 

vis d vis, opposite, over the way. 
II etait vis d vis, he was opposite. 



ADVERBS, &C. 153 

*volontiers, gladly, willingly, cheerfully, readily, &c. 

Ferez-vous cela ? je le ferai volontiers, will you do that ? I will do 
it willingly. 



EXERCISES ON THE ADVERBS AND ADVERBIAL EXPRESSIONS. 

" FIRST LESSON. 

11 pense profondement, decrit fortement, et s'exprime avec 
dignite. C'est une femme etourdie et inconsequente, qui 
parle beaucoup et reflechit peu. II agit k contre cceur. II 
ne craint point la pluie, il est k couvert. II n'y avait ni por- 
tes ni fene'tres a cette rnaison ; nous etions k decouvert. II 
Pa fait a bon dessein. Les fondemens de cetedifice sont dejk 
k fleur de terre. 

Portez des verres k la ronde. II le mena k Pecart, sous 
pr^texte de promenade, et lui fit mettre Pepee k la main. II 
a mis son manteau a Penvers. Cette affaire est importante, 
il ne faut pas y aller k Petourdie. II entend k merveille ses 
interests. 'A peine serons-nous arrives qu'il faudra partir? 
Cela est dit fort k propos. On ne le prendra jamais au de- 
pourvu. II a mange beaucoup plus que vous. Cependant 
Cesar approcbait. Combien cela coute-t-il 1 Comment le 
monde est-il si peu peuple en comparaison de ce qu'il etait 
autrefois. 

Profondement, deeply lui Jit mettre Vep£e & la main, 

decrire, to describe made him draw his sword 

inconsequente , thoughtless manteau, ra. cloak 



SECOND LESSON. 

lis sont alles dehors. Cette terrasse est de niveau avec-le 
rez de chaussee de la maison. Sa vue diminue de plus en 
plus. Je n'en ai point oui parler depuis. Vous m'insultez de 
gaiete de coeur. Je Pai laisse bien loin derriere. Si vous 



* Obs. Although the words are classed in the preceding and following 
lists, yet, the same words are sometimes adverbs, sometimes prepositions, 
and sometimes conjunctions, depending upon the manner in which they 
are used. 



154 PREPOSITIONS. 

£tes presse, courez devant. Reflechissez-y bien dorenavant. 
J'attends encore. Elle vit encore. Je veux essnyer encore 
si je pourrai le faire. Enfin cette affaire est terminee. Car 
enfin que pouvait-il faire ? Vous 6tes souvent ensemble. 
Vous irez-l& ensuite. J'irai chez lui ensuite. II a fait b&tir 
cet appartement expres pour recevoir ses amis. II n'y a 
guere de gens tout-&-fait desinteresses. Cela etait bon au 
tems jadis. C'est pour jamais. Ne me parlez jamais de ces 
choses-l&. Etes-vous pr6t maintenant 1 NousPavons fait par 
megarde. On dit par tout. lis entrerent peie-meie dans la 
ville avec les ennemis. II arrivera dans peu de jours. T6t 
ou tard les mechans sont punis. Vous parlez toujours. Par- 
lez tour k tour. II ecoutera volontiers cette proposition. 

Terrasse, f. terrace ou'i, heard ; loin, far 

rez de chaussee, m. ground- pressi, in a hurry ; car, for 
floor ; en, of it ecouter, to listen to 



Wvt»Q#itiont$+ 



The following prepositions immediately precede the nouns, 
or pronouns, to which they apply. 

'A, or a, to, at, in, on, upon, by, for, with, &c. 

Je vais a Paris, I am going to Paris. Pourvoir h sa surete, to pro- 
vide/or his safety. Des bas cl trois fils, stockings with three threads. 

apres, after, next to, &c. 

II est entre aprhs moi, he came in after me. Sa maison est apres 
la votre, his house is next to yours. 

attendu, owing to, on account of. 

II fut exempte de la milice attendu son age, he was exempted from 
the militia on account of, or owing to his age. 

avant, before. 

J'ai vu cela avant vous, I saw that before you. 

avec, with, in, &c. 

Venez avec moi, come with me. Jtoec le tems, in time. 

chez, at, to, in, among, &c. 

II est chez nous, he is at our house, Je vais chez vous, I am going 



PREPOSITIONS. 155 

to your house. Chacun doit etre maitre chez soi, every one ought 
to be master of his own house. II y avait une coutume chez les 
Romains, there was a custom among the Romans. 

contre, against, next to ; tout contre, near to, nigh to. 

Qu'avez-vous a dire contre cela ? what have you to say against 
that ? Sa maison est contre la mienne, his house is next to mine. 
Votre maison est tout contre la sienne, your house is near to his. 

dans, in, into, &c. 

Elle est dans Londres, she is in London. Quand il entra dans la 
chambre, when he entered into the room. 

d'apres, after, like, from. 

Ce portrait est fait d'apres nature, this portrait is drawn from, or 
after nature, or like life. 

de, of, for, by, with, from, in, about, &c. 

L'amour de Dieu, the love of God. Charles saute de joie, Charles 
jumps for joy. II est estime de tout le monde, he is esteemed 
by every body. Je suis content de vous, I am satisfied with you. 

depuis, since, from, after, &c. 

Depuis son retour, since his return. Je vous attendrai depuis cinq 
jusqu'a six, I will wait for you from five till six. 

derriere, behind, after. 

Regardez derri&re vous, look behind you. II est derriere la porte, 
he is behind the door. 

dcs, from, since, at. 

Des le berceau, from the cradle. Des lundi dernier, since last 
Monday. Dts le point du jour, from, or since the break of day. 

dessus, on, upon, above ; dessous, under, below, beneath. 

II n'est ni dessus ni dessous la table, it is neither upon nor under 
the table. 

devant, before, &c. - 

Mettez cela deviant le feu, put that before the fire. 

durant, during. 

Durant sa vie, during his life. 

en, in into, to, at, on, over, like, with, within, into, &c. 

II est en Fiance, he is in France. E!le s'eleva en Pair, she mounted 
into the air. Venir ou passer en Angleterre, to come, or pass over to 
England. En tout terns, at all times. Vivre en roi, to live like a 
king. En chemin, on the road. Cette eau abonde en poissons, this 



156 PREPOSITIONS. 

water abounds with fish. Reflechissez bien en vous meme, reflect 
well within yourself. 

entre y between. 

Entre le ciel et la terre, between heaven and earth. II etait assis 
entre nous deux, he sat between us two. 

envers, towards, to. 

II est ingrat envers son bienfaiteur, he is ungrateful to, or towards 
his benefactor. 

environ, about, near. 

II est environ deux heures, it is about, or near two o'clock. Son 
armee est tf environ vingt mille homines, his army consists of about 
twenty thousand men. 

excepte, except, but, &c. 

Excepts votre ami, except your friend. 

hormis, but, except, save, excepting, &c. 

lis sortirent tous hormis deux ou trois, they all went out except two 
or three. 

malgre, in spite of, notwithstanding, against one's will. 

II Pa fait malgre" moi, he did it in spite of me. II est parti malgre 
la rigueur du terns, he f set out notwithstanding the severity of the 
season. 

moyennant, for, by means of. 

II a obtenu Pemploi moyennant une bonne somme d'argent, he has 
obtained the situation by means of, or/or a large sum of money. 

nonobstant, notwithstanding. 

JYonobstant ses difficultes, notwithstanding his difficulties. 

outre, besides, beyond. 

Outre cette somme, je lui ai donne deux guinees, besides that sum, 

I have given him two guineas. Outre-met, beyond the sea. 

par, by, through, out of, out at, for, in, at, with, along, &c. 

Tout a ete cree par la parole de Dieu, every thing has been created 
by the word of God. II entra par la porte, mais il soxiitpar la fenetre, 
he went in at the door, but he got out at or through the window. 

II se promenait par la riviere, he walked along by the river. Par 
un terns calme, in calm weather. 

parmi, among, amongst. 

Parmi les hommes, among men. 



PREPOSITIONS. 157 

pendant, during. 

Pendant l'hiver, during the winter. 

pour, for, as for. 

Ceci est pour moi, et cela est pour vous, this is for me, and that 
for you, 

sans, without, but for, was it not for. 

II est sans vertu, he is without virtue. Sans eux tout irait bien, 
were it not for them all would go well. 

sauf, save, with deference to, except, but. 

Saufvotre meilleur avis, with deference to your better advice. 
Tout est perdu saw/Tesperance, all is lost save or except hope. 

selon, according to, agreeably, conformable to. 

'Chacun sera recompense selon ses ceuvrea, each will be rewarded 
according to his works. 

sous-, under, beneath. 

Sous la ligne, tinder the fine. Sous voire protection, under your 
protection. 

suivant, according to. 

Suivant votre sentiment, according to your opinion. 

sur, on, upon, over, above, at, towards, in, &c. 

Sur le pupitre, upon the desk. Sur un vaisseau, on board a ship. 
Les globes celestes qui roulent sur nos letes, the heavenly bodies 
"which roll over our heads. Sur le soir, towards the evening. II 
i'a mis sur son testament, he has put him in his will. 

touchant, concerning, touching, about. 

11 m'a entretenu touchant vos affaires, he discoursed with me con- 
cerning or about your affairs. 

vers, towards, about. 

Vers le nord, towards the north. Vers l'annee 1821, about the 
year 1821. 

vu } or vu, considering, seeing. 

La recompense est petite, vu ses grands services, the recompense is 
small, considering his great services. 

The following prepositions are used before a genitive, and 
consequently take de, du, de la, de V, or des immediately after 
them. 

14 



158 PREPOSITIONS. 

d cause de, on account of, for, because of, &c. 

X A cause de l'affection que je vous porte, on account of, or for the 
love I have for you (I bear you). 

d cote, by, aside, beside, near. 

11 demeure a cdte du village, he lives by or near the village. 

a force, by dint of, by force, by strength of, with. 

II s'est tue a force de boire, he has killed himself with drinking. 

a Vabri, secure from, sheltered, protected. 

II est a Vabri de la faveur, he is protected by favor. 

d lafaveur de, by means of, by the aid or help of, by the 
favor of. 

II a passe la riviere a lafaveur du canon, he has crossed the river 
by the aid of the cannon. 

a Vegard, as for, as to. 

\1 I'egard de ce que vous me devez, as to what you owe me. 

d Pegard de, in comparison with, with respect to. 

La terre est petite a regard du soleil, the earth is but small in com- 
parison with the sun. 

a V exception, except, save, with the exception. 

VZ V exception de son frere, except, or with the exception of his 
brother. 

d Vinspi, ou a Vinsu. unknown to, without the knowledge of. 

*A Vinsqu de toute la compagnie, unknown to, or without the 
knowledge of the whole company. 

a moins de, for less than, under. 

Vous ne l'aurez pas d moins de vingts guinees, you shall not have 
it for less than, or under twenty guineas. 

a raison de, at the rate of, in proportion. 

Je vous payerai cette etoffe d raison de deux guinees l'aune. I will 
pay you for that stuff at the rate of two guineas an ell. 

au de cd, on this side, this side ; but de pa is frequently used 
without au. 

Au de ca, ou en de ca de la riviere, on this side the river. De ga 
les Alpes, on this side the Alps. 

au de Id, beyond, on the other side. 

Au de Id des mers, beyond the seas. Au de la de la riviere, on the 
other side of the river. 






PREPOSITIONS. 

au dessous, below, under, beneath. 

Je suis loge au dessous de sa chambre, I lodge below, or under his 
room. 

au dessuSf above, beyond. 

Vous etes au dessus de la calomnie, you are out of, or beyond the 
reach of slander. 

au devant, before, anticipate. 

lis ont ete au devant de l'objection, they have anticipated the ob- 
jection. 

au lieu de, instead of. 

Au lieu de secourir son ami, il l'a trahi, instead of assisting his 
friend, he has betted him. 

au milieu, in the middle, amidst. 

Cette ville est situee au milieu de la France, this town is situated 
in the middle of France. Au milieu des cris, amidst the cries. 

au moyen de, by means of, for, on consideration of. 

Au moyen de la lettre que vous eerirez nous reussirons, we shall 
succeed by means of the letter which you will write. 

au niveau, on a level with, even with. 

II se met au niveau de tout le monde, he puts himself on a level 
with every body, or all the world. 

aupres, near, by, close to, next to. 

Sa maison est aupres de la mienne, his house is near or by mine. 

au prix de, in comparison with, at the expense of. 

Cela n'est rien au prix de ce que vous allez entendre, that is noth- 
ing in comparison with what you are going to hear. 

au peril, at the hazard of, at the peril of. 

Je vous servirai au peril de ma vie, 1 will serve you at the peril of 
my life. 

en depity in spite of. 

II fit cela en depit de tout le monde, he did that in spite of every 
body, or all the world. 

hors de, out of, free from, except. 

Sa maison est hors de la ville, his house is out of the city. Nous 
sommes hors de blame, we are free from blame. 

pour Vamour de, for the sake of. 

Je voudrais pour Vamour de vous que cela fut, I wish it were so for 
your sake, 



16*0 PREPOSITIONS. 

sur le pied, at the rate. 

J'ai paye cette etoffe sur le pied de dix schellings Faune, I have 
paid for that stuff at the rate of ten shillings an ell. 

vis-d-vis, over against, opposite. (Obs. De is sometimes 
omitted in the familiar style.) 

Je me pla^ai vis-d-vis de lui, I placed myself opposite or over against 
him. II demeure vis-d-vis l'eglise, he lives opposite the chureh. 

The following prepositions are generally used before a 
dative and consequently take d, au, d la % d /', aux, immedi- 
ately after them. 

jusque,jusques, to, even, as far as, how, till, until, (jusque is 
sometimes followed by oil, Id, ici, aupres, &c.) 

Depuis Pans jusqu'a Londres, from Paris to London. II &]]&jusqv/au 
Grand-Caire, he went as far as Grand-Cairo. Elle rit jusqu'aux 
larmes, she laughed till she cried. Jusqu'oii faut-il que j'aille ? how 
far must I go I Jusqu' aupres de Londres, as far as London. 

par rapport, as to, with respect to. 

11 ne fait rien que par rapport a. ses interets, he does nothing hut 
with respect to his own interests. 

quant d t as to, as for. 

Quant a moi, ou quant a ce qui est de moi, as for me, or for my 
part. 

The following prepositions express different relations de- 
pending upon the manner in which they are used. 

a, at, to, into. 

II est a Paris r he is at Paris. II va a Paris, he is going to Paris r 
Elle est allee d la campagne, she is gone into the country. 

cliez, at ; de cliez, from. 

11 est chez nous, he is at our house. Je viens de chez Monsieur 
Meurice's. J'ai passe chez vous, I have called at your house. 

dans, in, into, with, within. 

II est dans Paris. He is in Paris. II est dans le Louvre. He is 
in the Louvre. Nous sommes dans la maison, we are in the house. 
II fait sa cour dans le dessein de s'avancer, he makes his court 
with the intention of being advanced. 

en, in, to. 

II est en Italie, he is in Italy. II va en Italie, he is going to Italy 
&c— [ V. Gram, de Restaut.] 



EXERCISES ON THE PREPOSITIONS. l6l 

EXERCISES ON THE PREPOSITIONS. 

FIRST LESSON. 

Je demeure a Londres et raon frere a Paris. II s'taile re- 
tire a la campagne. II promet de payer apres Noel. II ne 
peut pas partir attendu les vents contraires. II faut niettre 
ce mot-ci avant I'autre. J'ai passe par chez vous. II partit 
de nuit. Je ne l'ai point vu depuis son retour. Vous 6tes 
venu depuis moi. Des l'enfance. II marehait devant moi. 
Durant tout l'hiver. II se conduit en honnele homme. II y 
a bien des villes entre Paris et Rome. Elle est charitable 
envers les pauvres. Je l'ai fait malgre lui. Outre qu'elle est 
riche, elle est belle et sage. II a fait cela par crainte. II a 
obtenu cela par hasard. Vous ferez ce qu'il vous plaira, pour 
moi je n'en ferai jamais rien. Sans moi, il mourait de faim. 
II lui a cede tout son bien, sauf une terre. Cela n'est pas 
selon la raison. Cette comedie fut representee a Paris sur 
le theatre du Petit Bourbon. Vers les quatre heures. 

Noel, Christmas faim, hunger 

passe par, called at bien, property 

sage, discreet, or prudent 
hasard. chance 



SECOND LESSON. 

Ce village est au-dessous de Paris. II est au-dessous de 
vous en merite. II f.iit un peu trop le familier avec ceux qui 
sont au-dessus de lui. lis elaient a Tabri d'une muraille. On 
doit etre honn6te a son egard et a Fegard des autres. A 
Tegard de ce que vous disiez. II s'est marie a Pinscu de 
ses parens. Je ne lui vendrai pas ce cheval a moins de quinze 
guinees. Au lieu d'etudier, il ne fait que se divertir. II lui a 
donne mille ecus, au moyen de quoi il s'est oblige. Le ton- 
nerre tomba au milieu de l'eglise. II entra au milieu de l'as- 
semblee. Au milieu des acclamations. Les savans sont au 
niveau des plus grands Seigneurs. Nous payons a raison de 
cinq pour cent. La riviere passe aupres de cette ville. II a 
achete la victoire au prix de sa vie. 11 aime jusqu'a ses en- 

14* 



162 CONJUNCTIONS. 

nemis. Leurs maisons sont situees vis a vis de l'autre. II 
etait assis vis & vis de moi. Quant a vos observations je les 
trouve bonnes. 

muraille, f. wall ecus, crowns 

a son egard, to ourselves etait assis, was sitting. 



Qonjumtitmn. 



List of conjunctions which take the indicative mood after 
them. 

d cause que, because. 

Je n'irai pas, a cause qu'il est trop tard, I shall not go, because it is 
too late. 

d ce que, as, as far as, by, according as. 

S JL ce que je puis juger, as far as I can judge. 

ainsi que, as, as well as, even as, in the manner. 

Howe, ainsi que Nelson, etait un grand amiral, Howe, as well as- 
Nelson, was a great admiral. Cela s'est passe ainsi que je vous Vai 
dit, that has happened in the manner I have told you. 

d mesure que, according to, as, accordingly, in proportion as. 

On vous payera a mesure que vous travaillerez r you will be paid in 
proportion to, or according as you work.. 

apres que, when, after, after that. 

Nous sortirons apres que nous aurons dine, we shall go out when, 
or after we have dined. 

attendu que, as, because, since, seeing, that. 

Attendu gw'il s'agissait d\me matiere impoitante, il fut arrete qu'il 
y allat, seeing that, because, or since the thing in question was of 
moment, it was resolved that he should go there. 

au lieu que, whereas, when on the contrary, while. 

II ne songe qu'a son plaisir, au lieu qu'i] devrait veiller a ses af- 
faires, he minds nothing but his pleasure, whereas he ought to look 
after his business. 

Obs. Although conjunctions are generally followed by some particular 
mood, yet there are, or may be, manyexceptions. 



CONJUNCTIONS. l63 

aussi bien que, as well as, and even. 

Je sais cela aussi bien que vous, I know that as ivettas you. 

aussi peu que, as little as, as few as. 

Vous en prendrez aussi peu que vous vaudrez, you will take as 
few as, or as little as you please. 

aussitot que, as soon as. 

Je lui dirai, aussitot ^u'il viendra, I will tell him, as soon as he 
returns. 

autant que, as, as far as. 

Autant que j'en puis juger , as far as I can judge. 

bien attendu que, provided that, on condition that, it being 
understood that. 

Je vous aceorde cela, mais bien attendu que vous ferez votre ou- 
vrage,I grant you that, but on condition that you will do your work. 

de meme que, as, just as, even as. 

11 fondit sur lui de mime que l'epervier fait sur sa proie, he darted 
upon him as a hawk upon its prey. 

depuis que, since, since that. 

Elle est morte, depuis que vous Sies parti, she died since you went 
away. 

des que, as soon as, since. 

Des que la paix sera faite, je partirai pour la France, as soon as 
peace is made, I shall set off for Fiance. Des que vous le souhai- 
tez, je vous le donnerai, since you wish it, I will give it you. 

en effet, indeed, and indeed, in reality. 

Nous devons aimer Dreu, en effet qu'y a-t-il de plus raisonnable que 
d'aiiner un hienfaiteur ? it is our duty to love God, and indeed what 
is more reasonable than to love a benefactor ? 

lorsque, when, at the time. 

Lorsqu'W apprit cette fataTe nouvelle, il partft sur le champ, when 
he heard that fatal news, he set off immediately. 

neanmoins, nevertheless, and yet, however, still. 

II est encore tres jeune, et nianrnoins il est fort savant en Mathe- 
matiques, he is very yonng, and yet, or nevertheless, he is very 
learned in Mathematics. 

parceque, because, in as much, for as much. 

Je le veux bien, parceque cela est juste, I consent to it, because it 
is just. 



164 CONJUNCTIONS. 

pendant que, while, whilst. 

Pendant que nous jouons, il etudie safari, whilst we are playing, 
he studies his lesson. 

puisque, since, seeing, seeing that. 

Je le veux bien, puisque vous le voulez, I agree fo it, since, or see- 
ing that you wish it. Puis done que vous le voulez ainsi, since you 
will have it so then. 

selon que, as, according as, according to. 

lis seront payes selon qu'ils travailleront, they will be paid accord- 
ing to their work. 

sitot que^ as soon as. 

Sitdt qu'W eut re<ju la lettre, il partit, as soon as he had received the 
letter, he set off. 

tandis que, while, or whilst. 

Tandis gu'il m'en souvient, whilst I remember. 

t ant que, as far as, so far as, as long as. 

Tant que la vue pent s'etendre, as far as the sight can reach. 
Tant que je serai dans Paris, as long as I am {shall be) in Paris. 

tellcment que, so, so that, in such a manner. 

Nous sommes tellement occupes que nous ne voyons personne, 
we are so occupied that we see nobody, or we are so very busy that 
we see nobody. 

vu que, seeing that, considering that, since, because. 

II ne peut le faire, vu gw'il est ignorant, he cannot do it, because 
he is ignorant. 

List of conjunctions which generally take the subjunctive 
after them. 

a Dieu ne plaise que, God forbid that. 

*A Dieu ne plaise que vous sachiez ces choses-la mieux que moi, 
God forbid that you should know those things better than I. 

afin que, that, to the end that, in order that. 

Je l'ai dit, afin que vous le sachiez, I said so that you might know it. 

a moins que, unless, except. (Obs. Ne is put after a moins 
que.) 

II n'en fera rien, a moins que vous ne lui parliez, he will do nothing 
unless you speak to him. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 165 

au cas que, ou en cas que, in case that, if. 

Je n'y irai pas, au cas que cela arrive, I shall not go there, if that 
should happen. En cas que je ne sois pas chez moi, if I be not at 
home. 

avant que, before, ere. 

Avant que nous fissions leves, before we were up. 

bien loin que, far from, so far from. 

Bien loin que cela soit > it is- far from being so, 

bien que, though, although. 

II est honnete homrae, bien gu'il soit pauvre, he is an honest ma» r 
although he be poor. 

de crainte que, for fear that, lest. (06s. Ne is put after de 
crainte que.) 

De crainte gu'il ne \efasse,for fear, or lest he should do it. 

de peur que, for fear, lest. (06s. Ne is put after de peur que.) 
De peur qu , i\ nemeure, for fear, or lest he should die* 

en attendant que, till, until, in the mean while. 

Jouons en attendant qu'il vienne, let us play till he comes. 

encore que, though-,, although. 

Encore qu'i\ soit fort jeune, il est sage, although he be very young 
he is prudent. 

loin que, far from. 

Loin gu'il soit dispose a vous faire satisfaction, il esthomme a vous 
quereller, far from being disposed to offer you satisfaction, it is 
likely he will quarrel with you. 

moyennant que> provided that, provided. 

Elle l'aura, moyennant gw'elle vienne, she will have it, provided 
she come, 

plaise d Dieu que, God grant that. 

Plaise a, Dieu que nous ayons fa paix, God grant that we may have 
peace. 

plut a Dieu, would to God. 

Plut a Dieu que cela/tU, would to God it were so. 

pour que, for, that, to the end that, as. 

C'est trop outrageant pour que je ne m'en venge pas, it is too outra- 
geous for me not to resent it. 



166 CONJUNCTIONS. 

pourpeu que, if ever so little, let ever so little. 

Pour pen que vous enpreniez soin, if you take ever so little care of it. 

Pour peu qu'un homme soit connu d'un autre, let a man have ever 

so little acquaintance with another. 

pourvu que, provided that, provided. 

Pourvu qu'il n'arrive rien de contraire, provided nothing happens 
to the contrary. 

quoique, although, though, however. 

Quoiqu'il soit pauvre, il est honnete homme, although he be poor, 
he is an honest man. 

sans que, without. 

II a passe sans que je Vaie appercu, he passed without my having 
perceived him. 

soit que, or ou, whether. 

Soit qu'il veille, soit git'il dorme, (or ou qu'il dorme), whether he 
be awake, or asleep. 

suppose que, suppose, supposing, supposing that. 

Quel fruit en retirerons-nous, suppose qu'ils fissent la paix ? what 
advantage shall we gain by it, supposing they make peace ? 

The following conjunctions so?netimes take the indicative, 
and sometimes the subjunctive after them. 

d condition que, on condition that, provided that, provided. 

J'y consens, a condition gw'il viendra, I consent to it, on condition 
that he will come. J'y consentiiai, d condition qu'il vienne, I will 
agree to it, provided that he come. 

d la charge que, on condition that, provided. 

Je lui ai cede cette terre-la d la charge qu'il vienne, ou qu'il vien- 
dra ; qu'il vint, ou qu'il viendrait, 1 have made the estate over to 
him on condition that, or provided he come, will come, or should 
come. 

defafon que, so that, in such a manner that. 

La nuit vint, defaqon que jefus contraint de me relirer, night came 
on, so that I was obliged to retire. II faut vivre defaqon gw'on ne 
fasse tort a. personne, we should live so that we may do harm to 
nobody. 

de maniere que, so that, in such a manner that. 

Faites les choses de maniere que tout le monde soit content, do 
things so that, or in such a manner that every body may be con- 



CONJUNCTIONS. 167 

tented. Be maniere qu'il n'etait point du tout content, so thathe 
was not satisfied at all. 

de sorte que, en sorte que, so that, insomuch that, that. 

La nuit vint de sorte qu'ilfut coniraint de se retirer, night came on, 
so that he was obliged to retire. Faites en sorte que tout soil pret, 
see that every thing be ready. 

There are two sorts of conjunctions lohicli take the infinitive 
after them. 

1st. Those which, on account of their being followed by 
a verb, are not distinguished from prepositions; such as, pour, 
sans,jusqu'd, &c. 

2nd. All conjunctions followed by de ; such as, afn de, 
auant que de, au lieu de, de peur de, &c. — [V. Grammaire des 
Grammaires, vol. ii. p. 113.] 

pour, to, in order to, with a design to, for. 

II est trop sense pour /aire cela, he has too much sense to do that. ! 

sans, without, besides. 

II abeaucoup d'argent dans ses coffres, sans parler de ses revenus, 
he has a great deal of money in his coffers, not to, or without speak- 
ing of his revenues. 

afin de, to, in order to, that, to the end that. 

II ecrit contre le Docteur, afin dattraper un benefice, he writes 
against the doctor in order to obtain a living. 

a la charge de, on condition of. 

Je lui ai vendu mon cheval, a la charge de payer mes creanciers, I 
have sold him my horse on condition of his paying my creditors. 

arc ant de, ou avant que de, before. 

Parlez-lui avant de le faire, speak to him before you do it. 

bien loin ar, instead of, far from. 

Bien loin de me remercier, il m'a dit des injures, instead of thank- 
ing me, he abused me. 

de crainte de, for fear of. 

Les soldats se fortifierent, de crainte d'etre surprises, the soldiers 
fortified themselves for fear of being surprised. 

de peur dc. for fear of. 

II ne se rend jamais tard, de peur d'etre vole, he never comes home 
late, for fear of being robbed. 



1(>8 EXERCISES ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

EXERCISES ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

FIRST LESSON. 

Je n'en veux pas a cause qu'il est neuf. II peut aller, k 
condition qu'il la dise. Les plaisirs ainsi que les peinestrou- 
blent l'ame. A ce que je puis voir, vous ne Paurez pas a 
temps. Ainsi que les rayons du soleil dissipent les nuages, 
ainsi la presence du prince dissipe les seditions. Voulez- 
vous sortir, apres que vous aurez dejeune. A mesure que 
Pun avancait, Pautre reculait. II faut ecouter les pauvres 
aussi-bien que les riches. Je suis arrive autsit6t qu'il m'a ete 
possible. II aime la lecture autant que vous aimez le jeu. 
Je vous Paccorde, bien entendu que vous tiendrez parole. 
De meme que la cire molle reeoit aisement toutes sortes 
d'empreintes et de figures, de meme un jeune homme regoit 
facilement toutes les impressions qu'on veut lui donner. 
Qu'avez vous fait depuis que vous &tes ici 1 J'en jugerai lors- 
que j'en serai mieux informe. Pendant que nous sommes 
libres. Sit6t que nous eAmes dine, nous partimes. Tandis 
qu'il fait beau temps. Tant que j'aurai de l'argent, vous n'en 
manquerez pas. Quand vous aurez une connaissance plus 
etendue de la geometrie et de Palgebre, je vous donnerai 
quelques legons d'astronomie. 

Je n'en veux pas, I will not ainsi, so : reculait, retired 

have it (of it) toutes sortes, all kinds 

troubler, to disturb empreinte, impressions 

dissiper, to disperse serai, am (shall be) 



SECOND LESSON. 

A. Dieu ne plaise qu'elle ne meure. Je suis sa caution, 
afin qu'il soit mis en liberie. II faudra nous retirer, au cas 
que cela arrive. Avant qu'il soit un an. Pour les besoins 
du corps, bien loin qu'ils me fassent douter de la bonte de 
Dieu, j'y trouve des marques sensibles de son attention pater- 
nelle sur nous. Bien qu'il le sache, il n'en parle pas. En 
cas qu'elle vienne, dites lui que je suis sorti. Encore qu'il 
soit riche, il n'en vaut pas mieux. Dep&chez-vous, de crainte 
que Pheure ne soit passee. II a fait son testament, de peur 



EXERCISES ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 169 

qu'il ne mouriit sans le faire. Loin qu'il fasse de bruit, il est 
tranquille. Je le lui accorderai, moycnnant qu'il vienne le 
ebercher. Plut a Dieu que les homraes entendissent leurs 
vrais interests! Yous ra'avez rendu trop de service, pour que 
je puisse jamais douter de votre amitie. II le fera, pour peu 
quevousluien parliez. Je vous payerai, pourvu que vous le 
fassiez. Vous ferez bien cela sans que j'y aille. 

Mourir, to die entendre, to understand 

caution, surety trop, too many 

retirer, to withdraw bien, well enough 

testament, will fy aille, my going there 



THIRD LESSON. 

Pour se tromper, il ne faut qu'Stre homme, mais pour s'ob- 
stiner dans son erreur, il faut etre fou. J'ai fait tout mon 
possible pour gagner son amitie. Nous ne pouvons trahir 
la vtrite, sans nous exposer au mepris des honnetes gens, 
J'ai ete six jours sans la voir. II a passe la nuit sans dormir. 
II est avare jusqu'a se refuser le necessaire. II commenca 
par se plaindre, et finit par demander de l'argent. Si je me 
donne tant de mal, c'est afin de faire quelque chose de bon. 
Je lui ai vendu ma terre, a la charge de payer mes crean- 
ciers. Travaillez au lieu dejouer. II est alle le trouver afin 
d'obtenir sa grace. II faut prier Dieu avant que de se mettre 
au travail. Bien loin d'aimer sa femme, il ne la saurait souf- 
frir. II ne sort jamais la nuit, de peur des voleurs. Nous 
avons fait venir du ble, de peur d^en manquer. 

S'obstiner, to persist mettre au travail, to begin to 

trahir, to act contrary to work 

mepris, scorn ne saurait souffrir, connot en- 

creanciers, creditors dure 

chercher, to look for 

grace, pardon, or forgiveness hie, corn 



FOURTH LESSON. 

Si pendant une belle nuit, et dans un lieu dont l'horizon 
soit a decouvert, on suit avec attention le spectacle du ciel ; 

15 



17X) EXERCISES ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

on le voit changer a chaque instant. Les etoiles s'elevent 
ou s'abaissent ; quelques-unes commencent a, se montrer vers 
Porient, d'autres disparaissent vers Poccident ; plusieurs, tel- 
lcs que Petoile polaire, et les etoiles de la grande Ourse, 
n'atteignent jamais Phorizou dans nos climats. Dans ces 
mouvemens divers, la position respective de tous ces astres 
reste la mgme : ils decrivent des cercles d'autant plus petits, 
qu'ils sont plus pres d'un point que Pon con§oit immobile. 
Ainsi le ciel parait tourner stir deux points fixes nommes 
par cette raison, poles du monde ; et dans ce mouvement, il 
emporte le systeme entier des astres. Le p61e eleve sur no- 
tre horizon estle p61e boreal ou septentrional ; le p61e oppose 
que Pon imagine audessous de l'horizon, se nomme p61e au- 
stral ou meridional, — Laplace. 

Lieu, place se montrer, to appear 

dont Vlwrizon soit a decouvert, Ourse, Bear 

where the horizon is un- atteindre, to reach 

interrupted emporter, to carry along with 

spectacle, appearance 



SYNTAX OP ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



171 



SYNTAX. 



sntav of &vtitltu anirNottus* 



CHAPTER T. 



Rules, illustrated by Examples, for the contraction of Arti- 
cles and Nouns. 



Rule I. 

The articles un or une, a; and le or la, the, must agree 
with nouns in gender and number j as, 



Un livre,m. a book 
ujic plume, f. a pen 
unefemme, f. a woman 

Un homme sage commande 

a ses passions 
Je viens d'une eglise 
Je parle d'un cheval 
Le livre que j'ai lu est sur la 

table 
La terre tourne autour du 

soleil 
La maison de mon pere n'est 

pas finie 



Le livre, m. the book 
la plume, f. the pen 
lesfemmes, f. pi. the women 

A wise man governs his pas- 
sions 

I come from a church 

I speak of a horse 

The book which I have read 
is upon the table 

The earth turns round the sun 

The house of my father, or 
my father's house is not 
finished. - 



Obs. The articles are repeated in French though not in English; as, 
Le pire, la mere, et la sceur sont alles en France, the father, mother, and 
sister, are gone to France ; fai un bon pere, une bonne mere, et une bonne 
$omr t I have a good father, mother, and sister. 



irz 



SYNTAX OF ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



Le cheval que je vous ai ven- 

du est excellent 
La maison que j 7 ai achetee 

est excellente 
Le rez de chaussee etait in- 

onde 



The horse which I have sold 
you is excellent 

The house which I have 
bought is excellent 

The ground-floor was over- 
flowed 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



Have you shut the door ? Have you not opened the window ? 
The Rhine is a fine river. Walk in the yard. Read a book. 
Light the candles. Speak to the maid. Go to the park. 
Observe the rules of the school, and the eye of the master. 
I esteem the virtue of the man. He will lend me a book. 
By buying the horse, I have also bought the saddle and {the) 
bridle. The prudence of the father. The antiquity of the 
empire. The body perishes, the soul is immortal. The 
army of the infidels was defeated- A part of the time is iU 
employed. 



To shut, fermer 

door, porte, f. 

to open, ouvrir 

window, fenetre, f. 

fine, beau ; river, riviere, f. 

Rhine, Rhin, m. 

to walk, se promener 

in, dans ; yard, cour > f. 

to light, allumer 

candle, chandelle, f. 

to speak, purler 

maid, servante, f. 

to go, oiler 

park, pare, m. 

to observe, observer 

rule, regie, f. 

school, ecole, f. 

eye, ceil, m. 

master, maitre, m. 

to esteem, est'mer 



virtue, vertu, f. 

he will lend me, il me prelera 
by buying, en achetant 
to buy, acheter ; also, aussi 
saddle, selle, f. 
bridle, bride, f. 
prudence, prudence, f. 
antiquity, antiquitt, f. 
empire, empire, m. 
body, corps, m. 
to perish; perir 
soul, dme, f. 
immortal, immortel 
army, armee, f. 
infidel, injidlle 
was defeated, fut defaite 
part, par tie, f. 
time, terns, m. 

is ill employed, est mat em- 
ploye 



SYNTAX OF ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



173 



Rule. II. 

The definite article is used in French, though not in 
English; 1st, before nouns in a general, or universal sense ; 
2ndly, before the proper names of countries, mountains, prov- 
inces, &c. and also before titles of men. 



EXAMPLES. 



1. La vertu est aimable 
Le vice est odieux 

Les homines sont mortels 

Le mensonge est le plus grand 

de tous les vices 
L'or, et V argent ne sauraient 

rendre Vhomme heureux 
Uhonneur est du aux rois et 

aux magistrals 
La vie n'est qu'un songe 
Le blanc, le rouge, et le noir, 

sont trois differentes cou- 

leurs 

2, La France est plus petite 
que la Russie 

L'Irland est plus peuplee que 

I'Ecosse 
Le Mont Vesuve est un volcan 

celebre 
Le Languedoc est la plus belle 

province de la France 
L'aiiiiral Nelson fut tue a la 

bataille de Trafalgar 
Monsieur le President 



Virtue is amiable 

Vice is odious 

Men are mortal 

Falsehood is the greatest of 

all vices 
Gold and silver cannot make 

man happy 
Honor is due to kings and 

magistrates 
Life is but a dream 
White, red, and black are three 

different colors 

France is less than Russia 

Ireland is more populous than 
Scotland 

Mount Vesuvius is a celebrated 
volcano 

Languedoc is the finest pro- 
vince of France 

Admiral Nelson was killed at 
the battle of Trafalgar 

Mr. President 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

Life is a mixture of good and evil. Man is endowed with 
reason. The price of silk is extravagant. Men ought to shun 
vice, and follow virtue. Italy is the garden of Europe. It is 
to England we are indebted for the discovery of the circula- 
tion of the blood. Study makes men learned. Black and 
15* 



174 



SYNTAX OF ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



red are more esteemed than yellow and grey. History, 
geography, and mathematics are (some)' necessary sciences. 
Virtue alone can make man happy. 



Life, vie, f. 
mixture, melange 
good, biens ; evil, maux 
endowed with, dout de 
price, prix, m. 
silk, sole, f. 

extravagant, exorbitant 
men ought, on doit 
shun, fair : vice, vice, m. 
follow, s'attacher a 
Italy, Italie, f. 
it is, e'est 

we are indebted for, on doit 
discovery, decouverte, f. 
circulation, circulation, f. 
blood, sang, m. 



study,, etude, L 

to make, rendrc 

learned, savant, rm 

black, noir, m. 

red, rouge^ m. 

esteemed, es times, m. pi. 

yellow, jaune, m. 

grey, gris, m. 

history, histoire, f. 

geography, geographic, f. 

mathematics j mathematiques } 

m. pi. 
science, science, f. 
necessary, necessaire 
alone, 
can, p< 



OBSERVATIONS. 

1. The proper names of deities, persons, &c.take no article before them ; 
unless when joined with another noun or adjective expressed or understood ; 
as, Dieu est present par tout, God is present every where ; Ciceron et De- 
mosthhxe etaient deux grands orateurs, Cicero and 1 Demosthenes were 
two great orators ; Jupiter ef Venus etaient des diviniles paiennes, Jupf- 
piter and Venus were heathen divinities. Le Dieu des Chretiens est un 
Dieu de paix, the God of Christians is a God of peace ; L 1 Empereur 
Mzxandre, the Emperor Alexander ; Les Cicerons et Us Demosthenes 
sont rares, Ciceros and Demosthenes are rare (here orateurs comnie, ora- 
tors like, is understood) ; Le Jupiter d'Uomere, Homer's Jupiter, or the 
Jupiter of Homer ; Uancienne Ro7ne 6tait t>h belle, ancient Rome was 
very fine ; Le Tasse, Tasso ; Xe Dante, Dante, (here potte, poet, is under- 
stood) ; so the names of most distinguished orators, authors, poets, and 
painters take the article, except Raphael, Michael Angelo, Petrarch, 
Bocace, Sannazar, and some others who have written in Latin. 

2. The names of islands, cities, towns, and also provinces, called after 
their capitals, take no article ; as, Rhodes, Candle, Corfu, Paris, Rome, 
Vienne, JVajrtes, Alger, G6nes, Geneve, Malthe, Venise, &c. 

3. The names of countries and kingdoms take no article before them, 
when motion from, or to, or rest in, is denoted ; as, to come from France, 
Spain, &c, venirDF, France, d'Espagne, &c. to go into, or live in 
France, Spain, &c. alter ou demeurer en France, en Espagne, &c 



SYNTAX OP ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



175 



also when preceded by a noun denoting any commodity of the country, or 
by the nouns roi, king ; w royaume, kingdom, &c. as, de la soie d'Italie, 
Italian silk ; le roi de France, d'Espagne, the king of France, 
Spain, &c. Sec. However, the names of some French provinces; as, 
VAnjou, Anjou, le Maine. Main ; le Dauphine, Dauphiny ; le Havre de 
Grace, Havre de Grace ; la Haye, the Hague, &c. do not fall under either 
of the two last exceptions ; nor the proper names of countries out of Europe 
as, la Chine, China ; les Indes, the Indies, &c. as, to come from Anjou, 
China, Sec, venir dk i/Anjott, de la Chine, &c. 



Obs. 1. Bucephale etait le cheval 

d' Alexandre 
Le.Jupiter de Phidias 
La Venus de Praxitele 
2. Sc 3. Rhodes, Can die, Corfou, 

sont des isles de la Mediterranee. 
Valence est une des plus agreables 

provinces d'Espagne 
Le royaume de Naples 
La republique de Geneve 
Florence appartient a la Toscane 
Tcnise est un etat d'Italie 
11 vient d'Angleterre 
El!e est sortie de France 
Us demeurent en Russie 
II va en Espagne 
La Province de Picardic, et celle 

d'Artois. 
L'Histoire d'Espagne 
L'Histoire du Perou 
II a ete an Mixique, an Japon, a 

la Chine, aux Indes 
Je viens du Mexique, du Japon, de 

la Chine, des Indes 
Je vais au .Mexique, au Japon, d 

la Chine, aux Jades 
II demeure a la Haye 



Bucephalus was Alexander's horse 

The Jupiter of Phidias 

The Venus of Praxiteles 

Rhodes, Candia, Corfu, are islands 
in the Mediterranean 

Valentia is one of the most agree- 
able provinces of Spain 

The kingdom of Naples 

The republic of Geneva 

Florence belongs to Tuscany 

Venice is a state of Italy 

He comes from England 

She is gone from France 

They live in Russia 

He goes to Spain 

The Province of Picardy and that 
of Artois 

The History of Spain 

The History of Peru 

He has been in Mexico, in Japan, 
in China, the Indies 

I come from Mexico, Japan, China, 
the Indies 

I am going to Mexico, to Japan, to 
China, to the Indies 

He lives at the Hague 



Rule III. 

The articles omitted in French, though used in English ; 
1st. Before a paresthetica (phrase ; as ; 

Londres (capitate del'Angle- London (the capital of Eng- 

terre) est une grande ville land) is a great city 

Majorque,* isle de la Medi- Majorca, an island in the 

terranee,* sa capitale est Mediterranean, its capital 



* The commas frequently supply the place of parentheses, and may gen- 
erally be considered as small parentheses. 



176 SYNTAX OF ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 

Paltna, ville riche avec un is Palma, a rich town with 

bon port a good port 

Telemaque, fils d'Ulysse, roi Telemachus, the son of Ulys- 

d'lthaque ses, king of Ithaca 

But when the phrase is not parenthetical then the article 
is used ; as, 

Londres est la capitale de London is the capital of Eng- 

l'Angleterre land 

Majorque est une isle de la Majorca is an island in the 

Mediierranee Mediterranean 

Pan etait le Dieu de la na- Pan was the god of nature 

ture 

2ndly. Before comparatives ; as, 

Plus on se presse, moins on The more we hasten, the slow- 

avance er we proceed 

Plus on etudie, plus on de- The more we study, the more 

vient savant learned we become 

3rdly. Before the titles of books, &c. and after etre, de, cleve- 
nir, quel, comme, point, en, sans, avec, avoir peur, &c. when the 
names* which follow them are derived from nations, dignities, 
employments, trades, conditions, &c, or when the nouns are 
taken in an indefinite, general, adjectival, or adverbial sense ; 
but when the noun is taken in a particular, or individual* 
sense, then the article is used. 

Grammaire de la langue Fran- A Grammar of the French 

caise language 

Catalogue de livres Anglais A Catalogue of English books 

Je su\s franc ais I am [French) a Frenchman 

II est italien He is an Italian 

Elle est duchesse She is a duchess 

Vous §tes negociant You are a merchant 

II etait officicr He was an officer 

II est cordonnier He is a shoemaker 

Elle est veuve She is a widow 

Quel bruit vous faites ! What a noise you make ! 

Quel homme vous etes ! What a man you are ! 

II agitcw roi He acts like a king 



SYNTAX OP ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 177 

Voila tine* Grcmmaire de la There is a grammar of the 
langue Anglaise Knglish language 

L/usage est le tyran des Custom, or use is the tyrant 
langues of languages 



OBSERVATIONS. 

1. When ce is the subject of etre, instead of il, elle, &c, or when an 
adjective is used with the noun, the article is not omitted; as, c'est un 
negotiant, he, or that, is a merchant ; je suis un Franqais d'illustre mai- 
son, I am a Frenchman of an illustrious family (house) ; c'etait un prince, 
he was a prince ; il etait un prince malheureux, he was an unfortunate 
prince. In each of these examples the noun is taken in an individual 
sense.— [V. 3, Rule III.] 

2. "When a numeral follows as a title to a noun, the article is omitted; 
as, George quatre, George the Fourth; livre premier, book the first; 
chapitre cinq, chapter the fifth: but when adjectives of praise or dispraise 
follow nouns, the article is used; as, Louis le juste, Louis the just ; Nerc* 
It tyran, Nero the tyrant. 

3. The article is omitted in adverbial expressions ; as, c'est un homme 
sans vertu, that is a man without virtue : but when any thing is saidf o 
virtue itself, the article is used ; as, sans la vertu l'homme ne saurait eetr 
heureux, without virtue man cannot be happy. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

Paris, the capital of France, is a fine city. Madrid is the 
capital of Spain. The more you (will) think, the more you 
will improve. Frederick the Third. A discourse upon epic 
poetry. I have won a thousand guineas ; I will lend you a 
hundred of them. The St. George, a ninety-gun ship. The 
Count of Clermont, a prince of the blood, died, &c. The 
contents {table of contents), A general maxim, &c. We are 
indebted to Homer for the rich invention of having personi- 
fied the divine attributes, human passions, and physical causes, 
a fruitful source of (some) fine fictions. I dare not eat thee 
as a mouse, but I will devour thee as a bat. Will it be a 
holiday to-morrow? Are you a Scotchman ? She is a French 
woman. I am an Englishman. He will become a doctor in 
time. Will you have a morsel? Have you a desire to read ? 
He has had a quarrel. He has a pain in his head, arm, &c> 
(in the head, in the arm). 



178 



SYNTAX OF ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



Spain, Espagne 

more, plus 

to think, penser, (future) 

to improve, faire de progres 

Frederick, Frederic 

discourse, discours 

upon, sur 

poetry, po'esie, f. 

epic, epique 

to win, gagner 

guinea, guinee 

I will lend you of them, je 

vous en preterai 
hundred, cent 
ninety-gun ship, vaisseau de 

guerre, de quatre-vingt dix 

pieces de canon 
count, comte, m. 
to die, mourir, pret. 
contents, table des matieres 
maxim, maxime, f. 
general, general, f. 
we are indebted, on doit 
Homer, Homere 
rich, riche 

invention, invention, f. 
of having personified, d'avoir 

personnalise 
attribute, attribute m. 



divine, divins, m. pi. 

passion, passion, f. 

human, humaine 

cause, cause, f. 

physical, physique 

source, source, f. 

fruitful, fecond 

fiction, fiction, f. 

I dare not eat thee, je n'ose 

te manger 
as, comme 
mouse, souris } f. 
but, mais 
I will devour thee, je te cro- 

querai 
bat, chauve-souris, f. 
holiday, conge, m. 
to-morrow, demain 
Scotchman, Ecossais 
Frenchwoman, Frangaise 
Englishman, Anglais 
to become, devenir (ir.) 
doctor, docteur, m, 
in time, avec le terns 
morsel, morce.au, m. 
desire, envie, f. 
to, de ; read, lire 
quarrel, querelle, f. 
pahi ? mat 






Rule IV. 

The partitive articles du, de la, de V, des (Englished by 
some expressed or understood) are used to express a portion 
of a whole thing, or part of a quantity of things; as, 



Apportez-moi du pain, de la 
viande, de Z'eau, et des 
ceufs 

Voila du vin et de la biere 

Elle a des amis 

Avez-vous du fil, ou de la 
soie ? 



Bring me some bread, some 
meat, some water and eggs 

There is wine and beer 
She has (some) friends 
Have you thread or silk ? 



SYNTAX OP ARTICLES AND HWmS. 179 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

Will you bring me some apples, pears, oranges, and nuts ? 
Bread and water are sufficient for him. Guinea produces 
pepper, cotton, honey, wax, and ambergris. This thread re- 
sembles (to the) silk. This son is like (to) his father. You 
must lay this fruit in (the) straw. He compares this stuff (to 
the) velvet. Did you see any fish in the market? Let us 
have charity for all men. 

To be willing, vouloir thread, fil, m. 

bring me, m'ap porter to resemble, ressembler 

apple, pomme, f. to, d; silk, sole, f. 

pear, poire, f. to be like, ressembler ; to, d 

orange, orange, f. you must lay, ilfaut mettre 

nut, noisette, f. fruit, fruit, m. ; in, dans 

are sufficient for him, lui suf- straw, paille, f. 

fiscnt. to compare, comparer 

Guinea, Guinee, f. stuff, itoffe, f. 

to produce, produire velvet, velours, m. 

pepper, yoivre, m. did you see? avez-vous vu ? 

cotton, coton, m. fish, poissoji, m. ■ 

honey, miel, m. market, marche, ra. 

wax, cire, f. charity, charite, f. ; for, pour 

ambergris, ambre-gris, m. all men, tons les hommes 



Obs. 1. When a noun is preceded by an adjective, the preposition de 
only is used ; as, de bon pain, good bread ; de bonne viande, good meat ; 
de bons pois, good peas, &c. : but nouns compounded with an adjective 
take des ; as, des beaux-esprits, wits ; also, when the word which quali- 
fies is used in a particular sense ; as, le but des bons maitres doit etre de 
cultiver l'esprit de leurs disciples, the aim of good masters should be to 
cultivate the mind of their pupils. — [ V. Du Marsais, tome ii. p. 33.] 

2. De is used after beaucoup, much ; combien, how much ; pen, 
little ; point, no ; rien, nothing ; sorte, sort ; espece, kind ; tant, so much, 
moiyis, less ; plus, less ; que, as, &c. ; as, combien d'argent avez-vous ? 
how much money have you ? je n'ai pas beaucoup d'argent, I have not 
much money ; voulez-vous boire un peu de vin ? will you drink a little 
wine ? but bien takes the article after it ; as, a-t-il bien de Pargent ? has 
he much money ? and beaucoup also takes ihe article when a determinate 
sense is to be expressed ; as, elle a depense beaucoup de /'argent que 
vous lui aviez donne, she has spent a great deal of the money which you 
gave her. 



180 



SYNTAX OP ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



Rule V. 

1. The definite article is used in French, and the indefi- 
nite in English, before nouns of number, iveight, and measure, 
and also before nouns used in a general sense ; as, 



Nombre. 



Number. 



Les ceufs valent trente sous Eggs are worth fifteen pence 



la douzaine, 



a dozen 



Poids. Weight. 

Le veau coute vingt sous la Veal costs ten pence a pound, 

livre, et le beurre seize aud butter eight pence a 

sous la livre, pound 



Mesur 



Measure. 



Le vin se vend soixante ecus Wine sells for sixty crowns a 
le muid ; e'est plus de six hogshead ; it is more than 
sous la. bouteille, three-pence (or six sous) a 

bottle 

Nouns in a General Sense. 

he sage n'ani amour ni haine, A wise man has neither love 

nor hatred 
he mensonge est indigne d'un A lie is unworthy an honest 
honnete homme, man 

2. Par is used instead of the definite article before nouns 
of time ; as, 

II donne a son fils six francs He gives his son six francs a 
par jour, (or per) day 

Je prends trois lemons de mu- I take three lessons a (or 
sique par semaine, per) week in music 

Also, the French say, par tete, a head (or per head) ; par 
lecon, a (or per) lesson ; as, 

II nous en coute six schel- It costs us six shillings a (or 

lings par tete, per) head 

II donne a son maitre de He gives his mathematical 

mathematiques une guinee master a guinea a (or per) 

par lecon, lesson 



SYNTAX OP ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



181 



3. The partitive article is used instead of the indefinite 
before a noun ; but the indefinite article is used before an 
adjective ; as, 

J'entends du bruit, 
J'entends un grand bruit, 

But we may either say, j'entends du bruit la haut, or j'en- 
tends un bruit la haut, I hear some, or a noise above. 



I hear a noise 

I hear a great noise 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

Wine sells for two francs* a bottle. I pay him two guineas 
a month. It is six guineas a quarter. He gives two lessons 
a week. He will ask you two shillings a league. Two 
crowns a bushel. How much a yard ? Four guineas an ell. 
Seven farthings a pint. Threepence a pound. Twice a 
year. Once a day. A wise man governs his passions. A 
liar and flatterer are equally despicable. Sometimes we hunt 
a stag, and sometimes a hare. Do you often fish with a (the) 
net?" 

Wine, pin, m. 
to sell for, se vendre 
bottle bouteille, f. 
I pay h\m,je lui paie 
month, mois, m. 
quarter, quartier 
to give, donner 
lesson, legon. f. 
week, scmaine, f. 
he will ask you, il vous de- 

mandera 
shilling, schelling, m. 
league, lieue, f. 
crown, ecu. m. 



bushel, boisseau, m. 
how much, combien 
yard, verge, f. 
ell, mine, f. 
farthing, Hard, m. 



pint, pinte, f. 

pound, livre, f. 

twice, deux fuis 

year, annie, f. 

once, unefois 

d ay, jour, m. 

wise man, sage 

to govern, regler ; his, son 

liar, menteur, m. 

flatterer, Jlatteur 

equally, egalement 

despicable, meprisable 

sometimes, tantot 

to hurt, courir (ir.) 

stag, cerf, m. 

hare, lievre, m. 

do you often fish ? pechez- 

vous souvent ? 
with {the), au ; net, Jilet, m. 



* A. franc is equal to about ten-pence in England. 
16 



182 



SYNTAX OP ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



Rule VI. 

When possession is expressed in English, we generally put 
an s with an apostrophe before it, at the end of a singular 
noun ; but if the noun be plural and end in s the apostrophe 
is put after it. Sometimes also we use of and the termina- 
tions en, an, &c. to express possession. The French invaria- 
bly put de, du, de la, de /', or des before the latter noun or 
pronoun ; as, 

Le livre de Jean, 

La Philosophie de Newton, 

La maison de mon pere, 

La fin de Z'annee, 

Le fils du roi, 

Le palais de la reine, 

Les maisons des deux sceurs, 

Sur des ailes (f aigles, 

L'age d'or, 

L'armee de Prusse, 

Les troupes du roi de Prusse 

La mart du roi de France, 



Du c6te du pere, du c6te de 
la mere, 



John's book 

Newton's Philosophy 

My father's house, or the 

house of my father 
The year's end 
The king's son 
The queen's palace 
The two sisters' houses • 
On eagles'' wings 
The golden age 
The Prussian army 
The king of Prussia's troops 
The death of the king of 

France, or the king of 

France 9 s death 
Both by fat Iter and mother's 

side 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

The king's palace. The king of England's subjects. The 
garden gate is open. My uncle's house is well built. Cice- 
ro's letters are very fine. This is the captain's house. Dia- 
na's anger caused Actaeon's death. Helen's beauty caused 
the ruin of Troy. That is my brother's wife. Do you see 
the queen's servants ? 



Subject, sujet 

gate, porte, f. 

well, Men; to build, bdtir 

Jetter, lettre, f. 

Cicero, Cic6ron 

very, fort 



this is, void 
captain, capitaine, m. 
anger, colere, f. 
Diana, Diane, f. 
caused, causa 
death, mort, f. 



SYNTAX OF ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



183 



Action, Action 
beauty, bcaute, f. 
Helen, Helene 



that is, voildi 
wife, epouse, f. 
to see, voir 



ruin, mine, f. ; Troy, Troie servant, domestique, m. 



OBSERVATIONS. 

1. The English compounds are rendered in French by the aid of de, and 
sometimes by a ; as, a gold watch, une montre eTor; a windmill, un mou- 
lin a vent, &c. 

2. When to follows nouns in English, it is always rendered by de in 
French; as, a friend to virtue, un ami de la vertu. 

3. The governing substantive is never omitted in French ; therefore St. 
Paul's, that is, St. Paul's church, is rendered by Veglise de Sc. Paul ; at 
my brother's, that is, at my brother's house, is rendered by the preposi- 
tion chez ; as, chez mon fre v re ; this hat is the gentleman's, meaning, 
this hat belongs to the gentleman, is expressed by a dative in French; as, 
ce chapeau est a Monsieur ; a friend of my brother's, meaning, one of 
my brother's friends, is turned in French by, un des amis de monfrere. 

4. When a noun is followed by another noun, the preposition de is used 
without any article when the sense is general or indeterminate ; as, an act 
of justice, unacte de justice ; greedy of glory, avide de gloire ; but, in 
a particular sense, the article must be used ; as, Part de l a natation, the 
art of swimming ; il est avide de la gloire de ses ancitres, he is greedy 
of the glory of his ancestors. 



CONTRASTED EXAMPLES OF ARTICLES. 



With the Article. 

London is the capital of 
^England, Paris of France, 
Madrid of Spain, &c. 

He lives in Peru, Japan, 
China, Martinico, the In- 
dies, &c. 

He comes from India, Asia, 
America, Africa, China, 
&c. 

The islands of Japan, Jamai- 
ca, Barbadoes, &c. 



Without the Article. 
The kingdom of England,* 

the kingdom of France, the 

kingdom of Spain, &c. 
He lives in Italy, in Persia, 

France, at, or in London, 

Paris, &c. 
He comes from Italy, from 

Persia, France, England, 

Madrid, &c. 
The islands of Rhodes, Can- 

dia, Corfu, &c. 



* The words in italics in the left column, take the article ; and those in 
the right-hand column, take no article. 



184 



SYNTAX OF ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



He is returned from French 

Flanders, from Mexico, &c. 
The mountains of Asia Minor 

are Olympus, Ida, Taurus, 

&c. 
That town is situated between 

France and Switzerland 
The province of Main 
The politeness of France 
Normandy is in France 
The circumference of E??^- 

The interest of Spain 

The invention of printing is 

attributed to Germany 
He comes from Rochelle 

He did it with astonishing 
tourage 

The goodness of the ^reetf 

Henry 
The different species of «7??- 

??*«fc which are upon the 

He has jjchs, zn£, and p«/?er 

I have bought some 7«ce 
This lady has property 

Give me a 7*7 £/e of the wine 

which is in that bottle 
I have a great deal of the 

money which I brought from 

France 
Use the signs which we have 

agreed upon 

She has many* friends 
He is (that is) a physician 
He has no need of the lesson 
which you wish to give him 



He is returned from Flanders, 

from Germany, &c. 
The)- travelled as far as 

Mount Atlas 

He is gone into France and 

Switzerland 
A province of Spain 
The fashions of France 
The cows of Normandy 
The horses of England are 

very fine 
The wines of Spain 
The empire of Germany is 

divided into nine parts 
The wine of Burgundy is 

very good 
He did it with courage 

The goodness of Henry the 

Fourth 
There are different species of 

animals upon the earth 

He has good pens, ink, and 

paper 
I have bought some fine lace 
This lady has a great deal of 

property 
Give me a little (of) wine 

I have a great deal of money 
still 

We are obliged to use (of) 
signs, in order to make 
ourselves understood 

She has manyf friends 

He is a physician 

He has no need of lessons 



SYNTAX OP ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



185 



Knoidedge has always been It is an object of esteem, of 
the object of men's esteem, praise, of admiration 
praise, and admiration 



Spain, Espagne 
Peru, Perou, m. 
Japan, Japon, m. 
China, Chine, f. 
JMartinico, Martinique, f. 
to come, venzr ; from, c?e 
India, hides, pi. 
Asia, ^.s/e, f. 
America, Amerique, f. 
Africa, Afrique, f. 
Jamaica, Jamdique, f. 
Barbadoes, Barbade, f. 
to return, revenir 
Flanders, Flandre, f. 
Mexico, Mexique, m. 
mountain, montagne, f. 
Minor, Mineure, f. 
Olympus, Olympe, m. 
Ida, lic/a, m. 
Taurus, Taurus, m. 
between, erc£re 
Switzerland, Suisse, f. 
province, province, f. 
Main, Maine, m. 
politeness, politesse, f. 
Normandy, Normandie, f. 
in, dans ; circumference, ar- 

cumference, f. 
interest, interet, m. 
printing, imprimerie, f. 
to attribute, attribuer 
Germany, Allemagne, f. 
Rochelle, Rochelle, f. 
it, z7; to do, f aire 
courage, courage^ m. 
astonishing, etonnant 
goodness, 6on£e, f. 
Henry, ifenri 
species, especes, f. pi. 
16* 



upon, swr 

to buy, acheter 

lace, dentelle, f. 

lady, dame, f. 

property, fo'ercs, m. pi. 

little, j?e?4 

bottle, bouteille, f. 

a great deal, beaucoup 

to bring, apporter 

to use, 5e servir 

sign, signe, m. 

to have agreed, e£re convenu 

many, fo'ew* 

physician, medecin, m. 

need, besoin 

lesson, 7ep on, f. 

wish, voulez 

knowledge, connaissances, f.pl. 

esteem, estime, f. 

praise, Jouange, f. 

Italy, Itafo"e ; Persia, Perse 

at, or in, a 

Rhodes, Rhode 

Candia, Candie 

Corfu, Corfou 

to travel, voyager 

into, ew; fashion, mode, f. 

cow, vache, f. 

empire, empire, ni. 

to divide, diviser 

Burgundy, Bourgogne 

to oblige, obliger 

to use, d'wser 

in order to, powr 

ourselves, wows 

to make understood, /aire 

entendre 
many, beaucoupi 
object, objet, m. 






186 SYNTAX OF ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 

RECAPITULATORY PRACTICE. 

The king's palace will be a magnificent building. The 
queen's apartments are very fine. We eat bread. We drink 
water. The more we have, the more we desire. The ant is 
the emblem of industry, the lamb and dove of meekness and 
humility. Exercise and temperance strengthen the constitu- 
tion. Bread, water, and meat will be sufficient. He has fine 
lands and gardens. Cheerfulness promotes the happiness of 
the mind. Covetousness promises wealth, luxury pleasures. 
Secrecy is the key of prudence, and the sanctuary of wis- 
dom. Necessity is the mother of invention. Trade enriches, 
luxury enervates, and arts amuse. Alexander, the son of 
Philip, was a conqueror. Henry the Eighth was a great poli- 
tician. The more a country is inhabited, the more opulent it 
is. Complaisance suits itself to every humor. Obstinacy 
in vice is a mark of reprobation. Sight, hearing, feeling, 
taste, and smell, are the five natural senses. Corn is sold for 
a crown a bushel. My father goes to Ireland four or five 
times a } T ear. It is necessaiy, if } r ou wish to make a rapid 
progress (progresses rapid), that you take a lesson three tim< s 
a week. He says he is a Frenchman ; I think he is an Eng- 
lishman. I have been a prisoner in Egypt as a Phoenician. 

Mr. B , Sophia's uncle, says that you are a Spaniard. 

The best coffee comes from Mocha, a town of Arabia Felix. 
Edward the Third was a warrior. Henry the Fourth was a 
good king. George the Fourth was an excellent king. 

Building, bailment, m. cheerfulness, gaiete, f. 

magnificent, magnifique to promote, procurer 
apartments, appartemens, m. happiness, bonheur, m. 

we have, on a covetousness, avarice, m. 

we desire, on desire to promise, promettre, (ir.) 

ant, fourmi, f. wealth, richesses, pi. 

emblem, embleme, m. luxury, luxe, m. 

industry, Industrie, f. secrecy, secret, m. 

lamb, agneau, m. key, c/e, or clef, f. 

dove, colombe, f. sanctuary, sanctuaire, m. 

meekness, douceur, f. wisdom, sagessc, f. 

to strengthen, fortifier trade, commerce, m. 
constitution, temperament, m. to enrich, enrichir 

to be sufficient, suffire to enervate, affaiblir 

land, terrey f. to amuse, amuser 



SYNTAX OF ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



187 



Philip, Philippe 

"was, itait 

conqueror, conqueront 

Henry. Henri 

eighth, huit 

politician, politique, m. 

country, pays, m. 

inhabited, peuple 

it is, il est ; rich, riche 

to suit oneself, s'accommodcr 

every humor, toutes sortes 

d'humeurs 
obstinacy, opinidtrete, f. 
in, dans ; mark, marque, f. 
sight, vue, f. 
hearing, ouie, f. 
feeling, toucher, m. 
taste, gout, m. 
smell, odorat, m. 
sense, sens 



corn, bl'e, m. ; is sold, se vend 

for a crown, un ecu 

bushel, boisseau, m. 

to make, fair e 

progress, progres, pi. 

rapid, rapide 

that you take, que vous pre- 

nitz 
I think, je crois 
prisoner, prisonnier, m. 
Phoenician, Phcenicien, m. 
uncle, oncle, m. 
Sophia, Sophie 
Spaniard, Espognol, m. 
coffee, cafe, m. 
Mocha, Moka 
Arabia Felix, Arable Heu- 

reuse 
Edward, Edouard 
warrior, guerrier, m. 



EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX OF ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



FIRST LESSON. 

C'est un trop long voyage pour moi. Un perfide est de- 
teste de tout le monde. Mon frere a une montre d ? or avec 
un ruban de soie. Les murs de la ville ont dix pieds d'epais- 
seur. L'automne est moins varie que le printems. Les 
plus habiles gens ne sont pas toujours les plus vertueux. La 
Loire est plus longue que la Seine. La beaute la plus rare 
est fragile et mortelle. Les hommes qui aiment l'etude sont 
avares de leur terns. La faiblesse, la crainte, la melancholie, 
et Tignorance sont les sources de la superstition. L'horame 
est sujet & toutes sortes d'infirmites. La jalousie est un me- 
lange d'amour et de haine, de crainte et de desespoir. La 
France et l'Angleterre sont deux puissans royaumes. Pai 
passe par TEspagne, la Suisse et l'Allemagne. Charles douze 
fut PAlexandre de son siecle. Cet homme est un Alexandre. 
Londres et Paris sont deux grandes viiles. L'ignorance est 
la mere de l'admiration, de l'erreur, du scrupule, de la super- 
stition, et de la prevention. 



SYNTAX OF ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 



Cest, it is ; trop, too 

pour, for 

perjide, perfidious man 

deteste de, hated by 

tout le monde, every body 

soie, silk ; murs, walls 

ont, are ; pieds, feet 

epaisseur, thick 

moins varie que, less varied 

than 
printems, spring 
gens, people 
toujours, always 



rare, exquisite 
avares, penurious 
faiblesse, weakness 
crainte, fear 
a toutes sortes, to all sorts, or 

kinds 
melange, mixture 
haine, hatred 
desespoir, despair 
Allemagne, Germany 
siecle, age 
scrupule, doubt 
prevention, anticipation 



SECOND LESSON. 

La patience et l'esperance, le terns et la fortune rendent 
toutes choses possibles. L'esperance est la derniere chose 
qui meurt dans Phomme. La religion est le meilleur garant 
que les hommes puissent avoir de la probite des hommes. La 
sobriete, la moderation, et les bonnes moeurs donnent une vie 
longue et exempte de maladies. Un homme qui est jaloux 
de sa reputation, frequente la bonne compagnie et fuit la mau- 
vaise. La droiture du cceur est le fondement de la vertu. 
La religion est une lumiere divine, qui decouvre Dieu k 
Phomme, et qui regie les devoirs de Phomme envers Dieu. 
La reconnaissance est un tribut du cceur qui est fait pour 6tre 
senti et non pour 6tre exprime. 



Rendre, to render, or make 
derniere, last 
mourir, to die 
garant, guarantee 
puissent, can ; mozurs, morals 
donner, to bestow, or ensure 
jaloux, careful 
fuir, to shun 



droiture, uprightness 
fondement, foundation 
lumiere, light 
decouvrir, to reveal 
regler, to regulate 
envers, towards 
la reconnaissance, gratitude 
pour, to ; sentir, to feel 



THIRD LESSON. 

Orgue. Cet instrument vient de la Grece ; il est fort an- 
cien, puisqu'Archimede et Vitruve en ont parle. Les pre- 



SYNTAX OP ARTICLES AND NOUNS. 189 

mieres que Pon vit en France furent apportees au roi Pepin, 
Fan 752, par les ambassadeurs de Pempereur Constantin. II 
V a des orgues hydrauliques dont on attribue Pinvention a 
Ctesibius, qui vivait sous Ptolomee Evergetes. 

Epingles. Les premieres epingles ont paru en Angle- 
terre, en 1569, et selon d'autres, en 1543. Auparavaut on 
se servait de brochettes de bois, cPivoire, ou d'epines. C'est a 
FAigle, departement de l'Orne, que se fabrique la plus grande 
quantite d'epingles ; il y a eu jusqu'a six mille ouvriers em- 
ployes a cette fabrique. On a calcule qu'il pouvait se con- 
so miner par an a Paris 60 millions d'epingles de loutes es- 
peces, qui, a 25 centimes* le cent, font cent cinquante mille 
francs.* — Amusemjsns Philologiques. 

Vent?-, to come sous, under 

Grece, Greece Ptolomee, Ptolomy 

fort , very; puisque, since ont paru, appeared 

Archimede, Archimedes selon, according to 

Vitruve, Vitruvius auparavant, formerly 

en, of it se servir, to make use of 
que Von vit, which were seen brochette, skewer 

apporter, to bring epine, thorn 

hydr antique, hydraulic se fabriquer, to manufacture 

vivre, to live jusqu'&j as many as 



FOURTH LESSON. 

L'homme n'est qu'un roseau le plus faible de la nature ; 
mais c'est un roseau pensant. II ne faut pas que Punivers 
entier s'arme pour Pecraser ; une vapeur, une goutte d'eau 
suffit pour le tuer ; mais quand Punivers Pecraserait, Phomme 
serait encore plus noble que ce qui le tue, parcequ'il sait 
qu'ilmeurt; et Pavantage que Punivers a sur lui, Punivers 
n'en sait rien. — Ainsi toute notre dignite consiste dans la 
pensee. Travaillons done a bien penser ; voila le principe 
de la morale. II est dangereux de trop faire voir a Phomme 
combien il est egal aux bdtes, sans lui montrer sa grandeur. 

* JVote. A centime is a hundredth part of a franc, which is about one 
tenth of a penny. 



190 



SYNTAX OP ADJECTIVES. 



II est encore dangereux de luifaire trop voir sa grandeur sans 
sa bassesse. II est encore plus dangereux de lui laisser igno- 
rerPun et l'autre. Mais il est tres avantageux de lui repre* 
senter l'un et l'autre. Les inventions des hommes vont en 
avangant de siecle en siecle. La bonte et la mal : ce du monde' 
en general reste la mdme. 



Roseau, reed 

penser, to think 

enticr, whole 

sparine, should arm itself 

ecraser, to crush 

goutte, drop 

suffit, is sufficient 

tuer, to kill 

encore, still 

ainsi, hence 

travaillez, to labor 



clone, then 
voila, there is 
morale, morality 
trop, too much 
bites, brutes 

laisser ignorer, to leave igno- 
rant of 
de siecle en sie.de , from age to 
- age 

rester, to remain 
malice, wickedness 



Sfftttap of gnrjwtnitsu 



Rule I. 



Adjectives must agree with the nouns to which they refer 
in gender and number; as, 



Masculine. 
Un bon livre, a good book 
Un homme vertueux, a virtu- 
ous man 
II est savant, he is learned 
De beaux jardins, fine gardens 



Feminine. 
Une bonne plume, a good pen 
Une femme vertueuse, a virtu- 
ous woman 
Elle est savante, she is learned 
De belles fleurs, fine flowers 



Obs. Adjectives that are used adverbially are always in the masculine 
singular ; as, elle parle haul , she speaks loud ; elles voient clair, they see 
clear, or clearly, &c. — [ V. Wailly, &c] 

Rule II. 

Adjectives are generally placed after the noun, particu- 
larly when they express nationality ; as, Anglais, English ; 



SYNTAX OP ADJECTIVES. 



191 



Franpais, French ; Italien, Italian ; Ecossais, Scotch, &c. 
and when they express color, or shape ; as, brim, brown ; 
rond, round, &c. Also those words which express the quali- 
ties, or states of the elements ; as,froid, cold ; chaud, warm, 
&c. Adjectives expressive of savour ; as, aigre, sour ; doux, 
sweet, &c. : qualities of sound and feeling ; as, harmonieux, 
harmonious ; dur } hard ; mou, soft : and those that end in esque, 
ic, if, He, ique, ue, ule, ve, (except du vif argent, quicksilver) : 
and also participles used adjectively ; as, respecte, respected, 
&c. : and, in general, adjectives that may be used alone as 
nouns ; such as, Paveugle, the blind ; le boiteux, the lame ; le 
riche, the rich, &c. 

EXAMPLES. 



Apportez-moi 

Anglais 
Montrez-moi les modes Fran- 

paises 
Voila des vaches brunes 
Elle a des bas blancs 
Vendez-moi une table ronde 
Donnez-moi du Wiifroid 
Voulez-vous me donner de 

Teau chaude ? 
Avez-vous une pomme aigre ? 
Ne voulez-vous pas avoir une 

pomme douce ? 
Votre frere a une voix har- 

monieuse 
Voulez-vous 

bois dur ? 
Cet homme 

grotesque 
Ce predicateur fit un discours 

puirile 
Votre pere est un homme re- 
specte 
Voila un homme aveugle ; 

donnez-lui un sous 
Seneque etait l'homme le 

plus riche de l'empire (do 

not say le plus riche homme) 



un chapeau Bring me an English hat 

Show me the French fashions 



There are some brown cows 

She has white stockings 

Sell me around table 

Give me some cold milk 

Will you give me some warm 
water 1 

Have you a sour apple ? 

Will you not have a sweet 
apple ? 

Your brother has a harmoni- 
ous voice 

Will you bring me some hard 
wood ? 

That man has a grotesque ap- 
pearance 

That preacher made a child- 
ish discourse 

Your father is a respected 
man 

There is a blind man ; give 
him a sous (or half-penny) 

Seneca was the richest man 
in the empire 



m'apporter du 
la a une figure 



192 



SYNTAX OP ADJECTIVES. 



Some adjectives have different meanings, according as they 
are placed before or after the substantive ; as, 



Un bon homme, a simple harm- 
less man 

Un brave homme, a deserving 
man {one wlio is honest, and 
can be relied upon in busi- 
ness) 

Une certaine nouvelle, a cer- 
tain piece of news 

Un digne homme, a worthy 
man 

Une sage-femme, a midwife 

Ungalant homme, a brave and 

honest man {one who has 

talent and veracity) 
Un grand homme, a great man 

{a man of talent) 
Un honnete homme, an honest 

man, or a man of probity 
Le grand air, the appearance 

of a man of high birth, or 

station 
Un gentil-homme, a nobleman 

Un maigre repas, a pitiful 

cheer, or sorry fare 
Un pauvre homme, a man 

without genius, or merit 

Un plaisant homme, a ridicu- 
lous, or impertinent man 

Un vilain homme, a disagreea- 
man 

Un nouvel habit, a fresh coat < 

Les bas pnys, land that is low 



Un homme bon, a good-hearted 
man 

Un homme brave, a courageous 
man {one who braves dan- 
ger without fear) 

Une nouvelle certaine, a cer- 
tain, or true report 

Un homme digne de foi, a 
credible man 

Une femme sage, a virtuous 
woman 

Un homme galant, a gallant 
man {one who is polite and 
attentive to the ladies) 

Un homme grand, a tali man 

Un homme honnete, a polite or 
civil man 

Hair grand, a noble physi- 
ognomy, or appearance 

Un homme gentil, a genteel 

man 
Un repas maigre, a fish dinner 

Un homme pauvre, a poor man 
{one that has little or no 
property) 

Un homme plaisant, a cheerful 
man 

Un homme vilain, a niggardly 
man (a miser) 

Un habit neuf, a new coat 

Un habit nouveau, a new-fash- 
ioned coat 

Les Pays Bas, the Low Coun- 
tries ; as, Flanders 



SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 193 

PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING RULES AND 
OBSERVATIONS. 

1. Adjectives preceding the Noun. 

A good woman. You have a fine house in the country. 
It is bad weather. Paris is a fine city. Your brother is a 
fine boy. Will you bring me some good bread 1 They have 
lost a great general in this war. Send me five volumes. It 
is fine weather. 1 like fine music. It was a mature deliber- 
ation. He is a faithful friend. 

2. Adjectives following the Noun. 

Do you like Italian music ? Laplace is a celebrated ma- 
thematician. You have a square snuff-box. I hate cold 
weather. She had a blue gown. I have seen an English 
lady. There is a bitter herb. Will you have a black coat ? 
Have you any ripe fruit 1 I saw a lame man. She is a wise 
and virtuous woman. He is a polite young man. She is a 
good, sober, and virtuous woman. Your sister has an har- 
monious voice. She is a prudent woman. Human life is a 
continual trial. Lead a regular and irreproachable life. A 
pretended friend is a dangerous enemy. You have an Eng* 
lisfa hat. I like the German tougue, and the Spanish dress 
He reads Italian authors. We have a good father and mother 

In the country, d la campagne gown, robe, f. 

weather, terns, m. lady, dame, f. 

city, ville, f. ; lost, perdu herb, herbe, f. 

general, general, m. bitter, amer ; black, noir 

in, dans ; war, guerre, f. fruit, fruit, m. 

to send, envoy tr ripe, mur 

volume, tome, f. harmonious, harmonieux 

music, musique, f. human, humain 

mature, mur trial, eprenve, f. 

deliberation, deliberation, f. continual, continue! 

faith (u\,fdele to lead, mener 

Italian, Italiennc, f. regular, reglee, f. 

snuff-box, tabatierc, f. irreproachable, irreprochable 

square, carre pretended, dissimule 

to hate, hair to like, aimer 

17 



194 



SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 



tongue, tongue, f, 
German, Allemande, f. 
dress, habillement, m. 



Spanish, Espagnol, m. 
author, auteur, m. 
Italian, Italien, m. 



Rules i. and ii. 



Adjectives after the Noun. 

He is a tall man. 

He was a just man 

Jt is lean meat 

It is a common price 

The last year of the war 

It is a certain thing 

We saw a fierce bull 
During this mortal life 
He is a poor man 
He is a pleasant man 
They are reputable people 
He has a dear suit 
That is fresh wine 
He is a niggardly man 
He is a true man 

Tall, great, grand 

just, reasonable, juste 

meat, viande, f. 

fare, chhre, f. 

sorry, lean, maigre 

common, commun ; with, de 

consent, accord, m. 

last, preceding, dernier 

certain, certain 

he promised him, il lui pro- 

mit 
recompense, recompense, f. 
bull, taureau, m. 
fierce, furieux 
monstrous, furieux 



Adjectives before the Noim. 

He is a great man 

It was a reasonable price 

It is sorry fare 

With one common consent 

The year preceding 

He promised him a certain 

recompense 
That is a monstrous beast 
He was my mortal enemy 
He is a sorry fellow 
He is an impertinent fellow 
They are civil people 
His dear friend is dead 
That is new wine 
He is a disagreeable man 
He is a downright quack 

beast, bete, f. 

mortal, mortel 

sorry, paui)re 

man, fellow, homme, m. 

pleasant, impertinent, plai- 

sant 
reputable, civil, honnete 
suit, habit, m. 
dear, cher 

fresh, new, nouveau 
niggardly, disagreeable, vilain 
downright, vrai 
quack, charlatan, m. 






SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 195 



ADJECTIVES he. OF DIMENSION. 

Adjectives which denote dimension ; as, haut, high ; long, 
long ; large, broad ; or the substantives hauteur, height ; 
longueur, length ; largeur, breadth ; profondeur, depth ; take 
simply de before them when avoir (Englished to be) is used 
instead of etre : but when etre, to be; void, here is; or voild, 
there is, is used, then de is put before both the numeral and 
the a 'jective. Ex. 

Cette maison a cinquante This house is fifty feet high, 

pieds de haut, ou de hau~ or in height 

teur ; or, cette maison est 

de cinquante pieds de haut, 

ou de hauteur 

Void une table de huit pieds Here is a table eight feet long, 

de long, ou de longueur or in length 

Voil& un mur de vingt pieds There is a wall twenty feet 

de large, ou de largeur wide, or in width 

Le fosse de la forteresse a The ditch of the fortress is 

quinze pieds de profondeur fifteen feet in depth, or deep 

(not de profond) 

But when etre is used, and the adjectives haut, long f &c. 
precede the numerals, then de is put only before the nume- 
rals ; as, 

Cette maison est haut de This house is fifty feet high 

cinquante pieds, 

C'est une tour haut de deux It is a tower two hundred feet 

cents pieds. high 

PRACTICE ON THE ADJECTIVES OF DIMENSION. 

St. Paul's church in London, is four hundred and four feet 
high. The monument of London is two hundred and two 
feet high. This circle is three feet in diameter. The front 
of this house is two hundred feet long and (by) sixty feet 
high. That tower is seventy-eight feet high. 

Diameter, diametre is, a 

from, facade and (by), sur 



196 



SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 



Rule III. 

When an adjective or participle refers to several nouns, it 
must agree with the last ; as, 

She sings with a charming 



Elle chante avec un gout (m.) 

et une delicatesse (f.) char- 

mante 
Elle avait les yeux (m.) et la 

bouche (f.) ouverte 
Elle avait la bouche (f.) et 

les yeux (m ) ouverts 
Elle trouva le cabinet (m.) et 

la chambre (f.) ouverte 
Elle trouva la chambre (f. ) et 

le cabinet (m.) ouvert 



taste and delicacy 

Her eyes and mouth were 

open (she had, Sfc.) 
Her mouth and eyes were 

open (she had, fyc.) 
She found the closet and room 

open 
She found the room and closet 

open 



Obs. When there are several substantives, and the adjective precedes, 
it must be repeated to each, and agree with them ; as, J'ai un bon pere, 
une bonne mere, et une bonne sceur, I have a good father, mother and 
sister. Voila, une jolie cage et un joli oiseau, there is a pretty cage and 
bird. 

Rule IV. 

When the adjective is separated from the nouns, by a verb 
expressed or understood, it must be put in the plural number ; 
and if the substantives are all of one gender, it must agree 
with them ; but if of different genders it must be masculine. 
So, likewise, when the adjectives imply a union or collection; 
as, unij reuni, joint, &c. Ex. 



La mere et la fille sont pru- 
dent es 

Le pere et le fils sont con- 
tens 

Le frere et la sceur sont con- 
tens 

Vous trouverez que le cabinet 
et la chambre sont ouverts 

Vous trouverez que la chambre 
et le cabinet sont ouverts 

Les yeux et la bouche sont 
ouverts 

La bouche et les yeux sont 
ouverts 



The mother and daughter are 
prudent 

The father and son are con- 
tented 

The brother and sister are 
contented 

You will find that the closet 
and room are open 

You will find that the room 
and closet are open 

The eyes and mouth are open 

The mouth and eyes are open 



SYNTAX OP ADJECTIVES. 197 

Les freres, la soeur et la mere The brothers, sister, and 
rhinis mother united 

Le travail, la conduite, et la Labor, conduct, and fortune 
fortune joints ensemble combined 

In the two last sentences sont is understood ; as, reunis for sontreunis, 

and joints for sont joints. 



PRACTICE ON THE TWO PRECEDING RULES AND 
OBSERVATIONS. 

Adjectives agreeing with the last Substantive. — [Rule iii.] 

I saw the door and window shut. He displayed (an) as- 
tonishing courage and intrepidity. He has a coat and waist- 
coat full of spots. He governs with (an) absolute power and 
authority. He had his face and hands covered. 



To display, montrer 


with, avec 


intrepidity, intrepidity f. 


power, pouvoir, m. 


astonishing, etonnant 


absolute, absolu 


waistcoat, gilet, m. 


his, le. and les 


spot, tache, f. 


face, visage, m. 


to govern, gouverner 


covered, convert 



Adjectives in the Masculine Plural. — [Rule iv.] 

His feet and legs were naked. His face and hands are 
covered. The castles and places seemed to me strong. He 
makes his father and mother happy. His courage and boldness 
seem astonishing to me. The children, father, and mother 
united. Health, honors, and fortune combined. 

Adjectives in the Feminine Plural. — [Rule iv.] 

The window and door are open. The head and mouth 
were fine. He found youth and beauty combined in her per- 
son. 

Foot, pied, m. united, reuni 

were, etaient combined, joint 

castle, chateau, m. open, ouvert 

place, place, f. fine, beau 

seem to me, me paraissent he found, il trouva 

strong, fort combined, reuni 

to make, rendre in, dans : her, sa 
17* 



198 SYNTAX OP ADJECTIVES. 



OBSERVATIONS. 

1. JYu and demi are indeclinable when used before the substantive form- 
ing a compound ; as, isv-tete, bare headed ; xu-pieds, BARK-foot (feet) ; 
une DZMi-heure, half an hour: and feu before an article or pronoun; as 
feu la reine, the late queen; feu votre mere, your late mother : but 
nu and demi are declinable when they follow the substantive; as, il va les 
pieds nus et la tete nue, he goes with his feet and head bare. Also feu 
is declinable when it follows an article or a nronoun ; as la feue reine, the 
late queen; votre /ewe mere, your late mother. 

Je suis a vous dans une dew?i-heure, I shall be with you in half an hour 
Je suis a vous dans une heure et I shall be with you in an hour and 
demie, a half 

2. When une partie, a part; la plupart, most; unefoule, a crowd, &c. 
are used with a masculine, the adjective or participle which is connected 
with the masculine must ag:ee with it ; as, he has apart of his arm broken 
il a une partie du bras casse, not cassee. 

3. Adjectives are used as substantives oftener in French than in English : 
as, a learned man, un savant ; a learned woman, une savante, &c. 



PRACTICE ON THE OBSERVATIONS. 
[Obs. 1, Rules iii. and iv.] 

Adjectives, Indeclinable. Adjectives Declinable. 

They go bare-footed They have their (the) feet bare 

We went bare-legged Our legs were bare (we had 

the legs bare) 

I shall go out in half an You will go out in an hour 

hour and a half 

The late princess The late princess 

Leg, jambe, f. princess, princcsse, f. 

o go out, sortir 



ADJECTIVES 

WHICH ARE FOLLOWED BY THE PREPOSITIONS d,de, pOUT, par,8fC 

Rule I. 

Adjectives, or participles which denote plenty , w ant, fulness, 
emptiness, &c. are followed by the English words of, from, 
with, by, and sometimes to, which are rendered into French by 
de, or d' ; and of the, from the, with the, are rendered by du, 
de la, de l J , des ; also of a, from a, icith a, by d r un, ou cVune. 



SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 199 

The following is a List of Adjectives which take of, from, 
with, after them in English, and de in French, 

Accuse de, accused of Incapable de, incapable of 

Agreable de, agreeable to Indigne de, unworthy of 

Aise de and a, easy to Las de, lired with or of 

Avide de, greedy of Libre de, free from 

Charme de, charmed with Mecontent de, dissatisfied 
Capable de, capable of ivith 

Content de, contented ivith Plein de, deprived of 

Comble dc, loaded with Prive de, deprived of 

Digne de, worthy of Ravi de, enraptured ivith 

Exempt de, exempt from. Vide de, void of, &c. 
Fatigue de, fatigued with 

EXAMPLES. 

lis sont accuses dc meurtre, They are accused of murder 

II est agreable de vivre avec It is agreeable to live with 

ses amis, our friends 

II n'est pas aise de bien ecrire, It is not easy to write well 

J'ai recu une lettre qui n'est I have received a letter which 

pas aisee a lire. is not easy to read 

II est avide de gloire, lie is greedy of glory 

C'est un homme capable de He is a man capable of gov- 

gouverner, erning 

C'est un homme capable des He is a man capable of the 

plus grands choses, greatest things 

Le roi l'a comble eThonneurs, The king has loaded him with 

honors 

Elle est digne de la pension, She is worthy of the pension 

II etait digne d'une meilieure He was worthy of a better 

fortune, fortune 

II est exempt de ce defaut, He is exempt from that defect 

Je suis las de marcher, I am tired of wsffking 

Ach; tez un panier plein de Buy a basket full of fruit 

fruit, 



Obs. The English say sensible of, insensible of; and the French say 
fe a, sensible to, insensible a, insensible to. Ex. II est sensible a 
votre bonte, he is sensible of your kindness ; elle est sensible aux moindres 
impressions, she is sensible ofihe least impressions. 



200 SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 

Voilei un homme ravi de joie, There is a man enraptured 

with joy 
Cet ouvrage est vide de rai- That work is void of reason 
son, 

Rule TI. 

In English we frequently use to, at, in, for, to the, at the, 
in the, (which correspond to the French d, au, & la, d V,aux,) 
after adjectives which denote aptness, unaptness, due, fitness, 
unfitness, profit, inclination, submission, resistance, readiness, 
or any habit. 

The following is a List of Adjectives which take to, for, 
to the, &c. after them in English, and d, au, &c. in French. 

Adroit d, ready at Ingenieux a, ingenious to, 

Ardent d, ardent at, or in and in 

Bon* & and de, good for and Inutile a, useless in, and to 

to Lent &, slow to> and in 

Conforme d, conformable to Nuisible d, hurtful to 

Contraire a, contrary to Pret d, ready to 

Difficile d, difficult to Prompt d, ready to, quick at 

Enclin d, inclined to Semblable d. like, or like to 

Facile d and de, easy to and Sujet d, subject to 

for Utile d, useful to, &c. 

Note. The following sentences, as well as those under Rule I. are 
chiefly taken from the Dictionary of the French Academy, in which the 
student may find sentences to illustrate those words that are not given in 
these lists. 

EXAMPLES. 

II est adroit a ses exercises He is ready at his exercises 

II 6tait ardent d la dispute He was ardent or vehement 

in the dispute 

Cela n'est bon d rien That is good for nothing 

II n'est bon ni d r6tir, ni a It is neither good to roast, nor 

bouillir boil, (it is good for nothing) 

Cet homme est bien bon de* That man is very good to 

pretendre, de dire, &c. to pretend, to say, &c. 



*De is sometimes admissible after bon, facile, etc. 



syntax of adjectives. 



201 



Ses mceurs ne sont pas con- 
formes a sa doctrine 

Ce probleme esl difficile d 
resoudre 

Cela est contraire a ce que 
vous en avi^z dit 

Cela est contraire d la verite 

La nature de l'homme est 
inclinee au mal 

Cela est facile a dire, et non 
. d fa ire 

II est facile de* vous con- 
tenter 

II est lent d parler 

Je suis pret d faire tout ce 
qu'il vous plaira 

Nous so names to us snjets aux 
lois et aux coutumes des 
pays ou nous vivons 



His manners are not conform- 
able to his doctrine 

This problem is difficult to 
solve 

That is contrary to what you 
have said of it 

That is contrary to (the) truth 

The nature of man is inclined 
to evil 

That is easy to say, and not 
to do 

It is easy to content yourself 

He is slow in speaking, or to 

speak 
I am ready to do every thing 

you please 
We are all subject to the laws 

and customs of the country 

in which we live 



EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES. 



Rule I. 

He is accused of robbery. He is a man capable of every 
thing. He is contented with his fortune. She is not worthy 
of being loved. He is incapable of a bad action. We are 
free from care. Send me a hogshead full of wine. The bot- 
tle is full of water. She is unworthy of the reward. 



Robbery, vol, m. 
every thing, tout 
fortune, fortune, f. 
being, etre ; bad mauvais 
action, action, f. 



care, souci, m. 
hogshead, muid, m. 
bottle, bouteille, f. 
water, cau, f. 
reward, recompense, f. 



Rule IT. 

The meat is good to eat. That is good to eat. Lead a 
life conformable to your profession. That is contrary to the 
law of God, and to good manners. She is inclined to (the) 



202 



SYNTAX OP ADJECTIVES. 



good. He is inclined to (the) evil. They are slow in writ- 
ing. He is slow to punish. That is hurtful to your business. 
He is ready to set out. He is ready to serve his friends. I 
will not be subject to those conditions. A son is subject to 
his father. 



That, cela ; to lead, mener 

life, vie, f. 

manners, mccurs, f. pi. 

good, bien, m. 

evil, mal, m. 

writing, ecrire 



punish, punir 
business, affaires, f. pi. 
to set out, partir 
to serve, servir 
will, veux ; be, etre 
conditions, conditions-la 



OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 

Rule I. 

Than, after a comparative and before a noun, pronoun, or 
an infinitive preceded by a preposition or conjunction, is ren- 
dered by que ; but before nouns of number or quantity, by 
de j as, 



L'Afrique est moins peuplee 

que l'Europe, ou n'est pas 

si peuplee que l'Europe 
Jean est plus habile que Guil- 

laume 
Elle est plus grande que vous 

de* toute la t&te 
II est plus dispose & vous 

nuire, qu'a vous obliger 
II est plus heureux que s'il 

regnait 
II est moins savant que quand 

il commenc.a 
Votre frere a plus de vingt 

ans 
Vous n'avez pas plus de 

quinze guinees 
II a plus d'a demi fait 



Africa is less populous than 
Europe, or is not so popu- 
lous as Europe 

John is cleverer than William 

She is taller than you by the 
whole head 

He is more inclined to hurt 
you, than to oblige you 

He is happier than if he 
reigned 

He is less learned than when 
he began 

Your brother is more than 
twenty years old 

You have not more than fif- 
teen guineas 

He has more than half done 



* Note. When by is used after comparatives, and denotes that one thing 
exceeds another, it is always expressed by de (not par). 



SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 203 

Obs. 1. When a verb follows a comparative, it is generally preceded by 
ne ; as, Votre soeur est plus habile que je ne croyais, your sister is cleverer 
than I thought; il chante mieux qu'il ne danse, he sings better than he 
dances ; except the verb is in the infinitive, or a conjunction intervenes. 

2. The verb, in French, is sometimes better omitted at the end of a 
sentence ; as, Her husband is handsomer than she (is), son mari est plus 
beau qu'elle. 

Rule II. 

1. Comparisons of equality are expressed by, 

aussi, as, and que, as. 

Ex. II est aussi savant que vous, he is as learned as you. 
Venez aussi souvent que vous pouvez, come as often 
as you can. 

autant, as much, que, as. 

Ex. II boit autant de vin que d'eau, he drinks as much 
wine as water. 

si } so, que, as. 

Ex. Est-il si mechant qiSon le dit? is he 50 wicked as 
they say ? II n'est rien de si doux que la liberte, 
nothing is so sweet as liberty. 

2. Comparisons of inferiority or defect are expressed by, 

ne pas si, not so, and que, as. 

Ex. Elle n'est pas si riche que vous, she is not so rich as 
you. 

ne pas tant, not so much, not so many, que, as. 

Ex. Je ra'ai pas tant de guinees qu y \\ a de schellings, I 
have not so many guineas as he has shillings. lis 
w'ont pas tant d'argent que vous, they have not so 
much money as you. 

Obs. 1. Si and aussi are repeated before each adjective or adverb ; as, 
Elle est si sage et si prudente, she is so wise and prudent; un jeune 
homme aussi sage, aussi eclaire, et qui prend tant de peine, merite qu'on 
le protege, so p;udent and enlightened a young man, who takes so much 
pains, deserves to be protected. 



204 



SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 



2. The articles are omitted before plus and moins ; as, Plus vous £tu- 
dierez, plus vous ferez de progres, the more you (will) study, the more 
progress you will make ; on dit que plus on est pauvre, moins on a d'ern- 
barras, it is said that the poorer people are, the less care they have. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

The sun is larger and brighter than the moon. How old 
are you ? (what age have you ?) I am (/ have) more than 
fifteen (years). We have more than a hundred guineas. I 
am more than half persuaded. Her cousin has more books 
than you. Alexander was as ambitious as Caesar. My sister 
has as much (of) money as you ; she has not so much (of) wit 
as her sister, but she has as much (of) vivacity, and (she) is 
as amiable. 



Bright, eclatant 

year, an, m. ; half, a moitie 

persuaded, 'persuade 



wit, esprit, m. 
amiable, aimable 
vivacity, vivacit6, f. 



Rule III. 

When a superlative precedes its substantive, the article is 
not repeated ; but it must be repeated when the noun pre- 
cedes the superlative ; as, 

There is the most agreeable 
situation " 



Voil& la plus agreable situa- 
tion, ou voilzt la situation 

7a plus agreable 
C'est un des hommes les plus 

habiles 
Ce sont les plus sottes gens du 

monde 
C'est une des coutumes les 

plus barbares 
C'est la coutume des peuples 

les plus barbares 
La sobriete rend la nourri- 

ture la plus simple tres 

agreable 

Obs. Superlative adverbs are not declinable ; as, lequel, laquelle, les- 
quels, &c. aimez vous lk mieux ? which do you like best ? not even when 
coupled with an adjective, if there be no comparison with another person; 
a3, L'anUquite de V empire des Assyriens est le point sur lequel on a ete 



He is one of the cleverest 
men 

They are the most foolish 
people in the world 

It is one of the most barba- 
rous customs 

It is the custom of the most 
barbarous people 

Sobriety renders the simplest 
food very agreeable 



SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 



205 



le moins partage, the antiquity of the Assyrian empire is a point on 
which people have been least divided. 



Ce fut la chose qui contribua le plus 

a les Her 
Elle ecrit le mieux 



mo t to bind them 
She writes the best 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

The cleverest men sometimes commit the grossest faults. 
I speak of the most delicate subject. He has obeyed (to) 
the most unjust commandment. I have snatched it from the 
most avaricious hands. They are the cleverest people in the 
country. 



Sometimes commit, quelque- 

fois font 
fan\\,faute. f. 
gross, grossiere 
subject, matiere. y f. 



to obey, obeir 

I have snatched it, je Vai ar- 

rache 
avaricious, avare 
in the, du 



RECAPITULATORY PRACTICE. 



It is as easy to do good as to do evil. Great events and 
(great) revolutions followed the death of Caesar. Every 
body admires the uncommon and charming flowers of your 
garden. The wind is an agitated air. The central fire is 
the only physical cause of the heat of the subterraneous 
springs. A handsome and rich woman is not sufficient to 
make a man happy. The public good is preferable to pri- 
vate interest. Bath is, indeed, but a small city, but it ir» 
famous for its medicinal waters and hot baths. Why do you 
leave the windows and door open ? She sings with a charming 
delicacy and taste. Virtue is the most precious thing in the 
world. My best friend is dead. Nothing is more lovely than 
virtue, and nothing is more desirable than wisdom. Paris 
is not so populous as London. 



Good, bien 
evil, mal 

event, evenement,m. 
to follow, suivre 
every body, tout le monde 
18 



to admire, admirer 
flower, fleu/\ f. 
uncommon, rare 
charming, charmant 
to agitate, agiter 



206 



SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 



only, seul; heat, chaleur, f. 
spring, source, f. 
subterraneous, souterrain 
to be sufficient, suffire, (ir.) 
to make, pour rendrc 
good, bien, m. 
interest, bien, m. 
private, particulier 
is indeed but, n'est & la verite 

at? ; but it is, mais c'esf 
for, pour ; its, ses 



bath, bain, m. 

hot, chaud 

why, pourquoi 

to leave, laisser 

delicacy, delicatesse, f. 

taste, g-0w£, rn. 

in the world, du monde 

dead, mort 

nothing is, rien rCest 

lovely, aimable 

populous, peuple 



EXERCISES ON THE ADJECTIVES, TO BE TRANSLATED INTO 
ENGLISH. 



FIRST LESSON. 



J'aime la belle situation de sa maison. Cette raaison me 
coute cher, mais elle est belle. Ce cheval me coute cher, 
mais il est beau. Mon frere et ma mere sont morts. Votre 
mere et votre sceur sont mortes. C'est une femme sage et 
vertueuse. Cette actrice joue avec un gout et une noblesse 
charmante. Le mari et la femme sont toujours malheureux, 
lorsqu'il ne regne pas entre eux la plus parfaite union. 
L'homme de bien est toujours prdt h secourir celui qui se 
trouve dans le besoin. Ce pere est aime et cheri de ses en- 
fans. Une femme belle et vertueuse est bien sure d'etre 
aimee et respectee de tout le monde. L'intemperance et 
l'oisivete sont les deux ennemis les plus dangereux tie la vie. 
Le roi et le berger sont egaux apres la mort. Le plus beau 
privilege des rois est d'etre utiles aux malheureux. La deli- 
catesse du gout est un don de la nature aussi rare que le vrai 
genie. 



Mort, dead ; jouer, to play 

entre, between 

Vhomme de bien, a good man 

se trouve, is 

de tout le monde, by every body 



oisivete, idleness 
berger, shepherd 
malheureux, unfortunate 
don, gift 
genie, genius 



SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 20? 



SECOND LESSON. 



Comme c'est le caractere des grands esprits de faire enten- 
dre en pen de paroles beaucoup de choses ; les petits esprits, 
au contraire, ont le don de beaucoup parler et de ne rien 
dire. La philosophic triomphe aisement des maux passes et 
des maux a venir ; mais les maux presens triomphent d'elle. 
Le vrai merite est toujours accompagne de civilite et de mo- 
destie. Plus un prince est juste et bienfaisant, plus les sujets 
sont fideles. Ceux qui s'appliquent trop aux petites choses 
deviennent ordinairement incapables i es grandes. Le bon- 
heur et le malheur des hommes ne depend pas moins de leur 
humeur que de la fortune. Quelque eclatante que soit une 
action, elle ne doit pas passer pour grande lorsqu'elle n'est 
pas l'effet d'un grand dessein. 

De faire, to make bonheur, happiness 

parole, f. word malheur, misfortune 

esprit, m. mind moins, less 

don, m. gift quelque, however 

d venir, to come que soit, may be 

bienfaisant, humane devoir, to owe 

devenir, to become dessein, m. design 



THIRD LESSON. 

Le plus malheureux de tousles hommes est celui qui croit 
Petre; car le malheur depend moins des choses qu'on souf- 
fre, que de Pimpatience avec laquelle on augmente son mal- 
heur. Le plus libre de tous les hommes, est celui qui peut 
£tre libre dans I'esclavage mdme. Jamais aucun peuple n'a 
eu un roi conquerant, sans avoir beaucoup a souffrir de son 
ambition. Un conquerant enivre de sa gloire ruine presque 
autant sa nation victorieuse que les nations vaincues. Heu- 
reux ceux qui se divertissent en s'instruisant, et qui se plai- 
sent a cultiver leur esprit par les sciences ! Un jeune homme 
qui aime a se parer vainement comme une femme, est indigne 
de la sagesse et de la gloire : la gloire n'est due qu'& un cceur 
qui sait souffrir la peine, et fouler aux pieds les plaisirs. — 
Fenelon. 



208 



SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 



Malheureux, unhappy 
croit PettCy thinks himself so 
depend, arises 
des chases, from what 
qiCon, we ; son, our 
libre, free 
Vesclavage, slavery 
mime, itself 
jamais, never 
n'a eu, had 



aucvn pevple, any nation 

enivre, intoxicated 

presqve autant, almost as much 

heurcvx ceux, happy are those 
par, with 
parer, to deck 

due, due; (from, devoir) 
fouler aux pieds, to trample 
under foot 



FOURTH LESSON. 

Heureux ceux qui peuvent lire dans le grand livre de la 
nature, et qui font leurs delices de Tetudier. Nous ne nous 
connaissons jamais bien ; nous sommes tcujours meilleurs, ou 
plus mauvais, que nous n'imaginons. Dieu est le plus grand 
et le meilleur de tous les §tres : il est tout-puissant, infiniment 
sage, misericordieux, et le saint des saints. II a forme le 
ciel et la terre de rien ; il fait tout ce qui lui plait, mais il ne 
fait rien que de bon, parcequ'il est la bonte par essence. II 
connait tout ; le passe, le present, et Pavenir ; rien ne peut 
lui 6ire cache. Dieu est en tous lieux en m6me tems, mais 
sa gloire eclate plus particulierement dans le ciel, ou il a un 
tr6ne plus brillant que le soleil ; et ou habite avec lui une 
multitude innombrable d'anges et d'esprits bien heureux. 



Heureux, happy are 

pouvoir, to be able 

qui font leurs dilices, who 

delight 
bien, thoroughly 
que, than 
etres, beings 
out-puissant, almighty 



misericordieux, merciful 

saint, holy 

que de bon, but what is good 

avenir, future 

cachcr, to hide 

en, in, or at 

ec later, to shine 

bien heureux, happy 



SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 209 



Rule I. 



Pronouns must agree with the nouns to which they refer in 
gender and number ; as, 

Oil est ma plume ? Elle est Where is my pen ? It is upon 

sur la table the table 

Oil est mon livre ? II est sur Where is my book ? Jt is up- 

le pupitre on the desk 

Voila une bonne plume, pre- There is a good pen, take it 

nez-fa 

Voila un bon livre, lisez-/e There is a good book, read it 

Lorsque cette riviere se de- When this river overflows, it 

borde, elle entraine tout carries every thing away 

apres elle with it 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

Never judge from appearances, for they are often deceitful. 
The reins are good, they are new. This is a good pamphlet, 
read it. I like [the) truth, I would sacrifice every thing for 
it. I like your house, it is in a fine situation. Where is 
(Mr.) your father ? he is gone into the country. Where is 
(Miss) your sister ? she is at home. 

Reins, guides, f. to sacrifice, sacrijier 

new, neuves every thing, tout; in, dans 

this is, void at home, chez-nous } or d la 
pamphlet, brochure, f. maison 



OBSERVATIONS. 

1. When there are two or more nouns of different genders, the mascu- 
line is considered more worthy thau the feminine, consequently the pro- 
noun which refers to them must be masculine ; as, votre frere et votre 
sceur, sont Us alles a Rouen ? are your brother and sister gone to Rouen ? 
ou avez-vous mis mon papier, ma plume, et mon encre ? Us sont dans la 
bibliofheque, where have you put my paper, pen, and ink ? they are io the 
library. 

18* 



210 SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

2. He, she, they, &c. are rendered indifferently, either by il, elle, 
ils, &c or by ce, with the verb ttre before substantives denoting a per- 
son's profession, nation, quality, &c. ; as, he is a merchant, il est nego- 
tiant, oy\ o' est un negotiant ; they are Frenchmen, ils sont Fran- 
cais, ou ce soiit des Frangais ; but it is proper to observe, that il, &c. is 
preferable when the person referred to is known, and ce when the person is 
a stranger. This latter mode of speech is not unfrequent in English : when 
we wish to point out any one in particular, we say, that is a boaster, 
for he is a boaster, c'est un fanfaron. 

3. It is rendered by il before itre ; 1st, When followed by an adjective ; 
as, it is glorious to die for one's country, il est glorieux de mourir 
pour sa patrie : 2ndly, When speaking of lime ; as, it is eleven o'clock, 
il est onze heures. Except when a question is asked, with ce ; as, 
what o'clockis that ? quelle heure est-ce la ? it is one, c'est une 
heure : 3rdly, Before the pronoun en in such idioms ; as, it is with poetry 
as with painting, il en est de lapcSsie comme dc la peinture. ■ 

4. It is rendered by ce before itre ; 1st, When followed by pronouns 
or nouns with or without an adjective ; as, it is I, c'est moi ; it is a 
pity, c'est dommage ; it is a reasonable thing, c'est une chose raison- 
nable : 2ndly, Before adjectives when they precede an infinitive passive; 
as, it is easy (that is easy) to be done, c'est aise a f aire, but it is easy 
to do that, il est aise de /aire cela: 3rdly, Before any thing of which one 
is going to speak (though the it is sometimes omitted in English) ; as, 
what I fear is, that he will come, ce que je crains c'est qu'il ne vienne ; 
to live in familiar intercourse with the vicious is to authorize vice, c'est 
autoriser le vice que de vivre dans une liaison familiere avec les vicieux. 

Obs. 2. C'est, ou il est le plus dili- He t is the most diligent of the 

gent de toute l'ecole, whole school 

C'est, ou elle est ma parente, She is my relation 

C'est, ou il est mon parent, He is my relation 

Ce sont, ou ils sont mes parens, They are my relations 

C'est, ou il est un de nos amis, He is a friend of ours 

Ce sont des paresseux, ou ils sont They are idle 

paresseux, 

Ce sont des Anglais, ou ils sont An- They are Englishmen 

glais, 

Ce sont des Anglaises, ou elles sont They are English women 

Anglaises, 

Le marquis dit qu'u est (not c'est) The marquis says that he (meaning 

un de vos amis, himself) is a friend of yours 

Le marquis dit que c'est (not il est) The marquis says that he (meaning 

un de vos ami», another) is a friend of yours 

3. II est honteux d'obeir a ses pas- It is shameful to be subject to one's 

sions, passions 

H est glorieux d'etre utile a sa pa- It is glorious to be useful to one's 

trie, country 

Quelle heure est-il ? What o'clock is it ? 

II n'est pas tard, It is not late 

H est deux heures et demie, It is half after two 

II est six heures et un quart, It is a quarter past six 

II est sept heures moins un quart, It is three quarters past six 

II est sept heures vingt minutes, It is twenty minutes past seven 



SYNTAX OF TERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



211 



II est huit heures moins dix minutes, 
H est terns rie dejeuner, 
II en est des females comrae des 
enfans, 

4. Cest moi, c'est lui, test elle, ce 
sont eux, c'itait le laquais, c'e- 
taient les servantes, 

Est-ce moi ? Est-ce lui ? Est-ce 
elle ? Est-ce eux ? Etait-ce le 
laquais ? Etait-ce les servantes ? 

C'esf mon livre, 

C'esf au maitre a. parler, 

C'est au disciple d'ecouter, 

Cesf de peur d'etre injuste que je 
refuse vos presens, 

C'est sagesse que d'avouer ses 



Ce sont de jolis enfans que les v6- 

tres, 
L'homme le plus aimable que j'aie 

jamais vu c'est son pere, 



7? wants ten minutes to eight 

It is time to breakfast 

It is with women as with children 

It is T, it is he, it is she, if is they, 

if u?as the footman, it was the 

maids 
Is it 1 ? 7s it he ? 7s if she ? 7s if 

they ? Was it the footman ? Was 

it the maids ? 
7f is my book 

It is for the master to speak 
It is for the scholar to listen 
It is for fear of being unjust that I 

refuse your presents 
It is wisdom to own one's faults 

Yours are pretty children 

The most amiable man I ever saw 
is his father 



PRACTICE ON THE OBSERVATIONS. 



7/, he ; elle, she : elles, they ; 
before $tre. 

Can you forsake her if she is 
really your daughter ? 

Mr- L. is at V. preparing to 
make his entry ; he is our 
governor now, since Mr. 
C. is ffoue (the departure of 
Mr. C) 

I told your brother that he 
was an indiscreet man 

It is true. It is good. It is 
time to go. What o'clock 
is it (what hour is it)? It 
is half past three. It is a 
quarter past three (three 
hours and a quarter). It is 
three quarters past three 
(four hours less a quarter). 
It is reasonable that we 
should be paid. Is it not 



Ce, he, she, they ; before 
etre. 

He is the handsomest young 
man I ever saw 

If you wish to know what 
that gentleman is, whom 
we met yesterday, I will 
tell \ r ou, he is (that is J our 
governor 

He is (thai is) an experien- 
ced officer 

It is tiie truth. It is a good 
book. It is they who will 
repent of it. What o'clock 
was that ? It (that) was 
twelve (noon). It was 
midnight. It was one. It 
is striking eleven (it is ele- 
ven hours that it strikes). 
It is a reasonable thing that 
we should be paid. Is it 



212 



SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



reasonable that we should 
be paid ? It is lamentable. 
It is with poets as with 
painters. 

Forsake, abandonner 
really, v raiment 
I ever saw, que. faie jamais vu 
is preparing to make, est oc- 

cupe des preparalifs de 

faire 
entry, entree, f. 
governor, gouverneur, m. 
since, da puis 
departure, depart, m. 
what that gentleman is, quel 

est ce Monsieur 



not a reasonable thing that 
we should be paid? Yes, 
it is reasonable 



to meet, rencontrer 

I will tell you, je vais vous 

V apprendre 
an indiscreet man, un indis- 

crct 
experienced, experiments, 
to repent, se repentir 
to strike, sonner 
reasonable, raisonnable 
should be, soyons 
to pay, payer 
lamentable, triste 



Rule II. 



Moi, toi, lui, eux, &c. are used as nominatives to the verb, 
instead of je, tu, il, its, &c. 

1. When more than one agent of different persons come 
in the sentence, after which nous, or vous ; but notils, or elles 
is used : as, 



Lui, elle, et *moi *nous al- 

lames a. Tegiise 
Vous et moi nous sommes de 

bons amis 
Vous* et lui vous* apprenez 

le Francois 
Lui et mon frere pensent dif- 

feremment 
Elk et lui sont alles a Paris 
Man frere et lui sont arrives 

de la Chine 
Henri et moi nous fimes la 

partie 



He, she, and / went to the 

church 
You and I are good friends 

You and he learn French 

He and my brother think dif- 
ferently 

She and he are gone to Paris 

My brother and he are arrived 
from China 

Henry and I made a party 



* Obs. The first person is considered preferable to the second, and the 
second to the third. 



SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 213 

Votre sceur et moi nous etions Your sister and I were pre- 
presens sent 

2. T ) distinguish the part each agent takes in an action ; 



Mes freres et mon cousin m'ont My brothers and cousin assist- 
secouru, eux m'out releve, ed me, they lifted me up, 

et lui m'a panse and he dressed my wound 

3. After the verb etre, in the reply to a question; as, 

Qui a fait cela 1 Who has done that? 

C'est moi, e'etait/wi It is I, it was he 

Ce sera toi, ou elle It will be thou, or she 

Ce sont eux, m. ou elles,f. It is they 

Qui est-ce qui dit cela? Lui Who says that 1 He and they 

et eux 

C'est lui, ou ce sont eux It is he, or it is they 

Est-ce que vousetes contens? Are you contented 1 

Oui, je jsuis content, et lui Yes, I am contented, and he 

aussi also 

EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

You, your brother, and I went to London last year. He 
and I learn German. She and I went to the park together. 
He and his sister talk. You, he, and I are (some) good friends. 
It is not I. It was not he who said it. Who took my book? 
She (has taken it). He is more learned than I, than he, than 
she, than they. 



To learn, apprendre 


to talk, parler 


German, Mlemand 


said it, le dit 


together, ensemble 


took, a pris 


park, pare, m. 


than, que 



OBSERVATIONS. 

1. Mot, tot, &c. are frequently used with je, tu, &c. or me, tr, &c. 
as, I alont had the courage, moi seul j'eus le courage. They call him 
an honext man, I call him a rogue, Us Vappellent unhonntte homme, moi 
je Vappelle un fripon. Ruin me, who am your relation, me perdre, moi 
qui suis votre parent. 



214 



SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



2. Lui, ellk, eux, after tire, ars used for persons only, le, la, and 
les, are used for inanimate objects in general ; as, Self-love is deceitful, 
it seduces us, V amour propre est captieux, c'est lui qui nous siduit. Is 
that your book ? yes it is (that is it), est ce-ld voire livre ? oui, ce iJest, 
but when i.e, it, so, supplies the place of an adjective or verb, it is inde- 
clinable ; as, Are your sisters sick ? yes they are (so), vos sozurs, sont- 
elles malades ? oui, elles le sont. 

Examples to illustrate the above Observations. 



Obs. 1. Pourquoi ne travailleriez 
vous pas ? je travaille bien, moi, 

Moi, le parent du vaillant roi, je n'ai 
encore sacrifie que des traities, 

// ne pouvait le noire, lui qui se 

piquait d'une probite severe, 
2. Est-ce la votre ft ere ? 
Oui c'est lui ? 
Est-ce la votre sceur? 
Oui, c'est elle, 
Sont-ce la vos freres ? 
Oui, ce sont eux, 
Sont-ce la vos soeurs ? 
Oui, ce sont elles, 
Est-ce la votre chapeau ? Oui, ce 

Test, 
Est-ce la votre pensee ? 
Pouvez-vous douter que ce ne la 

soit ? 
Sont-ce la vos sentimens ? 
Oui, ce les sont, 
Sont-ce la vos raisons ? 
Oui, ce les sont, 
lis ont ete malades, et ils le sont 

encore, 
Elles ont ete malades, et elles le 

sont encore, 
Mes sceurs ont ete malades, et, elles 

le sont encore, 



1 work, why should you not ? 

i, the relative of the valiant king, 

have hitherto sacrificed none but 

traitors 
He who piqued himself on (a) strict 

probity, could not believe it 
Is that your brother ? 
Yes, it is (that is he) 
Is that your sister ? 
Yes, it is- (that is she) 
Are those your brothers ; 
Yes, they are (those are they) 
Are those your sisters ? 
Yes they are (those are they) 
Is that your hat? Yes, it is (that 

is it) 
Is that your thought ? 
Can you doubt that it is (it) ? 

Are those your sentiments ? 
Yes, they are (those are they) 
Are those your reasons ? 
Yes, they are (those are they) 
Thev have been sick, and are so 

still 
They have been sick, and are so 

still 
My sisters have been sick, and are 

so still 



PRACTICE ON THE OBSERVATIONS. 



(I) I should mind (of) vain threats ! Every body says 
(that) she is (has) right. (I) I say she is (has) wrong. 
Pyrrhus obeyed (he) who had so many (of) causes for being 
dissatisfied (of discontent). You (other) young people (you) 
are never satisfied. My brothers have been ill a long time, 
and are so still. Is that your aunt ? Yes, it is. 



SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



215 



To mind, s'arreter d de 
right, raison, f. 
wrong, tort ■ 



cause, sujct, m. 

discontent, niecontentement, ra. 

ill, maladc 



Rule III. 



The pronouns me, me ; te, thee ; 



you. 



or to 



you 



nous, us, or to us ; le, him, or it ; la her, or it ; lui, him, her, 
to him, to her, to it ; les, them ; leur, them, to them, are put 
before the active verb, or its auxiliary ; os, 



-vous pas amies 1 



II me connait, 

Je la vois, 

Je le verrai, 

II lui parla, 

Elles m'ont parle, 

Je le vis. II ra'a vu, 

Nous les vimes, 

lis nous ont vus, 

Je ne vous avais pas vu, ou vus, 

Je Z'aime. Elle vous aime, 

Je les aimerai, 

lis m'aimeraient, 

Ne les avez- 

Nous le respectons, 

Vous les respecterez. 

Vous a-t-il respecte 1 

II ZVstime, 

Vous ne lui parlez pas, 

11 lui parlera, 

Nous leur parlerons, 

Nous leur souhaitons du 

heur, 
II lui a ecrit, 
Nous lui avons ecrit, 

Nous lui avons promis, 
Lui avez-vous promis 1 
Ne leur avez-vous pas pro- 
mis ? 
Je lui ai dit, 
Lui avez-vous dit ? 
Ne lui avez-vous pas dit 1 



bon- 



He knows me 

I see her j or it 

I shall see him, or it 

He spoke to her, or to him 

They have spoken to me ' 

I saw him. He saw me 

We saw them 

They have seen us 

I had not seen you 

I love her. She loves you 

I shall love them 

They would love me 

Did you not love them ? 

We respect him 

You will respect them 

Did he respect you ? 

He esteems her 

You do not speak to him 

He will speak to her 

We shall speak to them 

We wish them happiness 

He has written to him, or to her 
We have written to her or to 

him 
We have promised him, or her 
Did you promise her, or him ? 
Did you not promise them ? 

I have told her, or him 
Did you tell him or her ? 
Did you not tell him, or herl 



216 



SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

He has given her what he had promised her (to her). I 
see him. I have not seen him. He will pardon me. She has 
taken it. He ate them. He related to her how they had 
deceived him. Can you send it to-morrow? Have 3'ou told 
her (to her) that you had lent them? I have taken it. I 
shall not take them. I shall tell him (to him). He will tell 
her (to her). He has brought it. They have read it. He 
has shown me (to me) your letter. They have shown her 
(to her) his letter. 



To pardon, pardonner 
to take, prendre (ir.) 
to eat, manger 
to relate, raconter 
how, comment 



had (imperf.) 
to deceive, t romper 
to tell, dire (ir.) 
had, (imperf.) 
to lend, preter 



OBSERVATIONS. 

1. When two pronouns come together, their order in French is directly 
contrary to that in English ; as, I to'd it to You,je vousle dis ; unless 
they be both in the third person ; in which case their order is the same in 
both languages ; as, J give it to him, je le lui donne. He gives it 

TO THEM, il LE LEUR donne. 

2. In the imperative mood the pronouns mos, toi, lui, le, &c. are put 
after the verb as in English ; and the order of two pronouns coming to- 
gether is the same in both languages; as, Give it to me, donnez-j,\z moi. 
Bring her to thfm, apportez-L.\ leur; but with a negative the pronouns 
follow the rule ; as, JVe me parlezpas, do not speak to me. JVe le lui 
donnez pas, do not give it to him : and when there are two impera- 
tives in a sentence, the pronoun is put after the first and before the second ; 
as, Take it and eat it, prenez-\.Y. et le mangez. 



Examples illustrative of the above Observations. 



Obs. 1. Je ne vous Z'ai pas dit, 

Elle ne me Z'a pas dit, 

Nous Ta-t-elle dit? 

Ne vous Z'a-t-il pas dit ? 

Je vous les promets, 

Vous les ai-je promis ? 

Ne vous les ai-je pas promis ? 

II ne nous le piomet pas, 

Nous les a-t-elle promis ? 

Ne nous les a-t-elle pas promis ? 



I did not tell it to you 

She did not teli it to me 

Did she tell it to us ? 

Did he not tell it to you ? 

I promise them to you 

Did I promise thtin to you? 

Did I not promise them to you ? 

He does not promise it to us 

Did she promise them to us ? 

Did she not promise them to us ? 



SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



217 



Elle le lui promet, 

Le lui a-t-elle promis ? 

Ne le lui a-t-elle pas promis ? 

II ne les lui avait pas promis, 

Ne les Zi/ia-t-il pas promis ? 

II ne les lui a pas promis, 

Nous la leur avons promis, 

La leur ai-je promis ? 

Ne la leur avez vous pas promis ? 

2. Portez-wioi. Portez-Ze. Portez- 

la. Portons-Ze. 
Dites-moi. Dites-Zm. Dites-Zwi. 

Dites-Zewr. Disons-Zeur, 
Ne me dites pas. Ne lui dites pas. 

Ne lui dites pas. Ne leur dites 

pas, 
Donnez-Ze moi. Donnez-Ze lui. 

Donnez-Ze leur, 
Ne me le donnez pas. Ne le lui 

donnez pas. Ne le leur donnez 

pas, 
Montrez-Zes moi. Montrez-Zes lui. 

Montrez-Zes lui. Montrez-Zes 

leur, 
Ne me les montrez pas, 
Ne les lui montrez pas, 
Ne les leur montrez pas, 



She promises it to him 

Did she promise it to him ? 

Did she not promise it to him 2 , 

He had not promised them to her 

Has he not promised them to her ? 

He has not promised them to her 

We promised it to them 

Did I promise it to them ? 

Did you not promise it to them ? 

Carry me. Carry him. Carry her. 

Let us carry him 
Tell me. Tell Am. TellZier. Tell 

them. Let us tell them 
Do not tell ??ie. Do not tell him* 

Do not tell her. Do not tell them 

Give it to me. Give it to him. 

Give it to them 
Do not give it to me. Do not give 

it to him. Do not give it to them 

Show me them. Show them to him. 

Show them to her. Show them 

to them 
Do not show them to me 
Do not show them to him, or her 
Do not show them to them 



Pronouns whose order is different in French and English. 

[Obs. 1.] 

He has related it to me. They have related it to us. She 
has not related it to you. I will lend it to you. Will he not 
lend it to us 1 Has she not lent it to you 1 

Fronouns which follow each other in French as in English. 

Has she not related it to him 1 Has he related it to her 1 
Will he relate it to them ? He will not lend il to her. They 
have not brought it to him. We did not bring it to them. 



[Obs. 2.] 



Pronouns going after the 
Imperative. 

Lend it to me. Lend it to us. 
Lend it to them. Lend it 
to him. Lend it to her. 
Bring it to me. 

19 



Pronouns going before the 
Imperative. 

Do not lend it to me. Do not 
lend it to us. Do not lend 
it to them. Do not lend it 
to him. 



218 SYNTAX OP PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

Rule IV. 

The pronouns moi, toi, soi, lui, elk, eux, and elks, are used 
after prepositions instead of me, te, se, le, la, les, leurs ; as, 

lis parlent de moi, de toi, de They speak of me, of thee, of 
soi, de lui, d'e/Ze, de nous, themselves, of him, of Aer, 
de vous, tfeuz, ou belles of «s, of yow, of Mem 

Elle arrivait avant moi She arrived before me 

J'etais assis contre lui I sat by him 

Pour moi, je pense ainsi As for me, I think so 

Cela est pour vous, ceci est That is for you, this for me 

pour moi 

Vous parlerez apres eux You will speak after them 

II marchait apres fci, ou elks He walked after him, or Mem 

C'est raalgre lui, ou e//e It is in spite of him, or Aer 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

You will arrive before him to-morrow. They were sitting 
by me. Will you come with me 1 No, I shall go with him. 
My father is satisfied with me. Will you walk after her 1 
Were they not speaking of him 1 

To come, venir ; with, avec satisfied with, content de 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1. With the verb etre (to denote possession) ; penser or songer, to think; 
viser, to aim ; aller, to go ; venir, to come ; courir, to run ; accourir, to 
flock to ; boire, to drink : the preposition *a with the above pronouns is 
used ; as, a qui est ce livre ? whose book is this ? e'est *A moi, it is mine , 
c'etaifA. vous, it was yours ; je pense v a lui, I think of him. 

2. When two pronouns come together, in the third state, or dative case, 
after any verb, the preposition is used before each pronoun ; as, J speak to 
him and not to you, je parle \\. lui et non *a vous. 

3. When two pronouns, both denoting persons, are used with any verb, 
the one that is governed in the third state must he preceded by the preposi- 
tion ; as, he recommends us to you, il nous a recommende \a. vous, not 
il nous vous a recommende : unless coupled with le, la, les ; as, we en~ 
trust him to you, nous vous le confions. 

4. When it is used, in English, for things animate, or inanimate, after 
any preposition, the corresponding word in Prench is omitted, unless de or 
a precede ; as, opposite to it, vis-d-vis, under it (underneath), dessous. 



SYNTAX OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 219 

EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 
On Obs. 1 and 2. 

I ran to him. He came to me. I trust to him. I am 
thinking of (to) him, and not of you. To whom did you 
speak? To him, to her, to them. I forgive you and him too. 



iioggrggfto ^rmumns* 



Rule I. 



Possessive Pronouns, whether conjunctive or relative, 
must agree with the object possessed, and not with the pos- 
sessor, in gender and number ; as, 

Mon livre et ma plume sont My book and pen are upon 

sur le pupitre the desk 

Son p6re, sa mere, et ses sceurs His father, mother, and sisters 

sont alles a Nimes are gone to Nimes 

Son pere et le sien Her father and his 

Sa mere et la sienne His mother and hers 

Son livre et le sien His book and hers 

Sa plume et la sienne sont His pen and hers, or her pen 

trop molles and his are too soft 

Ses livres et les miens Her books and mine 

Ses plumes et les miennes His pens and mine 

Vos chevaux et les leurs Your horses and theirs 



OBSERVATIONS. 

1. Son, sa, its ; leur, their, are supplied by en in the second member 
of a sentence when its or their can be rendered by of it, of them, or there' 
of; as, Paris is fine, I admire its size; Paris est beau, j'en admire la 
grandeur ; but if governed by a preposition they are used according to the 
rule ; as, Paris is fine, I admire the size of its buildings ; Paris est beau, 
f admire la grandeur de ses bdtimens. 

Ceux qui lisent le Paradis Perdu, ne Those who read Paradise Lost, are 

sont pas toujours capables M'en. not always capable of feeling its 

* sentir les beautes, beauties 

Voyez-vous cet arbre ? les fruits Do you see that tree ? its fruit is not 

n'en sont pas bons, good 



220 



SYNTAX OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



2. Mine, thijve, &c. after etre, are rendered by the preposition a, and 
the personal pronouns, moi, toi, lui, &c. ; as, 



C'est a moi. C'est a lui. C'est a 
elle. C'est a vous. C'est deux, 



It is mine. It is his. It is hers. 
It is yours. It is theirs. 



Rule II. 



My, thy, his, her, &c. are rendered by the definite article 
in speaking of injury done to, or suffered by the body, and 
when there is no doubt* about the possessor ; sometimes the 
personal pronoun, in the third state, or dative case, is also 
added ; as, 



Pai mal a la t6te, au cdte, au 

genou, et aux jambes 
II eut la tete tranchee 
Elle a mal au genou 
S'est-ii blesse la jambe 1 
II leve les mains et les yeux 
Vous avez chaud aux pieds,et 

moi j'ai froid aiix miens 
Vcus me hlessez la main 
II s'est casse la jambe 
Les mains lui brulent 
Vous etes-vous lave le visage ? 
Vous lui faites mal au doigt 
Chauffez-vous les pieds, vous 
y avez froid 



I have a pain in my head, 

side, knee, and legs 
He had his head cut off 
She has a pain in her knee 
Has he hurt his leg ? 
He lifts up his hands and eyes 
Your feet are warm, and mine 

are cold 
You hurt my hand 
He has broken his leg 
His or her hands burn 
Did you wash your face? 
You hurt her ringer 
Warm your feet, they are cold 
(you have cold in them) 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

I have the tooth ache. I am shutting my eyes. I have a 
violent sore throat. Your hands are cold and mine are warm. 
She lias a pain in her side. I owe my life to it. He owes 
his life to me. The carriage ran over both his knees. Our 
general lost his left eye in that battle. You have broken her 
arm. He has the head ache. I had a fall yesterday. 



* Obs. When any ambiguity is to be apprehended, the possessive pro- 
noun must by used ; as, / see that my leg swells, je vois que ma jambe 
enfle ; ma is here necessary to limit the sense, because J can see the leg 
of another swell. 



SYNTAX OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 



221 



Tooth, dent, f. 

ache, inal 

violent, grand ; sore, mat de 

throat, gorge, f. 

lo owe, devoir ; life, vie, f. 

carriage, voiture y f. 



to run, passer 
left, gauche ; in, a, 
to break, rompre 
arm, 6; - tfs, m. 

I had a fall, je me suis laisse 
tomber 



BtttutngtratUit lirxmottug, or articles* 



Rule. 



Celui, celle, ceuz, or celles is put for *A?s, that, these, or 
Mose, and for he, she, they, when followed by a relative. 
These pronouns must agree in gender and number with the 
nouns for which they stand ; as. 



Le carrosse du roi et celui de 

la reine 
La maison de mon frere et 

celle de ma soeur 
II a depense tout son bien et 

celui de sa femme 
Ces chevaux et ceuz de mon 

fils 
Cette maison est plus grande 

que celle-ld 
Celui qui l'a fait a ete puni 
Celle qui l'a fait a ete punie 
Ceuz qui Pont fait ont ete 

punis 
Celles qui l'ont fait ont ete 

punies 
Ceuz ou celles que vous pro- 
tege z 



The king's coach and that of 
the queen 

The house of my brother and 
that of my sister 

He has spent all his own for- 
tune and that of his wife 

These horses and those of my 
son 

This house is larger than that 

He who did it was punished 
She who did it was punished 



They who did 
ished 



it were pun- 



Those whom you protect 



OBSERVATIONS. 



1. Ci and la are added to ce, celui, &c. to point out different things more 
particularly ; and when there are two antecedents, ci refers to the latter, and 

19* 



222 SYNTAX OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

la to the former; as, Ce livre-ct et cette plume-7<z ; this book and that pen. 
Le corps petit, l'ame est immortelle, cependant nous negligeons celle-ci, et 
nous saciifions tout pour celui-ld,, the body perishes, the soul is immortal, 
nevertheless we neglect this and sacrifice every thing for that. Je n'aime 
pas ceci, donnez-moi tela, I do not like this, give me that. 

2. Celtji is sometimes understood in general sentences, when he who 
signifies whoever, or all who ; as, he who has had no education re- 
sembles a body without a soul, qui n'a point eu d' 'education resemble a 
un corps sans dine. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

Give me that book. I have nothing in common with that 
man. He does not like this, lend him that. The city of 
London is larger than that of Paris. You house is smaller 
than your brother's (than that of your brother). They who 
despise learning are despicable. He who puts confidence in 
the promises of men does not know the human heart. He to 
whom I spoke is married. She of whom I spoke is dead. They 
from whom I received the letter are gone. 

Nothing, rien to put confidence, sejier 

in common, de comtnun to know, connaitre 

with, avec; to like, aimer human, liumain 

large, grand ; small, petit heart, cceur, m. 

to despise, meyriser to speak, parler, (imperf.) 

learning, science^ f. to receive, recevoir 

despicable, meprisable to go, partir 



iUlatifce 13roumtu$u 



Rule I. 



The Relatives qui, who, that, which ; dont, whose, of 
whom, of which, with which ; que, whom, that, which, are 
used for persons and things, and are never separated from 
their antecedents ; but qui is never used for things, unless the 
antecedent be expressed ; as, 



SYNTAX OP RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



223 



L'horame qui parle 

La fern me qui pense 

La b&te qui mange 

Les pierres qui tombent 

Ceux qui iretudient pas ne se- 
ront jamais savans 

Celui qui trahit son ami est 
indigne d'amitie 

Le personne dont la reputa- 
tion vous etonne 

Le ciel, dont le secours est 
necessaire 

Le tyran dont je me plains 

La chose dont je suis content 

L : ami quevous aimez 

Les maux que vous apprehen- 

dez 
Qui observera les commande- 

mens de Dieu, sera sauve 



The man who speaks 

The woman who thinks 

The beast that eats 

The stones which fall 

They will never be learned 
icho do not study 

He is unworthy of friendship 
icho betrays his friend 

The person whose reputation 
you wonder at 

Heaven, ivhose asssistance is 
necessary 

The tyrant of whom I com- 
plain 

The thing with which I am 
contented 

The friend lohomyou love 

The evils tohich you appre- 
hend 

He who, or whoever observes 
the commandments qf God ? 
will be saved 



OBSERVATIONS. 

1. Qui, icho, is never abbreviated before a vowel, but que, whom, that, 
which, and all other words that end in que are ; as, a qui ai-je l'honneur 
de parler ? to whom have I the honor of speaking? L'homrne qu'il vit 
est mort, the man whom he saw is dead. Le chev al qiCa vendu mon 
frere,lhe horse which my brother has sold. 

2. When the relative requires to be separated from the antecedent, de 
qui is used for persons, instead of dcnt, and duquel, de la quelle, 
either for person; or things ; as, God, whose laws all men ought to 
obey, Dieu, aux lois de qui, ou duquel tons les hommes doivent 



obeir. 

Le ciel, sans le secours duquel, cfc. 



Heaven, without whose assistance, 

&c. 
The Thames, into the bed of which, 

.&c. 
A woman in whose conduct there is 
nothing to censure 



La Tamise, dans le lit de laquelle 

&c. 
Une fern me sur la conduite de qui 

ou de laquelle il n'y a rien a. re 

dire, 

3. Qui, instead of que, is used for whom, signifying what person 
as, I do not know whom you mean, jene sais qui vous voulez dire. 

4. Que is always expressed in French, though whom is sometimes omit 
ted in English ; as, the person (whom) he loves, la personne Qu'iZ aime. 



224 



SYNTAX OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

The book which pleases most is not always the most use- 
ful. A young man will assuredly have (some) merit, who is 
attentive (docile) to the counsel (advices) that is given him 
(which one gives him). It is a conduct that cannot be excused. 
He is a man whose virtues we ought to revere. Tt it an ac- 
tion, the consequences of which are very fatal. There is a 
horse, the value of which is very great. The stockings are 
very bad which you bought me yesterday. Lying is a vice 
of which we cannot have too great an abhorrence. 



To please, plaire 

useful, utile 

assuredly, infailliblement 

advice, avis, m. 

cannot, ne pent 

to be excused, s'excuser 

consequence, suite f. 



very, tres; fatal, funeste 
value, prix, m. 
to buy, acheter (pret.) 
yesterday, hier 
we cannot, on ne saurait 
too great an abhorrence, trop 
d'horreur 



Rule II. 



Whom, after prepositions, is rendered by qui, and relates 
only to persons or things personified ; lequel, laquelle, &c. is 
used for persons and things according to their gender and num- 
ber ; this is the only pronoun that can be employed in speak- 
ing of a thing, when it is placed after the noun to which it 
relates ; quoi is used when the antecedent thing is expressed 
or understood ; as, 



L'homme, pour qui vous par- 

lez, est alle a Paris 
C'est un ami en qui je mets 

ma confiance — a qui je me 

fie — contre qui on ne peut 

mal parler 
C'est de quoi il se plaint 
C'est a quoi il s'appliqua 
II n'y a rien sur quoi on ait 

plus ecrit 
C'est l'opinion a laquelle je 

m'attache ■ — Le bonheur 

apres lequel j 'aspire — Un 



The man, for whom you speak, 

is gone to Paris 
He is a friend in whom I put 
my confidence — in whom I 
confide — against xohom no- 
thing can be said 
It is what he complains of 
It is what he applied to 
There is nothing on which 

more has been written 
It is the opinion to which I am 
attached — The happiness 
after xohich I aspire - — An 



SYNTAX OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



225 



mal auquel il n'y a point de 
remede — Les raisons avec 
lesquelles je l'ai convaincu 



evil for which there is ho 
remedy — The reasons with 
which I convinced him 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

The merchant for whom I keep accounts (keep the books) 
is very wealthy. I know the person to whom you spoke. 
He is a man to whom I owe great obligations. The merchant 
from whom I received the letter. Vicious habits are maladies 
which (to which) human aid alone cannot remedy. That is 
the wall against which he was leaning. The pleasure to 
which you devote yourself, is hurtful to (the) health. The 
thing of which I am thinking, is very interesting. 



Merchant, negotiant 

to keep, tenir 

very wealthy, tres-opulent 

to know, connaitre 

I owe great obligations, fai 

beaucoup cV obligation 
habit, habitude, f. 
aid, secours, m. 



wall, mur, m. 

against, contre 

to lean, appuyer 

pleasure, plaisir, m. 

to devote one's self, se Jivrer 

hurtful, nuisible 

health, sante, f. ; very, fort 

interesting, interessante 



Rule III. 

That which, what {of), are rendered by # ce qui, ce que, ce 
dont ; as, 



On ne doit s'appliquer qu'a ce 

qui peut £tre utile 
Ce qui est dit est dit 
Ce qui me fache, e'est qu'il 

ne veut pas me parler 
Ce qui le rejouit, Jest d'ap- 

prendre que vous etes en 

bonne sante 
Ce que je crains Jest d'etre 

decouvert 
Cc que vous entendez est la 

verite 



We ought to apply to that on- 
ly which may be useful 

What is said is said 

What vexes me, is that he 
will not speak to me 

What rejoices him is to hear 
you are good health 

What I fear is being disco- 
vered 
What your hear is the truth 



* Obs. 1. Ce qui is used as the subject, and ce que as the object. 



226 



SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUN EN. 



Ce dont vous parlez est tres 
vraisemblable 



What you speak of is very 
probable, or that which you 
speak of, &c. 



2. Ce qui, ou que requires ce to be repeated before etre in the second 
member of a sentence ; as, what vexes him, is her bad humor, ce qui 
le fache, c'est sa mauvaise humeur: in short sentences, however, this 
repetition is unnecessary; as, what / say is true, ce que je dis est 
vrai. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

That which flatters is more dangerous than that which of- 
fends. What I like most, is being (is to be) alone. What 
you have just been mentioning is dreadful. He tells what he 
knows. Has he given her what he had promised her ? What 
you complain of is vexatious. 



To flatter, flatter 
to offend, offenser 
to be alone, cfitre seul 
have just been mentioning, 
venez de parler 



dreadful, horrible 

to tell, dire 

to know, savoir 

to complain, se plaindre 

vexatious, fdcheux 



THE PRONOUN EN. 



En, as a relative pronoun, stands for de lui, oVelle, d'euz, 
oVelles, de cela, &c. and refers to persons and things; it is 
Englished by of him, of her, of it, of them, for him, for her, 
for it, for them, with him, with her, with it, with them, about 
him, about her, about it, about them, from him, from her, from 
it, from them, thence, by him, by her, by it, at it, some, any, 
none, &c. ; as, 



Newton vous plait, vous en 

parlez toujours 
Voila une belle montre, je 

vous en ferai present 

II avait deux fils, il lui en est 
mort un 



Newton pleases you, you are 

always speaking of him 
There is a handsome watch, 

I shall make you a present 

of it 
He had two sons, one of them 

is dead 



SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUN T. 



227 



En 6tes vous faches ? 

Elle s'en rejouit 

Voila des porumes ; en voulez- 

vous 1 
Voulez-vous me preter de 

Pargent ? non, je n'era ai 

point 
Monsieur, en avez-vous ? 
Voulez-vous m'en prater ? 



Are you sorry for it ? 

She rejoices at it 

There are some apples ; will 
you have some? 

Will you lend me some mo- 
ney ? no, I have none 

Sir, have you any ? 
Will you lend me some ? 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

Will you give me my books ? I want them. I will thank 
you for them. Have you bought some books ? Yes, I have 
bought some. I am very sorry for it. I want change, have 
you any ? I am very glad of it. 1 thank you for it. They 
will speak to them about it. I will give you a faithful account 
of it. Have you some pens? No, I have none. Here are 
some. Will you give me three of them ? What do you say 
to it now 1 

Want, ai besoin 

to thank, remercier 

to buy, acheter 

very, bien 

to want, avoir besoin de 



change, monnaie, f. 

glad, aise 

account, compte 

faithful, Jidele,m. 

what, qv? ; now, maintenant 



THE PRONOUN F 



F, as a pronoun, mostly relates to things, and seldom to 
persons : it is used for d lui, d eux, en lui, en elle, & cela, a 
cet Jiomme Id, &c. ; and is Englished by, to it, at it, on it, it, 
by it, of it, into it, about it, with him, with her, with it, with 
them, in him, in her, in it, in them, to him, to her, to them, 
them, &c. ; as, 



Cette raison est juste, je m 7 y 

rends 
Je n'y touchais jamais 
Elle n'y eut plus pense 



This reason is just, I will 

yield to it 
I never touched it or there 
She had thought no more 

about it 



228 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS, EN AND T. 

II Pa fait, mais il n'y gagnera He has done it, but he will 

rien gain nothing by it 

Wy a-t-elle plus pense ? Had she thought no more 

about it? 
Ne vous y fiez pas Do not trust to him, to her, to 

it, to them, &c. 
Si nous y avions pense If we had thought on it 

C'est une entrepris difficile, It is a difficult undertaking, 

vous n'y reussirez pas you will not succeed in it 

Elles n'?/ auraient pas pense They would not have thought 

on it, on him, on her, on 
them, &c. 
C'est une belle charge, il y It is a fine appointment, he 
aspirait depuis long-tems aimed at it a long time ago 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

Would he not have thought of it? There is a fine picture, 
put a frame to it. Will he gain nothing by it 1 I never will 
consent to it. These are fine promises, but do not rely upon 
them. He does not like his profession, he is not fit for it. 
They have forced him to it. 

Picture, tableau, m. do not rely, ne comptez pas 

to put, mettre to like, aimer 

frame, bordure, f. profession, profession 

to consent, consentir • is not fit, n 1 est pas propre 
never, n 7 — jamais to force, forcer 

promise, promesse, f. 

OBSERVATIONS ON £JV AND Y, &c. 

1. En, ou y, taken singly, is placed after all other pronouns ; as, I will 
speak to him about it, je lui en parlerai ; speak to him about it, 
parlez-i.xn-'E.N ; let us not trust to it, ne nous y fions pas : and when 
they meet in a sentence, y precedes en ; us, I will send you some there, 
je vous y en enverrai. 

2. In the imperative mood, without a negation, me, te, are put instead 
of moi, toi, before en ; but mot, toi, are put after y; as, give me some, 
donnez m'en (not donnez moi en) ; lead or take me there, menez-Y moi 
(not menez moi y, nor menez m , y). 

3. The pronouns en, y, and le, supply the place of words and whole 
sentences, and are not always expressed in English ; as, you have not seen 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS EN AND T. 229 

the queen ? yes, I have (7 have seen her), vous n'avez pas vu la reine ; 
oui, je V.\i vue. How many children has he ? I told you he had one 
(of them), combien a-t-il d'enfans ? Je vous ai dit quHl en avait un. 
Have you answered his letter? yes, I have (I have answered it), avez- 
vousrepondu a salettre? oui, j'y ai repondu. 

4. The pronouns en and y may sometimes be used for persons ; as, we 
admi/x your sister and speak of her very often ; nous admirons votre 
sceur, et nous en parlous souvent. Lui and leur are used for animals or 
things personified ; thus, in speaking of a sword, we say, / owe my life 
to iT,je ltji dois la vie ; but if we add, I have got a new hilt put to it 
it must be rendered byj'y difait mettre une no uvelle garde. 

5. En, in some instances, and when preceded by an adverb of quantity, 
as, tant, aidant, plus, &c. : is not translated into English : Ex. Vous avez 
plus de livies que jen'en ai, you have more books than I. Avez- vous autant 
de chevaus en France que nous en avons en Angleterre ? have you as ma- 
ny horses in France as we have in England ? 



PRACTICE ON THE ABOVE OBSERVATIONS. 

Do not give me any. Give him or her some. Give them 
some. I will not give you any. Will he not give me some ? 
Shall I not give you some ? He did not bring them to us 
there. Did he briug them to her here ? Do not bring them 
to us there. Do not send me there. Did you see any officers 
in the park? Yes, there were a great many (of them). He 
is an honest man, trust him. This book is dear (to 7ne), but 
I am iudebted to it for my instruction. Go to the horses, and 
give them something to eat. 

Any, des is dear, (to we), m'a coute cher 

officer, ofjicier, m. am indebted, doit 

park, pare go to, visitez 

a great many, beaucoup to eat, d manger 



20 



230 SYNTAX OP INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 



Kutcvvoflatttoe, $zt. ^tououns, 



Rule T. 



1. Qui 1 , who? is said of persons only, and is used in all 
states or cases in asking questions ; as, 

Nom. Qwiestla? Qui sont- Who is there ? Who are they ? 

ils? 

Gen. De qui parlez-vous? Of whom do you speak ? 

Dat. "A qui ecrivez-vous ? To whom are you writing? 

Ace. Qui avez-vous vu ? Whom did you see? 

2. Que ? or qu'est-cc que ? is only said of things, and is 
the object of an action ; but quoi? is used when a thing is 
spoken of and a preposition precedes ; as, 

Que dites-vous ? ? JTri . , » 

~ , 4 i> * ? What do you say ? 

Q<rest ce que vous dites i 3 J J 

De quoi vous plaignez-vous ? Of what do you complain ? 

En quoi se trompe-t-il ? In what is he deceived 1 

3. hequel? which? must agree with the noun to which it 
refers, and quel? with the ncua to which it is joined ; as, 

hequel de vos freres est marie 1 Which of your brothers is 

married ? 
Laquelle des sceurs est morte ? Which of the sisters is dead ? 
Quel homme ? Quelle femme ? What man? What woman 1 
De quels messieurs parlez- Of what gentlemen do you 

vous ? speak ? 

y A quelles dames parlez-vous 1 To what ladies were you 

speaking ? 



OBSERVATIONS. 

1. Whose ? is rendered by a qui ? and de qui ? in asking questions ; as, 
Whose book is that ? a qui est-ce livre ? Whose pen is that ? a qui est 
cette plume ? By whose means ? par le moyen de qui ? Whose servant 
spoke lo you ? le domestique de qui vous a parle ? From whom ? is ren- 
dered by de qui? which corresponds to the ablative case in Latin. 



SYNTAX OF INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 231 

2. Qui est-ce qui ? is frequently used instead of qui ? for the nomina- 
tive, and qui tst-ce que? toi the accusative ; as, Nom. Qui est-ce qui l'a 
dit ? who said so ? instead of qui l'a dit : Ace. Qui est-ce que vous avez 
vu ? whom did you see. ? 

3. Que, when, placed at the beginning; of an exclamation, may be Eng- 
lished by how, why, what, how much, how many. After an adverb 
of comparison que signifies than. It is sometimes Englished by till and 

in the imperative by let and that. JVe que is Englished by but, only ; 

as, Qa'elleest jolie ! how preity she or it is. Que tie pailez-vous ? Why 
do you not speak r Que ne donnerai*-je pas ! What, cr how much would I 
not give ! Que tardez-vous ? Why do you stay i Vous etes plus grand que 
mei, you are taller than I. II attend que, he waits till. Qu'on le mene en 
prison, let him be taken to prison. lln'y a que deux, there are but two. 
Je ne connais que lui, I only know him. 



ADDITIONAL EXAMPLES TO ILLUSTRATE THE RULE AND 
OBSERVATIONS. 

Qu'est-ce qui vous fait rife ? What makes you laugh ? 

Que sert-il d'avoir du bien ? What avail riches? 

Que vous est-il arrive 1 What has happened to you 1 

Qu'est-ce? Qu'est-ce que e'est ? What is it ? 

Quoi ! toujours la me'me What! always the same 

chose ? thing'? 

De quoi parle-t-il ? Of what is he talking ? 

Voila deux grammaires : a There are two grammars : to 
laquelle donnez-vous la pre- tohich do you give the pre- 
ference ? ference ? 

Voici des pommes et des Here are apples and pears: 

poires ; lesqi/ellcs aimez- which do you like best? 
vous le mieux ? 

Laquelle de ces oranges? Which of these oranges? 

Lequel de ces tableaux-l& Which of those pictures do 

proposez-vou« de vendre ? you intend to sell ? 

Duquel vous deferez-vous ? Which will you part with ? 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

Who is come ? From whom have you this news 9 Whose 
fine house is that 1 Whom do you look for ? WIl t do you 
think? In what is he mistaken ? What .' I know not what 



232 



SYNTAX OP INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 



What is more pleasant to parents than virtuous children ? 
Which of these students is your brother? Which of your sis- 
ters will he marry ? Which of these two men is your father ? 
What pens will you buy ? What books? What paper? In 
what shop 1 What linen have you bought ? 

To have, tenir student, etudiant 

to look for, chercher will, vcut-il ? 

to be mistaken, se tromper to marry, epouser 

more pleasant, de plus agrea- shop, boutique, L 

hie linen, toile, f. 

Rule II. 



Ou may be used either for the relative or interrogative, le- 
quel, or qnoi, when, in English, we say in which, into which, 
where, wherein, from which, whence, &c. ; as, 



La maison oil il demeure, 
Les fautes ou je suis tombe, 

Je ne me rapelle pas l'endroit 
ou je dois le joindre, 

C'est une chose d'ou j'attends 

mon bonheur, 
Ou me reduisez-vous ? 
Par oil commencerons-nous ? 



The house in which he lives 

The faults into which I have 
fallen 

I have forgotten the place 
where or in which I am to 
meet him 

It is a thing from which! ex- 
pect my happiness 

What do you reduce me to ? 

What shall we begin with? 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

The circumstances in which you are. The cottage in 
which he lives. The end at which he aims. The reasons 
from which I conclude. The discourses by which he inst- 
ates. I know the means by which he gains his point. J>y 
what means [by what) shall I get out of this embarrassment ? 

to know, savoir 



Cottage, cabane, f. 

end, but, m. 

to aim, viser ; from, de 

to conclude, conclure 

by, par 

to insinuate, insinuer 



mean, moyc.n, m. 

to gain one's point, parvenir 

d ses fins 
to get out, se tirer 
of, de 



SYNTAX OP INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



233 



XttttUuitt Wvonoum. 



Rule I. 

To qui and quoi is added que ce soit qui, or que ce soit que 
and sometimes que ce puisse etre qui or que, answering to ever 
in English ; but with tiie negative ne, or when a question is 
asked, they signify any body, or any thing ; as, 



Qui que ce soit qui ait fait eel a, 

On ne doit jamais parler mal 
de qui que ce soit, 

Trouverez-vous qui que ce 

soit de votre avis 1 
Qui que ce soit, il sera de- 

couvert, 
Qui que ce puisse etre qui ait 

fait cela, e'est un habile 

hornme, 
A qui que ce soit que vous par- 

liez, 
Qui que ce soit que vous en- 

voyiez, 
Quoi que ce soit qui arrive 

faites-le-moi savoir, 
Quoi que ce soit qui vous em- 

peche, 
Quoi que ce soit que vous 

m'ordonniez, je le ferai, 
Quoi que ce soit qu'W entre- 

prenne, il n'y reussira ja- 
mais, 
Qui que ce soit ne m ? a parle 

de vous, 



Whoever did it (whoever may 

have done that) 
We ought never to speak ill 
of any body, be hewho he 

may 
Will you find any body (ivhat- 

rver) of your opinion ? 
Whoever he may be, he will 

be discovered 
He is a clever man who did 

that, let him be who he will 

To whomsoever you may be 

speaking 
Whomsoever you will send 

Whatever may happen, let 

me know 
Whatever may prevent you 

Whatever you may bid me, I 

will do it 
Whatever he may undertake, 

he will never succeed in it 

Nobody (whatever) spoke to 
me of you 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



Whoever knows it, I do not care. Whoever speaks to you. 



Of whomsoever you may speak. 
20< 



To whomsoever you may 



234 SYNTAX OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

speak. To whomsoever you address yourself, speak boldly. 
Whomsoever you may offer to him. Whatever may happen. 
Whatever you may bid me. To whatever you may apply. 
I have seen nobody. 

Knows it, le sache to happen, arriver 

I do not care ?t /e ne m 7 cn sonde to bid, ordonntr 

guere to apply, s'appliquer 
to offer, offrir (ir.) 

Obs. Whoever is likewise frequently rendered by quiconque ; as, 
whoever deceives me shall be punished, quiconque me trompera sera 
puni : the pronoun il is here omitted before sera, but with qui, que, ce 
soit qui it cannot be omitted ; as qui que ce soit qui me trompera, il sera 
puni. — [ V. Die. Fr.Ac.] 

2. When whatever signifies all that, it is rendered by tout ce qui 
or que ; as, / will do whatever (all that) you please, jeferai tout ce 
qu'iZ vows plaira. 

Rule II. 

The indefinite pronouns *nul, pas un, aucun, personne, ni 
Vun ni I'autrc, rien, are always accompanied by the negative 
ne before a verb ; unless, in some instances, where doubt is 
implied, or a question is asked ; as, 

Cela ra'est de nul usage, That is of no use 

Je rc'en ai nulle connaissance, I have no knowledge of it 

Pas un ne le croit, No one believes it 

Aucun ne lui a parle, No one spoke to him 

Jlucune raison ne peut justi- No reason can justify a false- 

fier le mensonge, hood 

Y en a-t-il aucuQ^qm vous Does any of them esteem 

estime 1 "^ you? 

Je doute qu'il y ait aucun I doubt whether there be any 

auteur sans defauts, <. author without faults 

Personne n'est assure de vivre Nobodij, or no one is certain 

jusqu'au lendemain, of living till to-morrow 

Elle ne Ta dit k personne, She told it to nobody, or no 

one 

Obs. 1. When there is a negative, as, nul, pas un, &c. pas or point is 
never used. 

2. Also nul, pas un, and aucun, are sometimes adjectives ; as, nul 
homme, no man; nulle femme, no woman. 



SYNTAX OP INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



235 



Personne a-t-il jamais pu trou- 
ver la pierre philosophale ? 

Je doute que personne soit 
assez hardi pour le nier, 

Ni Vun hi V autre n'ont fait 
leur devoir, 

Preferez-vous les groseilles 
aux cerises 1 Je /i'aime ni 
les unes ni les autres, 

Je n'ai parle ni de Pun ni de 

V autre, 

lis u'ont parle ni d Vun ni a 

V autre, 

II ne fait rien, 

Y a-t-il j-icn de nouveau 1 

Je doute que rien soit plus 

propre & faire impression, 

que, &c. 



Could ever any body find the 
philosopher's stone 1 

I doubt whether any body be 
bold enough to deny it 

Neither have done their duty 

Do you prefer gooseberries to 
cherries 1 I like neither 

I spoke for have spoken) of 

neither 
They have spoken (or spoJce) 

to neither 
He does nothing 
Is there any thing new? 
I doubt whether any thing be 

more adapted to make an 

impression, than, &c. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



No one of those ladies is gone out. No one is innocent 
before God. He has no repose. Not one of them believes 
this news. Not one person spoke to him. No one has seen 
it. I doubt whether there be in any science a more evident 
principle. None of his works will descend to posterity. It 
is doubtful whether any of those affairs will succeed. Nobody 
has seen you. Did any body ask for me 1 There is nobody 
at home. Is there any body in the world who esteems you 
more than I 1 Neither spoke to him. We trust to neither. I 
say nothing. Nothing pleases me more. Nothing frightens 
him. Is there any thing more beautiful than that house 1 

Is gone out, n'est sortie 

before, devant 

news, nouvelle, f . ; in. dans 

works, mwrages 

will descend, passera 

will succeed, reussisse 



to ask for, demander 
at home, au logis 
world, monde } m. 
more, davantage 
to frighten, epouvanter 



236 SYNTAX OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1. Personne is sometimes a pronoun and sometimes a noun: when a 
pronoun it is masculine, but when used as a noun it is feminine. Ex. 
Personne (m.) no peut se vanter d'etre toujours heureux, no one can boast 
of being always happy. La personne (f.) qui est incapable d'oublier le 
bienfait, est 01 dinairemenl genereuse, the person who is incapable of for- 
getting a kindness, is generally liberal. Mien, quiconque, and autrui, 
are sometimes nouns. 

2. JVul, when it does not relate to a noun, means the same as personne. 
JVul, followed by a noun, has no plural ; but it has a plural when it signi- 
fies qui n"est d'aucune valeur, which is of no value ; as, Ces actes sont 
nuls, those acts are nul or void. 

3. Plusieurs, many, has no singular and is of both genders ; as, Plusi- 
eurs se sont trompes en voulant tromper les autres, many have deceived 
themselves by wishing to deceive others. 

4. Chacun, every one, or every body, is always used in the singular; 
as, Dieu rendra a chacun selon ses oeuvres, God will reward every body 
according to his works. Chacun (m ) lira a son tour, every one will read 
in his turn. Chacune (f.) lira a son tour, every one will read in her turn. 
Every before a noun is expressed by chaque (m, orf.) ; as, Chaque pays 
a ses usages, every country has its customs. Chaque science a ses prin- 
cipes, every science has its principles. 

5. Tout, as an adjective, is Englished by all, every, and quel-q^c, 
QUELQUE-g'we, whatever, are declinable ; but tout, although, and 
quelque, however, when used adverbially, are indeclinable ; tout, as a 
pronoun, is only used in the masculine singular, and signifies toute chose, 
every thing. — \V. Grammaire des Grammaires, p. 314.] 

Examples to illustrate Observation 5. 

Declinable, 

Quel qu'W soit Whatever he may be 

Quelle gu'elle soit Whatever she may be 

Quelles que soient les merchandises Whatever the goods may be 

Quelques amis qu'il ait Whatever friends he may have 

Quelques recompenses que vous lui Whatever rewards you may give 

donniez, him 

Tous les peuples et toutes les Ian- Jill nations and tongues 

gues, 

Tout le cours de sa vie, The whole course of his life 

Tous leurs privileges sont nuls, Ml their privileges are null 

Tous les homines sont mortels, Jill men are mortal 

Tout homme est mortel, Every man is mortal 

II paya tous les depens, He paid all the expenses 

Je leur ecris toutes les semaines, I wrote to them every week 

Je la vois tous les jours, I see her every day 

Je les connais tous, I know them (m.) all 

11 les connait toutes, He knows them (/.) all 

C'est assez pour toute une famille, That is enough for a whole family 

Toute laide q'w'elle est, However ugly she may be 

Elle va tous les soirs, She goes every evening 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN ON. 237 

Indeclinable. 

QueJque riche ^u'il soit, However rich he may be 

Quelque belles gu'elles soient However handsome they may be 

Tout est perdu, Jill, or every thing is lost 

Tout est tranqnille a present, Every thins; is quiet now 

Presque tout est iucertain dans le Almost every thing is uncertain in 

monde, the world 

Tout is indeclinable before a feminine adjective beginning with a vowel 
or h mute ; as, ^ 

La verfu, tout austere qu'elle est, Virtue, though it may be austere, 

fait gouter de vrais plaisirs, afFords real pleasures 

Tout habile s qu'ils sont, Although they are clever 



THE PRONOUN ON. 

The pronoun on is used indefinitely for one, or several 
persons, and is always followed by a verb in the third person 
singular. On is Englished by, one, I, we, people, man, men, 
it, they, any one, any body, somebody : as, 

On dit, They say, people say, it is 

said 
On dit qu'il est savant, They say, people say he is 

learned, or it is said that 
he is learned 
On me Pa dit, I was told so 

On n'est pas toujours maitre We are not always masters of 

de ses passions, our passions 

On dit, on croit, on soutient People say, it is thought, they 

que la chose est ainsi maintain that it is so 

On a dit, on a rapporte, on It has been ^said, it has been 

croit que la paix se fera, reported, it is believed that 

peace will be made 
On a recu des lcttres, Letters have been received 

A-i-on recu des lettres? Have letters been received ? 

On a envoye un courier, A courier has been despatched 

A-X-on envoye un courier? Has a courier been despatched? 

On fera de grands prepa- Great preparations will be 

ratifs, made 

Ne fera-t-rm pas do grands Will not great preparations; 

preparatifs? be made ? 



238 

On nous ecoute, 
On a tout tente, 



On secourt plus volontiers les 
malheureux quand on Pa 
ete soi-meme, 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN ON. 



Somebody listens to us 
Every thing has been tried, 

or men have tried every 

thing 
We more willingly assist the 

unfortunate when we have, 

been so ourselves 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

It is thought that war will be declared. Men always reason 
ill when they are possessed of any violent passion. We remark 
every day that the passions cause (some) great disorders ; yet 
we do not endeavour to guard against the surprise of so pow- 
erful an enemy (an enemy so powerful). We often believe 
that the friendship which we have for a rich and powerful 
person is sincere and disinterested ; but we can know it only 
when it is stripped of its riches and power. Will great re- 
joicings be made 1 



To think, croire 

to reason, raisonner 

always, toitjours 

ill, mal ; when, quand 

to possess, posseder 

any, quelque 

to remark, remarquer 

disorder, desorder, m. 

yet, cependant 

to endeavour, chercher ; to, d 

guard, se garantir 



against, de 

powerful, puissant 

often, souvent 

to believe, croire 

disinterested, desinteresse 

only, ne — que 

when, lorsque 

to strip, depouiller 

riches, bien 

power, pouvoir, m. 

rejoicings, rejouissance, f. 



OBSERVATIONS. 

1. V on is used, for the sake of Euphony, instead of on after et, si, ou, 
and que, unless on should be followed by le, la, or les; as, si Von veut plaire, 
il faut se rendie aimable, if we wish to please, we must become amiable ; 
si on le voit pas, on l'entend, if it is not seen, it is heard, or, if we do not 
see it, we hear it. 

2. Sol and se, the oblique cases of on, are subject to the same rules, as, 
moi, me, &c [Rules iii. and iv.] ; as, itre trop content de soi estune sot- 
tise, to be too contented with one's self is a folly. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN ON. 



239 



3. Soi, the oblique case of on, is used in a general sense, and in the 
singular number only; himself, herself, &c. are rendered by lui, elle, &c. 
when taken in an individual sense ; as, c'est un homme qui ne parle que 
de lui, that is a man who talks only of himself. 

Examples to illustrate the above Observations. . 



Obs. 1. Si Von savait homer ses 
desirs, on s'epargnerait bien des 
maux et Von se procurerait beau- 
coup de bien, 

II y a des defauts que Von cache 
soigneusement, 

Ce que je desire le plus, c'est qu'on 
fasse la paix, 

2. On a souvent besoin d'un plus 
petit que .soi, 

£tre trop mecontent de soi est une 

faiblesse, 
II se donne bien de la peine, 

Elle se flatte, 

Elle parle toujours d'eZZe mime, 

Chacun agit pour soi, 

3. lis sont venus d'eux mimes, 
Cela est bon en soi, 

Le vice est odieux de soi, 
Ces choses sont bonnes en elles- 
memes, 



If we knew how to limit our desires, 
we should spare ourselves many 
evils and procure ourselves much 
good, 

There are some defects which we 
carefully conceal 

What / wish for most, is that peace 
may be made 

One has often need of a person in- 
ferior to oneself 

To be too dissatisfied with oneself 
is a weakness 

He gives himself a great deal of 
trouble 

She flatters herself 

She is always talking of herself 

Every one acts for himself 

They are come of themselves 

That is good in itself 

Vice is odious of itself 

These things are good in themselves 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



Soi, himself, &c. 
[Obs. 2. and 3.] 

He who regards nobody but 
himself is not worthy to 
live. The wise man is 
master of himself. We 
(one) ought to speak of 
ourselves {one^s self) with 
modesty. He never has 
money about him. 

He who, celui qui 

regards only, rCest bon que 

pour 
worthy, digne ; to, de 



Lui, elle, himself, &c. 
[Obs. 3.] 

That is a man who minds 
himself only. That person 
is very neat in herself. 
That man is constantly 
talking of himself. These 
things are indifferent in 
themselves. 



minds only, rtestbon que pour 
person, personne, f. 
neat, propre 
modesty, modestie, f. 



240 SYNTAX OF PRONOlTNS. 

in talking, par le money, argent, m. 

constantly, sans cesse about, sur 

never has, ne jwrte jamais indifferent, indifferent 



EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 

FIRST LESSON. 

Tout le rnonde se plaint de sa mernoire, et personno ne se 
plaint de son jugement. 

On ne pent se consoler d'etre trompe par ses ennemis et 
trahi par ses amis, et Ton est souvent satisfait de Tdtre par 
soi-m^me. 

Ouil n'y a point de prcbite, il n'y a point de religion. 

Celui qui est esclave de ses passions ne saurait jamais se 
vanter d'etre libre. 

S'occuper de fetes et de danses, quand les pauvres 
meurent de faim, c'est insulter k l'humanite. 

La gloire des grands hommes se doit mesurer aux moyens 
qu'ils ont pour l'acquerir. 

Les planetes et la lune nous communiquent la lumiere du 
soleil, et jamais la leur. 

Ce n'est presque jamais qu'aux depens de son repos qu'on 
entreprend de troubler celui d'autrui. 

Un cceur heureux est celui qui ne desire rien et que ne 
craint rien. 

Tout lemonde, every body c'est insulter a, is insulting 

plaindre, to complain se doit mesurer, should be 

ses, our ; trahir, to betray measured 

sur, by ; car, for aux moyens, by the means 

souvent, often la leur, their own 

probite, honesty ce west presque jamais que, it 

esclave, slave is scarcely ever but 

vanter, to boast aux depens, at the expense 

s'occuper de fetes, to be taken de son, of our oion 

up with entertainments qu'on, that we 

meurent de faim, are perishing ci'aindre, to fear 

with hunger 



SYNTAX OP PRONOUNS. 241 



SECOND LESSON. 



Personne ne peut se vanter d'etre sans imperfections. Ne 
parlez pas mal d'autrui, si vous voulez que personne ne parle 
mal de vous. Y a-t-il aucun de vous qui s'applique a l'etude 
autant qu'il le puisse 1 L'Angleterre espere que chacun fera 
son devoir. Chacun devrait, pour son bonheur, n'ecouter 
que la voix de Ja raison et de la verite. Le bonheur du peu- 
pie fait celui du prince ; leurs vrais interests sont lies les uns 
aux autres. Dans tout ce que vous dites, ne vous ecartez ja- 
mais du sentier de la verite. Qui que ce soit qui meprise 
les pauvres, est lui-meme meprisable. Avec quique ce soit 
que vous soyez, comportezvous toujours bien. Quiconque 
croit tout ce qu'on lui dit, est souvent trompe. Quelque 
surprenant que soit ce phenomene il n'est pas contre Pordre 
de la nature. Quels que soient vos motifs, votre conduite 
sera condamnee. Tout ce qui luit n'est pas or. 

Mal, ill ecarter, to deviate 

bonheur, happiness se comporter, to conduct 

fait, constitutes phenomene, phenomenon 

lies, connected luir-e, to glitter 



THIRD LESSON. 

Quand les vices nous quittent, nous nous flattons de la cro- 
vance, que c'est nous qui les quittons. 

On n'est jamais si ridicule par les qualites que l'on a 7 que 
par ceiles que l'on affecte d'avoir. 

Nous n'avouons de petits defauts que pour persuader que 
nous n'en avons pas de grands. 

Quelque decouverte que l'on ait faite dans les pays de l'a- 
mour propre, il y reste encore bien des terres inconnues. 

On n'est jamais si heureux ni si malheureux que Ton 
pense. 

L'esperance, toute trompeuse qu'elle est, sert au moins a 
nous mener a la fin de la vie par un chemin agreable. 

On ne doit pas juger du merite d'un homme par ses grandes 
qualites, mais par l'usage qu : il en sait faire. 

On ne meprise pas tous ceux qui ont des vices ; mais on me- 
prise tous ceux qui n'ont aucune vertu. — Rochefoucault. 

21 



242 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 

Quitter, to leave ; de } with V amour proyre, self-love 
croyance, belief servir, to serve 

avoaer, to acknowledge mepriser, to despise 



FOURTH LESSON. 

La fausse gloire que les hommes cherchent, est une grande 
marque de leur misere et de leur bassesse ; e'en est une aussi 
de leur excellence ; car quelques possessions qu'il ait sur la 
terre, de quelque sante et commodite essentielle qu'il jouisse, 
il n'est pas satisfait s'il n'est pas dans l'estime des hommes. 
II estime si grand la raison de l'homme, que quelque avan- 
tage qu'il ait dans le monde, il se croit malheureux s'il n'est 
place aussi avantageusement dans la raison de l'homme. La 
vanite est si ancree dans le cceur de l'homme, qu'un goujat, 
un marmiton, un crocheteur, se vante, et veut avoir ses admi- 
rateurs, et les philosophes me'me en veulent. Ceux qui ecri- 
vent contre la gloire, veulent avoir la gloire d'avoir bien 
ecrit; et ceux qui le lisent veulent avoir la gloire de l'avoir 
lu; et moi, qui ecris ceci, j'ai peut-gtre cette envie, et peut- 
etre que ceux qui le liront, l'auront aussi. — Pascal. 

Chercher, to seek marmiton, scullion, kitchen- 

bassesse, baseness, or mean- drudge 

ness; goujat, clown crocheteur, porter 



FIFTH LESSON. 

La terre est un lieu de repos, un sejour de delices, ou 
l'homme, place pour seconder la nature, preside & tous les 
dtres. Seul, entre tous, capable de connaitre et digne d'ad- 
mirer, Dieu l'a fait spectateur de l'univers et temoin de ses 
merveilles : l'etincelle divine dont il est anime, le rend parti- 
cipant aux mysteres divins ; e'est par cette lumiere qu'il 
pense et reflechit; e'est par elle qu'il voit et lit dans le livre 
du monde, comme dans un exemplaire de la Divinite. La 
nature est le tr6ne exterieur de la magnificence divine : 
l'homme qui la contemple, qui l'etudie, s'eleve par degres au 
tr6ne interieur de la Toute-Puissance. Fait pour adorer le 
Createur, vassal du ciel, roi de la terre, il l'ennoblit, la peu- 
ple et l'enrichit ; il etablit entre les §tres vivans l'ordre, la 



SYNTAX OF VERBS. 243 

subordination, l'harmonie ; il embellit la nature raeme, il la 
cultive, Fetend et la polit ; en elague le chardon et la ronce, 
y multiplie le raisin etla rose. — Buffon. 

a, over rendre participant aux, to ena 
stul, the only one ble to participate in the 

entre tous, among them all elague?', to cut down, or to lop 
temoin, a witness off 

ithicelle, spark, or light chardon, thistle 

dont, with which ronce, briar 



Sbpntav of Vkx^u. 



CHAPTER II. 

Rule I. 

A verb must agree with its nominative or subject in number 
and person ; as, 

Je donne, tu donnes, 8fc. I give, thou givest, &c. 

Nous ecrhons, vous Bcrivez, We write, you write, they 
Us ecrivent,8fc. write, &c. 

When a relative is placed between its antecedent and the 
verb, still the verb must agree with the antecedent to the 
relative in number and person ; as, 

C'est moi qui la connais, It is I who know her, or it 

C'est toi qui paries, It is thou who speakest 

C'est la dame qui lit, It is the lady who reads 

Cest moi qui Vai fait, It is I who have done it 

C'est elle qui Pa fait, It is she who has done it 

C'est nous qui Vavons fait, It is we who have done it 

C'est vous qui Vavez fait, It is you who have done it 

C'est eux qui Vont fait, It is they who have done it 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1. When several nominatives singular are connected together by a cop- 
ulative conjunction, the verb, adjective, and pronoun must be put in the 



244 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 

plural ; as, La faveur et l'industrie sont bonnes et necessaires, elles servent 
a faire valoir le merite, patronage and industry are good and necessary, 
they serve to give merit its full value. 

2. When several nouns singular have the disjunctive conjunctions ou, 
mais, autant que, Sec. between tbem the verb must be singular ; as, La 
crainte ou l'impuissance les empecha, fear or weakness prevented them. 

3. When the nominatives are of different persons, the verb must agree 
with the first rather than the second, and with the second rather than the 
third ; as, C'est \otvefrere et moi qui avons decouvert cette intrigue, it is 
your brother and / who discovered this intrigue. 

4. When collectives, partitives, and adverbs are followed by de and a 
noun in the plural, they require the verb, adjective, &c. to be plural; as, 
Une infinite de gens le croient, an infinite number of men think so ; but 
when the following noun is singular, the verb, &c. must be singular ; as, 
La plupart du monde est de cette opinion, most people are of that opinion. 
La plupart, however, without another noun requires a verb plural ; as, 
La plupart pretendent qu'il a tort, most maintain that he is wrong. Other- 
wise, whatever the noun may be, the verb and pronoun must agree with it ; 
as, La foulefaisait un grand bruit, ells etait dans la rue, the crowd made 
a great noise, it was in the street. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

I admire the beauty of this landscape. Are you studying 
geography and history 1 He is going into the country. The 
sun shines. The stars begin to appear. These meadows 
are very fine. His father and mother love him very much. 
It is T who saw them. What shall I do (I) who have not a 
friend in the world? Let us love justice, peace, and virtue* 
It was your sister and I who saw the king. 

Landscape, paysage, m. to, a; appear, paraitre 

to ttudy, etudier meadow, prairie, f. 

geography, geographic, f. in the world, au monde 

to shine, luire peace, paix, f. 

Rule IT. 

When a noun, or any one of the pronouns ceci, cela, aucun, 
quelgu'urir personne, or rien is the nominative, it must pre- 
cede the verb in asking a question, and the pronouns, il or 
elle ; Us or elles, depending upon the gender and number of 
the noun, must be put after the verb ; as, 



SYNTAX OF VERBS. 



245 



Yotrefrere a.-t-il ecrit ? 
Votre soeur a-i-elle ecrit 1 
Le roi est-il arrive 1 
Le diner est-27pr€t? 
La reine est-elle morte ? 
Ses parens sont-ils morts ? 
Vos sceurs ont-elles appris 



ranyais 



le 



Cela est-il bon a manger? 
Quelqu'un m'a-t-iZ demande? 
Per sonne a-t-il narre plus na- 
ivement que La Fontaine 1 



Has your brother written ? 
Has your sister written ? 
Is the king arrived ? 
Is the dinner ready 1 
Is the queen dead 1 
Are her relations dead 1 
Have your sisters learnt 

French ? 
Is that good to eat ? 
Did any body ask for me? 
Has any body narrated with 

more simplicity than La 

Fontaine 1 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



Is the company arrived 1 Is your father gone to France ? 
Has your brother done his exercise ? Is the supper ready 1 
Has the servant brought my shoes'? Do your scholars learn 
the irregular verbs ? Does your mother speak French ? Do 
your sisters learn music ? Did ever any body express him- 
self with more grace than Sheridan 1 



Company, co?npagnie, f. 
to do, fair e 
exercise, devoir, m. 
to bring, apportcr 
shoe, Soulier 



music, musique, f. 
ever, jamais 
to express, exprimer 
with, avec ~* 

than, que 



Obs. Interrogations are sometimes asked by est-ce que ? ou rtest-ce 
pas? as, Est-ce que je perds (not perds-je).? do /lose ? II lui en parlera, 
iv est-ce pas ? he will speak to him about it, will he not? Est-ce que je 
sors ? am I going out r Est-ce que je dors ? do I sleep ? J'ai fait cela, 



n' est-ce pas, ma soeur ? ou n'est ce pas, ma soeur, que j'ai fait cela ? 
that, did I not, sister ? 



I did 



Rule III. 

Verbs are repeated in French, though not in English, in 
the second member of a sentence, and in the reply to a ques- 
tion ; as, 

21* 



246 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 

II n'y a pas beaucoup de per- There are not many persons 

. sonnes qui aiment leur who love their neighbours 

prochain plus qu'ils ne more than themselves 

s' aiment eux-m£mes 

Avez-vous regu les lettres 1 Did you receive the letters ? 

Oui, je les ai regues Yes, 1 did 

Vous n'avez pas vu la reine. You have not seen the queen. 

Si fait, je Vai vue Yes, I have 

Le ferez-vous ? Oui, je lefe- Will you do it? Yes, I will 

rai 

Allez-vous k la comedie ce Are you going to the play 

fy vais this evening? Yes, I am 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

It is much more difficult to conquer one's self than (to con- 
quer) an enemy. Our reputation depends not on the cap- 
rice of men ; but (it depends) on our laudable actions (the 
laudable actions we do). Do you like it ? Yes, I do (I do like 
it). Have you not seen your sister ? No, I have not (I have 
not seen her). 

To, de; conquer one's self, se on, de ; laudable, louable 
vaincre soi-meme 



fttmm anir jsioos^ 



i. #u tlje Simple ffrow* tjv Qtimta. 



PRESENT TENSE INDICATIVE MOOD. 

The present tense generally expresses that a thing is, or is 
doing, at the time in -which we speak, and is Englished in 
three different ways; as, Je lis, I read, I do read, or I am 
reading. 






SYNTAX OF TENSES. 247 



OBSERVATIONS. 



1. The present is used to express what is, or will always be true, and 
what we do continually, or the continued state of a subject ; as, 

Dieu est eternal, et sa puissance est God is eternal, and his power is 
sans bornes, without bounds 

Je passe une grande partie de la I spend a great part of the day in 
journee a ecrire, writing 

2. The present is put for the future when it denotes that an action, or 
event will soon take place ; as, 

Je pars bientot, I shall soon set out 

II est a vous dans un moment, He will be with you in a moment 

Ou allez- vous demain ? Where are you going to-morrow ? 

3. The present, proceded by si (expressing a condition) has a future sig- 
nification ; as, Si ma soeur vient, vous ln'avertirez, if my sister (should) 
come, you will inform me. 

4. The French use the present for the past, when they wish to give 
more vivacity and energy to what they relate ; as, *Des que la flotte est 
en pleine mer, le ciel se couvre de nuages, les eclairs brillent de toutes 
parts, le tonnerre gronde, la mer ecwne, les fiots s'entre-choquent, les 
abimes s'ouvrent, les vaisseaux perdent leurs voiles, leurs mats ; leurs 
gouvernails se brisent contre les bancs et les rochers. 

N. B. When the present is used for the preterite, it is necessary that the 
verb which relates to the present should be present also. Ex. Le centu- 
rion ? envoye par Mucian entre dans le port de Carthage, et des qn'ilfut de- 
barque, il eleve la voix. We must say, et des qu'il est debarque, &c. — 
[V. Gram, des Grammaires, p. 496, and Wailly, p. 203.] 



PRACTICE ON THE RULE AND OBSERVATIONS. 

I am writing a letter. We are writing to Liverpool every 
day. Are you going to the play this evening ? I shall be 
ready in a moment. I shall set out to-night. Shall you have 
done soon 1 (have you soon done ?) I shall have done in a 
moment. Three times three are (make) nine. I am learn- 
ing (the) mathematics. If my cousin (should) come, tell him 
to wait for me. God is from all eternity. 

Every day, tous les jours are, font 

play, comedie, f. to learn, apprendre 

evening or night, soir, m. to wait for, attendre 

done, Jini eternity, eternite, f. 



* When the examples are long, they are left as exercises for the learner 
to translate. 



248 



SYNTAX OP TENSES. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 

The imperfect tense is used, 

1. When, in English, we can use was, wast, or were, and 
the active participle, whether the time be specified or not. 

2. To express that past actions or events were frequently 
repeated, continued, or become habitual, in a time that is not 
defined, and which may often be translated by used to and the 
verb. 

3. In expressing the age, character, quality, &c. of per- 
sons, or things that have ceased to exist. Also to express 
that an action was done, or doing at the time of some other 
past event. 

4. The imperfect is often used instead of the conditional, 
particularly after si, if, when if, in English, is followed by 
could, ivould, should, &c. expressed or understood, or when 
doubt is implied. 



examples. 



1. Vecrivais uue lettre hier, 
quand il entra 

Nous dinions lorsqu'elle ar- 
riva 

2. II lui ecrivait toutes les 
semaines 

Henri quatre etait un grand 
prince, il aimait son peuple 

Quand 'fetais a Paris, ] J allais 
souvent a la chambre des 
deputes 

3. George trois avait 82 ans 
quand il mourut 

Sa mere etait belle femme 

Alexandre le grand aimait 

trop la guerre 
Je lisais quand vous entrates 



I was writing a letter yester- 
day when he came in 

We were dining when she ar- 
rived 

He wrote or did write to her 
every week (we may say 
he used to write, &c.) 

Henry the Fourth was a great 
prince, he loved his people 

When T was in Paris, I often 
icent {used often to go) to 
the house of commons 
(chamber of deputies) 

George the third was 82 years 
of age when he died 

His mother was a handsome 
woman 

Alexander the Great was too 
fond of war 

I was reading when you came 
in 



SYNTAX OF TENSES. 



249 



Obs. In the preceding sentence lisais expresses a continuation, or do- 
ing ; but entrdtes expresses an event that is perfectly past, consequently 



not continued: but in the following sentences both the verbs express con- 
tinuity. 

Je lisais pendant qnil dcrivait, 
J'etais au theatre hier .au soit pen- 
dant qu'elle chantait cette ariette, 



1 was reading whilst he was writing 
1 icas at the theatre last night 
whilst she ivas singing that ari- 
etta, or song 



If I knew {could I Jcnoio) your 

intentions, I would execute 

them 
If he cofjie, or should he come } 

I shall pay him 
She would have lost her sight, 

if you had not arrived in 

time 

Obs. The imperfect may be said of an event that was continued, even 
though it occurred in a definitely past time ; as, yesterday. Ex. Quand 
avez-vous perdu votre bourse ? Je l'ai perdue ce matin ; je V avals hier au 
soir ; when did you lose your purse ? I have lost it this morning ; I had it 
last night. 



4. Si je connaissais vos inten- 
tions, je les executerais 

S'il nenaitj je le paierai 

Elle perdait la vue, si vous 
n'eticz arrive a tems 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

My sister was learning her lesson when you arrived. 
When I was in London I often went to the opera. Did they 
corrupt your manners? Henry the Fourth was a good king, 
They were spreading their nets. A vast number of people 
resorted thither from all parts. Titus was the delight of 
mankind. Meanwhile they were coming near the cottage. 
They heard the neighing of a young horse that was capering, 
&c. My sister was handsome. If he come, you will tell 
him. If he loved her, he would marry her. When he was 
speaking, we were looking. The women and old men were 
intrusted with the domestic concerns. If he had studied the 
Roman history. 



To learn, apprendre 
to corrupt, corrompre 
manners, mceurs, m. pi. 
to spread, etendre 
net, jilet, m. 
vast number, infinite 



people, monde 
to resort, accourir 
delight, delices, f. pi. 
mankind, genre humain, m. 
to come near, appro cher de 
meanwhile, cependant 



250 SYNTAX OF TENSES. 

to hear, entendre old men, vieillard, m. 

to be capering, venir en bon- to intrust, charger ; with, de 

dissant domestic concerns, soin de rat- 

io marry, ipouser nage 



PRETERITE TENSE. 

The preterite tense is used in speaking of an action, or 
event, having happened in a definitely past time, and of which 
no part of the specified time remains ; as, hier, yesterday ; la 
semaine passee, ou derniere, last week; Vannee derniere, on 
passee, last year, or Van passe, last year, &c. This tense is 
often used in relating historical events, although the present 
is sometimes used in its stead. 

examples. 

Vallai # dimanche dernier a I went to the church last 

Peglise, sunday 

Je recus hier, la semaine pas- I received some news from our 

see, le mois dernier, des friends yesterday, last week, 

nouvelles de nos amis, last month 

Je la vis hier, I saw her yesterday 

Elle alia hier a l'opera, She went to the opera yes- 
terday 

lis ecrivirent la semaine pas- They wrote last week 

see, 

II plut toute le mois passe, It rained all last month 

L'annee passee ne Imfut pas Last year was not very favor- 

tres favorable, able for him 

Les Romains chasserent Tar- The Romans expelled Tar qmn 

quin de Rome, from Rome 

Cesar vint, vit, et conquit, Caesar came, saw, and con- 
quered 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

I saw the king last week. We went to the theatre last 
night. We heard great news yesterday. They wrote to him 

* Obs. The preterite of the verb etre, to be, is often used instead of tbe 
preterite of aller, to go ; as Jefus hier a l'opera, I was at the opera yes- 
terday, instead of J'allai hier a l'opera, I went to the opera yesterday. 



SYNTAX OF TENSES. 251 

a month ago. The Spaniards conquered America in the six- 
teenth century. Charles the Tenth, king of France, began 
to reign September l6th, 1824. We wrote to your sister ten 
days ago. Alexander attacked Darius., conquered him twice, 
and made his mother, wife, and daughters prisoners. 

Last night, hier au soir century, siecle 

theatre, comedie, f. to reign, a regner 

a month ago, il y a un mois ten days ago, il y a dix jours 

Spaniard, Espagnol him, le 

to conquer, conquerir to conquer, vaincre 



FUTURE TENSE. 

The simple future is used in French as in English, to de- 
note that an action, or event shall, or will, take place at some 
time that is not yet come, whether that time be specified or 
not. 

EXAMPLES. 

Je lui ecrirai cet apres-midi, I shall write to him this after- 
noon 

yirai demain h, la campagne, I shall go into the country 

to-morrow 

Nos corps ressusciteront au Our bodies will rise again on 
jour dernier, the last day 

Nous aurons la paix, We shall have peace 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1. The future is used in French {not the present as in English) after 
the words quand, lorsque, apres que, aussitdt que, de's que, comme, &c. ; 
as, II faut que l'homme travaille tandis qu'il est jeune afin qu'il vive quand 
il sera vieux, a young man must labor whilst he is young, in order that he 
may live w hen he is {will he) old. 

2. The future has the signification of the imperative, when it expresses 
a command, or duty; as, Vous aimerez Dieu de tout votre coeur, you 
should love {will love) God with all your heart. 

3. The future is frequently expressed by the present [ V. Obs. 2, p. 
247] ; as, / am going, &c. is expressed by Je vais, ou je irten 'vais, &c. 
Ex. Je vais, ou je m'en vais partir, I am going to set out: but the future 
is expressed by devoir when the event or precise time cannot be deter- 
mined ; as, Le roi doff partir pour Brighton vers le mois de Juin, the king 
is to set out for Brighton about the month of June. 



252 



SYNTAX OF TENSES. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

We shall write to you next week. You will see him in 
the city to-morrow, I am going to write to my uncle. I shall 
write this evening. He will carry your goods on board the 
packet to-morrow. We shall go to Paris next week. We 
shall have war. The king is to return from Brighton about 
the middle of August. 



To carry, porter 
goods, effets 
on board, & bord 
packet, paqitebot 



(the) war, la guerre 
to return, revenir 
middle, milieu 
August, Aout 



CONDITIONAL. 

The simple conditional denotes the possibility of an action 
or event taking place, under certain conditions, either at the 
present or some future time. This tense or mood is generally 
used before or after the imperfect preceded by si: but the 
infinitive or subjunctive follows vouloir, pouvoir, souhaiter, &c. 

EXAMPLES. 



II lirait s'il avait des livres, 

Si vous demandiez cette place, 
on vous la donnera.it, 

Nous nous epargnerions bien 
des regrets, si nous savions 
moderer nos passions, 

Voudriez-v ous me faire un 

plaisir 1 
Je voudrais, ou je souhaiter ais 

qu'il fit beau Lundi, 
Pourriez-vous me prdter cent 

livres sterlings ? 
Je voudrais aller avec vous, 



He would read if he had 
books 

If you ask for that place, 
they would give it to you 

We should spare ourselves 
many troubles, if we knew 
how to, or could moderate 
our passions 

Would you do me a kind- 
ness ? 

I wish it may be fine on M on- 
day 

Could you lend me a hundred 
pounds 1 

I want to go with you 



SYNTAX OF TENSES. 253 

EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

Wo should taste many pleasures, if we knew how to make 
a good use of our time. I would settle (would do) your 
business before long, if it only depended upon me. You 
would have a (the) fever, if you ate of that fruit. He would 
oblige you, if you were to speak to him. Would you have 
the goodness to lend me five guineas 1 Could you lend me 
your horse 1 Could you suppose your son capable of in- 
gratitude? 

To taste, gouter before long, avant pen 

pleasure, jouissance o'dy, uniquemcnt ; upon, de 

knew how to make, savions fever, Jievre 

faire to oblige, rendre service 

use, usage goodness, bonte 

business, affaire to lend me, de me prefer 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1. The conditional serves to express a wish ; as Je serais, ou faurais 
it': content d'obtenir votre suffrage, I should be, or should have been sat- 
isfied to obtain, or have obtained your approbation. 

2. The conditional is often used for the simple and compound present, 
as y aimer ais que Ton travaillat a former le coeur etl'esprit dela jeunesse, ce 
devrait etre le principal but de l'education. Pourriez-vovs croire votre fils 
capable d'ingratitude ? JJauriez-vom soup^onne d'un vice si deshonnorant. 
In the first and second sentences tire conditional is used for the simple 
present ; they signify, J'qime qu'on travaille, &c. Pouvez-vous croire votre 
fils. &c. ; and in the third for the compound present: Yavez-vous soupconne 
Sec. — \V. Gram, des Grammaires, p. 505.] 

3. The conditional is sometimes used, instead of the future, after the 
conjunctions que and jjourquoi ; as, E!!e a promis ^w'elle viendrait, she 
has promised to come. On m'a dit que votre frere viendrait a Londres 
i'annee prochaine, I have been told that your brother will come to London 
next year. Pourquoi violerait-\\ un des devoirs les plus saints ? why will 
(would he) violate one of the most sacred duties? 

22 



254 SYNTAX OF TENSES. 

ii. <®n tfjt <£ompotnrtr ®awt$. 



COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. 

The compound of the present, in French, generally corre- 
sponds to the perfect in English, and is used to express that 
an action, or event happened, and was perfectly finished in a 
time that has not entirely passed or is not determined; sueh 
as, in an age, a life-time, year, month, iveek, day, hour, &c. of 
which some part still remains. 

EXAMPLES. 

Je Vai vu ce matin I have seen him this morning 

Dieu a forme le ciel et la terre God has formed (or formed) 
de rien heaven and earth from no- 

thing 
II a appris la langue franchise He has learned the French 

language 
Vai vu votre frere aujourd'hui X have seen your brother to- 
day 
Avez-vous ete a la comedie ce Have you been to the play this 
soir '? Non, Monsieur ; mais evening? No, Sir; but I 

j'y ai ete une fois cette se- have been once this week 
maine 
Tai ecrit une lettre a votre I have written a letter to.your 
frere aujourd'hui brother to-day 



OBSERVATIONS. 

1. The compound of the present, in French, is often rendered by the im- 
perfect in English ; as, 

Quand avez-vous perdu votre mon- When did you lose your watch ? 

tre ? 

Ou V avez-vous vu, Where did you see him ? 

II est arrive ce mois-ci, He arrived (or has arrived) this 

month 

II y a trois jours que je lui en ai It is three days ago since 1 spoke to 

parle, him about it 

II a ite avec eux apves diner, He was with them in the afternoon 

Us sont arrives chez eux ce matin, They came home this morning 



SYNTAX OF TENSES, &C. 255 

Avez-Yom jamais voyage en France ? Did you ever travel in France ? Yes, 

Oui, j"y ai voyage, I have 

fFStes-vous pas alles a Rome? Did you not go to Rome? 

Je lui ai ecrit depuis que je vous ai I have written to him since I saw 

vu, you 

2. The English perfect or present of the passive, with the word just, is 
rendered in French by venir in an active sense, and by ne /aire que in a 
neuter sense ; as, 

Je mens de le voir passer, I have just seen him pass 

II ne fait que de sortir,. He is but just gone out 

Nous venons d'apprendre que votre We have just heard (learnt) that 
frere viendra, your brother will come 

3. It is not a fault to use indifferently, in French, either the compound 
present, or preterite, particularly in representing historical events ; as, 
Troie a ete, ou fut detruite par les Troy icas destroyed by the Greeks 

Grecs, 
■Vai ecrit, ou ySerims hter a Fon- I wrote to Fontainebleau yesterday 
tainebleau, [ V. Gram, des Grammaires, p. 

501.] 

We may also equally say [v. Sicard, p. 218 j» and Chambaud, p. 278.] 
Ciceron etait un grand orateur, ) 

Ciceron a ete un grand orateur, > 

Ciceron/W un grand orateur, ) 

4. The simple present is used in French, and the perfect, or compound 
of the present in English, to express a continued state, or action; as, 
Combien y a-t-il que vous etes ici? How long have you been (are you) 

here ? 
II y a trois ans que je suis ici, I have been (am) here three years 

5. This tense is sometimes used instead of the future ; as, 
,4rez-vous bientot fait ? — Attendez, Shall you soon have done ? — Wait, 

yaifini dans un moment, I shall have finished or done in a 

moment 



PRACTICE ON THE RULE AND OBSERVATIONS. 

I have had a {the) fever this year, this spring, this month, 
this week, to-daj'. We have seen the king this morning. 
Where did you see him ? I have heard great news to-day, 
The emperor Alexander died (ts dead)$ this year. Our age 
has produced many great men. Have you been to Paris this 
year? It is three years since I went (am gone). We have 
but just begun. She is just dead. Your mother is just gone 
out. j\Joljere has been dead (is dead) more than a hundred 
years. 



256 SYN'lAX OF TENSES, &X. 

Morning, matin age, siecle 

heard, appris to produce, produire 

news, nouvelles since, que; but, ne — que 

emperor, empereur dead, expirer 



COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. 

The compound of the imperfect, in French, corresponds to 
the pluperfect of the active voice, or imperfect of the passive, 
in English ; it represents an event not only as passed, but as 
passed before something else occured which is also passed ; 
as, 
Vavais d'ejeune quand vous I had breakfasted when you 

vintcs me demander came to ask for me 

II etait sorti quand nous al- He was gone out when we 

lames ehez lui went to his house 

II avait fni son theme que He had finished his exercise 

vous n'avicz pas encore and you had not yet begun 

commence le v8tre yours 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

I had written my letter when he came in. He had not had 
his dinner when you came to ask for him. . Were they gone 
out when you went to their house ? We had dined when she 
arrived. Had you supped when my brother came in ? How 
long had you been in Paris when your sister arrived ? 



OBSERVATIONS. 

J. This tense is used when (he first clause of the sentence is the princi~ 
pal object the speaker has in view, hut the compound of the preterite is 
used when the principal object of the speaker is in the following clause; 
as, y avals dejeune quand vous vintes me demander, in this sentence the 
attention is directed to the compound of the imperfect, and not to the 
time of your coming. But when the compound of the preterite is used 
instead of the compound of the imperfect the attention is then directed to. 
the preterite in the second clause ; Ex. Quand 'feus reconnu mon erreur» 
yefus honteux des mauvais procedes que j'avais ens a son egard, when I 
had acknowledged my error, I was ashamed of the bad proceedings which 
I had made in that respect ; here my intention is to say. Que je fus hoa- 



SYNTAX OF TENSES, &C 257 

teux, fee. but only Apres que j'e-us reconnu mon erreur. — \V. Gram, des 
Grammaites, p. 501.] 

2. The English use the pluperfect, and the French the simple imper- 
fect, to express that actions, or events have continued ; as, Combien y 
avait-'\\ que vous etiez ici ? how long had you been here ? II y a quatre ans 
que je le coimai^, 1 have known, or I have been acquainted with him four 
years. 



COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITE. 

This tense, like simple preterite, denotes that an event hap- 
pened in a time of which no part remains ; but it also most 
commoniy expresses that an action was completed before an- 
other which is likewise past. This tense is always accompa- 
nied by conjunctions, or adverbs of time ; as, apres que, aus- 
ditot que, cl'abord que, dhs que, lorsque, qua/id, liier, &c. 

EXAMPLES. 

Apres que feusfini ma lettre, After I had finished my letter, 

elle me jpria&e lui en tenre she desired me to write one 

une for her 

Des que le parlement fat as- As soon as the parliament was 

semble, l'emeute cessa assembled the riot ceased 

J'cus /line hier dans un in- I dined (had dined) yesterday 

stant in an instant 

L'affaireJ^ hient&tfaife The business was soon done 

Obs. "When any part of the time remains in which we still are, then the 
compound of the present, which sometimes takes two participles, or the 
simple imperfect is used ; a:?, Elle est venue me voir aujourd'hui, she is 
come to see me to-day. Quand fat eu fini ma lettre, elle ui'a prie de lui 
en ecrire une, when I had finished my letter, she desired (had desired) 
me to wiite one for her. i'etais a ecrre quand elle est entree, I was 
-writing when she came in — [ V. Chambaud, p. 279.] We may say, Des 
que yai eu dineje suis parti, when I had dined I set out : but it is better 
to avoid usiug this tense, which we may do by substituting apres, and the 
preterite of the infinitive ; Ex. Apres avoir dine je suis parti, after I had 
dined I set out. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

When they had done playing they began to sing. We had 
written to him the week before. When I had read your let- 

22* 



258 SYNTAX OF TENSES, &C. 

ter, I gave it to my sister. As soon as I had breakfasted yes- 
terday it struck twelve. I bad dine breakfast, or I had break- 
fasted this morning at eight o'clock. When I had dined I 
set out, or after I had dined I set out. As soon as we had 
supped we set off for Naples. 

Done (finished), acheve it struck twelve, midi sonna 

began, sc mirent for, pour 



COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE. 

The compound of the future, in French corresponds to 
what is called the sexond future, in English, but it is some- 
times Englished by the perfect. This tense denotes that an 
action or event will have occurred, and be past, when or be- 
fore another future action or event happens, or will happen : 
but when a question is asked, the subsequent event is not al- 
ways mentioned. 

EXAMPLES. 

II sera parti de chez nous, He will be. gone from our 
quand vous reviendrez house when you come bock 

(will come back) or return 
Des que j'aurai fini mes As soon as I have done my 

affaires je sortirai business I shall go out 

Quand yaurai soupe il entrera When I have supped (shall 

have supped) he will come in 

Quand aurez-vous fini votre When will you have finished 

theme? 'A trois heures your exercise? At three 

o'clock 

Obs. This sentence expresses that an action will be accomplished before 
the hour of three takes place. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



When I have had (shall have had) the honor of seeing you 
at our house, I shall go to see you. When you have done 
(shall have done) your business, you will come to see me. 
We shall be gone when you return (will return). I shall 
play when I have written (shall have written). You will be 



SYNTAX OF TENSES, &C. 259 

paid when you have finished your work. The two houses will 
have finished their business when the king comes (will come) 
to prorogue them. 

Honor, honneur house, chambre 

to play 9 jfouer them, les 

work, ouurage, m. to prorogue, proroger 



COMPOUND OF THE CONDITIONAL. 

The co?npound of the conditional denotes that something 
would have been done in a passed time, if the condition on 
which it depended had been fulfilled, or had taken place. 

EXAMPLES. 

y 

Le ministre lui aurait Sonne The minister would have given 

cette place s'il V avait de-, him that place if he had 

mandee asked for it 

II serait alii a la campagne, He would have (wouldbe) gone 

si son tems le lui avait per- into the country, had his 

mis time permitted him 

Je vous aurais ecrit il y a un I should have written to you a 

mois, si j'avais * su votrc month ago, if I had known 

adresse your address, or direction 

Je vous aurais ecrit il y a une I should have written to you a 

semaine, si j'ewsse * vu vo- week ago, if I had seen 

tre frere auparavant your brother before 

Obs. 1. * Avait marks more precisely the time at which a thing would 
have been undertaken, and *eu$se, at which it would have been finished. 

2. The conditional is used with si when doubt or uncertainty is implied ; 
as, Demandez lui s'il serait venu avec nous, suppose qu'il n'eut pas eu 
d'affaiie. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



We should have been to see you, if the weather had been* 
fine. I would have settled (done) your business, if you had 
mentioned it to me (if you had spoken of it to me). My bro- 
ther would have written to you a week ago, if he had known 



260 SYNTAX OF MOODS, &C. 

where you lived. I should have gone to Fiance last year, 
had my time permitted me. 

Been, ete, ou fait* would have, aurais, ou cusse 

fine weather, beau terns had, aviez, ou eussiez 



Sjjnt&p of JWootrg un% Emntu. 



Correspondence of the tenses in the indicative mood, 

SIMPLE TENSES. 

The present corresponds 

To the pres. \ J T S < J uan ^ vous ^ stz 

. com p. pres. J ( quand vous avez lu» 

The imperfect corresponds 

quand vous -ecriviez. 
quand vous ecrivites. 
quand vous avez ecrit. 
quand vous aviez ecrit* 

The preterite corresponds 

To the pret. Quand vous le voulutes, je vins. 

The future corresponds 

To the pres. \ 'e /"si vous le desirez. 

.... comp. pres. f '■£ J si vous avezfini votre ouvrage, 

.... simp. fut. ( ^ \ quand vous voudrez. 

.... comp. fut. J g v.°i uan d vous Vaurez dit. 

The conditional corresponds 

Quand un coupable echapperait au 



To the imp. 




\ .^ 


. . . . pret. 
. . . . comp. 


pres. 




. . . . comp. 


imp. 


/ ^ 



To the simple cond. { chatiment, il n : echapperait pas aux 
remords. 

, Je vous aiderais volontiers de ma 
simp. imp. < i • -v, • i i 

r ' ( bourse, si j etais plus heureux. 

Je vous croirais, si. vous n'' aviez pas 
comp. imp. ^ eu la malheureuse habitude de 
mentir. 



SYNTAX OP MOODS, &C. 26l 



COMPOUND TENSES. 

The compound present corresponds 



To the comp. pres. \ 4« C aussit6t qu 
. . . . simp. imp. > •§ ( pendant qi 
.... comp. pres. ) ^ ( apres que 



e vous Yavez voulu. 
que vous ecriviez. 
vous avez eu dine. 



The compound of the imperfect corresponds 

To the simp. imp. \ s / quand vous entriez. 

.... simp. pret. / ^ \ quand vous entrdtes. 

.... comp. pres. > 3 < quand vous etes entre. 

.... comp. pret. \ J 3 / quand vousywfes entre. 

. . . . comp. imp. ' *"* ^ que vous n'etiez pas encore entre. 

The compound of the preterite corresponds 

Quand yeus lu, vous entrdtes. 
To the simp. pret. 



{iguana yeus lu, vous entrates. 
Apres que j'ews In, on me demanda. 
Quand j'eusjini) j'y a//ai. 



The compound of the future corresponds 

rp i • f + 5 Q lj and vous aurezfni, je partirai. 

JL O I 11 6 S 1 111 I J • IUl»\f« . y~ . -1 

^ j aurai Jim, quand vous arnverez. 

The compound of the conditional corresponds 

Les Romains auraient conserve 
To the comp. imp. ^ l'empire dela terre^s'lls avaient 

conserve leurs anciennes vertus. 

. , ( J'aurais ete content, si 'feusse mi 
.... comp. pret. sub. { .. ' ~ J ^ 

1 r ( vous etre utile. 

£ Quand Alexandre aurait conquis 
.... comp. cond. / tout la lerre, il n'aiwait pas 

( bte satisfait. 

[V. Grammaire des Grammaires, p. 522.] 



262 SYNTAX OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



The subjunctive or subjoined mood is used when any doubt 
or uncertainty is implied ; it has no determinate sense unless 
preceded or followed by an affirmative or negative expression 
or phrase on which it depends. 

PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 

This tense, though under the same form in French, repre- 
sents ei.her a present or future time, depending upon the sense 
in which it is used. It is sometimes Englished by the present 
subjunctive, or the present and future indicative, and also by 
the infinitive and imperfect subjunctive when they denote 
futurity. 

EXAMPLES. 

Comportez-vous de telle sorte Conduct yourself in such a 
que vous meritiez l'estime manner, or so that you may 

des gens de bien, merit the esteem of good 

men 

Je souhaite qu'il vienne, I wish he would come 

Votre cousin est tres-modeste, Your cousin is very modest, 
quoiqu'il soit tres-instruit, although he is (may be) 

very well informed 

Quoique vous soyez riche, Although you may he rich, 
vous n'etes pas savant, you are not learned 

Je desire que vous allicz le I wish you to go, or would go 
voir, to see him 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

Send me a book, that I may read it. I do not believe he 
is come (that he may be come). I do not think he will come 
(that he may come). I wish you may succeed in your under- 
taking. I doubt whether he will do it (he may do it). I won- 
der that you dare to do it (should dare to do il). He desires 
or wishes you to carry (would carry) this note expeditiously. 
Do you believe that she will do it ? 



SYNTAX OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



203 



That, afin que 
to believe, croire 
to think, croire 
to succeed, reussir 
undertaking, entreprise 



I wonder, je suis surpris 
to dare, oser 
to carry, porter 
expeditiously, promptement 
note, billet, rn. 



PRETERITE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

The preterite of the subjunctive denotes the same time as 
the imperfect of the indicative, with the difference that this 
tense expresses doubt, and sometimes denotes futurity. 



EXAMPLES. 



II refusait la place qui lui 
eta.it offerte, quoiqu'il Jut 
bien en etat de la remplir, 

Quoiqu'il la maltraitdt sou- 
vent, elle etait toujours 
gaie, 

Je ne croyais pas que vous 
vinssiez avant le mois pro- 
chain, 

Quelque vieille qu'elle fut 9 
elle etait belle, 



He refused the situation which 
was offered to him. although 
he was (might be) well 
qualified to fill it 

Although he often ill-treated 
(might often ill-treat) her, 
she was always merry 

I did not think you would come 
before the next month 

However old she might be, 
she was handsome 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

Did yon suspect (that) he would not do it. Alexander the 
Great ordered, that all his subjects should worship him like a 
God. I should wish you to come (that you should come) next 
week only. He would wish you had taken (that you should 
take) more becoming measures. I should have feared that 
you would have struck him. 



To suspect, soupconncr 
to order, ordonner 
subjects, sujets 
to worship, adorer 



like a, comme un 
becoming, convenables 
should have feared, aurais 
craint ; to strike, f rapper 



264 



SYNTAX OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. 

This tense is generally preceded by the present, or future 
of the indicative, or imperative, followed by a conjunction, 
and denotes that an action was accomplished, or will be ac- 
complished before, or at a time specified by the preceding 
verb. 



EXAMPLES. 



Je doute que vons n'aycz fait 

des plaintes de moi, 
3' 'ignore, qu'il soit vc?iu y 

Je suis enchante que vous 
aycz fait la connaissance 
d'un homme aussi estima- 
ble, 

Je ne cachtterai pas cette 
lettre que vous ne Vayez 
iue, 



I doubt ( t hi ?ik) you have made 
complaints of me 

I do not know that he is 
(may be) come 

I am delighted that you have 
become (should have become) 
acquainted with so worthy 
a man 

I shall not seal that letter be- 
fore you have read h 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

I fear you have complained (that you may have made com- 
plaints) of me. They are delighted that you have (should 
have) become acquainted with them. Although he may have 
read many books, be knows nothing. I believe 1 shall be 
ready before they come (may be come). Conduct yourselves 
in such a manner, that you may be loved and esteemed by 
your masters. 

To fear, craindre in such a manner, de maniere 

to complain, plaindre to esteem, cs timer ; by, de 

to conduct, comport er 



COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITE. 

This tense, like the corresponding tense of the indicative, 
denotes that an action was completed before another event 
happened, which is also passed ; but it has sometimes a fu- 
ture signification. 



SYNTAX OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



265 



EXAMPLES. 



Je doutais que vous rfeussiez 

fait des plaintes de moi 
lis n'ont pas cru que je fusse 
arrive avant eux 

Elle voudrait que vous eussiez 
Jini quand elle reviendra 



I doubted you would have 
made complaints of me 

They did not think that I 
should have arrived before 
them 

She zvould wish you to have 
done (that you would have 
done) when she returns 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

I did not believe that you would have done so soon. We 
did not know that you had (might have) embraced that profes- 
sion. They did not believe that he had learnt (could have 
learnt) geography. You did not believe that I should have 
arrived before you. I should wish them to have done when 
I return. 



So soon, sitot 

to embrace, embrasser 



learnt, appris 
geography, geograph 



Correspondence of the tenses of the subjunctive with those of 
the indicative and imperative. 

Rule T. 

When the verb, in the principal part of the sentence, is in 
the present, future, or imperative, then the present subjunctive 
is used in the subordinate part of the sentence ; but the sim- 
ple or compound of the preterite is employed after the present, 
when a conditional phrase is used. 



EXAMPLES. 



Je crains qu'il ne vienne 
Je souhaite qu'il vienne 
Je crains qu'il vienne 
Son pere defend qu'il y aille 

23 



I fear lest he should come 
I wish he would come 
I am afraid he will come 
His father forbids his going 
there 



266 



SYNTAX OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



II nie qu'il Vait pris 

Je suis surpris que vous osiez 

le fa ire 
Je n'm rien vu qu'on puisse 

blamer dans sa conduite 
Je doute qu'il lefasse 

Je veux qu'il ecrive 

Vicris qu'on m'envoze de l'ar- 

gent 
Je craindrai qu'il vienne 

Je ne douterai pas qu'il le 

Zh'tes-lui qu'il revienne 

II ecrira qu'on lui envoie de 

Pargent 
Je efowfe que l'experience 

nous \esfit eviter 

Je ne pense pas que cette af- 
faire eut reussi sans votre 
protection 



He denies having taken it 

I wonder that you dare to do 

it 
I have seen nothing reprehen- 
sible in his conduct 
I doubt, or question whether he 

will do it 
I will have him write 
I am writing to them to send 

me some money 
I shall be afraid that he will 

come 
I shall not doubt that he will 

do it 
Te// him to come bach (that he 

should come back) 
He will write to them to send 

him some money 
I doubt whether experience 

could have made us avoid 

them 
I do not think that (that) 

business couldhavc succeeded 

without your protection 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



They are afraid lest he should come. He will be afraid 
lest we should come. He must learn fit is necessary that he 
should learn) the English language. Jt will be necessary for 
him to learn ( that he should learn) French. I fear that you 
have (may have) complained (made seme complaints) of me. 
Tell him to go out (that he should go out). 1 am rejoiced at 
your having gained (that you should have gained) your law- 
suit. 



To fear, craindre 
lest he, qu'il ne 
to be afraid, craindre 
lest we, que nous ne 
to be necessary , falloir 



complaint, plainte, f. 
to tell, dire 
to go out, sortir 
to rejoice, ravir 
law-suit, proces, m. 



SYNTAX OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 267 

Rule IT. 

When the verb, in the principal part of the sentence, is in 
the simple or compound of the imperfect, preterite, or condi- 
tional, then the preterite is used in the subordinate part of the 
sentence. 

Obs. 1. With the compound of the present, we may put the second 
verb in the simple present, if it expresses an action which is doing, or may 
be doing at any time ; but the compound of the present is used, if we wish 
to express a past action ; as, Dieu a entoure les yeux de tuniques fort 
minces, transparentes au-devaut, afin que Ton puisse voir a travers. II a 
fallu qu'il ait solicite ses juges, et qu'il se soit informe de plusieurs af- 
faires. 

2. The simple or compound of the preterite is used after the present, 
when there is a third verb in the imperfect ; as, Croyez-vous qu'ils me re- 

fusasse7it, si je les en priais ? Do you think they would refuse me, if I 
requested it of them ? 

3. The subjunctive is used at the beginning of a sentence to express 
desire, surprise , Sac. Ex. Puissions -nous etre heureux! way we be 
happy .' 

EXAMPLES. 

Je craignais qu'il vint ■ I was afraid that he would 

come 
Je doutais qirWla. fit I was in doubt whether he 

would do it 
Vecrivais qu'on m'envoyat de I -wrote to them to send me 

l'argent some money 

II a nie (il nia) qu'il Veiit He denied having taken it 

pris 
Vetais surpris qu'il osdt le I wondered that he dared to 

faire do it 

II faudrait que je \efsse I should be obliged to do it 

Je voudrais qu'il ecrivit I would have him write 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

I was afraid lest he should come. I have been fearing 
lest he should come. I should be afraid lest he should come. 
He was obliged to learn (it -was necessary that he should 
learn) French. He had been obliged to learn French. I 
was afraid that you had (should have made complaints) com- 



268 



SYNTAX OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



plained of me. I told him to go out (that he should go out). 
I should have told him to go out (that he should go out). I 
was rejoiced at your having (that you should, have) gained 
the law-suit. He would have been rejoiced at your having 
gained the law-suit 



Correspondence of the tenses in the subjunctive mood. 
SIMPLE TENSES. 



The present of the subjunctive corresponds to, and follows 
The pres. iud. Je veux ~) 



. simp. fut. ind. 
. comp. fut. ind. 



Je voudrai 

Quand 'faurai voulu 



que tu viennes, 



The preterite of the subjunctive corresponds to, and follows 



The imp. ind. 

. comp. imp. ind. 
. simp. pret. ind: 
. comp pret. ind. 
. simp. cond. ind* 
. comp. cond. ind. 



Je voulais 
J'avais voulu 
Je voulus 
Veils voulu 
Je voudrais 
Vaurais voulu 



7 

► qi.e tu vinsses 



The compound of the present subjunctive corresponds to, 
and follows 

The simp. pres. ind. Je veux 
. . comp. pres. ind. J 7 ai voulu 
. . simp. fut. ind. Je voudrai 
. . comp. fut. ind. Quand j'aurai voulu 

The compound of the preterite subjunctive corresponds to 3 
and follows 



que tu aies ecmt* 



The comp. pres. ind. 
simp. imp. ind. 
comp. imp* ind. 
simp. pret. ind. 
comp. pret. ind. 
simp. cond. ind. 
comp. cond, ind. 



J'ai voulu 
Je voulais 
JJavqis vomlu 
Je voulus 
Quand j'ews voulu 
Je voudrais 
Vaurais voulu 



}■ que tu. eusses icrit. 



SYNTAX OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 269 



OBSERVATIONS ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

1. The subjunctive mood is used after que, in the second member of a 
sentence, or when que is preceded by verbs of fearing, doubting, asking, 

forbidding, wishing, &c. ; as, Si vous m'aimez et que vous vouliez me le 
persuader, &c. if you love me and wish to persuade me of it, &c. Je crains 
que mon pere ne'soit mort, I fear my father is dead. Je doute ^it'il le 
fasse, I doubt he will do it. 

2. When preceded by the impersonate, ilfaut, I must, we must, &c. ; il 
importe, it concerns, or matters ; il convient, it becomes ; il est juste, it is 
just; il est injuste, it is unjust ; il est important, it concerns ; as, Ilfaut 
que yaille en ville, I i7imt go to town. 11 emporte a vos associes que vous 
partiez sur l'heure, it concerns your partners that you should set offimme- 
diately. II est juste qu'il la voie, it is just that he should see her. 

. 3 After the relatives qui, que, dont, oh, or any relative pronoun pre- 
ceded by a superlative, a negative, or by seal, unique, premier, dernier, 
personne, and conjunctions expressing doubt, &c. ; as, Vous parlez du 
plus grand roi qui ait jamais existe, you speak of the greatest king that has 
ever existed. C'est la plus belle femme que je connaisse, she is the finest 
woman (that) I know. C'est le seul homrae sur qui nous puissions comp- 
ter, he is the only man upon whom we can rely. 

4. Many verbs ; such as, savoir, to know ; croire, to believe, &.c. and 
impersonals that denote evidence, certainty, or probability ; as, II est vrai, 
it is true ; il est clair, it is clear ; il y a, there is, &c. take the subjunctive 
after them when used negatively, interrogatively, or conditionally ; but 
they take the indicative when used affirmatively, or when the event is pos- 
itively known to the speaker, even though used negatively or interroga- 
tively ; as, Croyez -\o\xs qu'il ait raison i Do you th in k he is right ? II 
n'est pas certain que j'cu'e raison. it is not certain that I am right. Je 
crois qu'il a raison, I believe he is right. Ne savez-vous pas qu'il est venu ? 
do you not know that he is come ? II n'y a pas un horame qui soit plus es- 
time que lui, there it no man ivho is (may be) more esteemed than he : 
but the indicative is used when the negative is taken away ; as, II y a un 
homme qui est plus estime que lui, there is a man taho is more esteemed 
than he. 

5. 77 semble, with que and a noun or pronoun expressing the object, 
takes the indicative after it ; but when there is no object, the subjunctive 
is used ; as, II me semble que vous avez peur, it seems to me that you are 
afraid. II semble que vous ayez peur, it seems that you are afraid. 

6. Some conjunctions take, the indicative or subjunctive after them, de- 
pending upon the sense of the sentence ; if determinate and positive, they 
take the indicative ; if not positive, the subjunctive. For those conjunc- 
tions which take the indicative or subjunctive, or both, vide pages 162, 164, 
and 166. 

Examples to illustrate the preceding Observations, fyc. 

1. S'il vient et qu'il me demand e, If he come and ask for me 

Pourvu quil vienne et qu'il soit en Provided he come and be in good 
sanne sante, health 

23* 



270 



SYNTAX OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOT). 



Dites qiron vienne de bonne heure, 
II ordonne qu'on les punisse, 
A Dieu ne plaise qu'on/asse, 
Je n'ai pas voulu qu'il vint, 
II ne permettait pas qu'ils le jetas- 
sent, 

2. II faut qu'il vienne, 
II irnporfe qu'elle y soit, 

II est juste qu'il le sache, 

II n'y a pas moyen qu'elle echappe, 

II est surprenant qu'elle ait riussi, 

II est injuste qu'il soit puni, 

C'est une chose facheuse qu'il soit 

arrive si tard, 
II est indifferent qu'il soit en Angle- 

terre ou en Irlande, 

3. Quoi-que je fasse, 
Quelques amis que yaie 7 

C'est la meilleure raison que vous 

puissiez lui donner, 
C'est le meilleur ouvrage qui soit, 
Y en a-t-il qui le sache ? 
Je cherche uri domestique a qui je 

puisse me tier. 
Donnez-moi des raisons quipuissent 

me convaincre, 
Je veuxun cheval qui aille bien, 
Je n'ai jamais vu d'homme qui exit 

plus d'esprit que lui, * 
Avez-rous un livie que je n'm'e lu ? 

Afin que vous puissiez reussir, 
Bien qu'il me Yait dit, 
Crainte qu'il ne soit fache, 
A moins que vous n'olliez, 
Quoiqu'il soi pauvre, 
Quoiqu'ilm'offrit tout l'ordumonde, 

4. Je sais qu'il est venu, 

Je ne savais pas qu'il fat venu, 
^Savez-vous qu'il soit venu ? 
Je crois qu'il viendra, 



Bid them come in time 
He orders them to be punished 
God forbid that it should be done 
I did not wish him to come 
He would not permit them to throw 
it 

He must come 

It is of importance that she should 
be there 

It is right for him to know it 

There is no way for her to escape 

It is surprising that she has suc- 
ceeded 

It is unjust that he should be pun- 
ished 

It is a grevious thing that he is come 
so late 

It is indifferent whether he be in 
England or Ireland 

Whatever I do (may do) 

Whatever friends I have (may have) 

It is the best reason you can give 
him 

It is the best work extant 

Is there any one that knoics it ? 

I look for a servant, whom I can trust 

Give me reasons that can convince 

me 
I want a horse that will go well 
I never saw a man that had more 

sense than he 
Have you a book that I have not 

read ? 
In order that you may succeed 
Although he told, me of it 
Lest he should be angry 
Unless you go 
Poor as he is 
Were he to offer me all the gold in 

the world 
I know that he is come 
I did not know that he was come 
Do you know* whether he is come r 
I believe he will come 






* Do you know that he is come ? may be rendered by *savez-vous qu'il 
est venu ? the question here does not imply any doubt on the part of the 
speaker, but is rather intended to give information to the hearer. There- 
fore we may, in many instances, use either the indicative or subjunctive, 
depending upon the idea we wish to convey. 



SYNTAX OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



271 



Ne croyez-vous pas qu'il viendra ? 

Croyez-vous qu'il vienne ? 
Je ne crois pas qu'il vienne, 
J'espere qu'il le /era, 
N'esperez-vous pas qu'il \efera ? 
Espeiez-vous qu*il \efasse ? 
Je n'espere pas qu'il \efasse, 
II est certain qu'il est mort, 
N'est-il pas certain qu'il est mort ? 
Est-H certain qu'il soit mort ? 
II n'est pas certain qu'il soit mort, 
S'il est certain qu'il soit mort, 
Agissez de maniere que, ou en sorte 

que, vous reussissiez, 
II agit de maniere qu'il reussit, 
5. II lui semble que vous avez tort, 
11 semble que vous ayez tort, 
II me semble que vous n'etes pas si 

age, 
II ne semble pas que vous soyez si 

age, 



Do you not believe that he will 

come ? 
Do you believe that he ivill come ? 
I do not believe that he will come 
I hope he will do it 
Do you not hope that he will do it? 
Do you hope that he will do it ? 
I do not hope that he will do it 
It is certain that he is dead 
Is it not certain that he is dead ? 
Is it certain that he is dead ? 
It is not certain that he is dead 
If it be certain that he is dead 
Act so as to succeed (so that you 

may succeed) 
He acts so as to succeed 
It seems to him that you are wrong 
It seems that you are wrong 
It seems to me that you are not so 

aged 
It does not seem that you are so 

a°red 



PRACTICE OX THE ABOVE OBSERVATIONS. 



Practice on Observation 1. 



Perhaps he loves her, but is unwilling {that liemay not wish) 
to own it. We easily commit faults when we are young, and 
take {and that ice may take) coun-el only of ourselves. I 
doubt whether he will come. I wish they {one) would make 
peace.- He ordered the bad books to be burnt (that one 
should burn the bad%ooks). I could wish that you lived near 
rnc. I will have him (/ will that he should) obey me. I am 
sorry they have [one may have) deceived you. I fear that he 
is dead. I bid him learn {that he should learn) his lesson. 



To owu, avoucr 

easily, bien 

to commit j faire 

to wish, souhaiter 



to order, ordonner 
to wish, voulojr 
to live, demeurer 
to deceive, tromper 
to bid, dire 



Practice on Observation 2. 

He who speaks, must (it is necessary that one who speaks 
should) accomodate himself to the understanding of him who 



272 SYNTAX OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

listens. It becomes you to speak to her. It is necessary for 
him to go to Paris, it is sufficient for him to have {that he 
should have) neglected nothing. It is impossible for him to 
recover. 

To accommodate one's self to to be sufficient, suffire 
the understanding, se met- to recover, en revenir 
ire a la portee 

Practice on Observation 3. 

The best guard that a king can have, is the heart of his 
subjects. However learned he may be, he is not prudent. 
He is the most learned man that I know. He is the only one 
on whom I can rely. Have you any book that 1 have not 
read ? Unless you come with me, he will not go. Though 
he is idle, he has some good qualities. Send me your book, 
that I may read it. I shall be ready before they are come 
(may be come). Retire, lest he should use you ill. Though 
he is very poor, yet he is happy. 

Guard, cortege, f. to use ill, maltraiter 

only one, seul that, afin que 

Practice on Observation 4. 

The Indicative. The Subjunctive. 

It is certain that he will go. Is it certain that he will go? 

Is it not certain that he It is not certain that he will 

will go ? It is true that he go. If it be certain that he 

knew (has known) him. Is will go. Is it true that he 

it not true that he knew him knew hiin 1 If it is true 

(has known him) 1 I know that he knew him. I do 

that he is come. Do you not know that he is come, 

not know that he is come 1 Do you believe that he has 

I believe that he has done done it 1 1 do not believe 

*h. Do you not believe that he has done it. Is it 

that he has done it ? It is probable that he will come ? 

probable that he will come. It does not appear that he 

It appears that he is right. is right. Is it evident that 

It is evident that he is he is wrong ? Do not tell 

wrong. Tell him that I him that I am at home, 

will come. It is said that Tell him that I will come 






SYNTAX OF MOODS AND TENSES. 



273 



the king of Spain is ar- 
rived. It seems to me 
that he is (has) right. It 
seems to me that you are 
sorry. Do you think that 
an honest man is not more 
estimable than a rogue ? If 
you are persuaded that he 
is an honest man, and {that 
he) wishes for your welfare, 
follow his counsels. Do 
you think that he would go 
on his journey ? 

Rogue, fripon 
to wish for, vonloir 
welfare, bien 

to go on one's journey, oiler 
voyager 



{may corned). It is not said 
whether the king of Spain 
is arrived. It seems that 
he is right. It does not 
seem that she is sick. Do 
you think that one can be- 
come learned without stu- 
dying methodically ? I do 
not think there can be 
(«wy) true friendship be- 
tween persons who are not 
virtuous ? 

methodically, avec methode 
he, y avoir 
friendship, amitii 
between, entre 






Rule. 



When may and might, can and could, will and woirfd, shall 
and should, must and ought, are used as principal verbs, and 
not as auxiliaries, they are rendered, in French, by pouvoir, 
savoir, etre capable, vouloir, devoir, or falloir. 

Obs. Would have, could have, should have, or might have, are ren- 
dered, in French, by some tense of avoir, and the participles voulu, pu, 
ox du. The compound present is often rendered by vouloir, pouvoir, or 
devoir, and the infinitive avoir followed by a participle. 

EXAMPLES. 



P0LTV0IK. MAY. MIGHT. 

Je puis y aller, ou rester chez I may go there, or stay at 
moi home 



274 



SYNTAX OF MOODS AND TENSES. 



Vous pouvez vous promener 

dans le jardin, mais non 

dans lebois 
En montant sur un arbre 

aussi haut, ils auraient pu 

se tuer 
Vous pourriez avoir ete trora- 

pes 

POUVOIR. SAVOIR. ETRE CAPABLE DE, 

Pouvez-vous me preter votre 

canif ? Non, je ne puis pas 
Vous savcz lire aussi bien que 

lui 
II est capable de parler toute 

une journee sans s'arreter 

une minute 
Je pourrais courir aussi vite 

que vous 
Je n'ai pas pu dormir 
Je ne pus jamais lui faire 

goiter vos raisons 
Je jjus le faire autrefois 
Pourrie^vQus venir domain 1 
Je pourrais aller, si je voulais 



Can you lend me you 

knife ? No, I cannot 

You can 



This verb is used to express a 
nation. It is also Englished by 
have, &c. 

Je veux qu'il ecrive 
Voulez-vous venir avec moi 
Elle veut partir demain 

II le fera quand il voudra 

Voulez-vous que je vous de- 
couvre la cause de tous ces 
desordres ? 

Je voudrais que vous eussiez 
entendu ce qu'il a dit 

Je voudrais qu'il ecrivit 

Vaurais voulu qu'il ecrivit 



You may walk in the garden, 
but not in the wood 

By climbing so high a tree, 
they might have killed 
themselves 

You might have been deceived 

CAN. COULD. 

pen- 
knife ? No, I cannot 

read as well as he 

He can speak (is capable of 
speaking) a whole day, 
without stopping a minute 

I could run as fast as you 

I could not sleep 

I could never make him relish 

your argument 
I could do it formerly 
Could you come to-morrow ? 
I could or might go, if I would 

WILL. WOULD. SHALL, 

desire, will, wish, or an incli-* 
will have % shall, intend, would 



I will have him write 

Will you go (come) with me 

She wishes, intends, or has a 
desire to set out to-morrow 

He will do it when he pleases, 
likes, or has a mind to do it 

Shall I lay before you tho 
cause of all these disor- 
ders? 

I wish you had heard what he 
said 

I would have him write 

I would have had him write 



SYNTAX OF MOODS AND TENSES. 



275 



J'aurais voulu ecrire h votre 

frere 
On vous donnera tout ce que 

vous voudrez 
Malgre votre obstination, je 

veux que vous alliez a l'e- 

cole 

DEVOIR. 

Je dois-, ou je devrais aimer 

mes parens 
Tai du vous representer Paf- 

faire 
Vous deviez vous lever ce 

matin de bonne heure 
Vous auriez du vous lever ce 

matin plus de bonne heure 
Vous auriez du lui ecrire au- 

paravant 

FAIRE. AVOIR. 

Faites-mo'i le plaisir de venir 

chez nous 
J'ai fait mon devoir 
llfaisait ou fit son devoir 
Jlvez-vous fait cela ? 



I wanted, or wished to write to 

your brother 
They will give you all that you 

iv ant, or wish for 
You shall go to school in 

spite of your obstinacy 

should, used for ought. 
I should love, or ought to love 

my relations 
I should have represented the 

case to you 
You should rise early this 

morning 
You should have got up ear- 
lier this morning 
You should have written, or 

ought to have written to 

him before 

DO. DID. DONE. 

Do me the pleasure of com- 
ing to our house 
I have done my duty 
He did his duty 
Did vou do that 1 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

You may go out if you wish or like. May I go out this 
afternoon 1 Can you lend me a guinea? She can write a 
whole day without stopping. I might have lost a great deal 
of time. You can write your letter before dinner. I could 
not go this week. You cannot go out to-day. You shall go 
home notwithstanding your obstinacy. I will not have that 
dirty book. I would have done my exercise before now 
(this time). I could have done that this morning. I wanted, 
or wished you to write to him. He wanted us to write to 
you. You should have walked early this morning. You 
should love your father and mother. You should have writ- 
ten to me since you knew my address. I did that myself. 



276 



SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Afternoon, apres-midi 
notwithstanding*, malgre 
dirty, vilain 



exercise, theme 
now, auparavant 
to walk, sc promcner 



XnftnttCfc* JWoo^ 



The infinitive, in French, is not preceded by a preposition 
when it is used as a nominative, like the English infinitive or 
active participle , in which case it may be considered as a noun* 



EXAMPLES 



Mourir n'est rien quand on a 

bien vecu 
Secourir les pauvres est une 

action digne de louange 

Eire trop mecontent de soi 
est une faiblesse 



To die, or dying is nothing 
when we have lived well 

Relieving, or to relieve the 
poor is a praiseworthy ac- 
tion 

To be too much dissatisfied 
with one's self is a weakness 



Obs. The infinitive is used without any preposition after the verbs 



Jlller, to go 
croire, to believe 
compter, to reckon 
daigner, to condescend 
declarer, to declare 
devoir, to owe 
entendre, to hear 
envoyer, to send 
esperer, to hope 
/aire, to do 
falloir, to be necessary 
laisser, to let 



JVier, to deny 
oser, to dare 
paraitre, to appear 
pretendre, to pretend 
pouvoir, to be able 
savoir, to know 
sembler, to appear 
souhaiter, to wish 
soutenir, to maintain 
venir, to come 
voir, to see 
vouloir, to be willing 



EXAMPLES. 






Voulez-vous alter la voir? 
Croyez-vous ayoi'r raison ? 

II ncrazl se taire 

Je les enferai repentir 



Will you g-0 £0 see her ? 
Do you Mm/c you are in 

right ? 
He cannot keep silence 
I shall make them repent 



the 
of it 



SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 



277 



Je le leur ai vufaire 

Je ne Vai pas laisse ecrire 



I saw them do it 

I did not let her zm'fe 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE ON THE RULE AND 
OBSERVATION. 

To whom can I apply for protection ? I have heard your sis- 
ter siiig that song. To be, or being too much satisfied with one's 
self is a folly. To speak, or speaking too much is dangerous. 
To gratify one's ambition is dangerous. How can I prevent 
that ? I will cause your orders to be executed. Did you not 
let him write to your uncle. You may go out when you 
please. He can do it, if he will. Why speak to him about it ? 
He came to see you. It was insulting him too much. Let 
him finish his discourse. 



To apply, s'addresser 
to hear, entendre 
song, ariette, f. 
folly, sottise 
to gratify, satisfaire d 
one's, son 



to prevent, empecher 

uncle, oncle 

if he will, sHi veut 

why, pourquoi 

about it, en; to let, laisser 

to finish, achever 



INFINITIVE WITH DE. 
Rule I. 

The infinitive with de is generally used when the English 
noun, adjective, participle, or verb, is followed by an infinitive 
with to, and when the active participle is preceded by the 
preposition of, from, for, with, at, upon, about, or after. 

EXAMPLES. 



lis sont indignes de vivrc, 

11 a eu le plaisir de vous voir 

chez lui, 
Elle a acquis Vart de parler, 

II est capable de le faire, 
Nous sommes faches de vous 

interrompre, 
II le blame d'avoir ecrit, 

24 



They are unworthy to live 
He has had the pleasure of 

seeing you at his house 
She has acquired the art of 

speaking 
He is capable of doing it 
We are sorry to interrupt you 

He blames him for having 
written 



278 SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 

II se contentait de vivre ici, He was contented to live here 
Quand il eut cesse de parler, When he had done speaking 
II se flatte de savoir lout, He flatters himself with know- 

ing every thing - 

Although the author has endeavoured to give rules on the use of the 
infinitive with de, a, and pour, yet there are so many exceptions to them, 
that he must acknowledge with the best French Grammarians, that no posi- 
tive rules have been or can be given ; hence their use must, in a great meas- 
ure, be learned by practice; for which purpose the writer has introduced a 
variety of examples. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

It is dangerous totrust every body. I am very glad to see 
you. He is sorry to see you sick. He is on the point of 
dying. I am wearied with writing. I proposed calling on 
you. I had an opportunity of serving him. He had the in- 
tention of calling on you. It is time to set out. He intends 
to go and see you to-morrow evening. 

To trust, sejier to call, passer . 

glad, aise ; sorvy,fdch6 on, chez 

on, sur ; wearied, las opportunity, occasion 

to propose, se proposer to intend, se proposer 



OBSERVATIONS. 



1. De is used before the infinitive after verbs that govern a noun or pro- 
. noun in the dative or accusative. 

2. De is used after any adjective preceded by the impersonals, il est, il 
suffit, il semble, c'est, c'est que, &c. or the verbs venir, nefaire que, &c. 

3. De is used after que, when que follows a word of comparison. 

1. Woubliez pas d'apporter vos Do not forget to bring your books 
livres 

Elle refusa de lui parler, She refused to speak to him 

II m'empecha de travailler, He hindered me from working 

II a neglig6 d'etudier sa leqon, He neglected to study his lesson 

N'entreprenez-pas de la desabuser, Do not undertake to undeceive her 

Avez-vous promis d'y alter ? Did you promise to go there ? 

2. II est impoli de ne pas dire son It is impolite not to mention one's 
nom, name 

H suffira de lui dire, It will be sufficient to tell him 

Ce n'est pas une petite chose que It is not a trifle to know how to be 

de savoir se taire, silent 

C'est une belle chose que de garder It is a good thing to keep a secret 

le secret, 



SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 



279 



C'est une grande folie que de vouloir 

etre sage tout seul, 
C'est une grande folie a elle que de 

refuser mes offres, 
Je viens de le quitter, ou Je nefais 

que de le quitter, 
II ne lui convient point de prendre 

des airs, 
II importe de bien employer son 

terns, 
II est barbare d'insulter aux mal- 

heureux, 
Ce serait lui faire une injure que de 

nous mefier de lui, 

3. II est plus beau de vainer e. ses 

passions que de vainer e ses en- 

nemis, 
II aime autant souffrir que de se 

plaindre, 
Rien ne lui plait tant que de Ven- 

tendre chanter, 
Etudiez plutot que de perdre votre 

tems, 



To wish to be the only wise man is 

a great folly 
It is a great folly in Jier to refuse 

my offers 
I have just left him 

It does not become him to give him- 
self airs 

It is of importance to employ one's 
time well 

It is barbarous to insult the unfor- 
tunate 

It would be doing him an injury to 
mistrust him 

It is more noble to conquer our 
passions than our enemies 

He likes as well to suffer as to com- 
plain 

Nothing pleases him so much as to 
hear it sung 

Study rather than lose your time 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

He refused to speak to her. I advised him to be more 
diligent. He lias forgotten to bring them. Try to persuade 
her. It is time to set out. It will be sufficient to speak to 
him. It is dangerous to trust every body. It would be 
doing him an injustice to mistrust him. It is a barbarous 
action to insult (to) the unfortunate. It is a misfortune to 
have no friends. It is a folly to despise others. Nothing 
pleases him so much as to study languages. I had rather 
(should love better) die than (to) be idle. 



To advise, conseiller 
to forget, oublier 



to try, essayer 
misfortune, malheur, m. 



Rule II. 

The infinitive with & generally follows nouns, adjectives, 
verbs, &c. when the infinitive or active participle, in English, 
is used with the prepositions to, at, in, on, for , &c. to express 
effort, encouragement , inclination, &c. 



280 



SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 



EXAMPLES. 



Je suis pr£t a alter, 

11 s'attache & \u\ plaire, 

Je me plais d vous ecrire, 

Je suis dispose a vous obeir, 

Songez d me payer, 

Elle se plait d me tourmenter, 

II se prepare a partir, 

Elle l'a engage djoucr, 
Un Chretien doit 6tre pret & 
mourir plutot que de renier 
sa foi, 
Les habitans etaient deter- 
mines & mourir, 
Vous n'etes pas exact a ap- 

prendre votre lecon, 
II est tres-enclin d medire, 
Vous n^avez excite a manger, 



lam ready to go 
He endeavours to please her 
I delight in writing to you 
I am disposed to obey you 
Think of paying me 
She delights in tormenting me 
He is preparing for his de- 
parture 
She has engaged him to play 
A Christian ought to be ready 
to die rather than renounce 
his faith 
The inhabitants were deter- 
mined to die 
You are not exact in learning 

your lesson 
He is much enclined to slander 
You have induced me to eat 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



Think of paying him. He was busy writing. What has 
induced you to do it ? I am disposed to obey. Help me to 
write. Are you ready to go out '? I have great pleasure in 
writing to you. I employ myself in writing to my friends in 
the country. Do you not think of paying me. His sisters 
are preparing for their departure. 

To think, songer to help, aider 

to be busy, s'occuper to employ, s^occuper 

to induce, engager 

OBSERVATIONS. 

\. K A is also used after verbs that are emploj'ed to express the ideas of in- 
structing, assisting, employing, &c. even when followed by a dative or an 
accusative ; as, il apprend a faire des armes, he learns fencing. Aidez- 
inoi a le faire, help me to do it. 

2. \# is used to convey a passive signification ; as, sa compagnie est 
a eviter, his company is to be avoided. C'est aise d, faire, that is easy to 
be done. 






SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 



281 



3. After avoir ; as, J'ai une nouvelle a vous dire, I have a piece of news 
to tell you. 

4. To denote the being employed about a thing ; as, Ma mere est a 
ecrire des lettres, my mother is writing letters. 

5. In detached phrases, or sentences which denote circumstances, man- 
ner, means, &c. ; a more comme il fait, il n'ira pas loin, by living as he 
does, he will not hold out long. 

6. After c'est a, to denote duty, business, occupation, turn to do a 
thing, &c. ; as, C'est a vous a obiir, it is for you to obey. 

7. The following verbs take a or de after them, according to the sense in 
which they are employed; commence)', continuer, contraindre, s'efforcer, 
engager, essayer, s' 'engager, exhorter, forcer, manquer, obliger, resoudre, 
tdcher, tarder, venir, &c. Prier, to invite, is used with a ; but prier, to 
desire, is used with de: etre followed by an adjective takes de after it ; 
but when it signifies to belong to it takes a; as, II est glorieux de mourir 
pour sa patrie, it is glorious to die for one's country. Ce tableau est a moi, 
that picture is mine, or belongs to me. 

Examples to illustrate the above Observations. 



1. II apprend a danser, 
Cherchez d rendre service. 
Aimez a secourir les malheureux, 
Qui vous montre a dessiner ? 

2. II est a plaindre, 

C'est un homme a craindre, 
Ce fruit est-il bon a manger 1 
Voila des chiffons a, bruler, 
Cela est difficile a fair e, 

3. Avez-vous quelque chose a man- 
ger ? 

II n'y a rien d gagner avec lui, 
J'ai a me plaindre de lui, 

4. Je serai deux heures a faire cela 

5. s ji vous parler sincerement, je 
n'en crois rien, 

v «5 Yentendre, on dirait qu'il etait 

fort riche, 
Je sais d n'en point douter, que 

c'est lui qui l'a fait, 

6. C'est a vous djouer, 
C'est a moi a sortir, 

C'est a lui a rester au logis, 
V A qui est-ce a boire ? 
C'est a elle a ecrire, 

7. Je PobHgerai a le faire, 
II fut oblige de le faire, 

11 9'est efforce a courir, 
11 s'efforce de lui plaire, 
II ne manquera pas de venir, 

24* 



He learns dancing 

Seek to do a kindness 

Love to assist the unfortunate 

"Who teaches you to draw ? 

He is to be pitied 

He is a man to be feared 

Is that fruity <o eat? 

These rags are for burning 

That is difficult to do, or to be done 

Have you any thing to eat ? 

There is nothing to be got by him 

I have to complain of him 

I shall be two hours doing that 

To tell you sincerely, I do not be- 
lieve any thing of it 

To hear him talk, one would think 
(say) he was very rich 

I know to a certainty, that it was 
he who did it 

It is your turn to play 

It is my turn to walk out 

It is his turn to stay at home 

Whose turn is it to drink ? 

It is her business, or turn to write 

I will oblige him to do it 

He was obliged to do it 

He made an effort to run 

He strives to please her 

He will not fail to come 



282 



SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 



J'ai manque de tomber, 

II a manque a /aire son devoir, 

II tache de vous obliger, 

II tache a me nuire, 

II a trop tarde a venir, 

II lui tarde de purtir, 

lis venaient definir, 

Quand je vins a ecrire ma lettre, 

C'est un plaisir de (que de) vous 

enseigner, 
II y a du plaisir a vous enseigner, 
Ce n'est pas la peine defaire cela, 
J'ai peine a le croire, 



I was near falling 

He has failed in doing his duty 

He endeavours to oblige you 

He aims at hurting me 

He has delayed too long coming 

He longs to set off 

They had just finished 

When I began to write my letter 

It is a pleasure to teach you 

There is a pleasure in teaching you 
It is not the trouble of doing that 
I can hardly believe it 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

He likes singing (to sing). Do you learn dancing (to dance) ? 
He instructs me in drawing. It is to be feared that he will 
die. That fruit is good to cat. I have much pleasure in see- 
ing you. Have you any thing to eat ? What you have given 
me to do is not very easy. This is a very hard lesson to 
learn. We shall be two hours doing (to do) that. He has 
been a week writing letters. To tell you candidly (to speak 
to you sincerely), I believe nothing of it. It is not my busi- 
ness (for me) to correct him. It is his turn (for him) to walk 
out. It is not your business to meddle with it. 



What, ce que 
easy, aise 
hard, difficile 



candidly, sineerement 
to meddle, se meler 
with it, en 



CONTRASTED EXAMPLES OF THE INFINITIVE. 



With de. 
He will not fail to write. 
I long to tell him. 
He longs to see you. 
He endeavours to satisfy you. 
My father is just gone out. 

They had just finished their 

game. 
We had just got out of the 

coach. 



With a. 
He has failed to write. 
Do not defer telling him. 
He delays going. 
They aim at deceiving you. 
If it happen to rain, he will 

be wet. 
He began to speak of his 

riches. 
As soon as she came to speak 

of her misfortunes. 



SYNTAX OP THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 



283 



I had just left him. 
It is easy to do that. 
It is dangerous to trust every 
body. 

He took great pains to per- 
suade me. 

To fail, manquer 
I long, il me tarde 
to defer, tarder 
he longs, il lui tarde, 
to delay, tarder 



to endeavour, or aim, 
to deceive, t romper 
to go out, sortir 



tdcher 



When he comes to know it. 

That is easy to be done. 

Some people think it danger- 
ous to be (place danger in 
being) charitable. 

He had much difficulty to 
persuade me. 

wet, mouille 
game, jeu, m. 
to get out, sortir 
as soon as, des que 
great pains, beaucoup de peines 
much difficulty, beaucoup de 
peine 



Rule III. 

Pour is used before the infinitive to express the end, design, 
cause, or reason for which any thing is done ; also pour is 
employed when we can put in order to, or for the purpose of, 
before an infinitive. 



EXAMPLES. 



Je viens pour vous dire que 
Monsieur B ... est mort 

II a ete pendu pour avoir tue 
un homme 

Je I'ai faitpour vous plaire 



Cette eau 
boire 



de mer est pour 



I am come to tell you that 

Mr. B ... is dead 
He was hanged for killing a 

man 
I have done it to, or in order 

to please you 
This salt water is to drink, or 

for the purpose of drinking 



Obs. Pour is frequently used, though not always, after trop, too much; 
assez, enough ; suffire, and etre suffisant, to be sufficient : also pour is 
used when we use for before the active participle ; Ex. II est trop sage 
pour fa'ire cela, he is too wise to do that. II a assez de vanite pour le 
croire, he has vanity enough to believe it. Combien me demandez-vous 
pour me /aire un chapeau ? how much do you ask for making me a hat ? 
Sometimes assez takes de after it, and sometimes there is no preposition 
after either assez or trop ; Ex. Ce n'etait pas assez de Youtrager, it was 
not sufficient to outrage him. C'est assez, ou trop m'insulter, this in- 
sults me enough, or too much. 



284 SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 

EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

He shall be rewarded for having worked well. He has 
too much (of) pride to own his faults. You have not money 
enough to bear (to make) great expenses. I shall do every 
thing to please you. In order to be happy, one must be (it 
is necessary to be) contented. They are strong enough to do 
it. He is virtuous enough to resist (to the) temptation. 

Too much, trop strong, fort 

pride, amour propre to resist, resister 

bear, faire temptation, tentation, f. 
expense, depense 

Infinitive used instead of the Active Participle. 

The infinitive is used, instead of the active participle, after 
the prepositions a, apres, de, par, pour, sans, &c. 

Obs. The active participle is never used, in French, after any other 
preposition than en *; although it is used, in English, after almost every 
preposition, 

EXAMPLES. 

On croient d Ventendre, qu'il One would think, by hearing 

ne sait rien him, he knows nothing 

II mourut apres avoir bien He died after having eaten a 

dine hearty dinner 

Emp6chez-le defairc du mal Prevent him from doing mis- 
chief 

II faut que vous commenciez You must begin by saying 

par reciter vos le 90ns your lessons 

Obs. 1. *En, before an active participle, is Englished by whilst, when, 
in, as, by, with, &c. Ex. II me rencontra en allant a Peglise, he met me 
when going, whilst, or as I was going to the church. II laissa des ordres 
en partant, he left orders when he went away, or was going away. II 
1'aborda en riant, he came up to her with a smile, or smiling. 

2. When the active participle, in English, is used with the article the or 
a, as a noun, it is generally rendered by a substantive in French ; as, 
L'ecriture est mauvaise, the writing is bad. 






SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 285 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

He went away without speaking. He was imprisoned for 
having robbed on the highway. She gets her living by writ- 
ing. He often speaks without knowing what he says. We 
have obtained peace by making great sacrifices. By buying 
the horse I have also bought the saddle and bridle. The 
learning of mathematics is difficult. 

Imprisoned, emprisonni by, a ; what, ce que 

highway, grand chemin, ra. to obtain, obtenir 

to get, gagner ; living, vie, f. sacrifice, sacrifice, m. 



<©tt tfje ^ttwutf* ov ^ttito Uavtitfcple* 



Rule. 



The active participle, terminating in ant, is indeclinable 
when used as a participle, and declinable when used as an 
adjective, in which instance it must agree with the noun to 
which it refers. 

examples. 

Indeclinable as Participles. 

Je l'ai rencontre allant a la I met him as he was going to 

comedie the play 

Je l'ai rencontre en allant k I met him as I was going to 

la comedie the play 



* Obs. 1. Although the participle or gerund, in ant, is called present, 
yet it may be applied to any time. Ex. En riant, je vous donne un avis 
serieux ; En riant, je vous ai donne un avis serieux ; En riant, je vous 
donnerai un avis serieux. 

2. Ay ant, etant, ayant ete, neither change for the gender nor number ; 
Ex. La ville de Londres ayant 6te brulee en 1666, fut rebatie, au grand 
etonnement de l'Europe, en trois annees, plus belle et plus reguliere 
qu'elle n'etait auparavant. 



286 



SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 



lis vont rampant devant les 

grands 
Votre frere devant sortir, 

vous resterez a la maison 



They go cringing before the 

great 
Your brother having to go 

out, you will stay at home 



Declinable as Adjectives. 



C'est un homrae obligeant 
Une personne obligeante se 

fait aimer de tout le monde 
Elles sont engageantes 
Ces horames sont condesccn- 

dans 



He is an obliging man 

An obliging person is beloved 

by every body 
They are engaging 
Those men are condescending 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



Indeclinable. 
I have seen them eating 
and drinking. It was a proof, 
convincing to every body but 
you. The mind is formed by 
reading good books. She 
saw your brother, as she was 
returning from the country. 

Proof, preuve, f. 
convincing, convainquant 
the mind is formed, on se 

forme V esprit 
as she was returning, en reve- 

nant 



Declinable. 
She is an obliging woman. 
It is a convincing proof. 
They are bleating sheep. 
That lady is a very charming 
singer. Her society is inter- 
esting. She produces surpris- 
ing effects. 

sheep, des brebis t f. 
bleating, belant 
lady, dame 
society, societe 
interesting, attachant 
effects, des effets 






SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 



287 



$38t W*vtitiplt8< 



Rule I. 



When the past participle is immediately preceded by any 
tense of the verbs etre, paraitre, naitre, sembler, &c. or any 
neuter verb, it must agree with the subject that precedes it 
in gender and number ; but it is never made to agree with 
the subject of avoir. When ete is joined to any tense of 
avoir, and is followed by another participle, the sense is pas- 
sive, and the second participle is declinable. 



EXAMXLES. 



II est alii h Calais 
Elle est allie a Paris 
lis sont alles a Rome 
Elles sont allies k Rome 
\Jennemi a eti * vaincu 

Les ennemis ont ete vaincus 

\Jarmie a ete vaincue 

Les armies ont ete vaincues 

Vos soeurs paraissent affligees 
Elle a regu une lettre ce ma- 
tin 
i\ous avons regu 
aujourd'hui 



des lettres 



He is gone to Calais 
She is gone to Paris 
They are gone to Rome 
They are gone to Rome 
The enemy has been con- 
quered 
The enemies have been con- 

quered 
The amy has been conquered 
The armies have been con- 

quered 
Your sisters appear afflicted 
She has received a letter this 

morning 
JFe have received some letters 
to-day 



* 06s. 1. The participle aecw, coute, and uaZu are indeclinable, and eu 
also, when it is placed before another participle, otherwise it is declina- 
ble : Ex. Vous croyiez que votre oncle aurait vecu cent ans ? Oui, Mon- 
sieur, il les aurait vecu. Ce chateau a du couter quatre vingt mille francs ? 
II les a effectivement coitte. Voyez-vous les honneurs qu'on rend a cet 
homme ? Eh bien ! c'est son genie qui les lui a valu. Je lui ai rendu ces 
livres lorsque je les ai eu lus. — [ Vide Savigny, p. 23.] 

2. When vous, you, is used in addressing a single person, the participle 
must be singular, although the verb which precedes must be plural ; Ex. 
J'ai dit que vous etiez engage, I said you were engaged. 



288 SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

My sister is respected by every body. She has written to 
my father to-day. He has written to my mother this morning. 
(The) Tyrants are feared and abhorred. Virtue is seldom 
rewarded. My friends have been persecuted. My father has 
sung that song. My mother has sung. My brothers have 
not sung. Have not my sisters sung ? 

Rule IT. 

When the verb avoir, is preceded by a noun, or pronoun 
in the accusative case, the participle is declinable; but if the 
participle be followed by the accusative it is indeclinable. 
When the noun, or pronoun which precedes avoir is in the 
genitive, dative, or ablative case, the participle is indeclina- 
ble, unless preceded by que, combien de, que de, quel- quelle, 
quels, quelles, &c. 

EXAMPLES. 

Avez-vous vu Marie ? Oui, Have you seen Mary ? Yes, 

je Z'ai vue (P, ace.) I have seen her {her, ace.) 

II y a des hommes la-bas ; je There are some men yonder ; 

les ai vus (les, ace.) I have seen them (them, ace.) 

Ces roses etaient belles ; mais These roses were beautiful ; 

vous les avez gatees (les, but you have spoiled them 

ace.) (them, ace.) 

Les hommes dont nous avons The men of whom we spoke 

parte sont alles (dont, gen.) are gone (of whom, gen.) 

Je les ai vus et leur ai parte I have seen them and (have) 

(leur, dat.) spoken to them (to them, 

dat.) 

Je connais la personne de qui I know the person from whom 

vous avez repu ces livres you received those books 

(de qui, abl.) (from whom, abl.) 

J'ai renvoye les lettres que I have sent back the letters 

vous m'avez pretees (que, which you lent me 

ace.) 

Obs. Que is /. pi. because it refers to les lettres, and we can say, you 
lent me them. 

La terre que j'ai vendue The land which I have sold 



SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 



289. 



Les lettres qiSW a ecrites 

Les livres que je vous ai pre- 

tes 
Avez-vous vu les bas que j'ai 

achetes ? 
Savez-vous les raisons qu y i\ 

m'a donnees ? 
Je n'ai pas lu les papiers que 

vous m'avez envoyes 
II nous a regus avec beaucoup 

d'honnetete 
lis la lui ont renvoyee 

Ce soiit des choses gz/e je n'ai 
jamais pr&oues 

Ce sont d'aussi bons fruits 
^i/e vous ayez jamais man- 
ges 

C'est la meilleure liqueur que 
j'aie jamais hue 

J'ai appris la le£on gwe vous 
m'aui^ donnec 

Je Z&? ai ??M5 et entrctcnus 

Je 7'ai i>«e et entretenue 

II wows a cherches long-terns 
Je Z'avais perdue 
Vous /'aviez crwe coupable 
Je connais la personne de qui 

il vous a parle 
Voila la ville par ou]\d passe, 

II a repu les lettres g^e vous 

lui avez ecrites 
Combien en a-t-il repu ? 
II en a repw trois (era, gen.J 

Les en avez-vous prevenus ? 
Combien de maisons avez-vous 
acheiees ? 

25 



The letters vbhich be has 

icrittcn 
The books ivhich I /e?zi you 

Have you seen the stockings 

which I bought ? 
Do you knuw the reasons he 

gave me ? 
I have not read the papers 

you sent me 
He received us with a great 

deal of politeness 
They have sent her back to 

him 
Those are things that Iriiever 

foresaw 
Those are as good fruits as 

you have ever eaten 

This is the best liquor I have 

ever drunk 
I have learnt the lesson you 

gave me 
I have seen them and spoken 

to them 
I have seen her and spoken to 

her 
He has sought us a long time 
I had lost her 
You had thought her guilty 
I know the person of whom 

he spoke to you 
This is the city through which 

I passed 
He has received the letters 

which you wrote to him 
How many did he receive? 
He has received three [of 

them) 
Have you informed them of it ? 
How many houses have you 

bought ? 



290 



SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 



La plume que nous vous avons 

taillee 
Quelles plumes nous avez-vous 

taillees ? 
Que de folies n'a-t-il pas 

faites ? 
Quelle toile a-t-il choisie ? 
Laquelle a-t-il achetee ? 
Quel homme avez-vous vu ? 
Savez-vous quels livres il a 

achetes ? 
Quelles nations n'a-t-on pas 

vaincues ? 



The pen which we have made 

for you 
What pens have you made for 

us? 
What pranks has he not 

played ? 
Which cloth has he chosen ? 
Which has he bought? 
What man did you see ? 
Do you know which books he 

has bought ? 
What nations did they not 

conquer ? 



CONTRASTED EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



Indeclinable. 
She has received the letters. 

Have you received the books? 

I knew the woman of whom 
you speak. 

T have sent you some papers 
to read. 

Did you not lend me some 
books ? 

I had lost my gloves ; 

God had created men inno- 
cent. 

Commerce has rendered this 
city flourishing ; 

I have undertaken a business. 

The letter of which I spoke 

to you. 
He has spoken to her. 
She has written to them. 



Declinable, 

The letters which she has re- 
ceived. 

Yes, I have received them. 

You speak of a woman whom 
I knew {have known). 

Have yon read the papers 
which I sent you 1 

There are the books which 
you lent me. 

But I have found them again. 

Their passions have made 
them guilty. 

But it has made it proud. 

What business have you un- 
dertaken 1 

The letter which I showed 
you. 

He has seen her. 

She has visited them. 



SYNTAX OP PARTICIPLES. 

Rule III. 



291 



The past participle is indeclinable after avoir when followed 
by an infinitive* or any verb that expresses an action done to 
the person or thing of which we speak ; but if the action is 
done by, or is in the person or thing of which we speak, then 
the participle is declinable. Fait is indeclinable when used 
impersonally ; but it is declinable when used actively for fa- 
briquer, creer, former, pro duire, &c. — [V. Gram. Par P. Cati- 
neau, p. 3T-] 



EXAMPLES. 



Indeclinable. 



Declinable. 



If in speaking of a house we 
say, je 7'ai vu bdtir, I saw 
it built (bcttir expresses that 
the action was upon V, it, 
meaning the house). 

Je Z'ai entendu chanter, I 
heard it sung (meaning a 
song). 

Je Pai vu peindre I saw her 
picture taken. 

Lafemme que j'ai vu battre, 
the woman whom I saw 
beaten (this means that the 
action of beating was per- 
formed upon the woman). 

La regie que j'ai commence 
a vous expliqucr, the rule 
U'hich I began to explain to 
you. 

Les mathtmatiques que vous 
n avez pas vouhi que yetu- 
diassc, the mathematics 
which you did not wish me 
to study. 



But if we say, in speaking of 
a house, je Z'ai vue totnber, 
I saiv it fail (tomber ex- 
presses that the action was 
performed, or done by the 
house). 

Je Z'ai entendue chanter, I 
heard her sing. 

Je /'ai vue peindre, I saw her 
painting. 

Lafemme que j'ai vue battre 
the woman whom I saw 
beating (this means that 
the woman performed the 
action of beating.) 

Uhisioire que je vous ai donnee 
a etudier, the history which 
I have given you to study. 

Les femmes que vous avez 
instruites k feindre vous 
ont surpassees, the women 
whom you have instructed 
to dissemble have surpassed 
you. 



Obs. The infinitive is sometimes not expressed, but understood. 



292 



SYNTAX OP PARTICIPLES. 



.Tai fait tout les efforts que 
j'ai pu (faire is under- 
stood), I have used all the 
endeavours I could. 

La graride chalcur qu'W a 
fait, a cause beaucoup de 
maladies, the great heat we 
have had, has caused a great 
deal of sickness. 

II a eu de la cour toutes les 
graces qu'W a voulu (avoir 
is understood), he has re- 
ceived every favor from 
the court which he could 
have wished, 

J'avais intention de me pro- 
mener, mais la pluie qu'il 
a fait m'en a empe'che, I 
intended to take a walk, 
but the rain which we have 
had prevented me. 

On dit qu'elle ne sait pas 
lire, mais je lui ai WMecrire 
une lettre, they say she 
does not know how to read, 
but I bave seen her write a 
letter. 



Les bottes qu'W m'afaites sont 
trop etroites, the boots 
which he has made for me 
are too tight. 

Les grandes depenses qiSW a 
faites ont mine sa famille ? 
th$ great expenses he has 
run into have ruined his 
family. 

La resolution que vous avez 
prise d'aller <i la campagne, 
the resolution which you 
have taken to go into^ the 
country. 

Les habits que le tailleur m'a 
faits ne valent rien,. the 
clothes which the tailor 
has made for me are worth 
nothing, or are good for 
nothing. 

Je Z'ai vue ecrire des lettres ? 
I have seen her writing 
letters. 



CONTRASTED EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE, 



Indeclinable. 

The men whom she saw (has 

seen) killed. 
That tragedy, I have seen it 

applauded. 
The reasons which he thought 

(that) I approved of. 
The virtues which I heard 

praised. 
The history which I have 

begun to read is Yery 

amusing. 



Declinable. 

The officers whom he saw 
(has seen) assemble. 

That tragedy, I have seen it 
fall. 

The reasons which I had ap- 
proved of. 

I heard her praising those 
virtues. 

The history which I gave you 
to read appeared to nae 
very agreeable* 



SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 



293 



The house which he ordered 

to be built. 
The ladies whom I suffered 

to pass. 
The man whom you ceased 

to visit. 
Have you heard the new 

actress sing ? 
Have you heard the new song 

sung 1 Yes, I have (I have 

heard it sung). 
It is a thing which I have 

seen done. 
I have cited the noblest 

(finest) traits I could. 



The soldiers whom they have 
obliged to submit. 

The ladies whom I saw pass- 
ing. 

The people whom I saw ar- 
riving. 

Yes, T have (I have heard her 
sing). . 

I have heard them singing it 
(I have heard them who sung 

u). 

I saw her doing the same 

thing. 
There are the books I ordered 

(have made, or caused to 

come) from France. 



To assemble, s* assembler 
tragedy, tragedie 
applauded, applaudir . 
to order, f aire 



obliged, contraints 
to submit, se soumettre 
cited, cite 
traits, traits 



OBSERVATIONS RESPECTING THE CASES. 

1. The pronouns me, me ; te, thee ; se, himself, herself, <fcc. ; nous, us ; 
vous, you; are in the accusative when Englished in the preceeding 
manner: but they are in the dative when they can be Englished as follows ; 
me, to me ; te, to thee ; se, to himself, &c. ; nous, to us ; vous, to you. 
Lui, to him, to her, to it ; lew, to them, are always dative ; and le } nira. 
it ; la, her, it ; les, them, are always accusative. 

2. The nominative answers to the question who ? or what ? the genitive 
to the question whose? of whom? or of what ? the dative to the ques- 
tion to, ox for whom ? to, or for what ? the accusative to the question 
whom ? what ? or whither? and the ablative is translated by from whom ? 
or from what? and generally answers to the question from whom ? or from 
what ? or where ? 

EXAMPLES. 

Mademoiselle B . . . dessine bien ; je Z'ai vue souvent dessiner, Miss 
B . . . draws well j I have often seen her draw. 



EXPLANATION - . 



Who saw, or has seen ? 
Whom did you see ? 



Nom. \,je 
Ace. Her, V 



Mademoiselle B . . . nous a envoye" de beaux tableaux, Miss B . . 
ahs sent us some fine pictures. 
25* 



294 



SYNTAX OP PARTICIPLES. 



Who has sent ? 

What has she sent ? 

To whom ? 
From where ? 



Nom. Miss B . . . Mademoiselle 
B . . . 

Ace. Some fine pictures, de beaux 

tableaux 
Dat. To us, a nous 
Abl. From Paris, de Paris 



Avez-vous vu mon pere et ma mere ? Oui, nous les avons vus, et leur 
avons parle, have you seen my father and mother? Yes, we have seen 
them, and have spoken to them. 



Who has seen ? 

Whom have you seen ? 

To whom have you spoken ? 



Nom. We, nous 
Ace. Them, les 
Dat. To them, a leur 



Rule IV. 

The past participle is made to agree with me, roe ; ie, thee 
se, himself, &c. that precede reflective verbs io the accusative ; 
but when those pronouns can be turned by to me, to thee, &c: 
in the dative, the participle is indeclinable, unless, que, quel) 
&c. precede, in which instance the participle is declinable. 



EXAMPLES 

Indeclinable. 

Lucrece s'est donne la mort, 
Lucretia killed herself (s', 
dat. gave death to herself), 

Elle s'est blesse le pied, she 
has hurt her foot. 



Us se sont casse les bras, they 

have broken their arms. 
Nous nous sonimes lave les 

mains, we have washed our 

hands. 
Elles se sont imagine, they 

have fancied to themselves. 

Vous vous 6tes imagine, you 
have fancied to yourselves. 

Elle s'est donne de la peine, 
she has given herself trouble 
(trouble to herself J. 



Declinable. 

Elle s'est tuee, she killed her- 
self (s\ ace.) 



La mort qu'elle s'est donnee* 
the death which she inflict- 
ed on herself. 

Elle s'est promenee, she has 
taken a walk. 

Elles se sont allecs promener, 
they are gone to take a 
walk. 

Us se sont appliques aux 
mathematiques, they have 
applied to the mathematics. 

Ma sceur s'est blessee, my 
sister has hurt herself. 

Les peines qu'elle s'est 
donnees, the trouble which 
she gave herself (to her- 
self). 



SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 



295 



Indeclinable. 

Nous ne nous sommes pas 
donne de la peine, we have 
not given ourselves trouble. 

Elle s'etait attire des enne- 
mis, she had drawn ene- 
mies upon herself. 



Declinable. 

Quelles peines s'est-elle don- 
nees ? what trouble did 
she give herself? (to her- 
self.) 

Les ennemis qu'elle s'etait 
attires, the enemies whom 
she has drawn upon herself. 



CONTRASTED EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



Indeclinable. 

They have attached to them- 
selves. 

We have proposed to our- 
selves. 

She has drawn upon herself. 

They have attached many 
persons to themselves. 

We have proposed difficulties 
to one another. 

She has drawn enemies upon 
herself. 

They have built houses for 
themselves. 

I had formed ideas of it. 

We have given ourselves 

much trouble. 
They have given themselves 

much trouble. 
She has cut her finder. 



Declinable. 
She has abandoned herself. 

We have applied ourselves. 

She has presented herself. 

They have abandoned them- 
selves to despair. 

We have applied to the ma- 
thematics. 

The enemies whom she has 
drawn upon herself. 

We have built them, f. for 
ourselves. 

Such are the ideas that T had 
formed of it. 

What (of) trouble has he 
given himself! 

The trouble which they give 
themselves. 

She has cut herself. 



To attach to one's self, s'at- to present one's self, se pre- 

t acker. senter 

to propose to one's self, se pro- to propose to one another, se 

poser fairc 

to abandon one's self, s'aban- difficulty, difficulty 

donne r to form, se former 

to draw upon one's self, sW- to cut, se couper 

tirer 



296 RECAPITULATORY PRACTICE. 

MtwpituUtovs brattice on fyt 7Jtx*% f 



FIRST LESSON. 

The source of true happiness is in the heart of man, and 
the greatest satisfaction is found in the practice of virtue. 
The Tribunes demanded of Clodius the execution of the 
promise which the Consul Valerius had given. The laws 
which the first Christians had imposed on themselves were 
full of wisdom. Demetrius Phalereus having understood 
that the Athenians had thrown down his statues ; Ct They 
have not," said he, " overthrown the virtue which caused them 
to be erected to me." ' The glory which our ancestors have 
left us,, is an inheritance of which merit alone can put us in 
possession. Study frees us from the errors into which the 
prejudices of a (the) bad education has plunged us. As 
soon as Aristides had said that the proposition of Themis- 
tocles was unjust, all the people cried out that it must be 
thought of no more. I have read in history that the Egyp- 
tians were very superstitious, and (that they) worshipped 
even the vegetables of their gardens. If you had studied the 
Roman history, you would know that Rome was at first gov- 
erned by kings. Plato said (used to say) that the people 
would be very happy if wisdom was the sole object of min- 
siters. We are- more prone to excuse ourselves than Jo ac- 
knowledge our faults. 

It, dans; practice, pratique to put in possession, donner 

promise, parole, f. la possession 

Valerius, Valerius to free, affranchir 

Demetrius, Demetrius to cry out, smearier 

to understand, apprendre it must be thought of no more 

Athenian, Jlthenien, m. il ri>y fallait plus penser 

to throw down, or overthrow, to worship, adorer 

renvtrscr eveiiyjusqu'auz 

to cause, faire vegetables, legumes, f. pi. 

to erect, dresser at first, d'abord 



RECAPITULATORY PACTICE. 



297 



SECOND LESSON. 

e idle are very seldom well-informed, Those who love 
to improve in knowledge, or to learn, are never idle. Eying 
lowest of all vices. A young man should speak (ought 
to speak) with a great deal of discretion. A wise man nei- 
ther allows himself to be governed, nor does he endeavour to 
govern others. Alexander attacked Darius Codomanus, de- 
feated him twice, and made his mother, wife, and daughters 

:ers (made prisoners his mother, §c). While M. Turenne 
was commanding in Germany, the inhabitants of a neutral city 
thought (bejie-ed) that the king's army was going to pass that 
way (was going by its side), and they, through fear, made an of- 
fer to the general of a hundred thousand crowns [caused to offer 
_ leral a. yc.) in order to induce him to take another 
route. "'• I cannot in conscience," said he, " accept that sum, 
because I have had no intention' of passing through that city/ 7 
Before you undertake (before undertaking) any thing, adopt 
proper measures, so that you may have nothing to reproach 
yourself for, if you do not succeed. You have adopted very 
proper measures, so that you will have nothing to reproach 
youself for, if the affair does not succeed. Patience is the 
surest remedy against calumnies : time, soon or late, discov- 
ers the truth. (The) True merit is always accompanied with 
civility and modesty. 



Very seldom, tres-rarement 

informed, instruit 

to improve in knowledge, or 

to learn, a s'instruire 
low. bas : with, avec 
allows himself to be governed, 

_ ' uver ner 
to endeavour, chtrcher 
to attack, attaquer 
to defeat, vainer e 
prisoner, prisonnier 
to induce, engager 



in, en ; before, avemt cle 

to adopt, prendre 

proper, juste 

measure, mesure, f. 

to reproach for, reprochcr 

remedy, remede, ra. 

sure, siir 

soon or late, tot ou tarcl 

discovers, decouvre 

true, veritable 

with, c/e, and d 1 

civility, honnetete 



RECAPITULATORY PRACTICE. 

THIRD LESSON. 

Sur le nombre XIV rclativement & Henri IV. 

Le premier roi de France, nomme Henri, a ete sacre le 14 
Mai 1029. 

Henri IV. naquit le 14* Decembre 1553, 14 siecles, 14 
decades, et 14 ans apres la naissance de J. C. 

Henri II. ordonne, le 14 Mai 1554, d'elargir la rue de la 
Feronnerie ; on negligea de )e faire, et cette negligence favo- 
risa Passassinat de Henri IV, un 14 Mai. 

Les Parisiens resistent, le 14 Mai 1576, h un edit de Henri 
III. roi de France. 

Marguerite de France, premiere femme de Henri IV. na- 
quit le 14 Mai 1582. 

Paris, a l'instigation du due de Guise, se revolte contre 
Henri III. le 14 Mai 1588. 

Henri IV. gagne la bataille d'lvry le 14 Mars 1590. 

La Ligne fait une procession le 14 Mai 1590, pendant le 
siege de Paris par Henri IV. 

Henri IV. est assassine le 14 Mai 1610. 

II a vecu 4 fois 14 ans, 14 semaines, et 4 fois 14 jours, 

II y a dans Henri de Bourbon 14 lettres. 

Louis XIII. fils de Henri IV. est mort le 14 Mai 1643. 

Amusemens Philologiques* 



FOURTH LESSON. 

La vraie politesse est commune aux &mes delicates de 
toutes les nations, et elle n'est particuliere a aucun peuple. 
La civilite exterieure n'est que la forme etablie dans les dif- 
ferens pays pour exprimer cette politesse de Fame. Je pre- 
fere la civilite des Grecs h celle des autres peuples, parce 
qu'elle est plus simple et moins fatigante : elle rejette toute 
formalite superflue, son unique objet est de rendre la societe 
et la conversation aisee et agreable. Mais la politesse inte- 
rieure est bien differente de cette civilite superficielle. C'est 



* Erreur, il est ne le 13 Decembre. 



RECAPITULATORY PRACTICE. 299 

une egalite d'ame qui exclut en m£me temps 1'insensibilite et 
le trop d'erapressement ; elle suppose une promptitude a discer- 
ner ce qui peut couvenir aux differens caracteres des hommes : 
c'est une douce condescendance, au moyen de laquelle 
nous nous accommodons au gout de chacun, non pas pour 
natter ses passions, mais pour eviter de les irriter. En un 
mot, c'est un oubli de nous-memes, pourchercher ce qui peut 
£tre agreable aux autres ; mais d'une manieresi delicate, que 
nous les laissions <k peine s'apercevoir que tel soit notre but; 
elle sait contredire avec respect, et plaire sans adulation, et 
elle est egalement eloignee de la fade complaisance et de la 
basse familiarite. — Ramsay. 

\1 discerner, in discerning ch les write?', provoking them 
couvenir a, suit d', in ; que nous les laissions , as 

au moyen de, by to let them ; fade, insipid 



FIFTH LESSON. 

Nous sommes si presomptueux, que nous voudrions etre 
connus de toute la terre, et meme des gens qui viendront 
quand nous n'y serons plus, et nous sommes si vains que 
l'estime de cinq ou six persons, qui nous environnent, nous 
amuse et nous contente. Que chacun examine sa pensee ; il 
la trouvera toujours occupe au passe et a l'avenir. Nous ne 
pensons presque point au present, et si nous y pensons, ce 
irest que pour en prendre-la lumiere pour disposer de l'ave- 
nir. Le present n'est jamais notre but. Le passe et le pre- 
sent sont nos moyens ; le seul avenir est notre objet. Ainsi 
nous ne vivons jamais, mais nous esperons de vivre; et nous 
disposant toujours a etre heureux, il est indubitable que nous 
ne le serons jamais, si nous n'aspirons a une autre beatitude 
qu'a celle dont on peut jouir en cette vie. Peu de chose nous 
console, parccque peu de chose nous afflige. — Pascal. 

Des gens qui viendront, to hit, aim 

posterity; que,\et moyens, resources 

prendre la lumiere, to gain disposant toujours, are always 
information endeavouring 



300 SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 



Rule T. 



Adverbs are generally placed after verbs in the simple 
tenses, and between the auxiliary and participle in the coin- 
pound tenses ; but davantage, more, is always put after the 
participle. 

Obs. 1. The adverbs Men, mieux, trop, mal,pis, touj ours, jamais, &c. 
are sometimes placed indifferently, either before or after an infinitive ; but 
they are always placed after verbs in the simple tenses, and generally, 
though not always, between the auxiliary and participle : Ex. Faire Men 
son devoir, ou Men faire son devoir. 

2. Adverbs are never placed between the nominative and the verb, as in 
English : Ex. II parle souvent, he often speaks. 

EXAMPLES. 

Votre frere parle rarement Your brother seldom speaks 

II a loitjours Men parle do He has always spoken well of 

vous you 

Je pense sonvent k elle T often think of her 

Elle n'a pas encore appris sa She has not yet learnt her 

lecon lesson 

Votre sceur a bien chante Your sister has sung well 

Rule IT. 

The adverbs adjourd'hui, demain, liier, and those which 
consist of several ivords,* are generally placed after the par- 
ticiple in the compound tenses. 

examples. 

II a plu aujourd'hui It has rained to-day 

J'aurai fait demain I shall have done to-morrow 

Elle a eu beaucovp de peine k She has had a great deal of 

le persuader trouble to persuade him 

Nous l'avons rencontree par We met her by chance 

liasard 



* Obs. Adverbs are sometimes so connected with nouns as to form a 
compound ; as, beaucoup de peine, much trouble. 



SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 301 

Rule III. 

The adverbs jamais, toujours, and souvent, are placed be- 
fore all other adverbs, except presque. Assez, enough, is ne- 
ver put after the noun as in English. 

EXAMPLES. 

Nous ne buvons jamais trop We never drink too much 

Mon pere est presque toitjours My father is almost always ill 

rnalade 

Vous §tes souvent ensemble You are often together 

Vous n'avez pas assez de pa- You have not patience enough 

Hence 

Obs. Adverbs, in French, as in English, frequently begin a sentence ; 
as, Comment se porte Monsieur votre pere ? horn is your father? Quand 
voulez-vous venir chez-nous ? when will you come to our house ? — [For 
the formation of Adverbs, &c. v. p. 143.] 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 

I often think of you. She speaks much, and thinks little. 
I have often seen her at the theatre. They never speak well 
of any body. We have never spoken ill of any body. They 
have acted conformably to their principles. I have always 
considered maturely. When shall you go to Italy ? The 
king is scarcely ever well (is almost always ill). You never 
come to see me. 

To act, agir maturely, murement 

principles, principes Italy, Italie 



OBSERVATIONS ON THE NEGATIVES NE - PAS, POINT, &C. 

1. Ne is generally put before the verb, and pas or point 
after ; in compound sentences pas or point is put before the 
participle. If an adverb follow the negation, pas must be 
used, not point. Point denies more strongly than pas — 
[it. p. 67.] 

26 



302 



SYNTAX OP ADVERBS. 



EXAMPLES. 

Je ne \o\spas souvent votre I do not often see your sister 
soeur 

Ne savez-vous pas votre le- Do you not know your les- 
eon? son ? 

IV'avez-vous pas dit votre le- Have you not said your les- 
sen ? 

II n J a point lu du tout 



son ? 
He has not read at all 



2. When jamais, plus, guere, aucun, nul, nullement, per- 
sonne, rien, qui que ce soit, quoi que ce soit, quelconque, que, ni, 
are used negatively, neither pas nor point can be used. 



EXAMPLES. 



Alexandre rc'est plus, il est 

mort 
Personne ne le sait 
Je ne le veux nullement 
Je ra'y pense plus 
Je ne soupe guere 
Je Ti'en ai jamais oui parler 
II ne cherche que la verite 
II ne mange ni ne boit 
II n'est ni beau ni riche 

Je n'ai vu qui que ce soit de 

ma connaissance 
II w'en saitne/i 
II ne peut reussir a quoi que ce 

soit 

3. Ne is used after apprehender, craindre, douier, avoir 
peur, empecher, a moins que, de crainte que, de peur que, si, que, 
&c, when the negation is not expressed in English; however, 
when the negation is expressed in English by not, ne and 
pas, or point, are mostly used in French; but after si and 
que, pas is sometimes omitted when we use not. Ne before a 
verb, and que after, is Englished by but or only. 



Alexander is no more, he is 

dead 
Nobody knows it 
I by no means wish it 
I shall think no more of it 
I seldom sup 
I have never heard of it 
He only seeks truth 
He neither eats nor drinks 
He is neither handsome nor 

rich 
I have seen none of my ac- 
quaintance 
He knows nothing about 
He cannot succeed in 



thing 



it 
any 



EXAMPLES. 



Je crains qu'il ne vienue 



I fear lest he should come, or 
I fear he will come 



SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 



303 



J'aipeur qu'il ne vienne pas 

Ne craignez-vous pas qu'il ne 
vienne ? 

Je crains qu'eWe ne meure 

J'apprehende que sa maladie 
ne soit mortelle 

Je ne doute point qu'il ne vi- 
enne 

"A moins qu y \\ ne fasse beau 

Si vous ne venez rae prendre 

*S"il ne le vent pas 

.SMI ne parlaitp«s 

Que it'Gtes-yous arrive plutot 1 

Que ne ra'est-il permis 1 
Que ne parlez-vous ? 
De crainte qu'W ne s'egare 
De peur qu r \\ ne vienne 
Je ?i'ai que deux francs 

4. Ne is used without pas, o 
before a verb followed by de i 



I am afraid he will not come 
Are you not afraid that he 

will come 1 
I fear lest she should die 
I am apprehensive lest his ma- 
lady should be mortal 
I do not doubt hut he will 

come 
Unless it should be fair 
If you do not fetch me 
If he does not wish it 
If he did not speak 
How is it you did not arrive 

sooner 1 
Why is it not granted to me ? 
Why do you not speak ? 
Lest he should go wrong 
For fear he should come 
I have only, or but two francs 

r point, after il y a, depuis 9 and 
n speaking of time. 



EXAMPLES. 

II y a dix ans que je ne 1'ai vu I have not seen him these ten 

years 
II y a six mois que je ne lui ai I have not spoken to him for 

parle six months 

Comment vous £tes-vous How have you been since I 
porte, depuis que je ne vous saw you ? 
ai vu ? 
Je ne sortirai de trois jours I shall not go out for three 

days 

5. Ne is used as a negative without pas or point, before the 
verbs cesser, oser, pouvoir, and also before savoir, to be able, 
used for pouvoir. 



EXAMPLES. 



II ne cesse de gronder 
On n'ose l'aborder 
Je ne puis me taire 
II He sail ce qu'il veut 



He does not cease grumbling 
They dare not accost him 
I cannot be silent 
He knows not what he wants 



301 



SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. 



6. Ne is used before a verb that is preceded by a compara- 
tive; as, plus, moins, &c. or by autre, autrement, when the 
first verb is used affirmatively or negatively interrogatively ; 
but if the first verb be negative, or interrogative without a 
negation, then ne is omitted. 



EXAMPLES. 



. est plus 
ne pensiez 



Mademoiselle S . 

riche que vous 

(affirmative) 
N'est-elle pas plus jeune que 

vous ne pensiez ? (neg. int.) 
L'affaire est tout autre qu'on 

ne me l'avait racontee 

Elle n'est pas moins belle que 
sa soeur Petait [negative) 

Est elle plus belle que sa soeur 
Petait 1 {interrogative) 



Miss S . . 
thought 



is richer than yois 



than 



you; 



Is she not younger 
thought 1 

The affair is quite different 
from what it had been re- 
lated to me 

She is not less handsome than 
her sister was 

Is she handsomer than her 
sister was 1 



©n tije niacins of ^repositions. 



Rule* 



Prepositions are generally placed before nouns and pr&~ 
nouns, in French as in English. 



EXAMPLES. 



'A qui parlez-vous 1 
Je parle a lui, et Don a vous 
De qu&i vous plaignez-vous ? 
Je me plains de la personne 

pour qui vous vous inte- 

ressez 

Obs. The French prepositions > particularly de and a, are frequently re- 
peated before nouns, pronouns, and verbs. With regard to the eases by 
which they are followed, and the different ways in which many of them 
are Englished,— [t>. pages 15.4., 155., &c.J 



To whom do you speak t 
I speak to him, and not to you 
Of what do you complain 1 
I complain of the person fov 
tohom you are interested 



SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. 



305 



As it would only be embarrassing to the student to enter 
into any further explanation respecting prepositions, than 
what has already been given, the author thinks it may here 
be only useful for the learner to see the various applications 
and illustrations of the manner in which de, a, &c. are ren- 
dered in English. 

De after Nouns, Adjectives, and Verbs. 



EXAMPLES. 



Un homme ^'esprit, d'hon- 

neur 
Un acte de justice, de probite 
II a une montre d*or, un habit 
de drap, un gilet de satin, 
un mouchoir de poche, du 
vin de France, des soies 
d'ltalie, de la laine d : Es- 
pagne 
II est digne de louanges, las 
du discours, charme de la 
nouvelle, content de sa con- 
dition 
II s'avisa cZ'un expedient 
Ne vous moquez pas des mal- 

heureux 
Ayez pitie de mes malheurs 
Rejouissez vous de ma fortune 
II s'est informe de vous 
lis s'etonnerent de lui 
II mourut de froid, de faim 



A man of talent, of honor 

An act of justice, of probity 
He has a gold watch, a cloth 
coat, a satin waist-coat, 
a pocket handkerchief, 
French wine, Italian silks, 
Spanish wool 

He is praiseworthy, weary of 
the discourse, overjoyed at 
the news, contented with 
his condition 
He thought of an expedient 
Do not laugh at the unfortu- 
nate 
Have pity on my misfortunes 
Rejoice at my fortune 
He inquired after you 
They wondered at him 
He died with, or of cold, with 
or of hunger 



De before Nouns denoting Measure, Weight, &,c, 



examples. 



Un tapis long de six verges et 
large de deux, ou un tapis 
de six verges de longueur et 
de deux de largeur 
26* 



A carpet six yards long and 
two wide, or six yards in 
length and two in breadth 



306 



SYNTAX OP PREPOSITIONS. 



Un livre £pais de trois pouces, 
ou un livre de trois pouces 
d'6pais ou d'epaisseur 

J'ai un arbre qui a quatre 
doigts de largeur, ou qui 
est large de quatre doigts 

H est rare de voir une planche 
de sapin longue de douze 
verges, large de dix pieds et 
epaisse de huit pouces, on de 
douze verges de long ou de 
longueur, de dix pieds de 
large ou de largeur et de huit 
pouces rf'epais ou d'epais- 
seur 

Ce linou a une verge de lar- 
geur 



four 
fmg- 



A book three inches thick, or 
a book three inches in 
thickness 

I have a tree which 
fingers broad, or fc 
ers in breadth 

It is rare to see a plank of 
deal twelve yards long, ten 
feet broad, and eight inches 
thick, or twelve yards in 
length, ten feet in breadth, 
and eight inches in thick- 
ness 



This lawn is a yard wide, or 
a yard in width 



De is used after Adjectives or Adverbs used par titively. 



EXAMPLES. 



Vous avez plus ^'argent que 

moi, autant d'amis et moins 

d'orgueil que lui 
II a beaucoup eTesprit, point 

d'argent, et tres pen efamis 
Autant de fe mines que 

^'homines 
Que de peines et de soins ! 
II prend trop de peine 
II n'a point de sens commun 



You have more money than 
I, as many friends and less 
pride than he 

He has much wit, no money, 
and very few friends 

As many women as men 

What care and trouble! 
He takes too much pains 
He has not common sense 



De after Numerals or Pronouns, and before Adjectives. 



EXAMPLES. 



II y en a trente ^'achieves 
II y en eut cinquante de tues 

et cent de blesses 
II n'y a personne de blesse 
II n'y a personne de si heureux 
II y a dans son style je ne 

sais quoi de dur 



Thirty of them are finished 
There were fifty men killed 

and a hundred wounded 
There is nobody wounded 
There is no person so happy 
His style has I know not 

what that is harsh in it 



SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. 



307 



Quoi de plus juste ? What can be fairer ? 

11 y a je ne sais quoi de gra- There is something inexpres- 

cieux dans ses discours sibly gracious in his dis- 
course 

Avez-vous jamais vu rien de Did you ever see any thing 

plus curieux ? more curious 1 

II n'y a rien de tel There is no such thing 

De after Comparatives. 

EXAMPLES. 

Plus de dix guinees More than ten guineas 

Pen suis plus J'a moitie per- 1 am more than half per- 
suade suaded of it 

II a plus de vingt ans He is more than twenty years 

of age 

II croit tous les jours d'un It grows an inch every day 
pouce 

II est plus grand de toute la He is taller by a whole head 
t6te 

Vous eUes plus jeune que moi You are younger than I by 
de quatre ans four years 

De used in Adverbial Expressions, 

EXAMPLES. 

II voit de nuit, comme les He sees by night, like a cat 

chats 
Nous y arriverons de jour 



II courut de toutes ses forces 
Elle danse de bonne grace 
II se conduit de cette maniere 
lis jouent de la flute 
Nous vivons de poisson 



We shall arrive there in the 

day-time 
He ran with all his might 
She dances with a good grace 
He behaves in that manner 
The}' play on the flute 
We live on fish 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE ON DE. 

That is a man of talent. Here is a silver dish. There are 
several fine stone bridges over the Thames. Where do you 
come from ? I come from France. My brother has a silver 



308 



SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. 



watch. He is worthy of friendship. There were as many 
children as men. We go from province to province, from 
town to town, from street to street. Have you ever seen 
any thing prettier. My sister is more than twenty years of 
age. I will not give more than twenty guineas "for that 
watch. We shall not travel by night. We shall only travel 
by day. They jumped, or leaped for joy. 

Dish, plat, m. 
silver, argent ; to, en 



to jump, or leap, sauter 



'A after Nouns, Adjectives, and Verbs. 



EXAMPLES. 



Des bas d trois fils 
L'homme au gilet rouge 

Un procureur d la cour de 
conscience 

Une dorure d Vox pale 

Voici ie moulin a vent 

Voila un moulin d eau 

Donnez-moi le pot d Z'eau 

Apportez la bouteille d Z'en- 
cre 

Une chaise d bras 

Un habit d la mode 

Un bassin d laver les mains 

Une corbeille d pain 

Avez-vous de la poudre a ca- 
non 1 

Nous avons des armes d feu 

Voici notre salle d manger 

C'est un fruit nuisible d la 
sante 

Elle est trop adonnee au 
plaisir 

Cela est semblable au mien 

II est propre d tout 

Cela est bon d quelque chose 



Stockings with three threads 

The man with the red waist- 
coat 

A proctor in the court of con- 
science 

A gilding with pale gold 

Here is the windmill 

There is a watermill 

Give me the watering-pot 

Bring the ink-Jbottle 

An elbow-chair 

A fashionable coat 

A wash-hand basin 

A bread-basket 

Have you any gunpowder? 

We have fire-arms 

This is our dining-room 

It is a fruit hurtful to the 

health 
She is too much addicted to 

pleasure 
That is like mine 
He is fit for every thing 
That is good for something 



SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. 



309 



Elle est tres sensible au froid 

II deplalt d son maitre 
Ne desobeissez pas a vos pa- 
rens 
Je pardonne d mes ennemis 
II ne ressemble pas a son pere 

du tout 
II applaudit d tout ce qu'ils 

font 
Elle condescend a tout 
II ne se fie d personne 
Ne nous nuisons pas Pun d 

1'autre 
Je pense d votre affaire 



She is very susceptible of 

cold 
He displeases his master 
Do not disobey your parents 

I forgive my enemies 
He does not resemble his fa- 
ther at all 
He applauds all they do 

She complies with every thing 

He trusts nobody 

Let us not hurt one another 

I am thinking on your busi- 
ness 



*A is used to denote the place where one is, or is going. 

EXAMPLES. 

II vint d Londres He came to London 

II demeure d Londres He lives in London 

Elle vit d la campagne She lives in the country 

*A l'entree, d l'extreinite, au M the entrance, at the ex- 
milieu des bois tremity, in the midst of the 

woods 
*A deux doigts de terre Within two inches of the 

ground 
Tournez d droite Turn to the right 

1 A is used to denote the Period or Succession of Time or 
Action . 

EXAMPLES. 



Nous nous levons & six heures, 
d neuf heures, au lever du 
soliel, au coucher du soleil, 
d tems, d divers tems 



We rise at six, at nine, at sun- 
rise, at sun-set, in time, at 
different times 



310 



SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. 



'A is used to denote the Circumstances cf Events and 
Actions. 



EXAMPLES. 



II a mal d la t6te 

Une blessure d l'epaule 

II etait blesse au bras 

Du drap d dix-huit schillings 

la verge, d vil prix 
II vend des chandelles d la 

douzaine, du vin d la pinte, 

de la viande d la livre, du 

drap d la verge 
Elle travaille d l'aiguille 
Jouerons-nous aux cartes, aux 

echecs, &c. 
Je montai d cheval 
Nous all^mes d pied 
Elle s'habille a la Francaise 



He has a pain in his head 
A wound in the shoulder 
He was wounded in the arm 
Cloth at eighteen shillings a 

yard, at a cheap rate 
He sells candles by the dozen, 

wine by the pint, meat by 

the pound, cloth by 

yard 
She works at her peedle 
Shall we play at cards, 

chess, &c. 
I rode on horseback 
We went on foot 
She dresses in the French 

fashion 



the 



at 



'A is used to denote Possession, Office, Duty, &c. 



EXAMPLES. 



' A qui est ce canif ? 

II est d moi 

II est d lui; il est d elle ; il 

est d monfrere 
C'est d vous a m'obeir 
Ce n'est pas d nous a decider 
C'est d votre pere & voir 



Whose penknife is this 1 

It is mine 

It is his ; it is herh ; it is my 

brother's 
It is your part to obey me 
It is not for us to decide 
It is your father's business to 

see 



In speaking of time, from is rendereJ by depuis, and to by 
jusqu'd, also when to signifies as far as, or so far as, it is 
mostly expressed by jusqu'd ; Ex. Je resterai a la ville depuis 
le milieu de Pete jusqu'd Noel, I shall remain in the city 
from Midsummer to Christmas. II a voyage jusqu'au deist de 
l'Euphrate, he has travelled as far as beyond the Euphrates. 



SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. 311 

Avant, before, opposed to Apres, after. 

EXAMPLES. 

II arriva avant moi He arrived before me 

II arriva apres moi He arrived after me 

Avant le deluge Before the deluge 

Apr Is le deluge After the deluge 

Devant, before, opposed to Derriere, behind. 

EXAMPLES. 

II est raon ancien ; il marche He is my senior ; he walks 
devant moi, et moi je before me, and I walk de- 
marche derriere lui hind him 
Devant la maison Before the house 
Derriere la maison Behind the house 

Chez, at, icith. 

EXAMPLES. 

11 est chez moi, chez lui, chez He is at my house, at his 
tile house, at her house 

II vient de chez moi, de chez He comes from my house, his 
lui, de chez vous house, your house 

II va chez vous, chez elle, chez He goes to your house, to her 
tux house, to their house 

II dina chez moi, chez eux He dined with me, with them 

Dans, in, used in a definite sense. 

EXAMPLES. 

Dans la ville. Dans la capi- In the city. In the capital 

tale 

Dans la maison. Dans la In the house. In the room. 

chambre. Dans le dessein With the intent 

Dans Londres. Dans Paris In London. In Paris 

Nous lisons dans Ciceron, We read in Cicero, in Ovid 

dans Ovide 

Dans un mois Within a month 



312 



SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. 



The prepositions en, dans, and *a sometimes express very 
different meanings. 



examples. 



II est en ville ; mais non chez 

lui 
Je crois qu'ii est dans la ville, 

et non hers de la ville 
II est'd la ville, et non a la 

campagne 



He is in town ; but not at 

home 
He is in town, and not out of 

town 
He is in town, and not in the 

country 



En is sometimes used adverbially. 

EXAMPLES. 



En prison, en Angleterre, en 
France, en Italie,&c. Aller 
en France, en ltalie, &c. 

En plein jour. En hiver. 
Tant en paix qu'erc guerre 

En colere. Dans la colere 
ou. il etait 

En ua instant. Dans le mo- 
ment 



In prison, in England, in 
France, in Italy, &c. To 
go to France, Italy, &c. 

In broad day. In winter. 
Both in peace and war. 

In a passion. In the passion 
he was in 

In an instant. M the mo- 
ment 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE ON V2, &c. 

He has a windmill in the country. I have a pain in my 
shoulder. We live in Paris, and my brother lives in Rouen. 
Are you going on foot, or on horseback. She received her 
daughter with open arms. We have cloth at eighteen shil- 
lings a (the) yard. To whom did you give the book ? I have 
given it to your brother. It is not far from his house to the 
church. He is in prison. Your father will dine at our house 
to-morrow. Whose book is this ? It is mine. We shall ar- 
rive before you. Your hat is behind the door. 



Cloth, drap 
yard, verge, f. 



far, loin 
to arrive. 



arriver 



Obs. it may not be necessary to say any thing respecting conjunctions. 
as they have already been sufficiently treated of at pages 162, 163, &c. 



SYNTAX OF INTERJECTIONS. 



313 



©e XnttvittUonn 



Interjections are unconnected words or broken sentences 
that are used in expressing the passions, feelings, or emotions 
of the mind. 

The following is a list of a few of the interjections used in 
French, which may be divided as follows : 

1. TO EXPRESS JOT. 

Ah ! ah ! 

Bon ! well ! 

Vive lajoie ! huzza ! 



Vive le roi! long live the Ouf ! pho ! 
king ! 



2. GRIEF OR AFFLICTION. 

Ah ! Ulas I ah ! alas ! 
Ah mon Dieu ! O dear ! 
AM ! die ! oh ! ay ! 



3. FEAR. 

Ah! ah! 
He! oh! 
Helas ! alas ! 



4. ENCOURAGEMENT. 

Allons ! pa ! ho pa ! come on ! 
Courage ! cheer up ! 
Tenezferme ! hold ! or stand 
fast ! 



5. CONTEMPT, OR AVERSION. 

Allez-vous en ! go away ! 
Fi ! fy ! or fie ! 
Fi done ! fy upon ! 

7. ADMIRATION. 

Oh ! oh ! 
Ha ! hah ! 



9. WARNING. 

Gare ! 

Prenez-garde 

Tout beau ! softly ! 



.) 



take care ! 



6. DERISION. 

Oh! oh! 

Zest ! Bah ! pshaw ! 

8. SURPRISE. 

Oh! oh! 

Misericorde ! bless me ! 

10. CALLING TO. 

Ho ! hold ! ho ! holla ! stop 
Hem ! here ! 



11. FOR SILENCING. 

Chut ! paiz ! hush ! be still ! 
Silence ! silence ! 
St! hist! 
27 



314 



IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 



Xtrtmuatical 2Bv9ttut>iQU8+ 



The following is a list of a few of the idiomatical expressions 
which frequently occur in the French language. 



T. Avoir is mostly Englished by to have; 
frequently Englished by to be. 



but it is also 



Avoir cliaud, to be warm 
Avoir froid, to be cold 
Avoir f aim, to be hungry 
Avoir soif, to be thirsty 
Avoir besoin de, to be in want 

of, to have occasion for, or 

need of 
Avoir honte, to be ashamed 
Avoir bonne mine, to look 

well 
Avoir affaire, to want, to have 

need 

N' avoir que f aire de 
N'avoir affaire de 

JV avoir garde de faire 
Se garcler Men de faire 

Avoir six, sept, ou huit ans 



Avoir raison, to be right 
Avoir tort, to be wrong 
Avoir peur, to be afraid 
Avoir soin, to take care 
Avoir pitie de, to pity, or to 

be pitied 
Avoir cours, to be current, or 

in vogue 
Avoir mal, to have a sore, or 

pain 
Avoir beau, to be in vain 
Avoir la bonte, to be so good 

or kind as. 
To want none of, or to have 

no occasion for, or to. 
To be far from doing a thing, 

or be sure not to do a thing, 

by no means. 
To be six, seven, or eight 

years of age. 



EXAMPLES. 



uns. 
is 



mais 



Vai chaud aux 

yaifroid aux pied: 
Avez-vous froid aux pieds? 
Chauffez-vous, si vous avez 

froid 
N'avez-vous pas / aim ? 
Non, mais j'ai grand' soif 
Vai besoin rf'un habit 



My hands are warm, but my 

feet are cold 
Are your feet cold? 
Warm yourself, if you are 

cold 
Are you not hungry ? 
No, but I am very thirsty 
I want, or am in want of a 

coat 



IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 



315 



Pen ai lionte 

Vous avez tres-bonne mine ce 

matin 
Pai affaire de cela, et vous 

?i , eu avez que fair e 

II n'a que faire de votre 

argent 
Elle u'a que faire de parler 
Quel age a Monsieur votre 

pere 1 
II avait cinquante ans le mois 

passe 
Vous aviez raison, et j'avais 

tort 
Elle a peur de son ombre 
Je ne crois pas que cette 

monnaie ait cours 
Tai mal a la tete 

Les enfans ont mal aux 

oreilles 
Vous avez beau parler 

Vous aviez beau Pavertir, il 
ne voulait pas vous croire 

Voulez-vous avoir la bonte de 
me donner une plume ? 



I am ashamed of it, of them, 
&c. 

You look very well this morn- 
ing 

I ivant that, and you do not 
(want that), or you have 
no occasion for that 

He wants none of your money 

She has no occasion to speak 
How old is your father ? 

He was fifty years of age last 

month 
You were right, and I ivas 

wrong 
She is afraid of her shadow 
I do not believe that this 

money is current 
I- have a pain in my head, or 

my head aches 
The children have sore ears 

You have spoken in vain, or 

to no purpose 
It is in vain for you to advise 

him, he would not believe 

you 
Will you have the goodness to 

give me a pen ? 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



Are your hands and feet warm ? My hands are so cold 
that I cannot write. Are you thirsty ? No, but I am very 
hungry. Do you want a hat ? You do not look well to-day. 
How old are you? I shal^be twenty-two next week. He is 
right, and you are wrong. If I be right, you are wrong. Why 
are you afraid ? I am not afraid. Does your head ache 1 No, 
but my tooth aches. It is in vain to wait for him (you have 



316 



IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 



waited for him in vain), he will not come. Will you be so 
kind as to bring me some chocolate 1 



So cold, sifroid 

to wait for him, Vattendre 



to bring, apporter 
chocolate, chocolat, m. 



II. Idiomatical signification of different verbs. 



Alter a bride abattue 
Aimer mieux 
Casser un testament 
Casser le parlement 
Donner a pleines mains 
Donner un coup de main 
Donner de main en main 
Donner la main a un mal- 

heureux 
En venir aux mains 
En -couloir d 
Je souhaiterais pouvoir 
II mc tarde de 
II ne laisse pas 
II ne tient qu'a moi, qu'd vous, 

&c. que 
II ne tient pas a moi t d vous, 

&c. que 
II y va de voire vie 
II y allait de mon honneur 

Jouer des instrumens 
Jouer une piece de theatre 
Mourir de faim 

Mourir de froid 
Mettre Vipte d la main 
Prendre a toutes mains 
Prendre les devans 
S' en prendre a 
Savoir bon gri 
S'en tenir d 



To go full speed 
To prefer, to have rather 
To annul a will 
To dissolve parliament 
To give plentifully 
To help 
To hand about 
To assist, or relieve an un- 
fortunate (person) 
To come to blows, to fight 
To have a spite against 
I wish I could 
I long to 

He fails not, nevertheless 
It is in my, your, &c. power 

It is not my, your, &c. fault, 

if 
Your life is at stake 
My honor was at stake, or was 

concerned in it 
To play upon instruments 
To act a play 
To be starved, or to die of 

hunger 
To be starved with cold 
To draw the sword 
To catch every way 
To get the start 
To find fault with, to blame 
To take kindly 
To keep, or stand to 



IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 



317 



Se bien prendre d quelque chose 

S'y bien prendre 

S'y prendre de la bonne f aeon 

«S'y prendre mal 

Tr ouver d redire d 

Venir d bout de 



To go the right way to work 

To go the wrong way to work 
To find fault with 
To accomplish, to bring 
about, &c. 



III. Idiomatical significations of Faire. 



Faire peur 
Faire cas de 
Faire etat 
Faire faire 



Faire de son pis 

Faire maigre 

Faire un tour de promenade 

Faire emplette 

Faire le bel esprit 

Faire semblant, ou mine 

Faire lemalade 

Faire des armes 

Faire de son mieux 

Faire bien ses affaires 

Faire la chambre 

Faire la cuisine 

Faire la moisson 

Faire fond sur qutlqu'un 

Faire en sorte que 

Faire main basse sur Vennemi 

Faire beaucoup de chemin 



Faire la sourde oreille 
Faire voile, ou mettre 
voile 



& la 



To make afraid 
To esteem, to value 

To bespeak, to get made, to 

oblige a person to do 

something 
To do our or one's worst 
To eat fish 
To take a walk 
To purchase 

To set up for a wit, to pretend 
To pretend 
To sham sickness 
To fence 
To do one's best 
To prosper 
To clean the room 
To cook, to dress victuals 
To reap the harvest 
To rely upon some one 
To do in such a manner that 
To put the enemy to the 

sword 
To go, or walk a great way 

about 
To turn, or give a deaf ear 
To set sail 



Obs. Faire is used in expressing the state of the weather — v. p. 104. 

27* 



318 IDIOM ATICAL EXPRESSIONS 

C'en est fait de lid 
Chn etaitfait de moi 



Ceil sera fait de moi 
Ne faire que 
Ne faire que de 
Se faire a la fatigue 

Se faire des amis, ou des en- 

nemis 
Se faire fort de 
Se faire des affaires 



He is undone, it is over with 
him 

1 was undone, it was over 
with me 

It will be over with me, &c. 

To do nothing but 

To be but just 

To inure one's self to hard- 
ships 

To make friends, or enemies 

To take upon one's self 
To bring one's self into trou- 
ble 



EXAMPLES. 



On a tort de faire peur aux 

enfans 
II m'a dit qu'il faisait grand 

cas de vous 
II a fait faire une montre a 

repetition 
II fait de son pis 
Les Catholiques font maigre 

pendant le car£me 
Nous avons quelques emplettes 

a faire 
Wfait le bcl esprit 
Elle fait mine d'etre malade 
II faisait semblant de n'en rien 

savoir 
II s'exerce a faire des armes 
Voulez-vous faire un tour de 

promenade 1 
On a dej& commence & faire 

la moisson 
Allez-vous mettre d la voile ? 
Vaime mieux lire que de jouer 
Quand on lui parle de cela, 

il fait la sourde oreille 



It is wrong to frighten chil- 
dren 

He told me that he esteemed 
you very much 

He has bespoken a gold repeat- 
ing watch 

He does his worst 

The Catholics eat fish during 
lent 

We have some things to pur- 
chase 

He sets up for a wit 

She pretends to be ill 

He pretended to be ignorant of 
it, or to know nothing of it 

He practises fencing 

Will you take a walk ? 

They have already begun to 

reap the harvest 
Are you going to set sail ? 
I had rather read than play 
When they talk to him about 

that, he turns a deaf ear, 

or he will not hear 



RECAPITULATORY PRACTICE. 319 



Mttzpitulutovv! ^vuttiw* 



FIRST LESSON. 

We should often be ashamed of our noblest actions, if the 
world were to see all the motives that produce them. 

Friendship cannot be maintained, without the forgiveness 
of many faults on both sides. 

A man would have but little pleasure, if he did not flatter 
himself. 

The world oftener rewards the appearance of merit, than 
merit itself. 

There is more glory in forgiving, than there is pleasure in 
revenging. 

Shallow people (little minds) ordinarily make a mystery 
of every thing, even of the greatest (least) trifles. 

Most people judge of men only by their fortune, and not 
by their merit. 

Most men are guided by custom, interest, and passion, and 
not by reason. 

The ill use we make of our prosperity is often the cause 
of our misfortunes. 

Let us not rest upon the virtue of our ancestors ; let us 
be persons of worth ourselves. 

The merit and greatness of a man should be measured on- 
ly by his virtue and knowledge, and not by his fortune. 



SECOND LESSON. 

" Be like a promontory, against which the waves of the 
sea incessantly dash ; but it stands firm, and about it the rage 
of the boiling billows is laid asleep." 

" An ignorant rich man is a golden slave, and in his form 
only differs from brutes." 

" Do not say few things in many words ; but much in few 
words." 

u The sight of the reasoning power begins to perceive 
acutely, when that of the eye loses its acme." 



320 RECAPITULATORY PRACTICE. 

" When the wise man opens his mouth, the beauties of 
his mind present themselves to view, like the statues in a 
temple." 

" The life of the avaricious resembles a funeral banquet; 
for though it has all things requisite to a feast, yet no one 
present rejoices." 

" This world is like a vast sea ; mankind is like a vessel 
sailing upon its tempestuous billows ; our skilful conduct is 
as its sails : the sciences serve us for our oars; good or bad 
fortune is the favorable or contrary wind ; and judgment is 
the rudder. If unhappily this last be wanting, I despair of 
the vessel, for it must infallibly be wrecked." 



THIRD LESSON. 

Archlm ede a dit : " Donnez-moi un point d'appui, et 
j'ebranlerai Punivers." Ferguson, celebre astronome et phy- 
sicien, s'est amuse a calculer, que si, au moment oii Archi- 
mede prononc,a ces paroles, Dieu Petit pris au mot en lui 
fournissant avec ce point d'appui donne h 6000 milles du 
centre de la terre, des materiaux d'une force sufnsante et un 
contre-poids de deux cents livres, il eut fallu a ce grand geo- 
metre un levier de douze quadrillons de milles (12,000,000,- 
000,000,000,000,000,000) et une vttesse a Pextremite du 
long bras egale a celle d'un boulet de canon, pour elever la 
terre d'un pouce en vingt-sept centaines de billions d'annees 
(27,000,000,000,000). 

La lumiere du soleil, qui nous parvient en 8 minutes 13 
secondes, fait 192893 milles par seconde, c'est a dire 95097538 
milles pendant les 8 minutes et quart ^,-peu-pres. 

Archimede, Archimedes fournissant, furnishing 

un point cfappui, a place to suffisante, sufficient 

stand upon contre-poids, counter-poise 

ebranler, to move livres, pounds 

univers, world eut fallu, would have wanted 

physicien, philosopher vitesse, velocity 

s'est amuse, amused himself boulet de canon, cannon-ball 

paroles, words elever, raise ; pouce, inch 

Peut prit au mot, had taken parvenir, to reach 

him at his word fait, travels 



RECAPITULATORY PRACTICE. 321 

FOURTH LESSON. 

II y a une premiere puissance, qui a forme le ciel et la 
terre ; lumiere infinie et immuable, qui se donne & tous saus 
se partager ; verite souveraine et universelle qui eclaire tous 
les esprits, corarae le soleil eclaire tous les corps. Celui qui 
n'a jamais vu cette lumiere pure, est aveugle comme. un aveu- 
gle-ne ; il passe sa vie dans une profonde nuit comme les 
peuples que le soleil n'eclaire point pendant plusieurs mois 
de l'annee. II croit 6tre sage, et il est insense ; il croit tout 
voir, et il ne voit rien ; il meurt n'ayant jamais rien vu ; tout 
au plus il apercoit de sombres et fausses lueurs, de vaines 
ombres, des fant6mes qui n'ont rien de reel. Ainsi sont tous 
les horames entraines par les plaisirs des sens et par le 
charme de Pimagination. II n'y a point sur la terre de veri- 
tables hommes, excepte ceux qui consultent, qui aiment, qui 
suh'ent cette raison eternelle ; c'est elle qui nous inspire 
quand nous pensons bien ; c'est elle qui nous reprend quand 
nous pensons mal. Nous ne tenons pas moins d'elle la rai- 
son que la vie. Elle est comme un vaste ocean de lumiere ; 
nos esprits sont comme de petits ruisseaux qui en sortent 3 et 
qui y retournent pour s'y perdre. — Fenelon. 

Se donne, communicates itself ombres, shadows 

sans se partager, without par- ainsi, such 

taking of them entraines, carried away 

eclaire, enlightens, or illumi- charme, allurements 

nates de veritables hommes, any ra- 

comme un aveugle-ne, as one tional men 

who is born blind suivent, obey 

nuit, darkness reprend, reproves 

il croit ctre sage, he thinks nous ne tenons pas moins, we 

himself wise are no less indebted 

insense, fool ruisseau, rivulet 

tout, all things en sortent, flow from it 

tout au plus, at most pour s'y perdre, to be lost in 

sombres, glimmering it again 



FIFTH LESSON. 

La source de la veritable grandeur d ? ame consiste a ne de- 
sirer rien de ce qui est a autrui ; et a etre persuade qu'on ne 



322 RECAPITULATORY PRACTICE. 

pent, ni sur le tr6ne, ni dans aucune autre condition, conser- 
ver ni courage ni honneur, si on se laisse seduire par des 
desirs que la justice condamne. 

II y a beaucoup d'hommes qui accommodent la religion 
a leurs interns, au lieu d'accommoder leurs interets k la re- 
ligion. 

La religion etant la source de toute bonne morale, elle 
rend les horames heureux sur la terre, en leur donnant la pa- 
tience, qui les soutient dans les maux ; Ja charite, qui leur 
fait aimer leurs semblables ; Pesperance qui les empeche 
d'alterer leur sante : vertus qui toutes tendent h leur conser- 
vation et a leur felicite dans ce monde et dans l'autre. 

La religion n'est pas plus exigeante que la philosophic 
Loin de prescrire a Phonnete homme aucun sacrifice qu'il 
puisse regretter, elle repand un charme secret sur ses de- 
voirs, et lui procure deux avantages ineitimables, une paix 
profonde pendant la vie, une douce esperance au moment de 
la mort. 



SIXTH LESSON. 

Grand Dieu ! dont la seule presence soutient la nature, et 
maintient Pharmonie des lois de Punivers ; vous qui, du trone 
immobile de Pempyree, voyez rouler sous vos pieds les 
spheres celestes, sans choc et sans confusion ; qui, du sein du 
repos, reproduisez a. chaque instant leurs mouvemens im- 
menses, et soul regissez, dans une paix profonde, ce nombre 
infini de cieux et de mondes ; rendez, rendez enfin le calme 
a la terre agitee ! qu'elle soit dans le silence ! qu'a votre 
voix, la discorde et la guerre cessent de faire retentir leurs 
clameurs orgueilleuses ! Dieu de bonte, auteur de tous les 
^tres, vos regards paternels embrassent tous les objets de la 
creation : mais Phomme est votre ^tre de choix. Vous avez 
eclaire son ame d'un rayon de votre lumiere immortelle ; 
comblez vos bienfaits, en penetrant son cceur d'un trait de 
votre amour : ce sentiment divin, se repandant partout, reu- 
nira les natures ennemies ; Phomme ne craindra plus l'aspect 
de Phomme ; le fer homicide n'armera plus sa main; le feu 
devorant de la guerre ne fera plus tarir la source des genera- 
tions ; Pespece humaine maintenant afTaiblie, mutilee, mois- 
sonnee dans sa fleur germera de nouveau, et se multipliera 



RECAPITULATORY PRACTICE. 



323 



sans nombre ; la nature, accablee sous le poids des fleaux, 
reprendra bientdt son ancienne fecondite, et nous, Dieu bien- 
faiteur, nous la seconderons, nous la cultiverons, nous Pobser- 
verons sans cesse, pour vous offrir a. chaque instant un nou- 
veau tribut de reconnaissance et d'admiration. — Buffon. 



Dont, whose 

empyree, highest heaven 

choc, disorder, or clashing 

sein, bosom 

rendtz, restore 

agitee, troubled 

defaire retentir. need not be 
translated into English 

de choix, chosen 

de, with, and of 

rayon, ray 

comblez, increase, or com- 
plete the measure of 

trait, ray 

ne — jjIus, no longer 

le fcr homicide rtarmera plus 



sa main, his hand will no 
longer wield the murderous 
steel 

tarir, exhaust 

affaiblie, impaired 

jiwissonnee, cut off 

accablee, borne down 

germer, to spring up 

fleaux, scourge 

reprendra bientot, will soon 
resume 

ancienne fecondite , former fer- 
tility 

bienfaiteur, beneficent 

sans cesse, incessantly 

reconnaissance, gratitude 



S24 ABBREVIATIONS. 



J. C. . . . Jesus Christ, Jesus Christ. 

L. M. . . . Leurs Majestes, their Majesties. 

L. M. Imp. . Leurs Majestes Imperiales, their Imperial 

Majesties. 
S. M. . . . Sa Majeste, his or her Majesty. 
S. M. Brit. . Sa Majeste Britannique, his Britannic Ma- 
jesty. 
S. M. T. C. . Sa Majeste tres Chretienne, his most Chris- 
tian Majesty. 
S. M. Cath. . Sa Majeste Catholique, his Catholic Ma- 
jesty. 
S. M. Prus. . Sa Majeste Prussienne, his Prussian Ma- 
jesty. 
S. A. R. . . Son Altesse Royale, his or her Royal High- 
ness. 
S. A. E. . . Son Altesse Electorate, his Electoral High- 
ness. 
S. A. S. . . Son Altesse Serenissime, his Most Serene 

Highness. 
S. E. ... Son Excellence, Ms or her Excellency. 
S. Emin. . . Son Eminence, his Eminence. 
S. S. * . . Sa Saintete, his Holiness. 
V. S. . . . Vieux Stile, Old Stile. 
N. S. . . . Nouveau Stile, New Stile. 
Messrs. . . Messieurs, Gentlemen, or Messrs. 

M Monsieur, Sir, or Mr. 

Mde. Me. . . Madame, Madam, Mistress, or Mrs. 

Mile. Madlle. Mademoiselle, Miss. 

M. S. . . . Manuscrit, Manuscript, 

Sept. or T bre " • Septembre, September. 

Oct. or 8 bre * . Octobre, October. 

Nov. or 9 bre ' • Novembre, November. 

Dec. or X bre# . Decembre, December. 

THE END. 






.... x im 



£4$ 






